This is a modern-English version of Anglo-Saxon Grammar and Exercise Book: with Inflections, Syntax, Selections for Reading, and Glossary, originally written by Smith, C. Alphonso (Charles Alphonso). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


This text includes characters that require UTF-8 (Unicode) file encoding:

This text includes characters that require UTF-8 (Unicode) file encoding:

Āā Ēē Īī Ōō Ūū; ȳ Ǣǣ (vowels with macron or “long” mark)
Ęę Ǫǫ (e and o with ogonek)

Āā Ēē Īī Ōō Ūū; ȳ Ǣǣ (vowels with macron or “long” mark)
Ęę Ǫǫ (e and o with ogonek)

If any of these characters do not display properly—in particular, if the diacritic does not appear directly above the letter—or if the apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph appear as garbage, you may have an incompatible browser or unavailable fonts. First, make sure that the browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change your browser’s default font.

If any of these characters aren’t showing up correctly—in particular, if the diacritic isn’t positioned directly above the letter—or if the apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph look like junk, you might be using an incompatible browser or missing fonts. First, check that your browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change your browser’s default font.

See the Poetry section for potential problems specific to that section.

See the Poetry section for any specific problems related to that section.

In references to numbered Sections, “Note” may mean either an inset Note or a footnote. Links in this e-text lead to the beginning of the section.

In references to numbered Sections, “Note” can refer to either an inset Note or a footnote. Links in this e-text direct you to the start of the section.

In the prose reading selections (pages 99-121), the original line breaks have been preserved for use with the linenotes and Glossary. In the verse selections, line numbers in the notes have been replaced with the line numbers from the original texts, printed in brackets as shown. In both, annotated passages are linked to their Notes; these links are intended to be unobtrusive. The distinction between linenotes and numbered footnotes is in the original.

In the prose reading selections (pages 99-121), the original line breaks have been kept for use with the linenotes and Glossary. In the verse selections, the line numbers in the notes have been switched out for the line numbers from the original texts, printed in brackets as shown. In both, annotated passages are linked to their Notes; these links are meant to be subtle. The difference between linenotes and numbered footnotes is in the original.

All brackets [ ] and asterisks * are in the original, as are the < and > symbols.

All brackets [ ] and asterisks * are in the original, as are the < and > symbols.

Contents
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__

ANGLO-SAXON GRAMMAR
AND EXERCISE BOOK

WITH INFLECTIONS, SYNTAX, SELECTIONS
FOR READING, AND GLOSSARY

 
 


BY

C. ALPHONSO SMITH, Ph.D., LL.D.

LATE PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH IN THE
UNITED STATES NAVAL ACADEMY

 
 


 
 


----

----

 
 


 
 


ALLYN & BACON
BOSTON       NEW YORK         CHICAGO
ATLANTA       SAN FRANCISCO

Copyright, 1896, by
C. ALPHONSO SMITH.

 
 


IAI

 
 


Norwood Press
J. S. Cushing & Co.—Berwick & Smith
Norwood Mass. U.S.A.

iii

PREFACE.

----

----

The scope of this book is indicated in § 5. It is intended for beginners, and in writing it, these words of Sir Thomas Elyot have not been forgotten: “Grammer, beinge but an introduction to the understandinge of autors, if it be made to longe or exquisite to the lerner, it in a maner mortifieth his corage: And by that time he cometh to the most swete and pleasant redinge of olde autors, the sparkes of fervent desire of lernynge are extincte with the burdone of grammer, lyke as a lyttell fyre is sone quenched with a great heape of small stickes.”—The Governour, Cap. X.

The scope of this book is outlined in § 5. It's designed for beginners, and while writing it, we kept in mind the words of Sir Thomas Elyot: “Grammar, being just an introduction to understanding authors, if it's too long or complex for learners, it really dampens their spirits. By the time they get to the most enjoyable readings of classic authors, the spark of enthusiasm for learning is extinguished by the burden of grammar, just like a small fire is quickly put out by a pile of sticks.” —The Governour, Cap. X.

Only the essentials, therefore, are treated in this work, which is planned more as a foundation for the study of Modern English grammar, of historical English grammar, and of the principles of English etymology, than as a general introduction to Germanic philology.

Only the essentials are covered in this work, which is intended more as a basis for studying Modern English grammar, historical English grammar, and the principles of English etymology, rather than as a general introduction to Germanic philology.

The Exercises in translation will, it is believed, furnish all the drill necessary to enable the student to retain the forms and constructions given in the various chapters.

The translation exercises are expected to provide all the practice needed for students to remember the forms and structures presented in the different chapters.

The Selections for Reading relate to the history and literature of King Alfred’s day, and are sufficient to give the student a first-hand, though brief, acquaintance with the native style and idiom of Early West Saxon prose in its golden age. Most of the words and constructions contained in them will be already familiar to the student through their intentional employment in the Exercises.

The readings are connected to the history and literature from King Alfred’s time, providing students with a direct, though brief, introduction to the native style and language of Early West Saxon prose during its peak. Most of the words and structures used in these selections will already be familiar to the students from their deliberate use in the exercises.

For the inflectional portion of this grammar, recourse iv has been had chiefly to Sievers’ Abriss der angelsächsischen Grammatik (1895). Constant reference has been made also to the same author’s earlier and larger Angelsächsishe Grammatik, translated by Cook. A more sparing use has been made of Cosijn’s Altwestsächsische Grammatik.

For the inflectional part of this grammar, we mainly referred to Sievers’ Abriss der angelsächsischen Grammatik (1895). We also frequently consulted the same author's earlier and larger Angelsächsishe Grammatik, translated by Cook. We used Cosijn’s Altwestsächsische Grammatik more sparingly.

For syntax and illustrative sentences, Dr. J. E. Wülfing’s Syntax in den Werken Alfreds des Grossen, Part I. (Bonn, 1894) has proved indispensable. Advance sheets of the second part of this great work lead one to believe that when completed the three parts will constitute the most important contribution to the study of English syntax that has yet been made. Old English sentences have also been cited from Sweet’s Anglo-Saxon Reader, Bright’s Anglo-Saxon Reader, and Cook’s First Book in Old English.

For syntax and example sentences, Dr. J. E. Wülfing’s Syntax in den Werken Alfreds des Grossen, Part I. (Bonn, 1894) has been essential. Advance copies of the second part of this significant work suggest that once finished, the three parts will represent the most important contribution to the study of English syntax to date. Old English sentences have also been referenced from Sweet’s Anglo-Saxon Reader, Bright’s Anglo-Saxon Reader, and Cook’s First Book in Old English.

The short chapter on the Order of Words has been condensed from my Order of Words in Anglo-Saxon Prose (Publications of the Modern Language Association of America, New Series, Vol. I, No. 2).

The brief chapter on the Order of Words has been shortened from my Order of Words in Anglo-Saxon Prose (Publications of the Modern Language Association of America, New Series, Vol. I, No. 2).

Though assuming sole responsibility for everything contained in this book, I take pleasure in acknowledging the kind and efficient assistance that has been so generously given me in its preparation. To none do I owe more than to Dr. J. E. Wülfing, of the University of Bonn; Prof. James A. Harrison, of the University of Virginia; Prof. W. S. Currell, of Washington and Lee University; Prof. J. Douglas Bruce, of Bryn Mawr College; and Prof. L. M. Harris, of the University of Indiana. They have each rendered material aid, not only in the tedious task of detecting typographical errors in the proof-sheets, but by the valuable criticisms and suggestions which they have made as this work was passing through the press.

Though I take full responsibility for everything in this book, I want to express my gratitude for the kind and efficient help I've received during its preparation. I owe a special thanks to Dr. J. E. Wülfing from the University of Bonn; Prof. James A. Harrison from the University of Virginia; Prof. W. S. Currell from Washington and Lee University; Prof. J. Douglas Bruce from Bryn Mawr College; and Prof. L. M. Harris from the University of Indiana. Each of them has provided significant support, not just in catching typographical errors in the proof-sheets, but also through their valuable feedback and suggestions as this work was being published.

C. ALPHONSO SMITH.

C. Alphonso Smith.

   Louisiana State University,
Baton Rouge
, September, 1896.

LSU, Baton Rouge, September 1896.

v

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

----

----

In preparing this enlarged edition, a few minor errors in the first edition have been corrected and a few sentences added. The chief difference between the two editions, however, consists in the introduction of more reading matter and the consequent exposition of Old English meter. Both changes have been made at the persistent request of teachers and students of Old English.

In preparing this expanded edition, a few minor errors from the first edition have been fixed and some sentences added. The main difference between the two editions, however, is the addition of more reading material and the subsequent explanation of Old English meter. Both changes have been made at the consistent request of teachers and students of Old English.

Uniformity of treatment has been studiously preserved in the new material and the old, the emphasis in both being placed on syntax and upon the affinities that Old English shares with Modern English.

Uniformity of treatment has been carefully maintained in both the new and old material, focusing on syntax and the connections that Old English has with Modern English.

Many obligations have been incurred in preparing this augmented edition. I have again to thank Dr. J. E. Wülfing, Prof. James A. Harrison, Prof. W. S. Currell, and Prof. J. Douglas Bruce. To the scholarly criticisms also of Prof. J. M. Hart, of Cornell; Prof. Frank Jewett Mather, Jr., of Williams College; and Prof. Frederick Tupper, Jr., of the University of Vermont, I am indebted for aid as generously given as it is genuinely appreciated.

Many obligations have been undertaken in preparing this updated edition. I’d like to thank Dr. J. E. Wülfing, Prof. James A. Harrison, Prof. W. S. Currell, and Prof. J. Douglas Bruce once again. I also appreciate the valuable feedback from Prof. J. M. Hart at Cornell, Prof. Frank Jewett Mather, Jr. at Williams College, and Prof. Frederick Tupper, Jr. at the University of Vermont, which has been both generously given and truly appreciated.

C. ALPHONSO SMITH.

C. Alphonso Smith.

    August, 1898.

August, 1898.

vi

PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION.

----

----

Among those who have kindly aided in making this edition free from error, I wish to thank especially my friend Dr. John M. McBryde, Jr., of Hollins Institute, Virginia.

Among those who have generously helped to ensure this edition is error-free, I want to especially thank my friend Dr. John M. McBryde, Jr., from Hollins Institute, Virginia.

C. ALPHONSO SMITH.

C. Alphonso Smith.

University of North Carolina,
   Chapel Hill, February, 1903.

UNC,
   Chapel Hill, February, 1903.

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

----

----

PART I.—INTRODUCTION.
Chapters Pages
I. History (§ 1-5) 1
II. Sounds (§ 6-11) 4
III. Inflections (§ 12-19) 10
IV. Order of Words (§ 20-21) 18
V. Practical Tips (§ 22-24) 21
PART II.—ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX.
VI. The a-Declension: Masculine a-Stems (§ 25-30) 27
VII. Neuter a-Stems (§ 31-36) 30
VIII. The ō-Declension (§ 37-42) 33
IX. The i-declension and the u-declension (§ 43-55) 35
X. Present Indicative Endings of Strong Verbs (§ 56-62) 39
XI. The Weak or n-Declension (§ 63-66) 44
XII. Remnants of Other Consonant Declensions (§ 67-71) 47
XIII. Pronouns (§ 72-77) 50
XIV. Adjectives, Strong and Weak (§ 78-87) 53
XV. Numerals (§ 88-92) 57
XVI. Adverbs, Prepositions, and Conjunctions (§ 93-95) 60
XVII. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs (§ 96-100) 64
XVIII. Strong Verbs: Class I, Sentence Structure of Moods (§ 101-108) 68
XIX. Classes II and III (§ 109-113) 74
viii XX. Classes IV, V, VI, and VII; Contract Verbs (§ 114-121) 78
XXI. Weak Verbs (§ 122-133) 82
XXII.

Remaining Verbs; Verb Phrases with habban, bēon, and weorðan (§ 134-143)

Remaining Verbs; Verb Phrases with have, be, and become134-143)

90
PART III.—SELECTIONS FOR READING.
Prose.
Intro 98
I. The Ashdown Battle 99
II. King Alfred's Prayer 101
III. The Travels of Ohthere and Wulfstan 102
Ohthere's First Voyage 103
Ohthere's Second Voyage 106
Wulfstan's Journey 107
IV. Cædmon's Story 111
V. Alfred’s Preface to the Pastoral Care 116
Poetry.
Intro 122
VI. Extracts from Beowulf 136
VII. The Traveler 148
GLOSSARIES.
I. Old English—Modern English 155
II. Modern English—Old English 190
ix

OLD ENGLISH
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES


1

OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND
EXERCISE BOOK.

----

----

PART I.
INTRODUCTION.

CHAPTER I.
History.

1.

The history of the English language falls naturally into three periods; but these periods blend into one another so gradually that too much significance must not be attached to the exact dates which scholars, chiefly for convenience of treatment, have assigned as their limits. Our language, it is true, has undergone many and great changes; but its continuity has never been broken, and its individuality has never been lost.

The history of the English language can be divided into three periods; however, these periods blend into each other so gradually that we shouldn't put too much emphasis on the exact dates that scholars have assigned for their boundaries, mainly for the sake of organization. It’s true that our language has gone through many significant changes, but its continuity has never been disrupted, and its unique character has never been lost.

2.

The first of these periods is that of Old English, or Anglo-Saxon,1 commonly known as the period of full 2 inflections. E.g. stān-as, stones; car-u, care; will-a, will; bind-an, to bind; help-að (= ath), they help.

The first of these periods is known as Modern English, or Anglo-Saxon,1 commonly referred to as the period of full 2 inflections. For example, stān-as, stones; car-u, care; will-a, will; bind-an, to bind; help-að (= ath), they help.

It extends from the arrival of the English in Great Britain to about one hundred years after the Norman Conquest,—from A.D. 449 to 1150; but there are no literary remains of the earlier centuries of this period. There were four2 distinct dialects spoken at this time. These were the Northumbrian, spoken north of the river Humber; the Mercian, spoken in the midland region between the Humber and the Thames; the West Saxon, spoken south and west of the Thames; and the Kentish, spoken in the neighborhood of Canterbury. Of these dialects, Modern English is most nearly akin to the Mercian; but the best known of them is the West Saxon. It was in the West Saxon dialect that King Alfred (849-901) wrote and spoke. His writings belong to the period of Early West Saxon as distinguished from the period of Late West Saxon, the latter being best represented in the writings of Abbot Ælfric (955?-1025?).

It spans from the arrival of the English in Great Britain to about a hundred years after the Norman Conquest—from CE 449 to 1150; however, there are no literary records from the earlier centuries of this timeframe. Four distinct dialects were spoken during this time. These were Northumbrian, spoken north of the Humber River; Mercian, spoken in the midlands between the Humber and the Thames; West Saxon, spoken to the south and west of the Thames; and Kentish, spoken around Canterbury. Of these dialects, Modern English is most closely related to Mercian, but the most well-known is West Saxon. King Alfred (849-901) wrote and spoke in the West Saxon dialect. His writings are from the Early West Saxon period, as opposed to the Late West Saxon period, which is best illustrated in the writings of Abbot Ælfric (955?-1025?).

3.

The second period is that of Middle English, or the period of leveled inflections, the dominant vowel of the inflections being e. E.g. ston-es, car-e, will-e, bind-en (or bind-e), help-eth, each being, as in the earlier period, a dissyllable.

The second period is that of Middle English, or the period of leveled inflections, with the main vowel of the inflections being e. E.g. ston-es, car-e, will-e, bind-en (or bind-e), help-eth, each of which is, like in the earlier period, a disyllable.

The Middle English period extends from A.D. 1150 to 1500. Its greatest representatives are Chaucer (1340-1400) in poetry and Wiclif (1324-1384) in prose. There were three prominent dialects during this period: the Northern, corresponding to the older Northumbrian; the Midland 3 (divided into East Midland and West Midland), corresponding to the Mercian; and the Southern, corresponding to the West Saxon and Kentish. London, situated in East Midland territory, had become the dominant speech center; and it was this East Midland dialect that both Chaucer and Wiclif employed.

The Middle English period runs from CE 1150 to 1500. Its most notable figures are Chaucer (1340-1400) in poetry and Wiclif (1324-1384) in prose. There were three main dialects during this time: the Northern, which relates to the earlier Northumbrian; the Midland 3 (divided into East Midland and West Midland), related to the Mercian; and the Southern, related to the West Saxon and Kentish. London, located in East Midland territory, became the main center of speech; and it was this East Midland dialect that both Chaucer and Wiclif used.

Note.—It is a great mistake to think that Chaucer shaped our language from crude materials. His influence was conservative, not plastic. The popularity of his works tended to crystalize and thus to perpetuate the forms of the East Midland dialect, but that dialect was ready to his hand before he began to write. The speech of London was, in Chaucer’s time, a mixture of Southern and Midland forms, but the Southern forms (survivals of the West Saxon dialect) had already begun to fall away; and this they continued to do, so that “Chaucer’s language,” as Dr. Murray says, “is more Southern than standard English eventually became.” See also Morsbach, Ueber den Ursprung der neuenglischen Schriftsprache (1888).

Note.—It's a big mistake to think that Chaucer created our language from rough materials. His influence was more about preservation than transformation. The popularity of his works helped solidify and thus maintain the forms of the East Midland dialect, but that dialect was already in place before he started writing. The speech of London during Chaucer’s time was a mix of Southern and Midland forms, but the Southern forms (which are remnants of the West Saxon dialect) had already started to fade; and they kept fading, so that “Chaucer’s language,” as Dr. Murray notes, “is more Southern than standard English eventually became.” See also Morsbach, Ueber den Ursprung der neuenglischen Schriftsprache (1888).

4.

The last period is that of Modern English, or the period of lost inflections. E.g. stones, care, will, bind, help, each being a monosyllable. Modern English extends from A.D. 1500 to the present time. It has witnessed comparatively few grammatical changes, but the vocabulary of our language has been vastly increased by additions from the classical languages. Vowels, too, have shifted their values.

The last period is that of Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. Modern English, or the period of lost inflections. For example, stones, care, will, bind, help, each being a one-syllable word. Modern English has been around from CE 1500 to today. It has seen relatively few grammatical changes, but our language's vocabulary has greatly expanded with additions from classical languages. Vowel sounds have also changed their values.

5.

It is the object of this book to give an elementary knowledge of Early West Saxon, that is, the language of King Alfred. With this knowledge, it will not be difficult for the student to read Late West Saxon, or any other dialect of the Old English period. Such knowledge will also serve as the best introduction to the structure both of Middle English and of Modern English, besides laying a secure foundation for the scientific study of any other Germanic tongue.

The goal of this book is to provide a basic understanding of Early West Saxon, which is the language of King Alfred. With this knowledge, students will find it easier to read Late West Saxon or any other dialect from the Old English period. This foundation will also be the best way to learn the structure of both Middle English and Modern English, while also providing a solid base for studying any other Germanic language scientifically.

4

Note.—The Germanic, or Teutonic, languages constitute a branch of the great Aryan, or Indo-Germanic (known also as the Indo-European) group. They are subdivided as follows:

Note.—The Germanic, or Teutonic, languages are a part of the larger Aryan, or Indo-Germanic (also known as Indo-European) group. They are divided as follows:

Germanic | North Germanic: Scandinavian, or Norse.
  East Germanic: Gothic.
  |

Old High German,
(to A.D. 1100,)

Old High German,
(to A.D. 1100,)

  | High German  

Middle High German,
(A.D. 1100–1500,)

Middle High German,
(A.D. 1100–1500,)

| West Germanic   |

New High German,
(A.D. 1500–.)

New High German,
(A.D. 1500–present)

| Low German | Dutch,
Old Saxon,
| Frisian,
English.

1. This unfortunate nomenclature is due to the term Angli Saxones, which Latin writers used as a designation for the English Saxons as distinguished from the continental or Old Saxons. But Alfred and Ælfric both use the term Englisc, not Anglo-Saxon. The Angles spread over Northumbria and Mercia, far outnumbering the other tribes. Thus Englisc (= Angel + isc) became the general name for the language spoken.

1. This unfortunate name comes from the term Angli Saxones, which Latin writers used to refer to the English Saxons, distinguishing them from the continental or Old Saxons. However, both Alfred and Ælfric use the term Englisc, not Anglo-Saxon. The Angles spread throughout Northumbria and Mercia, greatly outnumbering the other tribes. As a result, Englisc (= Angel + isc) became the common name for the language spoken.

2. As small as England is, there are six distinct dialects spoken in her borders to-day. Of these the Yorkshire dialect is, perhaps, the most peculiar. It preserves many Northumbrian survivals. See Tennyson’s Northern Farmer.

2. Even though England is small, there are six distinct dialects spoken within its borders today. Among these, the Yorkshire dialect is probably the most unique. It retains many features from Northumbrian. Check out Tennyson’s Northern Farmer.

----

----

CHAPTER II.
Sounds.

Vowels and Diphthongs.

6.

The long vowels and diphthongs will in this book be designated by the macron (–). Vowel length should in every case be associated by the student with each word learned: quantity alone sometimes distinguishes words meaning wholly different things: fōr, he went, for, for; gōd, good, God, God; mān, crime, man, man.

The long vowels and diphthongs in this book will be marked with a macron (–). Students should always associate vowel length with each word they learn: sometimes, just the quantity distinguishes words that mean completely different things: fōr, he went, for, for; gōd, good, God, God; mān, crime, man, man.

Long vowels and diphthongs:

Long vowels and diphthongs:

ā

as in father: stān, a stone.

as in father: stone, a stone.

ǣ

as in man (prolonged): slǣpan, to sleep.

as in main (prolonged): slǣpan, to sleep.

ē

as in they: hēr, here.

as in they: here, here.

ī

as in machine: mīn, mine.

as in machine: mine, mine.

ō

as in note (pure, not diphthongal): bōc, book.

as in note (pure, not diphthongal): book, book.

5 ū

as in rule: tūn, town.

as in rule: tūn, city.

ȳ

as in German grün, or English green (with lips rounded):1 brȳd, bride.

as in German grün, or English green (with lips rounded):1 brȳd, bride.

The diphthongs, long and short, have the stress upon the first vowel. The second vowel is obscured, and represents approximately the sound of er in sooner, faster (= soon-uh, fast-uh). The long diphthongs (ǣ is not a diphthong proper) are ēo, īe, and ēa. The sound of ēo is approximately reproduced in mayor (= mā-uh); that of īe in the dissyllabic pronunciation of fear (= fē-uh). But ēa = ǣ-uh. This diphthong is hardly to be distinguished from ea in pear, bear, etc., as pronounced in the southern section of the United States (= bæ-uh, pæ-uh).

The diphthongs, both long and short, emphasize the first vowel. The second vowel is less distinct and sounds roughly like er in sooner and faster (pronounced soon-uh, fast-uh). The long diphthongs (note that ǣ is not actually a diphthong) are ēo, īe, and ēa. The sound of ēo is similar to the pronunciation of mayor (pronounced mā-uh); īe resembles the two-syllable pronunciation of fear (pronounced fē-uh). However, ēa is pronounced as ǣ-uh. This diphthong is barely distinguishable from the ea in pear, bear, etc., as pronounced in the southern United States (which sounds like bæ-uh, pæ-uh).

7.

The short sounds are nothing more than the long vowels and diphthongs shortened; but the student must at once rid himself of the idea that Modern English red, for example, is the shortened form of reed, or that mat is the shortened form of mate. Pronounce these long sounds with increasing rapidity, and reed will approach rid, while mate will approach met. The Old English short vowel sounds are:

The short sounds are just the long vowels and diphthongs made shorter; however, the student must quickly let go of the idea that Modern English red, for instance, is the shortened version of reed, or that mat is the shortened version of mate. Pronounce these long sounds faster, and reed will get closer to rid, while mate will get closer to met. The Old English short vowel sounds are:

a

as in artistic: habban, to have.

as in artistic: habban, to own.

æ

as in mankind: dæg, day.

as in mankind: day.

e, ę

as in let: stelan, to steal, sęttan, to set.

as in let: stelan, to steal, sęttan, to set.

i

as in sit: hit, it.

as in sit: hit, it.

o

as in broad (but shorter): God, God.

as in broad (but shorter): God, God.

ǫ

as in not: lǫmb, lamb.

as in not: lǫmb, lamb.

u

as in full: sunu, son.

as in full: sunu, son.

y

as in miller (with lips rounded)1: gylden, golden.

as in miller (with lips rounded)1: golden, golden.

6

Note.—The symbol ę is known as umlaut-e (§ 58). It stands for Germanic a, while e (without the cedilla) represents Germanic e. The symbol ǫ is employed only before m and n. It, too, represents Germanic a. But Alfred writes manig or monig, many; lamb or lomb, lamb; hand or hond, hand, etc. The cedilla is an etymological sign added by modern grammarians.

Note.—The symbol ę is known as umlaut-e (§ 58). It represents the Germanic a, while e (without the cedilla) denotes the Germanic e. The symbol ǫ is only used before m and n. It also signifies Germanic a. However, Alfred writes manig or monig, many; lamb or lomb, lamb; hand or hond, hand, etc. The cedilla is an etymological mark added by modern grammarians.

The letters ę and ǫ were printed as shown in this e-text. The diacritic is not a cedilla (open to the left) but an ogonek (open to the right).

The letters ę and ǫ were printed as shown in this e-text. The diacritic is not a cedilla (open to the left) but an ogonek (open to the right).

Consonants.

8.

There is little difference between the values of Old English consonants and those of Modern English. The following distinctions, however, require notice:

There is little difference between the values of Old English consonants and those of Modern English. The following distinctions, however, require notice:

The digraph th is represented in Old English texts by ð and þ, no consistent distinction being made between them. In the works of Alfred, ð (capital, Ð) is the more common: ðās, those; ðæt, that; bindeð, he binds.

The digraph th is represented in Old English texts by ð and þ, with no consistent distinction between them. In the works of Alfred, ð (capital, Ð) is more commonly used: ðās, those; ðæt, that; bindeð, he binds.

The consonant c had the hard sound of k, the latter symbol being rare in West Saxon: cyning, king; cwēn, queen; cūð, known. When followed by a palatal vowel sound,—e, i, æ, ea, eo, long or short,—a vanishing y sound was doubtless interposed (cf. dialectic kyind for kind). In Modern English the combination has passed into ch: cealc, chalk; cīdan, to chide; lǣce, leech; cild, child; cēowan, to chew. This change (c > ch) is known as Palatalization. The letter g, pronounced as in Modern English gun, has also a palatal value before the palatal vowels (cf. dialectic gyirl for girl).

The consonant c had the hard sound of k, which is rare in West Saxon: cyning, king; cwēn, queen; cūð, known. When followed by a palatal vowel sound—e, i, æ, ea, eo, long or short—there was probably a disappearing y sound added in (cf. dialectic kyind for kind). In Modern English, this combination has changed to ch: cealc, chalk; cīdan, to chide; lǣce, leech; cild, child; cēowan, to chew. This change (c > ch) is known as Palatalization. The letter g, pronounced like in Modern English gun, also has a palatal value before the palatal vowels (cf. dialectic gyirl for girl).

The combination cg, which frequently stands for gg, had probably the sound of dge in Modern English edge: ęcg, edge; sęcgan, to say; brycg, bridge. 7 Initial h is sounded as in Modern English: habban, to have; hālga, saint. When closing a syllable it has the sound of German ch: slōh, he slew; hēah, high; ðurh, through.

The combination cg, which often represents gg, likely sounded like dge in Modern English edge: ęcg, edge; sęcgan, to say; brycg, bridge. 7 Initial h is pronounced the same way as in Modern English: habban, to have; hālga, saint. When it closes a syllable, it sounds like the German ch: slōh, he slew; hēah, high; ðurh, through.

9.

An important distinction is that between voiced (or sonant) and voiceless (or surd) consonants.2 In Old English they are as follows:

An important distinction is between voiced (or sonant) and voiceless (or surd) consonants.2 In Old English, they are as follows:

Voiced. Voiceless.
g h, c
d t
ð, þ (as in though)    ð, þ (as in thin)
b p
f (= v) f
s (= z) s

It is evident, therefore, that ð (þ), f, and s have double values in Old English. If voiced, they are equivalent to th (in though), v, and z. Otherwise, they are pronounced as th (in thin), f (in fin), and s (in sin). The syllabic environment will usually compel the student to give these letters their proper values. When occurring between vowels, they are always voiced: ōðer, other; ofer, over; rīsan, to rise.

It is clear, then, that ð (þ), f, and s have two different values in Old English. When voiced, they match th (as in though), v, and z. Otherwise, they are pronounced as th (as in thin), f (as in fin), and s (as in sin). The surrounding syllables typically guide the student to use the correct values for these letters. When they appear between vowels, they are always voiced: ōðer, other; ofer, over; rīsan, to rise.

Note.—The general rule in Old English, as in Modern English, is, that voiced consonants have a special affinity for other voiced consonants, and voiceless for voiceless. This is the law of Assimilation. Thus when de is added to form the preterit of a verb whose stem 8 ends in a voiceless consonant, the d is unvoiced, or assimilated, to t: sęttan, to set, sętte (but tręddan, to tread, has trędde); slǣpan, to sleep, slǣpte; dręncan, to drench, dręncte; cyssan, to kiss, cyste. See § 126, Note 1.

Note.—The general rule in Old English, just like in Modern English, is that voiced consonants tend to show a preference for other voiced consonants, and voiceless consonants for voiceless ones. This is known as Assimilation. So when de is added to create the past tense of a verb whose stem ends in a voiceless consonant, the d becomes voiceless or assimilates to t:sęttan, to set, sętte (but tręddan, to tread, has trędde); slǣpan, to sleep, slǣpte; dręncan, to drench, dręncte; cyssan, to kiss, cyste. See § 126, Note 1.

Syllables.

10.

A syllable is usually a vowel, either alone or in combination with consonants, uttered with a single impulse of stress; but certain consonants may form syllables: oven (= ov-n), battle (= bæt-l); (cf. also the vulgar pronunciation of elm).

A syllable is typically a vowel, either by itself or combined with consonants, pronounced with a single emphasis; however, some consonants can also form syllables: oven (= ov-n), battle (= bæt-l); (cf. also the informal pronunciation of elm).

A syllable may be (1) weak or strong, (2) open or closed, (3) long or short.

A syllable can be (1) weak or strong, (2) open or closed, (3) long or short.

(1) A weak syllable receives a light stress. Its vowel sound is often different from that of the corresponding strong, or stressed, syllable. Cf. weak and strong my in “I want my lárge hat” and “I want mý hat.”

(1) A weak syllable gets a light stress. Its vowel sound is often different from that of the corresponding strong, or stressed, syllable. Cf. weak and strong my in “I want my large hat” and “I want my hat.”

(2) An open syllable ends in a vowel or diphthong: dē-man, to deem; ðū, thou; sca-can, to shake; dæ-ges, by day. A closed syllable ends in one or more consonants: ðing, thing; gōd, good; glæd, glad.

(2) An open syllable ends with a vowel or diphthong: dē-man, to deem; ðū, thou; sca-can, to shake; dæ-ges, by day. A closed syllable ends with one or more consonants: ðing, thing; gōd, good; glæd, glad.

(3) A syllable is long (a) if it contains a long vowel or a long diphthong: drī-fan, to drive; lū-can, to lock; slǣ-pan, to sleep; cēo-san, to choose; (b) if its vowel or diphthong is followed by more than one consonant:3 cræft, strength; heard, hard; lib-ban, to live; feal-lan, 9 to fall. Otherwise, the syllable is short: ðe, which; be-ran, to bear; ðæt, that; gie-fan, to give.

(3) A syllable is long (a) if it has a long vowel or a long diphthong: drī-fan, to drive; lū-can, to lock; slǣ-pan, to sleep; cēo-san, to choose; (b) if its vowel or diphthong is followed by more than one consonant:3 cræft, strength; heard, hard; lib-ban, to live; feal-lan, 9 to fall. Otherwise, the syllable is short: ðe, which; be-ran, to bear; ðæt, that; gie-fan, to give.

Note 1.—A single consonant belongs to the following syllable: hā-lig, holy (not hāl-ig); wrī-tan, to write; fæ-der, father.

Note 1.—A single consonant goes with the next syllable: hā-lig, holy (not hāl-ig); wrī-tan, to write; fæ-der, father.

Note 2.—The student will notice that the syllable may be long and the vowel short; but the vowel cannot be long and the syllable short.

Note 2.—The student will see that the syllable can be long while the vowel is short; however, the vowel can't be long if the syllable is short.

Note 3.—Old English short vowels, occurring in open syllables, have regularly become long in Modern English: we-fan, to weave; e-tan, to eat; ma-cian, to make; na-cod, naked; a-can, to ache; o-fer, over. And Old English long vowels, preceding two or more consonants, have generally been shortened: brēost, breast; hǣlð, health; slǣpte, slept; lǣdde, led.

Note 3.—Old English short vowels, found in open syllables, have generally turned into long vowels in Modern English: we-fan, to weave; e-tan, to eat; ma-cian, to make; na-cod, naked; a-can, to ache; o-fer, over. And Old English long vowels, followed by two or more consonants, have mostly been shortened: brēost, breast; hǣlð, health; slǣpte, slept; lǣdde, led.

Accentuation.

11.

The accent in Old English falls usually on the radical syllable, never on the inflectional ending: bríngan, to bring; stā́nas, stones; bérende, bearing; ī́delnes, idleness; frḗondscipe, friendship.

The accent in Old English usually falls on the root syllable, never on the inflectional ending: bríngan, to bring; stā́nas, stones; bérende, bearing; ī́delnes, idleness; frḗondscipe, friendship.

But in the case of compound nouns, adjectives, and adverbs the first member of the compound (unless it be ge- or be-) receives the stronger stress: héofon-rīce, heaven-kingdom; ǫ́nd-giet, intelligence; sṓð-fæst, truthful; gód-cund, divine; éall-unga, entirely; blī́ðe-līce, blithely. But be-hā́t, promise; ge-béd, prayer; ge-fḗalīc, joyous; be-sǫ́ne, immediately.

But in the case of compound nouns, adjectives, and adverbs, the first part of the compound (unless it’s ge- or be-) gets the stronger emphasis: héofon-rīce, heaven-kingdom; ǫ́nd-giet, intelligence; sṓð-fæst, truthful; gód-cund, divine; éall-unga, entirely; blī́ðe-līce, blithely. But be-hā́t, promise; ge-béd, prayer; ge-fḗalīc, joyous; be-sǫ́ne, immediately.

Compound verbs, however, have the stress on the radical syllable: for-gíefan, to forgive; of-línnan, to cease; ā-cnā́wan, to know; wið-stǫ́ndan, to withstand; on-sácan, to resist.

Compound verbs, however, emphasize the main syllable: for-gíefan, to forgive; of-línnan, to cease; ā-cnā́wan, to know; wið-stǫ́ndan, to withstand; on-sácan, to resist.

Note.—The tendency of nouns to take the stress on the prefix, while verbs retain it on the root, is exemplified in many Modern English words: préference, prefér; cóntract (noun), contráct (verb); ábstinence, abstaín; pérfume (noun), perfúme (verb).

Note.—Nouns tend to have the stress on the prefix, while verbs keep it on the root. This can be seen in many Modern English words: préference, prefér; cóntract (noun), contráct (verb); ábstinence, abstaín; pérfume (noun), perfúme (verb).

1. Vowels are said to be round, or rounded, when the lip-opening is rounded; that is, when the lips are thrust out and puckered as if preparing to pronounce w. Thus o and u are round vowels: add -ing to each, and phonetically you have added -wing. E.g. gowing, suwing.

1. Vowels are considered round when the lips are shaped in a rounded way; that is, when the lips are pushed out and puckered as if getting ready to say w. So o and u are round vowels: if you add -ing to each, phonetically you create -wing. E.g. gowing, suwing.

2. A little practice will enable the student to see the appropriateness of calling these consonants voiced and voiceless. Try to pronounce a voiced consonant,—d in den, for example, but without the assistance of en,—and there will be heard a gurgle, or vocal murmur. But in t, of ten, there is no sound at all, but only a feeling of tension in the organs.

2. With a bit of practice, students will understand why these consonants are called voiced and voiceless. Try to say a voiced consonant, like d in den, but without the help of en, and you’ll notice a gurgle or vocal murmur. However, with t, as in ten, there’s no sound at all, just a sensation of tension in the speech organs.

3. Taken separately, every syllable ending in a single consonant is long. It may be said, therefore, that all closed syllables are long; but in the natural flow of language, the single final consonant of a syllable so often blends with a following initial vowel, the syllable thus becoming open and short, that such syllables are not recognized as prevailingly long. Cf. Modern English at all (= a-tall).

3. When you look at them individually, every syllable that ends with a single consonant is considered long. So, it's fair to say that all closed syllables are long; however, in everyday speech, the single final consonant of a syllable often merges with the next vowel sound, turning the syllable into an open and short one. Because of this, these syllables aren’t usually thought of as being predominantly long. Cf. Modern English at all (= a-tall).

----

----

10

CHAPTER III.
Inflections.

Cases.

12.

There are five cases in Old English: the nominative, the genitive, the dative, the accusative, and the instrumental.1 Each of them, except the nominative, may be governed by prepositions. When used without prepositions, they have, in general, the following functions:

There are five cases in Old English: the nominative, the genitive, the dative, the accusative, and the instrumental.1 Each of them, except the nominative, can be influenced by prepositions. When used without prepositions, they generally have the following functions:

(a) The nominative, as in Modern English, is the case of the subject of a finite verb.

(a) The nominative, like in Modern English, is the case used for the subject of a finite verb.

(b) The genitive (the possessive case of Modern English) is the case of the possessor or source. It may be called the of case.

(b) The genitive (the possessive case in Modern English) is the case that shows ownership or origin. It's also known as the of case.

(c) The dative is the case of the indirect object. It may be called the to or for case.

(c) The dative is the case used for the indirect object. It can be referred to as the to or for case.

(d) The accusative (the objective case of Modern English) is the case of the direct object.

(d) The accusative (the objective case in modern English) is the case used for the direct object.

(e) The instrumental, which rarely differs from the dative in form, is the case of the means or the method. It may be called the with or by case.

(e) The instrumental, which rarely differs from the dative in form, is the case of the means or the method. It can be referred to as the with or by case.

The following paradigm of mūð, the mouth, illustrates the several cases (the article being, for the present, gratuitously added in the Modern English equivalents):

The following example of mūð, the mouth, shows the different cases (the article being, for now, added for free in the Modern English equivalents):

11
Singular. Plural.
N.

mūð = the mouth.

mouth = the mouth.

mūð-as = the mouths.

mūð-as = the mouths.

G.

mūð-es2 = of the mouth (= the mouth’s).

mūð-es__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = of the mouth (= the mouth’s).

mūð-a = of the mouths (= the mouths’).

mūð-a = of the mouths (= the mouths’).

D.

mūð-e = to or for the mouth.

mūð-e = to or for the mouth.

mūð-um = to or for the mouths.

mūð-um = to or for the mouths.

A.

mūð = the mouth.

mouth = the mouth.

mūð-as = the mouths.

mūð-as = the mouths.

I.

mūðe = with or by means of the mouth.

mūðe = with or by mouth.

mūð-um = with or by means of the mouths.

mūð-um = with or by means of the mouths.

Gender.

13.

The gender of Old English nouns, unlike that of Modern English, depends partly on meaning and partly on form, or ending. Thus mūð, mouth, is masculine; tunge, tongue, feminine; ēage, eye, neuter.

The gender of Old English nouns, unlike that of Modern English, is based partly on meaning and partly on form, or ending. So, mūð, mouth, is masculine; tunge, tongue, is feminine; ēage, eye, is neuter.

No very comprehensive rules, therefore, can be given; but the gender of every noun should be learned with its meaning. Gender will be indicated in the vocabularies by the different gender forms of the definite article, for the masculine, sēo for the feminine, and ðæt for the neuter: sē mūð, sēo tunge, ðæt ēage = the mouth, the tongue, the eye.

No comprehensive rules can be provided, but you should learn the gender of every noun along with its meaning. Gender will be indicated in the vocabulary by the different forms of the definite article: for masculine, sēo for feminine, and ðæt for neuter: sē mūð, sēo tunge, ðæt ēage = the mouth, the tongue, the eye.

All nouns ending in -dōm, -hād, -scipe, or -ere are masculine (cf. Modern English wisdom, childhood, friendship, worker). Masculine, also, are nouns ending in -a.

All nouns that end in -dōm, -hād, -scipe, or -ere are masculine (cf. Modern English wisdom, childhood, friendship, worker). Nouns that end in -a are also masculine.

Those ending in -nes or -ung are feminine (cf. Modern 12 English goodness, and gerundial forms in -ing: seeing is believing).

Those that end in -nes or -ung are feminine (cf. Modern 12 English goodness, and gerund forms in -ing: seeing is believing).

Thus sē wīsdōm, wisdom; sē cildhād, childhood; sē frēondscipe, friendship; sē fiscere, fisher(man); sē hunta, hunter; sēo gelīcnes, likeness; sēo leornung, learning.

Thus wisdom, wisdom; childhood, childhood; friendship, friendship; fisherman, fisherman; hunter, hunter; likeness, likeness; learning, learning.

Declensions.

14.

There are two great systems of declension in Old English, the Vowel Declension and the Consonant Declension. A noun is said to belong to the Vowel Declension when the final letter of its stem is a vowel, this vowel being then known as the stem-characteristic; but if the stem-characteristic is a consonant, the noun belongs to the Consonant Declension. There might have been, therefore, as many subdivisions of the Vowel Declension in Old English as there were vowels, and as many subdivisions of the Consonant Declension as there were consonants. All Old English nouns, however, belonging to the Vowel Declension, ended their stems originally in a, ō, i, or u. Hence there are but four subdivisions of the Vowel Declension: a-stems, ō-stems, i-stems, and u-stems.

There are two main systems of declension in Old English: the Vowel Declension and the Consonant Declension. A noun is considered part of the Vowel Declension when the last letter of its stem is a vowel, which is referred to as the stem-characteristic; if the stem-characteristic is a consonant, the noun falls under the Consonant Declension. Therefore, there could have been as many subdivisions of the Vowel Declension in Old English as there were vowels, and as many subdivisions of the Consonant Declension as there were consonants. However, all Old English nouns that belong to the Vowel Declension originally ended their stems with a, ō, i, or u. Thus, there are only four subdivisions of the Vowel Declension: a-stems, ō-stems, i-stems, and u-stems.

The Vowel Declension is commonly called the Strong Declension, and its nouns Strong Nouns.

The Vowel Declension is usually referred to as the Strong Declension, and its nouns are called Strong Nouns.

Note.—The terms Strong and Weak were first used by Jacob Grimm (1785-1863) in the terminology of verbs, and thence transferred to nouns and adjectives. By a Strong Verb, Grimm meant one that could form its preterit out of its own resources; that is, without calling in the aid of an additional syllable: Modern English run, ran; find, found; but verbs of the Weak Conjugation had to borrow, as it were, an inflectional syllable: gain, gained; help, helped.

Note.—The terms Strong and Weak were first introduced by Jacob Grimm (1785-1863) in the context of verbs, and later applied to nouns and adjectives. By a Strong Verb, Grimm referred to one that could create its past tense on its own, without needing an additional syllable: Modern English run, ran; find, found; whereas Weak Conjugation verbs needed to add an inflectional syllable: gain, gained; help, helped.

13
15.

The stems of nouns belonging to the Consonant Declension ended, with but few exceptions, in the letter n (cf. Latin homin-em, ration-em, Greek ποιμέν-α). They are called, therefore, n-stems, the Declension itself being known as the n-Declension, or the Weak Declension. The nouns, also, are called Weak Nouns.

The stems of nouns in the Consonant Declension mostly end with the letter n (cf. Latin homin-em, ration-em, Greek shepherd). Because of this, they are referred to as n-stems, and the Declension is known as the n-Declension or the Weak Declension. These nouns are also called Weak Nouns.

16.

If every Old English noun had preserved the original Germanic stem-characteristic (or final letter of the stem), there would be no difficulty in deciding at once whether any given noun is an a-stem, ō-stem, i-stem, u-stem, or n-stem; but these final letters had, for the most part, either been dropped, or fused with the case-endings, long before the period of historic Old English. It is only, therefore, by a rigid comparison of the Germanic languages with one another, and with the other Aryan languages, that scholars are able to reconstruct a single Germanic language, in which the original stem-characteristics may be seen far better than in any one historic branch of the Germanic group (§ 5, Note).

If every Old English noun had kept its original Germanic stem characteristic (or final letter of the stem), it would be easy to tell right away whether a noun is an a-stem, ō-stem, i-stem, u-stem, or n-stem; but for the most part, these final letters were either dropped or merged with the case endings long before the historic Old English period. Therefore, scholars can only reconstruct a single Germanic language by rigorously comparing the Germanic languages with each other and with other Aryan languages, where the original stem characteristics are much clearer than in any one historic branch of the Germanic group (§ 5, Note).

This hypothetical language, which bears the same ancestral relation to the historic Germanic dialects that Latin bears to the Romance tongues, is known simply as Germanic (Gmc.), or as Primitive Germanic. Ability to reconstruct Germanic forms is not expected of the students of this book, but the following table should be examined as illustrating the basis of distinction among the several Old English declensions (O.E. = Old English, Mn.E. = Modern English):

This theoretical language, which is related to the historical Germanic dialects in the same way that Latin is related to the Romance languages, is simply called Germanic (Gmc.) or Primitive Germanic. Students of this book are not expected to reconstruct Germanic forms, but the table below should be reviewed as it highlights the differences among the various Old English declensions (O.E. = Old English, Mn.E. = Modern English):

14
{ { Gmc. staina-z,
(1) a-stems O.E. stān,
  Mn.E. stone.

I. Strong
or Vowel
Declensions

I. Strong
or Vowel
Declensions

  { Gmc. hallō,
  (2) ō-stems O.E. heall,
  Mn.E. hall.
  { Gmc. bōni-z,
  (3) i-stems O.E. bēn,
  Mn.E. boon.
  { Gmc. sunu-z,
{ (4) u-stems O.E. sunu,
Mn.E. son.
{ (1) n-stems
(Weak Declension)
{ Gmc. tungōn-iz,
O.E. tung-an,
  Mn.E. tongue-s.

II. Consonant
Declensions

II. Consonant
Declensions

  (2) Remnants
of other
Consonant
Declensions
{ { Gmc. fōt-iz,
  (a) O.E. fēt,
    Mn.E. feet.
    { Gmc. frijōnd-iz,
    (b) O.E. frīend,
    Mn.E. friend-s.
    { Gmc. brōðr-iz,
{ { (c) O.E. brōðor,
Mn.E. brother-s.

Note.—“It will be seen that if Old English ēage, eye, is said to be an n-stem, what is meant is this, that at some former period the kernel of the word ended in -n, while, as far as the Old English language proper is concerned, all that is implied is that the word is inflected in a certain manner.” (Jespersen, Progress in Language, § 109).

Note.—“It will be seen that if Old English ēage, eye, is described as an n-stem, it means that at some earlier time the core of the word ended in -n. However, with respect to the Old English language itself, it only suggests that the word is declined in a specific way.” (Jespersen, Progress in Language, § 109).

This is true of all Old English stems, whether Vowel or Consonant. The division, therefore, into a-stems, ō-stems, etc., is made in the interests of grammar as well as of philology.

This applies to all Old English stems, whether Vowel or Consonant. The division into a-stems, ō-stems, etc., is made for the sake of both grammar and philology.

Conjugations.

17.

There are, likewise, two systems of conjugation in Old English: the Strong or Old Conjugation, and the Weak or New Conjugation.

There are also two systems of conjugation in Old English: the Strong or Old Conjugation and the Weak or New Conjugation.

15

The verbs of the Strong Conjugation (the so-called Irregular Verbs of Modern English) number about three hundred, of which not one hundred remain in Modern English (§ 101, Note). They form their preterit and frequently their past participle by changing the radical vowel of the present stem. This vowel change or modification is called ablaut (pronounced áhp-lowt): Modern English sing, sang, sung; rise, rose, risen. As the radical vowel of the preterit plural is often different from that of the preterit singular, there are four principal parts or tense stems in an Old English strong verb, instead of the three of Modern English. The four principal parts in the conjugation of a strong verb are (1) the present indicative, (2) the preterit indicative singular, (3) the preterit indicative plural, and (4) the past participle.

The verbs of the Strong Conjugation (the so-called Irregular Verbs of Modern English) include about three hundred, with fewer than a hundred still in use in Modern English (§ 101, Note). They create their past tense and often their past participle by changing the main vowel of the present form. This vowel change is called ablaut (pronounced áhp-lowt): Modern English sing, sang, sung; rise, rose, risen. Since the main vowel of the past tense plural is often different from that of the past tense singular, Old English strong verbs have four principal parts or tense stems instead of the three found in Modern English. The four principal parts in the conjugation of a strong verb are (1) the present indicative, (2) the past indicative singular, (3) the past indicative plural, and (4) the past participle.

Strong verbs fall into seven groups, illustrated in the following table:

Strong verbs fall into seven categories, shown in the table below:

Present. Pret. Sing. Pret. Plur. Past Participle.
I.      
Bītan, to bite:      

Ic bīt-e, I bite or shall bite.3

I bite.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ic bāt, I bit.

I beat, I bit.

Wē bit-on, we bit.

We bit on, we bit.

Ic hæbbe ge4-biten, I have bitten.

I have bitten.

II.      
Bēodan, to bid:      

Ic bēod-e, I bid or shall bid.

I bid

Ic bēad, I bade.

I asked.

Wē bud-on, we bade.

We have begun, we said.

Ic hæbbe ge-boden, I have bidden.

I have bid, I have bidden.

16 III.      
Bindan, to bind:      

Ic bind-e, I bind or shall bind.

I'm binding, I bind or will bind.

Ic bǫnd, I bound.

I’m bound.

Wē bund-on, we bound.

We're bound, we're bound.

Ic hæbbe ge-bund-en, I have bound.

I've bound, I have bound.

IV.      
Beran, to bear:      

Ic ber-e, I bear or shall bear.

I bear or I will bear.

Ic bær, I bore.

I bore, I bore.

Wē bǣr-on, we bore.

We carried.

Ic hæbbe ge-bor-en, I have borne.

I have borne, I have borne.

V.      
Metan, to measure:      

Ic met-e, I measure or shall measure.

I measure, I measure or I will measure.

Ic mæt, I measured.

I measured.

Wē mǣt-on, we measured.

We measured.

Ic hæbbe ge-met-en, I have measured.

I have measured

VI.      
Faran, to go:      

Ic far-e, I go or shall go.

I’m going.

Ic fōr, I went.

I went.

Wē fōr-on, we went.

We forged on, we went.

Ic eom5 ge-far-en, I have (am) gone.

I am __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gone.

VII.      
Feallan, to fall:      

Ic feall-e, I fall or shall fall.

I'm falling or I will fall.

Ic fēoll, I fell.

I fell

Wē fēoll-on, we fell.

We fell, we fell.

Ic eom5 ge-feall-en, I have (am) fallen.

I am__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ fallen.

18.

The verbs of the Weak Conjugation (the so-called Regular Verbs of Modern English) form their preterit 17 and past participle by adding to the present stem a suffix6 with d or t: Modern English love, loved; sleep, slept.

The verbs of the Weak Conjugation (commonly known as Regular Verbs in Modern English) form their past tense and past participle by adding a suffix with d or t to the present stem: Modern English love, loved; sleep, slept.

The stem of the preterit plural is never different from the stem of the preterit singular; hence these verbs have only three distinctive tense-stems, or principal parts: viz., (1) the present indicative, (2) the preterit indicative, and (3) the past participle.

The base of the past tense plural is always the same as the base of the past tense singular; therefore, these verbs have only three distinct tense bases, or main forms: namely, (1) the present indicative, (2) the past indicative, and (3) the past participle.

Weak verbs fall into three groups, illustrated in the following table:

Weak verbs are divided into three groups, as shown in the table below:

Present. Preterit. Past Participle.
I.    
Fręmman, to perform:    

Ic fręmm-e, I perform or shall perform.

I perform or will perform.

Ic fręm-ede, I performed.

I performed.

Ic hæbbe ge-fręm-ed, I have performed.

I have performed.

II.    
Bodian, to proclaim:    

Ic bodi-e, I proclaim or shall proclaim.

I announce.

Ic bod-ode, I proclaimed.

I shared, I proclaimed.

Ic hæbbe ge-bod-od, I have proclaimed.

I have proclaimed.

III.    
Habban, to have:    

Ic hæbbe, I have or shall have.

I have or will have.

Ic hæf-de, I had.

I had

Ic hæbbe ge-hæf-d, I have had.

I have had.

19.

There remain a few verbs (chiefly the Auxiliary Verbs of Modern English) that do not belong entirely to either of the two conjugations mentioned. The most important of them are, Ic mæg I may, Ic mihte I might; Ic cǫn I can, Ic cūðe I could; Ic mōt I must, Ic mōste I 18 must; Ic sceal I shall, Ic sceolde I should; Ic eom I am, Ic wæs I was; Ic wille I will, Ic wolde I would; Ic dō I do, Ic dyde I did; Ic gā I go, Ic ēode I went.

There are still a few verbs (mainly the Auxiliary Verbs of Modern English) that don't fully fit into either of the two conjugations mentioned. The most important of them are, I may I may, I might I might; I can I can, I could I could; I must I must, I had to I had to; I shall I shall, I should I should; I am I am, I was I was; I will I will, I would I would; I do I do, I did I did; I go I go, I went I went.

All but the last four of these are known as Preterit-Present Verbs. The present tense of each of them is in origin a preterit, in function a present. Cf. Modern English ought (= owed).

All but the last four of these are known as Preterit-Present Verbs. The present tense of each of them originally comes from a past tense but functions as a present. See Modern English ought (= owed).

1. Most grammars add a sixth case, the vocative. But it seems best to consider the vocative as only a function of the nominative form.

1. Most grammars include a sixth case, the vocative. However, it seems more accurate to think of the vocative as just a function of the nominative form.

2. Of course our “apostrophe and s” (= ’s) comes from the Old English genitive ending -es. The e is preserved in Wednesday (= Old English Wōdnes dæg). But at a very early period it was thought that John’s book, for example, was a shortened form of John his book. Thus Addison (Spectator, No. 135) declares ’s a survival of his. How, then, would he explain the s of his? And how would he dispose of Mary’s book?

2. Of course our “apostrophe and s” (= ’s) comes from the Old English genitive ending -es. The e is preserved in Wednesday (= Old English Wōdnes dæg). But very early on, people thought that John’s book, for instance, was a shortened form of John his book. So Addison (Spectator, No. 135) claims that ’s is a leftover from his. How, then, would he explain the s in his? And how would he explain Mary’s book?

3. Early West Saxon had no distinctive form for the future. The present was used both as present proper and as future. Cf. Modern English “I go home tomorrow,” or “I am going home tomorrow” for “I shall go home tomorrow.”

3. Early West Saxon didn’t have a specific way to express the future. The present tense was used for both present situations and future events. Cf. Modern English “I go home tomorrow,” or “I am going home tomorrow” instead of “I shall go home tomorrow.”

4. The prefix ge- (Middle English y-), cognate with Latin co (con) and implying completeness of action, was not always used. It never occurs in the past participles of compound verbs: oþ-feallan, to fall off, past participle oþ-feallen (not oþ-gefeallen). Milton errs in prefixing it to a present participle:

4. The prefix ge- (Middle English y-), related to Latin co (con) and suggesting the completeness of action, wasn't always used. It never appears in the past participles of compound verbs: oþ-feallan, to fall off, past participle oþ-feallen (not oþ-gefeallen). Milton makes a mistake by adding it to a present participle:

“What needs my Shakespeare, for his honour’d bones,

“What does my Shakespeare need for his honored bones,

The labour of an age in piled stones?

The work of a generation in stacked stones?

Or that his hallow’d reliques should be hid

Or that his holy relics should be hidden

Under a star-ypointing pyramid.”

Under a star-pointing pyramid.

Epitaph on William Shakespeare.

Epitaph for William Shakespeare.

And Shakespeare misuses it in “Y-ravished,” a preterit (Pericles III, Prologue l. 35).

And Shakespeare misuses it in “Y-ravished,” a past tense (Pericles III, Prologue l. 35).

It survives in the archaic y-clept (Old English ge-clypod, called). It appears as a in aware (Old English ge-wær), as e in enough (Old English ge-nōh), and as i in handiwork (Old English hand-ge-weorc).

It exists in the old term y-clept (Old English ge-clypod, called). It shows up as a in aware (Old English ge-wær), as e in enough (Old English ge-nōh), and as i in handiwork (Old English hand-ge-weorc).

5. With intransitive verbs denoting change of condition, the Old English auxiliary is usually some form of to be rather than to have. See § 139.

5. With intransitive verbs indicating change of condition, the Old English auxiliary is typically a form of to be instead of to have. See § 139.

6. The theory that loved, for example, is a fused form of love-did has been generally given up. The dental ending was doubtless an Indo-Germanic suffix, which became completely specialized only in the Teutonic languages.

6. The idea that loved, for instance, is a combined form of love-did has mostly been abandoned. The dental ending was definitely an Indo-Germanic suffix that became fully specialized only in the Germanic languages.

----

----

CHAPTER IV.
Word Order.

20.

The order of words in Old English is more like that of Modern German than of Modern English. Yet it is only the Transposed order that the student will feel to be at all un-English; and the Transposed order, even before the period of the Norman Conquest, was fast yielding place to the Normal order.

The way words are arranged in Old English is more similar to Modern German than to Modern English. However, it's only the Transposed order that students might find somewhat un-English; and even before the Norman Conquest, the Transposed order was quickly giving way to the Normal order.

The three divisions of order are (1) Normal, (2) Inverted, and (3) Transposed.

The three types of order are (1) Normal, (2) Inverted, and (3) Transposed.

(1) Normal order = subject + predicate. In Old English, the Normal order is found chiefly in independent clauses. The predicate is followed by its modifiers: Sē hwæl bið micle lǣssa þonne ōðre hwalas, That whale is much smaller than other whales; Ǫnd hē geseah twā scipu, And he saw two ships.

(1) Normal order = subject + predicate. In Old English, the Normal order is primarily used in independent clauses. The predicate is followed by its modifiers: The whale is much smaller than other whales, That whale is much smaller than other whales; And he saw two ships, And he saw two ships.

(2) Inverted order = predicate + subject. This order occurs also in independent clauses, and is employed (a) when some modifier of the predicate precedes the predicate, the subject being thrown behind. The 19 words most frequently causing Inversion in Old English prose are þā then, þonne then, and þǣr there: Ðā fōr hē, Then went he; Ðonne ærnað hȳ ealle tōweard þǣm fēo, Then gallop they all toward the property; ac þǣr bið medo genōh, but there is mead enough.

(2) Inverted order = predicate + subject. This order also appears in independent clauses, and is used (a) when some modifier of the predicate comes before the predicate, causing the subject to come afterward. The 19 words most commonly causing inversion in Old English prose are þā then, þonne then, and þǣr there: Ðā fōr hē, Then he went; Ðonne ærnað hȳ ealle tōweard þǣm fēo, Then they all gallop toward the property; ac þǣr bið medo genōh, but there is enough mead.

Inversion is employed (b) in interrogative sentences: Lufast ðū mē? Lovest thou me? and (c) in imperative sentences: Cume ðīn rīce, Thy kingdom come.

Inversion is used (b) in questions: Do you love me? Lovest thou me? and (c) in commands: Let your kingdom come, Thy kingdom come.

(3) Transposed order = subject ... predicate. That is, the predicate comes last in the sentence, being preceded by its modifiers. This is the order observed in dependent clauses:1 Ðonne cymeð sē man sē þæt swiftoste hors hafað, Then comes the man that has the swiftest horse (literally, that the swiftest horse has); Ne mētte hē ǣr nān gebūn land, siþþan hē frǫm his āgnum hām fōr, Nor did he before find any cultivated land, after he went from his own home (literally, after he from his own home went).

(3) Transposed order = subject ... predicate. This means the predicate comes last in the sentence, preceded by its modifiers. This order is found in dependent clauses: 1 Then comes the man who has the swiftest horse, Then comes the man that has the swiftest horse (literally, that the swiftest horse has); Nor did he ever find any cultivated land before he left his own home, Nor did he before find any cultivated land, after he went from his own home (literally, after he from his own home went).

21.

Two other peculiarities in the order of words require a brief notice.

Two other oddities in the order of words need a quick mention.

(1) Pronominal datives and accusatives usually precede the predicate: Hē hine oferwann, He overcame him (literally, He him overcame); Dryhten him andwyrde, The Lord answered him. But substantival datives and accusatives, as in Modern English, follow the predicate. 20 The following sentence illustrates both orders: Hȳ genāmon Ioseph, ǫnd hine gesealdon cīpemǫnnum, ǫnd hȳ hine gesealdon in Ēgypta lǫnd, They took Joseph, and sold him to merchants, and they sold him into Egypt (literally, They took Joseph, and him sold to merchants, and they him sold into Egyptians’ land).

(1) Pronominal datives and accusatives usually come before the predicate: He overcame him, He overcame him (literally, He him overcame); The Lord answered him, The Lord answered him. But substantive datives and accusatives, like in Modern English, come after the predicate. 20 The following sentence shows both orders: They took Joseph, and sold him to merchants, and they sold him into Egypt, They took Joseph, and sold him to merchants, and they sold him into Egypt (literally, They took Joseph, and him sold to merchants, and they him sold into Egyptians’ land).

Note.—The same order prevails in the case of pronominal nominatives used as predicate nouns: Ic hit eom, It is I (literally, I it am); Ðū hit eart, It is thou (literally, Thou it art).

Note.—The same pattern applies when pronouns are used as predicate nouns: I am it, It is I (literally, I it am); You are it, It is thou (literally, Thou it art).

(2) The attributive genitive, whatever relationship it expresses, usually precedes the noun which it qualifies: Breoton is gārsecges īgland, Britain is an island of the ocean (literally, ocean’s island); Swilce hit is ēac berende on węcga ōrum, Likewise it is also rich in ores of metals (literally, metals’ ores); Cyninga cyning, King of kings (literally, Kings’ king); Gē witon Godes rīces gerȳne, Ye know the mystery of the kingdom of God (literally, Ye know God’s kingdom’s mystery).

(2) The attributive genitive, whatever relationship it shows, usually comes before the noun it describes: Breoton is gārsecges ígland, Britain is an island of the ocean (literally, ocean’s island); Swilce hit is ēac berende on węcga ōrum, Likewise it is also rich in ores of metals (literally, metals’ ores); Cyninga cyning, King of kings (literally, Kings’ king); Gē witon Godes rīces gerȳne, Ye know the mystery of the kingdom of God (literally, Ye know God’s kingdom’s mystery).

A preposition governing the word modified by the genitive, precedes the genitive:2 On ealdra manna sægenum, In old men’s sayings; Æt ðǣra strǣta ęndum, At the ends of the streets (literally, At the streets’ ends); For ealra ðīnra hālgena lufan, For all thy saints’ love. See, also, § 94, (5).

A preposition that controls the word modified by the genitive comes before the genitive:2 In old men’s sayings, On ealdra manna sægenum; At the ends of the streets, Æt ðǣra strǣta ęndum (literally, At the streets’ ends); For all thy saints’ love, For ealra ðīnra hālgena lufan. See, also, § 94, (5).

1. But in the Voyages of Ohthere and Wulfstan, in which the style is apparently more that of oral than of written discourse, the Normal is more frequent than the Transposed order in dependent clauses. In his other writings Alfred manifests a partiality for the Transposed order in dependent clauses, except in the case of substantival clauses introduced by þæt. Such clauses show a marked tendency to revert to their Normal oratio recta order. The norm thus set by the indirect affirmative clause seems to have proved an important factor in the ultimate disappearance of Transposition from dependent clauses. The influence of Norman French helped only to consummate forces that were already busily at work.

1. But in the Voyages of Ohthere and Wulfstan, where the style seems more spoken than written, the normal order appears more often than the transposed order in dependent clauses. In his other writings, Alfred shows a preference for the transposed order in dependent clauses, except for substantive clauses introduced by þæt. Such clauses tend to revert to their normal oratio recta order. The norm established by the indirect affirmative clause seems to have been an important factor in the eventual disappearance of transposition from dependent clauses. The influence of Norman French only helped to finalize forces that were already actively at work.

2. The positions of the genitive are various. It frequently follows its noun: þā bearn þāra Aðeniensa, The children of the Athenians. It may separate an adjective and a noun: Ān lȳtel sǣs earm, A little arm of (the) sea. The genitive may here be construed as an adjective, or part of a compound = A little sea-arm; Mid mǫnegum Godes gifum, With many God-gifts = many divine gifts.

2. The positions of the genitive are various. It often comes after its noun: þā bearn þāra Aðeniensa, The children of the Athenians. It can also separate an adjective from a noun: Ān lȳtel sǣs earm, A little arm of (the) sea. The genitive here can be interpreted as an adjective or part of a compound = A little sea arm; Mid mǫnegum Godes gifum, With many God-gifts = many divine gifts.

21

----

----

CHAPTER V.
Practical Tips.

22.

In the study of Old English, the student must remember that he is dealing not with a foreign or isolated language but with the earlier forms of his own mother tongue. The study will prove profitable and stimulating in proportion as close and constant comparison is made of the old with the new. The guiding principles in such a comparison are reducible chiefly to two. These are (1) the regular operation of phonetic laws, resulting especially in certain Vowel Shiftings, and (2) the alterations in form and syntax that are produced by Analogy.

In studying Old English, students should keep in mind that they're not dealing with a foreign or completely separate language but with earlier versions of their own language. The learning experience will be rewarding and engaging to the extent that they frequently compare the old with the new. The main principles guiding this comparison can be boiled down to two key points: (1) the consistent application of phonetic rules, particularly regarding certain vowel shifts, and (2) the changes in form and syntax brought about by analogy.

(1) “The former of these is of physiological or natural origin, and is perfectly and inflexibly regular throughout the same period of the same language; and even though different languages show different phonetic habits and predilections, there is a strong general resemblance between the changes induced in one language and in another; many of the particular laws are true for many languages.

(1) “The first type comes from physiological or natural origins and is completely and consistently regular throughout the same period of the same language. Even though different languages have different phonetic habits and preferences, there is a strong overall similarity between the changes that happen in one language and another; many of the specific rules apply to many languages.

(2) “The other principle is psychical, or mental, or artificial, introducing various more or less capricious changes that are supposed to be emendations; and its operation is, to some extent, uncertain and fitful.”1

(2) “The other principle is psychological, or mental, or artificial, introducing various changes that are considered to be improvements, and its effect is, to some degree, unpredictable and inconsistent.”1

22

(1) Vowel-Shiftings.

23.

It will prove an aid to the student in acquiring the inflections and vocabulary of Old English to note carefully the following shiftings that have taken place in the gradual growth of the Old English vowel system into that of Modern English.

It will help the student in learning the inflections and vocabulary of Old English to pay close attention to the following changes that have occurred in the gradual development of the Old English vowel system into that of Modern English.

(1) As stated in § 3, the Old English inflectional vowels, which were all short and unaccented, weakened in early Middle English to e. This e in Modern English is frequently dropped:

(1) As stated in § 3, the Old English inflectional vowels, which were all short and unstressed, weakened in early Middle English to e. This e in Modern English is often dropped:

Old English. Middle English. Modern English.
stān-as ston-es stones
sun-u sun-e son
sun-a sun-e sons
ox-an ox-en oxen
swift-ra swift-er swifter
swift-ost swift-est swiftest
lōc-ode lok-ede looked

(2) The Old English long vowels have shifted their phonetic values with such uniform regularity that it is possible in almost every case to infer the Modern English sound; but our spelling is so chaotic that while the student may infer the modern sound, he cannot always infer the modern symbol representing the sound.

(2) The Old English long vowels have changed their phonetic values so consistently that in almost every case you can figure out the Modern English sound; however, our spelling is so chaotic that while students can deduce the modern sound, they can’t always figure out the modern symbol that represents that sound.

Old English. Modern English.
ā

o (as in no)2

o (as in no) __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

{

= no; stān = stone; bān = bone; rād = road; āc = oak; hāl = whole; hām = home; sāwan = to sow; gāst = ghost.

= no; stān = stone; bān = bone; rād = road; āc = oak; hāl = whole; hām = home; sāwan = to sow; gāst = ghost.

 
23 ē

e (as in he)

e (as in he)

{

= he; = we; ðē = thee; = me; = ye; hēl = heel; wērig = weary; gelēfan = to believe; gēs = geese.

= he; = we; ðē = you; = me; = you; hēl = heel; wērig = weary; gelēfan = to believe; gēs = geese.

 
ī (ȳ)

i (y) (as in mine)

i (y) (like mine)

{

mīn = mine; ðīn = thine; wīr = wire; mȳs = mice; rīm = rime (wrongly spelt rhyme); lȳs = lice; = by; scīnan = to shine; stig-rāp = sty-rope (shortened to stirrup, stīgan meaning to mount).

mīn = mine; ðīn = thine; wīr = wire; mȳs = mice; rīm = rime (incorrectly spelt rhyme); lȳs = lice; = by; scīnan = to shine; stig-rāp = sty-rope (shortened to stirrup, stīgan meaning to mount).

 
ō

o (as in do)

o (as in do)

{

= I do; = too, to; gōs = goose; tōð = tooth; mōna = moon; ðōm = doom; mōd = mood; wōgian = to woo; slōh = I slew.

= I do; = too, to; gōs = goose; tōð = tooth; mōna = moon; ðōm = doom; mōd = mood; wōgian = to woo; slōh = I slew.

 
ū

ou (ow) (as in thou)

ou (like thou)

{

ðū = thou; fūl = foul; hūs = house; = now; = how; tūn = town; ūre = our; ūt = out; hlūd = loud; ðūsend = thousand.

thou = thou; foul = foul; house = house; now = now; how = how; town = town; our = our; out = out; loud = loud; thousand = thousand.

 
ǣ, ēa, ēo

ea (as in sea)

ea (like in sea)

{

ǣ: = sea; mǣl = meal; dǣlan = to deal; clǣne = clean; grǣdig = greedy.

ǣ: = sea; mǣl = meal; dǣlan = to deal; clǣne = clean; grǣdig = greedy.

ēa: ēare = ear; ēast = east; drēam = dream; gēar = year; bēatan = to beat.

ēa: ēare = ear; ēast = east; drēam = dream; gēar = year; bēatan = to beat.

ēo: ðrēo = three; drēorig = dreary; sēo = she, hrēod = reed; dēop = deep.

ēo: ðrēo = three; drēorig = dreary; sēo = she; hrēod = reed; dēop = deep.

(2) Analogy.

24.

But more important than vowel shifting is the great law of Analogy, for Analogy shapes not only words but constructions. It belongs, therefore, to 24 Etymology and to Syntax, since it influences both form and function. By this law, minorities tend to pass over to the side of the majorities. “The greater mass of cases exerts an assimilative influence upon the smaller.”3 The effect of Analogy is to simplify and to regularize. “The main factor in getting rid of irregularities is group-influence, or Analogy—the influence exercised by the members of an association-group on one another.... Irregularity consists in partial isolation from an association-group through some formal difference.”4

But more important than vowel shifting is the key principle of Analogy, because Analogy shapes not just words but also constructions. It’s part of Etymology and Syntax, as it affects both form and function. According to this principle, smaller groups tend to align with larger ones. “The greater mass of cases has an assimilative effect on the smaller.”3 The impact of Analogy is to simplify and standardize. “The main factor in eliminating irregularities is group influence, or Analogy—the effect that members of a group have on each other.... Irregularity comes from being partially isolated from a group due to some formal difference.”4

Under the influence of Analogy, entire declensions and conjugations have been swept away, leaving in Modern English not a trace of their former existence. There are in Old English, for example, five plural endings for nouns, -as, -a, -e, -u, and -an. No one could well have predicted5 that -as (Middle English -es) would soon take the lead, and become the norm to which the other endings would eventually conform, for there were more an-plurals than as-plurals; but the as-plurals were doubtless more often employed in everyday speech. Oxen (Old English oxan) is the sole pure survival of the hundreds of Old English an-plurals. 25 No group of feminine nouns in Old English had -es as the genitive singular ending; but by the close of the Middle English period all feminines formed their genitive singular in -es (or -s, Modern English ’s) after the analogy of the Old English masculine and neuter nouns with es-genitives. The weak preterits in -ode have all been leveled under the ed-forms, and of the three hundred strong verbs in Old English more than two hundred have become weak.

Under the influence of analogy, entire declensions and conjugations have been eliminated, leaving no trace of their former existence in Modern English. In Old English, for example, there were five plural endings for nouns: -as, -a, -e, -u, and -an. No one could have predicted that -as (Middle English -es) would soon take the lead and become the norm to which the other endings would eventually adapt, since there were more an- plurals than as- plurals; however, as- plurals were likely more commonly used in everyday speech. Oxen (Old English oxan) is the only true remnant of the hundreds of Old English an- plurals. 25 No group of feminine nouns in Old English had -es as the genitive singular ending; but by the end of the Middle English period, all feminine nouns formed their genitive singular in -es (or -s, Modern English ’s) following the pattern of Old English masculine and neuter nouns with es- genitives. The weak preterits in -ode have all been standardized to the ed- forms, and of the three hundred strong verbs in Old English, more than two hundred have become weak.

These are not cases of derivation (as are the shifted vowels): Modern English -s in sons, for example, could not possibly be derived from Old English -a in suna, or Middle English -e in sune (§ 23, (1)). They are cases of replacement by Analogy.

These aren’t examples of derivation (like the changed vowels): Modern English -s in sons, for instance, couldn't have come from Old English -a in suna, or Middle English -e in sune (§ 23, (1)). They are examples of replacement by analogy.

A few minor examples will quicken the student’s appreciation of the nature of the influence exercised by Analogy:

A few small examples will help the student better understand the kind of influence that Analogy has:

(a) The intrusive l in could (Chaucer always wrote coud or coude) is due to association with would and should, in each of which l belongs by etymological right.

(a) The extra l in could (Chaucer always wrote coud or coude) comes from its connection with would and should, where l is etymologically correct.

(b) He need not (for He needs not) is due to the assimilative influence of the auxiliaries may, can, etc., which have never added -s for their third person singular (§ 137).

(b) He does not need (for He needs not) is due to the assimilative influence of the auxiliaries may, can, etc., which have never added -s for their third person singular (§ 137).

(c) I am friends with him, in which friends is a crystalized form for on good terms, may be traced to the influence of such expressions as He and I are friends, They are friends, etc.

(c) I am friends with him, where friends is a consolidated way of saying on good terms, can be linked to the influence of expressions like He and I are friends, They are friends, and so on.

(d) Such errors as are seen in runned, seed, gooses, badder, hisself, says I (usually coupled with says he) 26 are all analogical formations. Though not sanctioned by good usage, it is hardly right to call these forms the products of “false analogy.” The grammar involved is false, because unsupported by literary usages and traditions; but the analogy on which these forms are built is no more false than the law of gravitation is false when it makes a dress sit unconventionally.

(d) Errors like runned, seed, gooses, badder, hisself, says I (usually paired with says he) 26 are all based on analogy. While they aren't considered correct by standard usage, it's not entirely fair to label these forms as the result of “false analogy.” The grammar may be wrong because it doesn't align with accepted literary usage and traditions, but the analogy these forms rely on isn't any less valid than the law of gravitation is when it causes a dress to hang in an unusual way.

1. Skeat, Principles of English Etymology, Second Series, § 342. But Jespersen, with Collitz and others, stoutly contests “the theory of sound laws and analogy sufficing between them to explain everything in linguistic development.”

1. Skeat, Principles of English Etymology, Second Series, § 342. But Jespersen, along with Collitz and others, strongly argues against “the theory that sound laws and analogy alone can explain everything in linguistic development.”

2. But Old English ā preceded by w sometimes gives Modern English o as in two: twā = two; hwā = who; hwām = whom.

2. But Old English ā that comes before w sometimes becomes Modern English o, like in two: twā = two; hwā = who; hwām = whom.

3. Whitney, Life and Growth of Language, Chap. IV.

3. Whitney, Life and Growth of Language, Chap. IV.

4. Sweet, A New English Grammar, Part I., § 535.

4. Sweet, A New English Grammar, Part I., § 535.

5. As Skeat says (§ 22, (2)), Analogy is “fitful.” It enables us to explain many linguistic phenomena, but not to anticipate them. The multiplication of books tends to check its influence by perpetuating the forms already in use. Thus Chaucer employed nine en-plurals, and his influence served for a time to check the further encroachment of the es-plurals. As soon as there is an acknowledged standard in any language, the operation of Analogy is fettered.

5. As Skeat says (§ 22, (2)), Analogy is “fitful.” It helps us explain many language phenomena, but it doesn’t allow us to predict them. The increase in books tends to limit its influence by keeping the existing forms in use. For example, Chaucer used nine en-plurals, and his impact helped to slow down the rise of the es-plurals for a time. Once there’s an accepted standard in any language, the function of Analogy is restricted.

27

PART II.
ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX.

The Strong or Vowel Declensions of Nouns.
The a-Declension.

----

----

CHAPTER VI.

(a) Masculine a-Stems.

[O.E., M.E., and Mn.E. will henceforth be used for Old English, Middle English, and Modern English. Other abbreviations employed are self-explaining.]

[O.E., M.E., and Mn.E. will henceforth be used for Old English, Middle English, and Modern English. Other abbreviations used are self-explanatory.]

25.

The a-Declension, corresponding to the Second or o-Declension of Latin and Greek, contains only (a) masculine and (b) neuter nouns. To this declension belong most of the O.E. masculine and neuter nouns of the Strong Declension. At a very early period, many of the nouns belonging properly to the i- and u-Declensions began to pass over to the a-Declension. This declension may therefore be considered the normal declension for all masculine and neuter nouns belonging to the Strong Declension.

The a-Declension, which corresponds to the Second or o-Declension in Latin and Greek, includes only (a) masculine and (b) neuter nouns. Most of the Old English masculine and neuter nouns from the Strong Declension fall under this category. Early on, many nouns that really belonged to the i- and u- Declensions started to shift over to the a- Declension. Therefore, this declension can be seen as the normal declension for all masculine and neuter nouns within the Strong Declension.

26.

Paradigms of sē mūð, mouth; sē fiscere, fisherman; sē hwæl, whale; sē mearh, horse; sē finger, finger:

Paradigms of sē mūð, mouth; sē fiscere, fisherman; sē hwæl, whale; sē mearh, horse; sē finger, finger:

28
Sing. N.A. mūð fiscer-e hwæl mearh finger
G. mūð-es fiscer-es hwæl-es mēar-es fingr-es
D.I. mūð-e fiscer-e hwæl-e mēar-e fingr-e
 
Plur N.A. mūð-as fiscer-as hwal-as mēar-as fingr-as
G. mūð-a fiscer-a hwal-a mēar-a fingr-a
D.I. mūð-um fiscer-um hwal-um mēar-um fingr-um

Note.—For meanings of the cases, see § 12. The dative and instrumental are alike in all nouns.

Note.—For meanings of the cases, see § 12. The dative and instrumental cases are the same for all nouns.

27.

The student will observe (1) that nouns whose nominative ends in -e (fiscere) drop this letter before adding the case endings; (2) that æ before a consonant (hwæl) changes to a in the plural;1 (3) that h, preceded by r (mearh) or l (seolh, seal), is dropped before an inflectional vowel, the stem diphthong being then lengthened by way of compensation; (4) that dissyllables (finger) having the first syllable long, usually syncopate the vowel of the second syllable before adding the case endings.2

The student will notice (1) that nouns whose nominative ends in -e (fiscere) drop this letter before adding the case endings; (2) that æ before a consonant (hwæl) changes to a in the plural; 1 (3) that h, preceded by r (mearh) or l (seolh, seal), is dropped before an inflectional vowel, and the stem diphthong is then lengthened to compensate; (4) that dissyllables (finger) with a long first syllable usually syncopate the vowel of the second syllable before adding the case endings. 2

28.

Paradigm of the Definite Article3 , sēo, ðæt = the:

Paradigm of the Definite Article __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ he, she, that = the:

29
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. sē (se) sēo ðæt
G. ðæs ðǣre ðæs
D. ðǣm (ðām) ðǣre ðǣm (ðām)
A. ðone ðā ðæt
I. ðȳ, ðon —— ðȳ, ðon
All Genders.
Plur. N.A. ðā
G. ðāra
D. ðǣm (ðām)
29.

Vocabulary.4

Vocabulary.4

sē bōcere, scribe [bōc].

bookkeeper, writer [book].

sē cyning, king.

the king, king.

sē dæg, day.

this day, day.

sē ęnde, end.

sē ęnde, end.

sē ęngel, angel [angelus].

the angel, angel [angelus].

sē frēodōm, freedom.

freedom, freedom.

sē fugol (G. sometimes fugles), bird [fowl].

sē fugol (G. sometimes fugles), bird.

sē gār, spear [gore, gar-fish].

sea spear, spear [gore, garfish].

sē heofon, heaven.

heaven, heaven.

sē hierde, herdsman [shep-herd].

this herder, herdsman [shep-herd].

ǫnd (and), and.

and, and.

sē sęcg, man, warrior.

he says, man, warrior.

sē seolh, seal.

sē seolh, seal.

sē stān, stone.

this stone, stone.

sē wealh, foreigner, Welshman [wal-nut].

sē wealh, foreigner, Welsh person [wal-nut].

sē weall, wall.

the wall, wall.

sē wīsdōm, wisdom.

that wisdom, wisdom.

sē wulf, wolf.

wolf, wolf.

30.

Exercises.

Exercises.

I. 1. Ðāra wulfa mūðas. 2. Ðæs fisceres fingras. 3. Ðāra Wēala cyninge. 4. Ðǣm ęnglum ǫnd ðǣm hierdum. 5. Ðāra 30 daga ęnde. 6. Ðǣm bōcerum ǫnd ðǣm sęcgum ðæs cyninges. 7. Ðǣm sēole ǫnd ðǣm fuglum. 8. Ðā stānas ǫnd ðā gāras. 9. Hwala ǫnd mēara. 10. Ðāra ęngla wīsdōm. 11. Ðæs cyninges bōceres frēodōm. 12. Ðāra hierda fuglum. 13. Ðȳ stāne. 14. Ðǣm wealle.

I. 1. The wolf's mouths. 2. The fisherman's fingers. 3. The Welsh king. 4. The angels and the herdsmen. 5. The end of the days. 6. The king's bookkeepers and the warriors. 7. The seals and the birds. 8. The stones and the gales. 9. The whales and the horses. 10. The wisdom of the angels. 11. The freedom of the king's bookkeeper. 12. The herdsmen's birds. 13. The stone. 14. The wall.

II. 1. For the horses and the seals. 2. For the Welshmen’s freedom. 3. Of the king’s birds. 4. By the wisdom of men and angels. 5. With the spear and the stone. 6. The herdsman’s seal and the warriors’ spears. 7. To the king of heaven. 8. By means of the scribe’s wisdom. 9. The whale’s mouth and the foreigner’s spear. 10. For the bird belonging to (= of) the king’s scribe. 11. Of that finger.

II. 1. For the horses and the seals. 2. For the freedom of the Welshmen. 3. Of the king's birds. 4. By the wisdom of men and angels. 5. With the spear and the stone. 6. The herdsman's seal and the warriors' spears. 7. To the king of heaven. 8. By means of the scribe's wisdom. 9. The whale's mouth and the foreigner's spear. 10. For the bird of the king's scribe. 11. Of that finger.

1. Adjectives usually retain æ in closed syllables, changing it to a in open syllables: hwæt (active), glæd (glad), wær (wary) have G. hwates, glades, wares; D. hwatum, gladum, warum; but A. hwætne, glædne, wærne. Nouns, however, change to a only in open syllables followed by a guttural vowel, a or u. The æ in the open syllables of the singular is doubtless due to the analogy of the N.A. singular, both being closed syllables.

1. Adjectives generally keep æ in closed syllables, changing it to a in open syllables: hwæt (active), glæd (glad), wær (wary) have G. hwates, glades, wares; D. hwatum, gladum, warum; but A. hwætne, glædne, wærne. Nouns, however, change to a only in open syllables followed by a guttural vowel, a or u. The æ in the open syllables of the singular is likely influenced by the analogy of the N.A. singular, both being closed syllables.

2. Cf. Mn.E. drizz’ling, rememb’ring, abysmal (abysm = abizum), sick’ning, in which the principle of syncopation is precisely the same.

2. See Mn.E. drizzling, remembering, abysmal (abysm = abizum), sickening, where the principle of syncopation is exactly the same.

3. This may mean four things: (1) The, (2) That (demonstrative), (3) He, she, it, (4) Who, which, that (relative pronoun). Mn.E. demonstrative that is, of course, the survival of O.E. neuter ðæt in its demonstrative sense. Professor Victor Henry (Comparative Grammar of English and German, § 160, 3) sees a survival of dative plural demonstrative ðǣm in such an expression as in them days. It seems more probable, however, that them so used has followed the lead of this and these, that and those, in their double function of pronoun and adjective. There was doubtless some such evolution as, I saw them. Them what? Them boys.

3. This could mean four things: (1) The, (2) That (demonstrative), (3) He, she, it, (4) Who, which, that (relative pronoun). The modern English demonstrative that is, of course, the continuation of the Old English neuter ðæt in its demonstrative sense. Professor Victor Henry (Comparative Grammar of English and German, § 160, 3) notes a remnant of the dative plural demonstrative ðǣm in expressions like in them days. However, it seems more likely that them used this way has followed the pattern of this and these, that and those, performing a dual role as both pronoun and adjective. There was probably some evolution like, I saw them. Them what? Them boys.

An unquestioned survival of the dative singular feminine of the article is seen in the -ter of Atterbury (= æt ðǣre byrig, at the town); and ðǣm survives in the -ten of Attenborough, the word borough having become an uninflected neuter. Skeat, Principles, First Series, § 185.

An unquestioned survival of the dative singular feminine of the article is seen in the -ter of Atterbury (= at the town); and ðǣm survives in the -ten of Attenborough, with the word borough having become uninflected and neuter. Skeat, Principles, First Series, § 185.

4. The brackets contain etymological hints that may help the student to discern relationships otherwise overlooked. The genitive is given only when not perfectly regular.

4. The brackets include hints about word origins that can help the student notice connections that might otherwise be missed. The genitive is provided only when it isn't completely standard.

----

----

CHAPTER VII.

(b) Neuter a-Stems.

31.

The neuter nouns of the a-Declension differ from the masculines only in the N.A. plural.

The neuter nouns of the a-Declension are different from the masculine nouns only in the nominative and accusative plural.

32.

Paradigms of ðæt hof, court, dwelling; ðaet bearn, child; ðæt bān, bone; ðæt rīce, kingdom; ðæt spere, spear; ðæt werod, band of men; ðæt tungol, star:

Paradigms of that hof, court, dwelling; the child, child; that bone, bone; the kingdom, kingdom; that spear, spear; the band of men, band of men; that star, star:

Sing. N.A. hof bearn bān rīc-e sper-e werod tungol
G. hof-es bearn-es bān-es rīc-es sper-es werod-es tungl-es
D.I. hof-e bearn-e bān-e rīc-e sper-e werod-e tungl-e
 
Plur N.A. hof-u bearn bān rīc-u sper-u werod tungl-u
G. hof-a bearn-a bān-a rīc-a sper-a werod-a tungl-a
D.I. hof-um bearn-um bān-um rīc-um sper-um werod-um tungl-um
33.

The paradigms show (1) that monosyllables with short stems (hof) take -u in the N.A. plural; (2) that 31 monosyllables with long stems (bearn, bān) do not distinguish the N.A. plural from the N.A. singular;1 (3) that dissyllables in -e, whether the stem be long or short (rīce, spere), have -u in the N.A. plural; (4) that dissyllables ending in a consonant and having the first syllable short2 (werod) do not usually distinguish the N.A. plural from the N.A. singular; (5) that dissyllables ending in a consonant and having the first syllable long (tungol) more frequently take -u in the N.A. plural.

The paradigms show (1) that monosyllables with short stems (hof) take -u in the N.A. plural; (2) that monosyllables with long stems (bearn, bān) do not distinguish the N.A. plural from the N.A. singular;1 (3) that dissyllables ending in -e, whether the stem is long or short (rīce, spere), have -u in the N.A. plural; (4) that dissyllables ending in a consonant and having the first syllable short2 (werod) usually do not distinguish the N.A. plural from the N.A. singular; (5) that dissyllables ending in a consonant and having the first syllable long (tungol) more often take -u in the N.A. plural.

Note.—Syncopation occurs as in the masculine a-stems. See § 27, (4).

Note.—Syncopation happens like in the masculine a-stems. See § 27, (4).

34.

Present and Preterit Indicative of habban, to have:

Present and Preterite Indicative of habban, to have:

Present.
Sing. 1. Ic hæbbe, I have, or shall have.3
2. ðū hæfst (hafast), thou hast, or wilt have.
3. , hēo, hit hæfð (hafað), he, she, it has, or will have.
Plur. 1. wē habbað, we have, or shall have.
2. gē habbað, ye have, or will have.
3. hīe habbað, they have, or will have.
Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic hæfde I had.
2. ðū hæfdest, thou hadst.
3. , hēo, hit hæfde, he, she, it had.
Plur. 1. wē hæfdon, we had.
2. gē hæfdon, ye had.
3. hīe hæfdon, they had.
32

Note.—The negative ne, not, which always precedes its verb, contracts with all the forms of habban. The negative loses its e, habban its h. Ne + habban = nabban; Ic ne hæbbe = Ic næbbe; Ic ne hæfde = Ic næfde, etc. The negative forms may be got, therefore, by simply substituting in each case n for h.

Note.—The negative ne, not, which always comes before its verb, combines with all forms of habban. The negative drops its e, and habban drops its h. Ne + habban = nabban; Ic ne hæbbe = Ic næbbe; Ic ne hæfde = Ic næfde, etc. To form the negative, you can simply replace h with n in each case.

35.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

ðæt dæl, dale.

that deal, dale.

ðæt dēor, animal [deer4].

that deer, animal [deer__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__].

ðæt dor, door.

that door, door.

ðæt fæt, vessel [vat].

that fat, container [vat].

ðæt fȳr, fire.

that fire, fire.

ðæt gēar, year.

that year, year.

ðæt geoc, yoke.

that yoke.

ðæt geset, habitation [settlement].

that is, habitation [settlement].

ðæt hēafod, head.

that head, head.

ðæt hūs, house.

that house, house.

ðæt līc, body [lich-gate].

that body, body [lich-gate].

ðæt lim, limb.

that limb, limb.

on (with dat.) in.

on (with dat.) in.

ðæt spor, track.

that sport, track.

ðæt wǣpen, weapon.

that weapon, weapon.

ðæt wīf, wife, woman.

that wife, wife, woman.

ðæt wīte, punishment.

that white, punishment.

ðæt word, word.

that word, word.

36.

Exercises.

Exercises.

I. 1. Hē hafað ðæs cyninges bearn. 2. Ðā Wēalas habbað ðā speru. 3. Ðā wīf habbað ðāra sęcga wǣpnu. 4. Ðū hæfst ðone fugol ǫnd ðæt hūs ðæs hierdes. 5. Hæfð5 hēo ðā fatu6? 6. Hæfde hē ðæs wīfes līc on ðǣm hofe? 7. Hē næfde ðæs wīfes līc; hē hæfde ðæs dēores hēafod. 8. Hæfð sē cyning gesetu on ðǣm dæle? 9. Sē bōcere hæfð ðā sēolas on ðǣm hūse. 10. Gē habbað frēodōm.

I. 1. He has the king's child. 2. The Welsh have the spears. 3. The women have the men's weapons. 4. You have the bird and the house of the lord. 5. Does she have the jars? 6. Did he have the woman's body in the hall? 7. He didn't have the woman's body; he had the deer's head. 8. Does the king have a seat in that part? 9. The clerk has the seals in the house. 10. You have freedom.

II. 1. They have yokes and spears. 2. We have not the vessels in the house. 3. He had fire in the vessel. 4. Did the woman have (= Had the woman) the children? 5. The animal has the body of the woman’s child. 6. I shall have 33 the heads of the wolves. 7. He and she have the king’s houses. 8. Have not (= Nabbað) the children the warrior’s weapons?

II. 1. They have yokes and spears. 2. We don’t have the containers in the house. 3. He had fire in the container. 4. Did the woman have the children? 5. The animal has the body of the woman’s child. 6. I will have 33 the heads of the wolves. 7. He and she have the king’s houses. 8. Don’t the children have the warrior’s weapons?

1. Note the many nouns in Mn.E. that are unchanged in the plural. These are either survivals of O.E. long stems, swine, sheep, deer, folk, or analogical forms, fish, trout, mackerel, salmon, etc.

1. Take note of the many nouns in Modern English that remain the same in the plural. These are either remnants of Old English long stems, swine, sheep, deer, folk, or derived forms, fish, trout, mackerel, salmon, etc.

2. Dissyllables whose first syllable is a prefix are, of course, excluded. They follow the declension of their last member: gebed, prayer, gebedu, prayers; gefeoht, battle, gefeoht, battles.

2. Dissyllables where the first syllable is a prefix are, of course, excluded. They follow the declension of their last part: gebed, prayer, gebedu, prayers; gefeoht, battle, gefeoht, battles.

3. See § 17, Note 1. Note that (as in hwæl, § 27, (2)) æ changes to a when the following syllable contains a: hæbbe, but hafast.

3. See § 17, Note 1. Note that (as in hwæl, § 27, (2)) æ changes to a when the next syllable has a: hæbbe, but hafast.

4. The old meaning survives in Shakespeare’s “Rats and mice and such small deer,” King Lear, III, iv, 144.

4. The old meaning lives on in Shakespeare’s “Rats and mice and such small things,” King Lear, III, iv, 144.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

----

----

CHAPTER VIII.
The ō-Declension.

37.

The ō-Declension, corresponding to the First or ā-Declension of Latin and Greek, contains only feminine nouns. Many feminine i-stems and u-stems soon passed over to this Declension. The ō-Declension may, therefore, be considered the normal declension for all strong feminine nouns.

The ō-Declension, which matches the First or ā-Declension of Latin and Greek, includes only feminine nouns. Many feminine i-stems and u-stems quickly shifted to this Declension. Thus, the ō-Declension can be seen as the normal declension for all strong feminine nouns.

38.

Paradigms of sēo giefu, gift; sēo wund, wound; sēo rōd, cross; sēo leornung, learning; sēo sāwol, soul:

Paradigms of sēo giefu, gift; sēo wund, wound; sēo rōd, cross; sēo leornung, learning; sēo sāwol, soul:

Sing. N. gief-u wund rōd leornung sāwol
G. gief-e wund-e rōd-e leornung-a (e) sāwl-e
D.I. gief-e wund-e rōd-e leornung-a (e) sāwl-e
A. gief-e wund-e rōd-e leornung-a (e) sāwl-e
 
Plur. N.A. gief-a wund-a rōd-a leornung-a sāwl-a
G. gief-a wund-a rōd-a leornung-a sāwl-a
D.I. gief-um wund-um rōd-um leornung-um sāwl-um
39.

Note (1) that monosyllables with short stems (giefu) take u in the nominative singular; (2) that monosyllables with long stems (wund, rōd) present the unchanged stem in the nominative singular; (3) that dissyllables are declined as monosyllables, except that abstract nouns in -ung prefer a to e in the singular.

Note (1) that monosyllables with short stems (giefu) take u in the nominative singular; (2) that monosyllables with long stems (wund, rōd) show the unchanged stem in the nominative singular; (3) that dissyllables are declined like monosyllables, except that abstract nouns in -ung prefer a to e in the singular.

Note.—Syncopation occurs as in masculine and neuter a-stems. See § 27, (4).

Note.—Syncopation happens in masculine and neuter a-stems. See § 27, (4).

34
40.

Present and Preterit Indicative of bēon (wesan) to be:

Present and Past Indicative of bēon (wesan) to be:

Present (first form). Now (second form). Preterite.
Sing. 1. Ic eom 1.  Ic bēom 1.  Ic wæs
2. ðū eart 2.  ðū bist 2.  ðū wǣre
3. hē is 3.  hē bið 3.  hē wæs
 
Plur. 1. } 1.  wē } 1.  wē }
2. sind(on), sint 2.  gē bēoð 2.  gē wǣron
3. hīe 3.  hīe 3.  hīe

Note 1.—The forms bēom, bist, etc. are used chiefly as future tenses in O.E. They survive to-day only in dialects and in poetry. Farmer Dobson, for example, in Tennyson’s Promise of May, uses be for all persons of the present indicative, both singular and plural; and there be is frequent in Shakespeare for there are. The Northern dialect employed aron as well as sindon and sind for the present plural; hence Mn.E. are.

Note 1.—The forms bēom, bist, etc. are mainly used as future tenses in Old English. They only exist today in dialects and in poetry. For instance, Farmer Dobson in Tennyson’s Promise of May uses be for all forms of the present indicative, both singular and plural; and there be is often used in Shakespeare instead of there are. The Northern dialect also used aron in addition to sindon and sind for the present plural, which is how we got Mn.E. are.

Note 2.—Fusion with ne gives neom, neart, nis for the present; næs, nǣre, nǣron for the preterit.

Note 2.—Fusion with ne gives neom, neart, nis for the present; næs, nǣre, nǣron for the past.

Note 3.—The verb to be is followed by the nominative case, as in Mn.E.; but when the predicate noun is plural, and the subject a neuter pronoun in the singular, the verb agrees in number with the predicate noun. The neuter singular ðæt is frequently employed in this construction: Ðaet wǣron eall Finnas, They were all Fins; Ðæt sind ęnglas, They are angels; Ðǣt wǣron ęngla gāstas, They were angels’ spirits.

Note 3.—The verb to be is followed by the nominative case, as in Modern English; however, when the predicate noun is plural and the subject is a neuter pronoun in the singular, the verb agrees in number with the predicate noun. The neuter singular that is often used in this construction: That were all Fins; They were all Fins; That are angels, They are angels; That were angels’ spirits, They were angels’ spirits.

Notice, too, that O.E. writers do not say It is I, It is thou, but I it am, Thou it art: Ic hit eom, ðū hit eart. See § 21, (1), Note 1.

Notice, too, that Old English writers do not say It is I, It is you, but I it am, You it are: Ic hit eom, ðū hit eart. See § 21, (1), Note 1.

41.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

sēo brycg, bridge.

the bridge, bridge.

sēo costnung, temptation.

the temptation, temptation.

sēo cwalu, death [quail, quell].

the quail, death [quail, quell].

sēo fōr, journey [faran].

the journey, journey [to go].

sēo frōfor, consolation, comfort.

the comfort, consolation, comfort.

sēo geoguð, youth.

the youth, youth.

sēo glōf, glove.

the glove, glove.

sēo hālignes1, holiness.

the holiness __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, holiness.

sēo heall, hall.

the hall, hall.

hēr, here.

here, here.

35

hwā, who?

who?

hwǣr, where?

where?

sēo lufu, love.

the love, love.

sēo mearc, boundary [mark, marches2].

the boundary, boundary [mark, marches__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__].

sēo mēd, meed, reward.

the meed, meed, reward.

sēo mildheortnes, mild-heartedness, mercy.

compassion, kindness, mercy.

sēo stōw, place [stow away].

the place, place [stow away].

ðǣr, there.

there

sēo ðearf, need.

need

sēo wylf, she wolf.

she wolf.

42.

Exercises.

Exercises.

I. 1. Hwǣr is ðǣre brycge ęnde? 2. Hēr sind ðāra rīca mearca. 3. Hwā hæfð þā glōfa? 4. Ðǣr bið ðǣm cyninge frōfre ðearf. 5. Sēo wund is on ðǣre wylfe hēafde. 6. Wē habbað costnunga. 7. Hīe nǣron on ðǣre healle. 8. Ic hit neom. 9. Ðæt wǣron Wēalas. 10. Ðæt sind ðæs wīfes bearn.

I. 1. Where is the end of the bridge? 2. Here are the rich marks. 3. Who has the gloves? 4. There is a need for comfort for the king. 5. The wound is on the wolf's head. 6. We have temptations. 7. They were not in the hall. 8. I do not accept it. 9. Those were the Welsh. 10. Those are the woman's children.

II. 1. We shall have the women’s gloves. 2. Where is the place? 3. He will be in the hall. 4. Those (Ðæt) were not the boundaries of the kingdom. 5. It was not I. 6. Ye are not the king’s scribes. 7. The shepherd’s words are full (full + gen.) of wisdom and comfort. 8. Where are the bodies of the children? 9. The gifts are not here. 10. Who has the seals and the birds?

II. 1. We will take the women's gloves. 2. Where is the location? 3. He will be in the hallway. 4. Those were not the borders of the kingdom. 5. It wasn't me. 6. You are not the king's scribes. 7. The shepherd's words are full of wisdom and comfort. 8. Where are the children’s bodies? 9. The gifts aren’t here. 10. Who has the seals and the birds?

1. All words ending in -nes double the -s before adding the case endings.

1. All words that end with -nes double the -s before adding the case endings.

2. As in warden of the marches.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Like a "guardian of the borders."

----

----

CHAPTER IX.
The i-Declension and the u-Declension.

The i-Declension. (See § 58.)

43.

The i-Declension, corresponding to the group of i-stems in the classical Third Declension, contains chiefly (a) masculine and (b) feminine nouns. The N.A. plural of these nouns ended originally in -e (from older i).

The i-Declension, which relates to the group of i-stems in the traditional Third Declension, mainly includes (a) masculine and (b) feminine nouns. The N.A. plural of these nouns originally ended in -e (derived from an older i).

36

(a) Masculine i-Stems.

44.

These stems have almost completely gone over to the a-Declension, so that -as is more common than -e as the N.A. plural ending, whether the stem is long or short. The short stems all have -e in the N.A. singular.

These stems have mostly transitioned to the a-Declension, making -as more common than -e as the N.A. plural ending, regardless of whether the stem is long or short. The short stems all use -e in the N.A. singular.

45.

Paradigms of sē wyrm, worm; sē wine, friend.

Paradigms of sē wyrm, worm; sē wine, friend.

Sing. N.A. wyrm win-e
G. wyrm-es win-es
D.I. wyrm-e win-e
 
Plur N.A. wyrm-as win-as (e)
G. wyrm-a win-a
D.I. wyrm-um win-um

Names of Peoples.

46.

The only i-stems that regularly retain -e of the N.A. plural are certain names of tribes or peoples used only in the plural.

The only i-stems that usually keep -e in the N.A. plural are specific names of tribes or peoples that are used only in the plural.

47.

Paradigms of ðā Ęngle, Angles; ðā Norðymbre, Northumbrians; ðā lēode, people:

Paradigms of the Angle, Angles; the Northumbrians, Northumbrians; the people, people:

Plur. N.A. Ęngle Norðymbre lēode
G. Ęngla Norðymbra lēoda
D.I. Ęnglum Norðymbrum lēodum

(b) Feminine i-Stems.

48.

The short stems (fręm-u) conform entirely to the declension of short ō-stems; long stems (cwēn, wyrt) differ from long ō-stems in having no ending for the A. singular. They show, also, a preference for -e rather than -a in the N.A. plural.

The short stems (fręm-u) completely follow the declension of short ō-stems; long stems (cwēn, wyrt) differ from long ō-stems because they don’t have an ending for the A. singular. They also tend to prefer -e instead of -a in the N.A. plural.

37
49.

Paradigms of sēo fręm-u, benefit; sēo cwēn, woman, queen [quean]; sēo wyrt, root [wort]:

Models of sēo fręm-u, benefit; sēo cwēn, woman, queen [quean]; sēo wyrt, root [wort]:

Sing. N. fręm-u cwēn wyrt
G. fręm-e cwēn-e wyrt-e
D.I. fręm-e cwēn-e wyrt-e
A. fręm-e cwēn wyrt
 
Plur N.A. fręm-a cwēn-e (a) wyrt-e (a)
G. fręm-a cwēn-a wyrt-a
D.I. fręm-um cwēn-um wyrt-um

The u-Declension.

50.

The u-Declension, corresponding to the group of u-stems in the classical Third Declension, contains no neuters, and but few (a) masculines and (b) feminines. The short-stemmed nouns of both genders (sun-u, dur-u) retain the final u of the N.A. singular, while the long stems (feld, hǫnd) drop it. The influence of the masculine a-stems is most clearly seen in the long-stemmed masculines of the u-Declension (feld, feld-es, etc.).

The u-Declension, which corresponds to the group of u-stems in the classical Third Declension, has no neuter nouns and only a few (a) masculine and (b) feminine nouns. The short-stemmed nouns of both genders (sun-u, dur-u) keep the final u in the N.A. singular, while the long-stemmed nouns (feld, hǫnd) drop it. The influence of the masculine a-stems is most clearly seen in the long-stemmed masculine nouns of the u-Declension (feld, feld-es, etc.).

Note.—Note the general aversion of all O.E. long stems to final -u: cf. N.A. plural hof-u, but bearn, bān; N. singular gief-u, but wund, rōd; N. singular fręm-u, but cwēn, wyrt; N.A. singular sun-u, dur-u, but feld, hǫnd.

Note.—Note the general dislike of all Old English long stems for the final -u: cf. North American plural hof-u, but bearn, bān; North singular gief-u, but wund, rōd; North singular fręm-u, but cwēn, wyrt; North American singular sun-u, dur-u, but feld, hǫnd.

(a) Masculine u-Stems.

51.

Paradigms of sē sun-u, son; sē feld, field:

Paradigms of sē sun-u, son; sē feld, field:

Sing. N.A. sun-u feld
G. sun-a feld-a (es)
D.I. sun-a feld-a (e)
 
Plur N.A. sun-a feld-a (as)
G. sun-a feld-a
D.I. sun-um feld-um
38

(b) Feminine u-Stems.

52.

Paradigms of sēo dur-u, door; sēo hǫnd, hand:

Models of sēo dur-u, door; sēo hǫnd, hand:

Sing. N.A. dur-u hǫnd
G. dur-a hǫnd-a
D.I. dur-a hǫnd-a
 
Plur N.A. dur-a hǫnd-a
G. dur-a hǫnd-a
D.I. dur-um hǫnd-um
53.

Paradigm of the Third Personal Pronoun, , hēo, hit = he, she, it:

Paradigm of the Third Person Pronoun, he, she, it = he, she, it:

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. hēo hit
G. his hiere his
D. him hiere him
A. hine, hiene hīe hit
All Genders.
Plur. N.A. hīe
G. hiera
D. him
54.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

(i-Stems.)

(i-Stems.)

sē cierr, turn, time [char, chare, chore].

turn, turn, time [char, chare, chore].

sēo dǣd, deed.

the deed, deed.

sē dǣl, part [a great deal].

many, part [a great deal].

ðā Dęne, Danes.

The Danes, Danes.

sē frēondscipe, friendship.

friendship, friendship.

sēo hȳd, skin, hide.

the hide, skin, hide.

ðā lǫndlēode, natives.

the locals, natives.

ðā Mierce, Mercians.

The Mercians.

ðā Rōmware, Romans.

The Romans, Romans.

ðā Seaxe, Saxons.

The Saxons, Saxons.

sē stęde, place [in-stead of].

site, place [instead of].

(u-Stems.)

(u-Stems.)

sēo flōr, floor.

the floor, floor.

sēo nosu, nose.

the nose, nose.

sē sumor (G. sumeres, D. sumera), summer.

summer.

sē winter (G. wintres, D. wintra), winter.

winter

sē wudu, wood, forest.

the wood, wood, forest.

Note.—The numerous masculine nouns ending in -hād,—cildhād (childhood), wīfhād (womanhood),—belong to the u-stems historically; but they have all passed over to the a-Declension.

Note.—The many masculine nouns ending in -hād,—cildhād (childhood), wīfhād (womanhood),—originally belong to the u-stems; however, they have all transitioned to the a-Declension.

39
55.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Ðā Seaxe habbað ðæs dēores hȳd on ðǣm wuda. 2. Hwā hæfð ðā giefa? 3. Ðā Mierce hīe1 habbað. 4. Hwǣr is ðæs Wēales fugol? 5. Ðā Dęne hiene habbað. 6. Hwǣr sindon hiera winas? 7. Hīe sindon on ðæs cyninges wuda. 8. Ðā Rōmware ǫnd ðā Seaxe hæfdon ðā gāras ǫnd ðā geocu. 9. Hēo is on ðǣm hūse on wintra, ǫnd on ðǣm feldum on sumera. 10. Hwǣr is ðæs hofes duru? 11. Hēo2 (= sēo duru) nis hēr.

I. 1. The Saxons have the precious hide in the woods. 2. Who has the gift? 3. The Mercians have it. 4. Where is the Welsh bird? 5. The Danes have it. 6. Where are their friends? 7. They are in the king's woods. 8. The Romans and the Saxons had the spears and the shields. 9. It is in the house in winter, and in the fields in summer. 10. Where is the hall’s door? 11. It is not here.

II. 1. His friends have the bones of the seals and the bodies of the Danes. 2. Art thou the king’s son? 3. Has she her3 gifts in her3 hands? 4. Here are the fields of the natives. 5. Who had the bird? 6. I had it.2 7. The child had the worm in his3 fingers. 8. The Mercians were here during (the) summer (on + dat.).

II. 1. His friends have the bones of the seals and the bodies of the Danes. 2. Are you the king’s son? 3. Does she have her3 gifts in her3 hands? 4. Here are the fields of the locals. 5. Who had the bird? 6. I had it.2 7. The child had the worm in his3 fingers. 8. The Mercians were here during the summer (on + dat.).

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

2. Pronouns agree in gender with the nouns for which they stand. Hit, however, sometimes stands for inanimate things of both masculine and feminine genders. See Wülfing (l.c.) I, § 238.

2. Pronouns match the gender of the nouns they replace. Hit, however, occasionally refers to inanimate objects of both masculine and feminine genders. See Wülfing (l.c.) I, § 238.

3. See § 76 (last sentence).

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ (last sentence).

----

----

CHAPTER X.
Present Indicative Endings of Strong Verbs.

56.

The unchanged stem of the present indicative may always be found by dropping -an of the infinitive: feall-an, to fall; cēos-an, to choose; bīd-an, to abide.

The stem of the present indicative can always be found by dropping -an from the infinitive: feall-an, to fall; cēos-an, to choose; bīd-an, to abide.

57.

The personal endings are:

The personal endings are:

Sing. 1. -e Plur. 1. }  -að
2. -est 2.
3. -eð 3.
40

i-Umlaut.

58.

The 2d and 3d singular endings were originally not -est and -eð, but -is and -ið; and the i of these older endings has left its traces upon almost every page of Early West Saxon literature. This i, though unaccented and soon displaced, exerted a powerful back influence upon the vowel of the preceding accented syllable. This influence, a form of regressive assimilation, is known as i-umlaut (pronounced oóm-lowt). The vowel i or j (= y), being itself a palatal, succeeded in palatalizing every guttural vowel that preceded it, and in imposing still more of the i-quality upon diphthongs that were already palatal.1 The changes produced were these:

The 2nd and 3rd singular endings were originally not -est and -eð, but -is and -ið; and the i of these older endings has left its mark on almost every page of Early West Saxon literature. This i, though unstressed and quickly replaced, had a strong influence on the vowel of the preceding stressed syllable. This influence, a form of regressive assimilation, is known as i-umlaut (pronounced oóm-lowt). The vowel i or j (= y), being itself a palatal, succeeded in palatalizing every guttural vowel that came before it and further imposed the i- quality on diphthongs that were already palatal.1 The changes produced were these:

a became ę (æ): męnn (< *mann-iz), men.
ā ǣ ǣnig (< *ān-ig), any.
u y wyllen (< *wull-in), woollen.
ū ȳ mȳs (< *mūs-iz), mice.
o ę dęhter (< *dohtr-i), to or for the daughter.
ō ē fēt (< *fōt-iz), feet.
ea ie wiexð (< *weax-ið), he grows (weaxan = to grow).
ēa īe hīewð (< *hēaw-ið), he hews (hēawan = to hew).
eo ie wiercan (< *weorc-jan), to work.
ēo īe līehtan (< *lēoht-jan), to light.

The Unchanged Present Indicative.

59.

In the Northumbrian and Mercian dialects, as well as in the dialect of Late West Saxon, the 2d and 3d singular endings were usually joined to the present 41 stem without modification either of the stem itself or of the personal endings. The complete absence of umlauted forms in the present indicative of Mn.E. is thus accounted for.

In the Northumbrian and Mercian dialects, as well as in the Late West Saxon dialect, the second and third singular endings were typically attached to the present 41 stem without any changes to the stem itself or the personal endings. This fully explains the lack of umlauted forms in the present indicative of Modern English.

In Early West Saxon, however, such forms as the following are comparatively rare in the 2d and 3d singular:

In Early West Saxon, however, forms like the following are relatively uncommon in the 2nd and 3rd singular:

Sing. 1. Ic feall-e (I fall) cēos-e (I choose) bīd-e (I abide)
2. ðū feall-est cēos-est bīd-est
3. hē feall-eð cēos-eð bīd-eð
 
Plur. 1. }
2. feall-að cēos-að bīd-að
3. hīe

The Present Indicative with i-Umlaut and Contraction.

60.

The 2d and 3d persons singular are distinguished from the other forms of the present indicative in Early West Saxon by (1) i-umlaut of the vowel of the stem, (2) syncope of the vowel of the ending, giving -st and for -est and -eð, and (3) contraction of -st and with the final consonant or consonants of the stem.

The 2nd and 3rd person singular are set apart from the other forms of the present indicative in Early West Saxon by (1) the i-umlaut of the stem vowel, (2) the loss of the vowel in the ending, resulting in -st and instead of -est and -eð, and (3) the contraction of -st and with the final consonant or consonants of the stem.

Contraction.

61.

The changes produced by i-umlaut have been already discussed. By these changes, therefore, the stems of the 2d and 3d singular indicative of such verbs as (1) stǫndan (= standan), to stand, (2) cuman, to come, (3) grōwan, to grow, (4) brūcan, to enjoy, (5) blāwan, to blow, (6) feallan, to fall, (7) hēawan, to hew, (8) weorpan, to throw, and (9) cēosan, to choose, 42 become respectively (1) stęnd-,2 (2) cym-, (3) grēw-, (4) brȳc-, (5) blǣw-, (6) fiell-, (7) hīew-, (8) wierp-, and (9) cīes-.

The changes created by i-umlaut have already been discussed. As a result of these changes, the stems of the 2nd and 3rd singular indicative of verbs like (1) stǫndan (= standan), to stand, (2) cuman, to come, (3) grōwan, to grow, (4) brūcan, to enjoy, (5) blāwan, to blow, (6) feallan, to fall, (7) hēawan, to hew, (8) weorpan, to throw, and (9) cēosan, to choose, 42 become respectively (1) stęnd-,2 (2) cym-, (3) grēw-, (4) brȳc-, (5) blǣw-, (6) fiell-, (7) hīew-, (8) wierp-, and (9) cīes-.

If the unchanged stem contains the vowel e, this is changed in the 2d and 3d singular to i (ie): cweðan to say, stem cwið-; beran to bear, stem bier-. But this mutation3 had taken place long before the period of O.E., and belongs to the Germanic languages in general. It is best, however, to class the change of e to i or ie with the changes due to umlaut, since it occurs consistently in the 2d and 3d singular stems of Early West Saxon, and outlasted almost all of the umlaut forms proper.

If the unchanged root has the vowel e, it changes to i (ie) in the 2nd and 3rd singular forms: cweðan to say, root cwið-; beran to bear, root bier-. However, this mutation3 happened long before the Old English period and is part of the Germanic languages overall. It's best to consider the change of e to i or ie alongside the changes caused by umlaut, since it appears consistently in the 2nd and 3rd singular roots of Early West Saxon and lasted longer than almost all of the actual umlaut forms.

If, now, the syncopated endings -st and are added directly to the umlauted stem, there will frequently result such a massing of consonants as almost to defy pronunciation: cwið-st, thou sayest; stęnd-st, thou standest, etc. Some sort of contraction, therefore, is demanded for the sake of euphony. The ear and eye will, by a little practice, become a sure guide in these contractions. The following rules, however, must be observed. They apply only to the 2d and 3d singular of the present indicative:

If we now add the syncopated endings -st and directly to the umlauted stem, it often creates a cluster of consonants that is almost impossible to pronounce: cwið-st, you say; stęnd-st, you stand, etc. Therefore, some sort of contraction is necessary for the sake of flow. With a bit of practice, the ear and eye will become reliable guides for these contractions. However, the following rules must be followed. They apply only to the 2nd and 3rd singular of the present indicative:

43

(1) If the stem ends in a double consonant, one of the consonants is dropped:

(1) If the stem ends in a double consonant, one of the consonants is dropped:

1. feall-e (I fall) 1. winn-e (I fight) 1. swimm-e (I swim)
2. fiel-st 2. win-st 2. swim-st
3. fiel-ð 3. win-ð 3. swim-ð

(2) If the stem ends in , this is dropped:

(2) If the stem ends in , it’s dropped:

1. cweð-e (I say) 1. weorð-e (I become)
2. cwi-st 2. wier-st
3. cwi-ð 3. wier-ð

(3) If the stem ends in -d, this is changed to -t. The of the ending is then also changed to -t, and usually absorbed. Thus the stem of the 2d singular serves as stem and ending for the 3d singular:

(3) If the stem ends in -d, it changes to -t. The at the end is also changed to -t and is typically absorbed. So, the stem of the 2nd singular acts as both the stem and ending for the 3rd singular:

1.

stǫnd-e (= stand-e) (I stand)

I stand

1.

bind-e (I bind)

bind-e (I bind)

1.

bīd-e (I abide)

bīd-e (I stay)

1.

rīd-e (I ride)

ride (I ride)

2. stęnt-st 2. bint-st 2. bīt-st 2. rīt-st
3. stęnt 3. bint 3. bīt (-t) 3. rīt (-t)

(4) If the stem ends already in -t, the endings are added as in (3), being again changed to -t and absorbed:

(4) If the stem already ends with -t, the endings are added as in (3), with changed to -t and absorbed:

1. brēot-e (I break) 1. feoht-e (I fight) 1. bīt-e (I bite)
2. brīet-st 2. fieht-st 2. bīt-st
3. brīet (-t) 3. fieht 3. bīt (-t)

(5) If the stem ends in -s, this is dropped before -st (to avoid -sst), but is retained before , the latter being changed to -t. Thus the 2d and 3d singulars are identical:4

(5) If the stem ends in -s, drop it before -st (to avoid -sst), but keep it before , which changes to -t. This means the 2nd and 3rd singulars are the same:4

44
1. cēos-e (I choose) 1. rīs-e (I rise)
2. cīe-st 2. rī-st
3. cīes-t 3. rīs-t
62.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Sē cyning fielð. 2. Ðā wīf cēosað ðā giefa. 3. Ðū stęntst on ðǣm hūse. 4. Hē wierpð ðæt wǣpen. 5. Sē sęcg hīewð ðā līc. 6. Ðæt sǣd grēwð ǫnd wiexð (Mark iv. 27). 7. Ic stǫnde hēr, ǫnd ðū stęntst ðǣr. 8. “Ic hit eom,” cwið hē. 9. Hīe berað ðæs wulfes bān. 10. Hē hīe bint, ǫnd ic hine binde. 11. Ne rītst ðū?

I. 1. The king falls. 2. The women choose the gift. 3. You stand in the house. 4. He throws the weapon. 5. The man shapes the body. 6. The seed grows and thrives (Mark iv. 27). 7. I stand here, and you stand there. 8. “I am it,” he says. 9. They carry the wolf's bone. 10. He binds them, and I bind him. 11. Don’t you write?

II. 1. We shall bind him. 2. Who chooses the child’s gifts? 3. “He was not here,” says she. 4. Wilt thou remain in the hall? 5. The wolves are biting (= bite) the fishermen. 6. He enjoys5 the love of his children. 7. Do you enjoy (= Enjoyest thou) the consolation and friendship of the scribe? 8. Will he come? 9. I shall throw the spear, and thou wilt bear the weapons. 10. The king’s son will become king. 11. The army (werod) is breaking the doors and walls of the house.

II. 1. We will tie him up. 2. Who picks the child’s gifts? 3. “He wasn’t here,” she says. 4. Will you stay in the hall? 5. The wolves are biting the fishermen. 6. He enjoys the love of his children. 7. Do you enjoy the comfort and friendship of the scribe? 8. Will he come? 9. I will throw the spear, and you will carry the weapons. 10. The king's son will become king. 11. The army (werod) is breaking down the doors and walls of the house.

1. The palatal vowels and diphthongs were long or short æ, e, i, (ie), y, ea, eo; the guttural vowels were long or short a, o, u.

1. The palatal vowels and diphthongs were long or short æ, e, i, (ie), y, ea, eo; the guttural vowels were long or short a, o, u.

2. The more common form for stems with a is æ rather than ę: faran, to go, 2d and 3d singular stem fær-; sacan, to contend, stem sæc-. Indeed, a changes to ę via æ (Cosijn, Altwestsächsische Grammatik, I, § 32).

2. The more common form for stems with a is æ instead of ę: faran, to go, 2nd and 3rd singular stem fær-; sacan, to contend, stem sæc-. In fact, a changes to ę through æ (Cosijn, Altwestsächsische Grammatik, I, § 32).

3. Umlaut is frequently called Mutation. Metaphony is still another name for the same phenomenon. The term Metaphony has the advantage of easy adjectival formation (metaphonic). It was proposed by Professor Victor Henry (Comparative Grammar of English and German, Paris, 1894), but has not been naturalized.

3. Umlaut is often referred to as Mutation. Metaphony is another term for the same concept. The term Metaphony makes it easy to create an adjective (metaphonic). It was suggested by Professor Victor Henry (Comparative Grammar of English and German, Paris, 1894), but hasn’t become commonly used.

4. This happens also when the infinitive stem ends in st:

4. This also occurs when the infinitive stem ends in st:

1. berst-e (I burst)

I burst

2. bier-st

2. beer-st

3. bierst.

3. beer.

5. Brūcan, to enjoy, usually takes the genitive case, not the accusative. It means “to have joy of any thing.”

5. Brūcan, to enjoy, typically requires the genitive case, not the accusative. It means “to take pleasure in something.”

----

----

CHAPTER XI.
Consonant Noun Declensions.

The Weak or n-Declension.

63.

The n-Declension contains almost all of the O.E. nouns belonging to the Consonant Declensions. The stem characteristic n has been preserved in the oblique 45 cases, so that there is no difficulty in distinguishing n-stems from the preceding vowel stems.

The n-Declension includes nearly all the Old English nouns that fall under the Consonant Declensions. The stem characteristic n has been kept in the oblique 45 cases, making it easy to tell n-stems apart from the earlier vowel stems.

The n-Declension includes (a) masculines, (b) feminines, and (c) neuters. The masculines far outnumber the feminines, and the neuters contain only ēage, eye and ēare, ear. The masculines end in -a, the feminines and neuters in -e.

The n-Declension includes (a) masculine nouns, (b) feminine nouns, and (c) neuter nouns. There are significantly more masculine nouns than feminine nouns, and the neuter nouns only include ēage, eye, and ēare, ear. The masculine nouns end in -a, while the feminine and neuter nouns end in -e.

64.

Paradigms of (a) sē hunta, hunter; (b) sēo tunge, tongue; (c) ðæt ēage, eye:

Paradigms of (a) sē hunta, hunter; (b) sēo tunge, tongue; (c) ðæt ēage, eye:

Sing. N. hunt-a tung-e ēag-e
G.D.I. hunt-an tung-an ēag-an
A. hunt-an tung-an ēag-e
 
Plur N.A. hunt-an tung-an ēag-an
G. hunt-ena tung-ena ēag-ena
D.I. hunt-um tung-um ēag-um
65.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

sē adesa, hatchet, adze.

that’s enough, hatchet, adze.

sē ǣmetta, leisure [empt-iness].

sē ǣmetta, leisure [emptiness].

sē bǫna (bana), murderer [bane].

sē bǫna (bana), murderer [bane].

sēo cirice, church [Scotch kirk].

the church, church [Scotch kirk].

sē cnapa (later, cnafa), boy [knave].

sē cnapa (later, cnafa), boy [knave].

sē cuma, stranger [comer].

here comes, stranger [comer].

ðæt ēare, ear.

that ear, ear.

sēo eorðe, earth.

the earth, earth.

sē gefēra, companion [co-farer].

sea companion, co-farer.

sē guma, man [bride-groom1].

the man, groom [bride-groom__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__].

sēo heorte, heart.

the heart, heart.

sē mōna, moon.

the moon, moon.

sēo nǣdre, adder [a nadder > an adder2].

sēo nǣdre, adder [a nadder > an adder2].

sē oxa, ox.

see ox, ox.

sē scēowyrhta, shoe-maker [shoe-wright].

sē scēowyrhta, shoemaker.

sēo sunne, sun.

the sun, sun.

sē tēona, injury [teen].

see ya, injury [teen].

biddan (with dat. of person and gen. of thing3), to request, ask for.

biddan (with the dative of person and genitive of thing3), to request, ask for.

cwelan, to die [quail].

cwelan, to die [quail].

46

gescieppan, to create [shape, land-scape, friend-ship].

gescieppan, to create [shape, landscape, friendship].

giefan (with dat. of indirect object), to give.

giefan (with the dative case for indirect objects), to give.

healdan, to hold.

healdan, to hold.

helpan (with dat.), to help.

helpan (with dat.), to assist.

scęððan4 (with dat.), to injure [scathe].

scęððan__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (with dat.), to harm [scathe].

wiðstǫndan (-standan) (with dat.), to withstand.

wiðstǫndan (-standan) (with dat.), to resist.

wrītan, to write.

write, to write.

66.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Sē scēowyrhta brȳcð his ǣmettan. 2. Ðā guman biddað ðǣm cnapan ðæs adesan. 3. Hwā is sē cuma? 4. Hielpst ðū ðǣm bǫnan? 5. Ic him ne helpe. 6. Ðā bearn scęððað ðæs bǫnan ēagum ǫnd ēarum. 7. Sē cuma cwielð on ðǣre cirican. 8. Sē hunta wiðstęnt ðǣm wulfum. 9. Ðā oxan berað ðæs cnapan gefēran. 10. Sē mōna ǫnd ðā tunglu sind on ðǣm heofonum. 11. Ðā huntan healdað ðǣre nǣdran tungan. 12. Hē hiere giefð ðā giefa. 13. Ðā werod scęððað ðæs cyninges feldum.

I. 1. The archer aims his bow. 2. The men ask the lad for assistance. 3. Who is the newcomer? 4. Will you help the hunter? 5. I will not help him. 6. The children watch the hunter with eyes and ears. 7. The newcomer speaks in the church. 8. The hunter stands against the wolves. 9. The oxen carry the lad's companions. 10. The moon and the stars are in the sky. 11. The hunters guard the serpent's tongue. 12. He gives her the gift. 13. The company watches over the king's fields.

II. 1. Who will bind the mouths of the oxen? 2. Who gives him the gifts? 3. Thou art helping him, and I am injuring him. 4. The boy’s companion is dying. 5. His nephew does not enjoy his leisure. 6. The adder’s tongue injures the king’s companion. 7. The sun is the day’s eye. 8. She asks the strangers for the spears. 9. The men’s bodies are not here. 10. Is he not (Nis hē) the child’s murderer? 11. Who creates the bodies and the souls of men? 12. Thou withstandest her. 13. He is not writing.

II. 1. Who will tie up the mouths of the oxen? 2. Who gives him the gifts? 3. You are helping him, and I am hurting him. 4. The boy's friend is dying. 5. His nephew isn’t enjoying his time off. 6. The snake’s tongue harms the king’s friend. 7. The sun is the eye of the day. 8. She asks the strangers for the spears. 9. The men's bodies aren’t here. 10. Isn’t he the child’s killer? 11. Who creates the bodies and souls of people? 12. You resist her. 13. He isn’t writing.

1. The r is intrusive in -groom, as it is in cart-r-idge, part-r-idge, vag-r-ant, and hoa-r-se.

1. The r is disruptive in -groom, just like it is in cart-r-idge, part-r-idge, vag-r-ant, and hoa-r-se.

2. The n has been appropriated by the article. Cf. an apron (< a napron), an auger (< a nauger), an orange (< a norange), an umpire (< a numpire).

2. The n has been taken over by the article. See an apron (< a napron), an auger (< a nauger), an orange (< a norange), an umpire (< a numpire).

3. In Mn.E. we say “I request a favor of you”; but in O.E. it was “I request you (dative) of a favor” (genitive). Cf. Cymbeline, III, vi, 92: “We’ll mannerly demand thee of thy story.” See Franz’s Shakespeare-Grammatik, § 361 (1900).

3. In Modern English, we say “I ask you for a favor”; but in Old English, it was “I ask you (dative) for a favor” (genitive). Cf. Cymbeline, III, vi, 92: “We’ll politely ask you for your story.” See Franz’s Shakespeare-Grammatik, § 361 (1900).

4. Scęððan is conjugated through the present indicative like fręmman. See § 129.

4. Scęððan is conjugated in the present indicative similar to fręmman. See § 129.

----

----

47

CHAPTER XII.

Remnants of Other Consonant Declensions.

67.

The nouns belonging here are chiefly masculines and feminines. Their stem ended in a consonant other than n. The most important of them may be divided as follows: (1) The foot Declension, (2) r-Stems, and (3) nd-Stems. These declensions are all characterized by the prevalence, wherever possible, of i-umlaut in certain cases, the case ending being then dropped.

The nouns in this category are mainly masculine and feminine. Their root ends in a consonant other than n. The key ones can be divided like this: (1) The foot Declension, (2) r-Stems, and (3) nd-Stems. These declensions are all marked by the use of i-umlaut in certain cases, and the case ending is then omitted.

68.

(1) The nouns belonging to the foot Declension exhibit umlaut most consistently in the N.A. plural.

(1) The nouns in the foot Declension show umlaut most consistently in the N.A. plural.

Sing. N.A. sē fōt (foot) sē mǫn (man) sē tōð (tooth) sēo cū (cow)
Plur N.A. fēt męn tēð

Note.—The dative singular usually has the same form as the N.A. plural. Here belong also sēo bōc (book), sēo burg (borough), sēo gōs (goose), sēo lūs (louse), and sēo mūs (mouse), all with umlauted plurals. Mn.E. preserves only six of the foot Declension plurals: feet, men, teeth, geese, lice, and mice. The c in the last two is an artificial spelling, intended to preserve the sound of voiceless s. Mn.E. kine (= cy-en) is a double plural formed after the analogy of weak stems; Burns in The Twa Dogs uses kye.

Note.—The dative singular usually has the same form as the N.A. plural. This also includes sēo bōc (book), sēo burg (borough), sēo gōs (goose), sēo lūs (louse), and sēo mūs (mouse), all with umlauted plurals. Modern English retains only six of the foot Declension plurals: feet, men, teeth, geese, lice, and mice. The c in the last two is an artificial spelling, designed to keep the sound of voiceless s. Modern English kine (= cy-en) is a double plural formed by following the pattern of weak stems; Burns in The Twa Dogs uses kye.

No umlaut is possible in sēo niht (night) and sē mōnað (month), plural niht and mōnað (preserved in Mn.E. twelvemonth and fortnight).

No umlaut can occur in sēo niht (night) and sē mōnað (month), with the plural being niht and mōnað (which are preserved in modern English as twelvemonth and fortnight).

(2) The r-Stems contain nouns expressing kinship, and exhibit umlaut of the dative singular.

(2) The r-Stems include nouns that represent family relationships and show umlaut in the dative singular form.

Sing. N.A.

sē fæder
(father)

sē fæder (dad)

sē brōðor
(brother)

brother

sēo mōdor
(mother)

the mother
(mother)

sēo dohtor
(daughter)

the daughter

sēo swuster
(sister)

the sister

D. fæder brēðer mēder dęhter swyster

Note.—The N.A. plural is usually the same as the N.A. singular. These umlaut datives are all due to the presence of a former i. Cf. Lat. dative singular patri, frātri, mātri, sorori (< *sosori), and Greek θυγατρί.

Note.—The N.A. plural is generally the same as the N.A. singular. These umlaut datives exist because of a former i. Compare Latin dative singulars patri, frātri, mātri, sorori (< *sosori), and Greek daughter.

48

(3) The nd-Stems show umlaut both in the N.A. plural and in the dative singular:

(3) The nd- stems display umlaut in both the North American plural and in the dative singular:

Sing. N.A. sē frēond (friend) sē fēond (enemy)
D. frīend fīend
Plur. N.A. frīend fīend

Note.—Mn.E. friend and fiend are interesting analogical spellings. When s had been added by analogy to the O.E. plurals frīend and fīend, thus giving the double plurals friends and fiends, a second singular was formed by dropping the s. Thus friend and fiend displaced the old singulars frend and fend, both of which occur in the M.E. Ormulum, written about the year 1200.

Note.—Modern English friend and fiend are interesting examples of spelling development through analogy. When s was added by analogy to the Old English plurals frīend and fīend, creating the plural forms friends and fiends, a singular form was then created by dropping the s. This resulted in friend and fiend replacing the old singular forms frend and fend, both of which can be found in the Middle English Ormulum, written around the year 1200.

Summary of O.E. Declensions.

69.

A brief, working summary of the O.E. system of declensions may now be made on the basis of gender.

A short, practical summary of the O.E. system of declensions can now be created based on gender.

All O.E. nouns are (1) masculine, (2) feminine, or (3) neuter.

All Old English nouns are (1) masculine, (2) feminine, or (3) neuter.

(1) The masculines follow the declension of mūð (§ 26), except those ending in -a, which are declined like hunta (§ 64):

(1) The masculine nouns follow the declension of mūð (§ 26), except for those ending in -a, which decline like hunta (§ 64):

Sing. N.A. mūð N. hunta
G. mūðes G.D.A. huntan
D.I. mūðe I. huntan
 
Plur N.A. mūðas huntan
G. mūða huntena
D.I. mūðum huntum

(2) The short-stemmed neuters follow the declension of hof (§ 32); the long-stemmed, that of bearn (§ 32):

(2) The short-stemmed neuters follow the same declension as hof (§ 32); the long-stemmed, like bearn (§ 32):

Sing. N.A. hof bearn
G. hofes bearnes
D.I. hofe bearne
 
Plur N.A. hofu bearn
G. hofa bearna
D.I. hofum bearnum
49

(3) The feminines follow the declensions of giefu and wund (§ 38) (the only difference being in the N. singular), except those ending in -e, which follow the declension of tunge (§ 64):

(3) The feminine nouns follow the declensions of giefu and wund (§ 38) (the only difference is in the nominative singular), except for those ending in -e, which follow the declension of tunge (§ 64):

Sing. N. giefu wund tunge
G. giefe wunde tungan
D.I. giefe wunde tungan
A. giefe wunde tungan
 
Plur N.A. giefa wunda tungan
G. giefa wunda tungena
D.I. giefum wundum tungum
70.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

ac, but.

ac, but.

būtan (with dat.), except, but, without.

but (with dat.), except, but, without.

sē Crīst, Christ.

Jesus, Christ.

sē eorl, earl, alderman, warrior.

the earl, earl, alderman, warrior.

ðæt Ęnglalǫnd, England [Angles’ land].

that England, England [Angles’ land].

faran, to go [fare].

faran, to go [fare].

findan, to find.

findan, to find.

sē God, God.

God, God.

hātan, to call, name.

hātan, to call, name.

sē hlāford, lord [hlāf-weard].

se lord, lord [bread-keeper].

mid (with dat.), with.

mid (with dat.), with.

on (with acc.), on, against, into.

on (with acc.), on, against, into.

(with dat.), to.

to (with dat.), to.

uton (with infin.), let us.

uton (with infin.), let's.

Note.—O.E. mǫn (man) is frequently used in an indefinite sense for one, people, they. It thus takes the place of a passive construction proper: And man nam þā gebrotu þe þār belifon, twęlf cȳpan fulle, And there were taken up of fragments that remained there twelve baskets full; but more literally, And one (or they) took the fragments, etc.; Ǫnd Hæstenes wīf ǫnd hīs suna twēgen mǫn brōhte tō ðǣm cyninge, And Hæsten’s wife and his two sons were brought to the king.

Note.—O.E. mǫn (man) is often used in a general sense for one, people, they. It serves as a substitute for a proper passive construction: And man nam þā gebrotu þe þār belifon, twęlf cȳpan fulle, And there were taken up of fragments that remained there twelve baskets full; but more literally, And one (or they) took the fragments, etc.; Ǫnd Hæstenes wīf ǫnd hīs suna twēgen mǫn brōhte tō ðǣm cyninge, And Hæsten’s wife and his two sons were brought to the king.

71.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Mōn hine hǣt Ælfred. 2. Uton faran on ðæt scip. 3. God is cyninga cyning ǫnd hlāforda hlāford. 4. Sē eorl ne giefð giefa his fīend. 5. Ic næs mid his frīend. 6. Sēo mōdor færð mid hiere dęhter on ðā burg. 7. Fintst ðū ðæs 50 bōceres bēc? 8. Hē bint ealle (all) ðā dēor būtan ðǣm wulfum. 9. Ðū eart Crīst, Godes sunu. 10. “Uton bindan ðæs bǫnan fēt,” cwið hē.

I. 1. His name was Alfred. 2. Let's go on the ship. 3. God is the king of kings and the lord of lords. 4. The earl does not give gifts to his enemy. 5. I was not with his friend. 6. The mother goes with her daughter to the town. 7. Do you find the book of the scholar? 8. He binds all the animals except the wolves. 9. You are Christ, the Son of God. 10. “Let's bind the feet of the slayer,” he said.

II. 1. Christ is the son of God. 2. Let us call him Cædmon. 3. He throws his spear against the door. 4. Thou art not the earl’s brother. 5. He will go with his father to England, but I shall remain (abide) here. 6. Gifts are not given to murderers. 7. Who will find the tracks of the animals? 8. They ask their lord for his weapons (§ 65, Note 3).

II. 1. Christ is the son of God. 2. Let's call him Cædmon. 3. He throws his spear at the door. 4. You are not the earl’s brother. 5. He will go to England with his father, but I will stay here. 6. Gifts are not given to murderers. 7. Who will find the tracks of the animals? 8. They ask their lord for his weapons (§ 65, Note 3).

----

----

CHAPTER XIII.
Pronouns.

(1) Personal Pronouns.

72.

Paradigms of ic, I; ðū, thou. For , hēo, hit, see § 53.

Schemas of ic, I; ðū, thou. For , hēo, hit, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Sing. N. ic ðū
G. mīn ðīn
D. ðē
A. mē (mec) ðē (ðec)
 
Dual N. wit (we two) git (ye two)
G. uncer (of us two) incer (of you two)
D. unc (to or for us two) inc (to or for you two)
A. unc (us two) inc (you two)
 
Plur N.
G. ūser (ūre) ēower
D. ūs ēow
A. ūs (ūsic) ēow (ēowic)

Note 1.—The dual number was soon absorbed by the plural. No relic of it now remains. But when two and only two are referred to, the dual is consistently used in O.E. An example occurs in the case 51 of the two blind men (Matthew ix. 27-31): Gemiltsa unc, Davīdes sunu! Pity us, (thou) Son of David! Sīe inc æfter incrum gelēafan, Be it unto you according to your faith.

Note 1.—The dual form was soon absorbed by the plural. There are no traces of it left now. However, when referring to exactly two, the dual is consistently used in Old English. An example occurs in the case 51 of the two blind men (Matthew ix. 27-31): Pity us, Son of David! Let it be done for you according to your faith.

Note 2.—Mn.E. ye (< ), the nominative proper, is fast being displaced by you (< ēow), the old objective. The distinction is preserved in the King James’s version of the Bible: Ye in me, and I in you (John xiv. 20); but not in Shakespeare and later writers.

Note 2.—Mn.E. ye (< ), the nominative form, is quickly being replaced by you (< ēow), the older objective form. The difference is maintained in the King James version of the Bible: Ye in me, and I in you (John xiv. 20); but it’s not used in Shakespeare and later writers.

(2) Demonstrative Pronouns.

73.

Paradigm of ðēs, ðēos, ðis, this. For the Definite Article as a demonstrative, meaning that, see § 28, Note 3.

Paradigm of this, these, this, this. For the Definite Article as a demonstrative, meaning that, see § 28, Note 3.

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. ðēs ðēos ðis
G. ðisses ðisse ðisses
D. ðissum ðisse ðissum
A. ðisne ðās ðis
I. ðȳs —— ðȳs
All Genders.
Plur. N.A. ðās
G. ðissa
D. ðissum

(3) The Interrogative Pronoun.

74.

Paradigm of hwā, hwæt, who, what?

Framework of hwā, hwæt, who, what?

Masculine. Neuter.
Sing. N. hwā hwæt
G. hwæs hwæs
D. hwǣm hwǣm
A. hwone hwæt
I. —— hwȳ

Note 1.—The derivative interrogatives, hwæðer (< *hwā-ðer), which of two? and hwilc (< *hwā-līc), which? are declined as strong adjectives (§§ 79-82).

Note 1.—The derivative interrogatives, hwæðer (< *hwā-ðer), which of two? and hwilc (< *hwā-līc), which? are declined as strong adjectives (§§ 79-82).

Note 2.—The instrumental case of hwā survives in Mn.E. why = on what account; the instrumental of the definite article is seen in the 52 adverbial the: The sooner, the better = by how much sooner, by so much better.

Note 2.—The instrumental case of hwā is still present in Modern English as why = for what reason; the instrumental of the definite article appears in the 52 adverbial the: The sooner, the better = by how much sooner, by so much better.

Note 3.—How were the Mn.E. relative pronouns, who and which, evolved from the O.E. interrogatives? The change began in early West Saxon with hwæt used in indirect questions (Wülfing, l.c. § 310, β): Nū ic wāt eall hwæt ðū woldest, Now I know all that thou desiredst. The direct question was, Hwæt woldest ðū? But the presence of eall shows that in Alfred’s mind hwæt was, in the indirect form, more relative than interrogative.

Note 3.—How did the Mn.E. relative pronouns, who and which, develop from the O.E. interrogatives? The shift started in early West Saxon with hwæt used in indirect questions (Wülfing, l.c. § 310, β): Nū ic wāt eall hwæt ðū woldest, Now I know everything you wanted. The direct question was, Hwæt woldest ðū? But the inclusion of eall indicates that in Alfred’s mind, hwæt was more relative than interrogative in its indirect form.

(4) Relative Pronouns.

75.

O.E. had no relative pronoun proper. It used instead (1) the Indeclinable Particle ðe, who, whom, which, that, (2) the Definite Article (§ 28), (3) the Definite Article with the Indeclinable Particle, (4) the Indeclinable Particle with a Personal Pronoun.

O.E. didn't have a proper relative pronoun. Instead, it used (1) the indeclinable particle ðe, who, whom, which, that, (2) the definite article (§ 28), (3) the definite article with the indeclinable particle, (4) the indeclinable particle with a personal pronoun.

The Definite Article agrees in gender and number with the antecedent. The case depends upon the construction. The bird which I have may, therefore, be:—

The definite article matches the gender and number of the noun it refers to. The case depends on the context. The bird that I have can, therefore, be:—

(1) Sē fugol ðe ic hæbbe;

So what you got;

(2) Sē fugol ðone ic hæbbe;

I have the bird;

(3) Sē fugol ðone ðe (= the which) ic hæbbe;

The bird that I have;

(4) Sē fugol ðe hine ic hæbbe.

(4) I have the bird that you see.

Note.—O.E. ðe agrees closely in construction with Mn.E. relative that: (1) Both are indeclinable. (2) Both refer to animate or inanimate objects. (3) Both may be used with phrasal value: ðȳ ylcan dæge ðe hī hine tō ðǣm āde beran wyllað, On the same day that (= on which) they intend to bear him to the funeral pile. (4) Neither can be preceded by a preposition.

Note.—Old English ðe closely matches the modern English relative that: (1) Both are indeclinable. (2) Both refer to animate or inanimate objects. (3) Both can be used in a phrasal context: ðȳ ylcan dæge ðe hī hine tō ðǣm āde beran wyllað, On the same day that (= on which) they intend to carry him to the funeral pile. (4) Neither can be preceded by a preposition.

(5) Possessive Pronouns.

76.

The Possessive Pronouns are mīn, mine; ðīn, thine; ūre, our; ēower, your; [sīn, his, her, its]; uncer, belonging to us two; incer, belonging to you two. They 53 are declined as strong adjectives. The genitives of the Third Personal Pronoun, his, his, hiere, her, hiera, their, are indeclinable.

The possessive pronouns are mīn, mine; ðīn, thine; ūre, our; ēower, your; [sīn, his, her, its]; uncer, belonging to us two; incer, belonging to you two. They 53 are declined like strong adjectives. The genitives of the third-person pronoun, his, his, hiere, her, hiera, their, are indeclinable.

(6) Indefinite Pronouns.

77.

These are ǣlc, each, every; ān, a, an, one; ǣnig (< ān-ig), any; nǣnig (< ne-ǣnig), none; ōðer, other; sum, one, a certain one; swilc, such. They are declined as strong adjectives.

These are each, every; a, a, an, one; any (one), any; none (not any), none; other, other; one, a certain one; such, such. They are declined as strong adjectives.

Note.—O.E. had three established methods of converting an interrogative pronoun into an indefinite: (1) By prefixing ge, (2) by prefixing ǣg, (3) by interposing the interrogative between swā ... swā: (1) gehwā, each; gehwæðer, either; gehwilc, each; (2) ǣghwā, each; ǣghwæðer, each; ǣghwilc, each; (3) swā hwā swā, whosoever; swā hwæðer swā, whichsoever of two; swā hwilc swā, whosoever.

Note.—Old English had three main ways to turn an interrogative pronoun into an indefinite: (1) By adding ge, (2) by adding ǣg, (3) by placing the interrogative between swā ... swā: (1) gehwā, each; gehwæðer, either; gehwilc, each; (2) ǣghwā, each; ǣghwæðer, each; ǣghwilc, each; (3) swā hwā swā, whosoever; swā hwæðer swā, whichsoever of two; swā hwilc swā, whosoever.

----

----

CHAPTER XIV.
Strong and Weak Adjectives.

78.

The declension of adjectives conforms in general to the declension of nouns, though a few pronominal inflections have influenced certain cases. Adjectives belong either to (1) the Strong Declension or to (2) the Weak Declension. The Weak Declension is employed when the adjective is preceded by or ðēs, the, that, or this; otherwise, the Strong Declension is employed: ðā gōdan cyningas, the good kings; ðēs gōda cyning, this good king; but gōde cyningas, good kings.

The way adjectives decline typically matches how nouns decline, although some pronominal endings have affected certain cases. Adjectives fall into two categories: (1) the Strong Declension and (2) the Weak Declension. The Weak Declension is used when the adjective is preceded by or ðēs, the, that, or this; otherwise, the Strong Declension is used: ðā gōdan cyningas, the good kings; ðēs gōda cyning, this good king; but gōde cyningas, good kings.

Note.—The Weak Declension is also frequently used when the adjective is employed in direct address, or preceded by a possessive 54 pronoun: Dryhten, ælmihtiga God ... ic bidde ðē for ðīnre miclan mildheortnesse, Lord, almighty God, I pray thee, for thy great mercy.

Note.—The Weak Declension is often used when the adjective is used in direct address or followed by a possessive 54 pronoun: Lord, almighty God, I ask you for your great mercy, Lord, almighty God, I pray thee, for thy great mercy.

(1) Strong Declension of Adjectives.
Monosyllables.

79.

The strong adjectives are chiefly monosyllabic with long stems: gōd, good; eald, old; lǫng, long; swift, swift. They are declined as follows.

The strong adjectives are mostly one-syllable words with long stems: gōd, good; eald, old; lǫng, long; swift, swift. They are declined as follows.

80.

Paradigm of gōd, good:

Paradigm of gōd, good:

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. gōd gōd gōd
G. gōdes gōdre gōdes
D. gōdum gōdre gōdum
A. gōdne gōde gōd
I. gōde —— gōde
 
Plur N.A. gōde gōda gōd
G. gōdra gōdra gōdra
D.I. gōdum gōdum gōdum
81.

If the stem is short, -u is retained as in giefu (§ 39, (1)) and hofu (§ 33, (1)). Thus glæd (§ 27, Note 1), glad, and til, useful, are inflected:

If the stem is short, -u is kept like in giefu (§ 39, (1)) and hofu (§ 33, (1)). So glæd (§ 27, Note 1), glad, and til, useful, are modified:

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. { glæd
til
gladu
tilu
glæd
til
 
Plur N.A. { glade
tile
glada
tila
gladu
tilu

(b) Polysyllables.

82.

Polysyllables follow the declension of short monosyllables. The most common terminations are -en, -en; -fæst, -fast; -full, -ful; -lēas, -less; -līc, -ly; -ig, -y: hǣð-en (hǣð = heath), heathen; stęde-fæst (stęde 55 = place), steadfast; sorg-full (sorg = sorrow), sorrowful; cyst-lēas (cyst = worth), worthless; eorð-līc (eorðe = earth), earthly; blōd-ig (blōd = blood), bloody. The present and past participles, when inflected and not as weak adjectives, may be classed with the polysyllabic adjectives, their inflection being the same.

Polysyllables follow the declension of short monosyllables. The most common endings are -en, -en; -fæst, -fast; -full, -ful; -lēas, -less; -līc, -ly; -ig, -y: hǣð-en (hǣð = heath), heathen; stęde-fæst (stęde = place), steadfast; sorg-full (sorg = sorrow), sorrowful; cyst-lēas (cyst = worth), worthless; eorð-līc (eorðe = earth), earthly; blōd-ig (blōd = blood), bloody. The present and past participles, when inflected and not treated as weak adjectives, can be classified with the polysyllabic adjectives, as their inflection is the same.

Syncopation occurs as in a-stems (§ 27, (4)). Thus hālig, holy, blīðe, blithe, berende, bearing, geboren, born, are thus inflected:

Syncopation happens as in a-stems (§ 27, (4)). So hālig, holy, blīðe, blithe, berende, bearing, geboren, born, are therefore inflected:

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. { hālig
blīðe
berende
geboren
hālgu
blīðu
berende
geborenu
hālig
blīðe
berende
geboren
 
Plur N.A. { hālge
blīðe
berende
geborene
hālga
blīða
berenda
geborena
hālgu
blīðu
berendu
geborenu

(2) Weak Declension of Adjectives.

83.

The Weak Declension of adjectives, whether monosyllabic or polysyllabic, does not differ from the Weak Declension of nouns, except that -ena of the genitive plural is usually replaced by -ra of the strong adjectives.

The Weak Declension of adjectives, whether one syllable or multiple syllables, is the same as the Weak Declension of nouns, except that -ena in the genitive plural is typically replaced by -ra in strong adjectives.

84.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. N. gōda gōde gōde
G. gōdan gōdan gōdan
D.I. gōdan gōdan gōdan
A. gōdan gōdan gōde
All Genders.
Plur. N.A. gōdan
G. gōdra (gōdena)
D.I. gōdum
56
85.

Rule of Syntax.

Syntax Rules.

Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case; but participles, when used predicatively, may remain uninflected (§ 139, § 140).

Adjectives match their nouns in gender, number, and case; however, participles, when used in a predicate way, can stay in their simple form. (§ 139, § 140).

86.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

dēad, dead.

dead, dead.

eall, all.

all

hāl,1 whole, hale.

hāl, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ whole, healthy.

heard, hard.

listened, difficult.

ðæt hors, horse.

that horse, horse.

lēof, dear [as lief].

dear

lȳtel, little.

little

micel, great, large.

big, great, large.

mǫnig, many.

many

niman, to take [nimble, numb].

niman, to take [nimble, numb].

nīwe, new.

new.

rīce, rich, powerful.

wealth, affluent, influential.

sōð, true [sooth-sayer].

true, true [soothsayer].

stælwierðe,2 serviceable [stalwart].

stalwart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ reliable [stalwart].

swīðe, very.

very

sē tūn, town, village.

sound, city, community.

sē ðegn, servant, thane, warrior.

the servant, servant, thane, warrior.

ðæt ðing, thing.

that thing, thing.

sē weg, way.

way, path.

wīs, wise.

wise.

wið (with acc.), against, in a hostile sense [with-stand].

wið (with acc.), against, in a hostile sense [withstand].

sē ilca, the same [of that ilk].

the same

87.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Ðās scipu ne sind swīðe swift, ac hīe sind swīðe stælwierðu. 2. Sēo gōde cwēn giefð ǣlcum ðegne mǫniga giefa. 3. Ðēs wīsa cyning hæfð mǫnige micele tūnas on his rīce. 4. Nǣnig mǫn is wīs on eallum ðingum. 5. Ðȳ ilcan dæge (§ 98, (2)) mǫn fǫnd (found) ðone ðegn ðe mīnes wines bēc hæfde. 6. Ealle ðā sęcgas ðā ðe swift hors habbað rīdað wið ðone bǫnan. 7. Ðīne fīend sind mīne 57 frīend. 8. Sē micela stān ðone ðe ic on mīnum hǫndum hæbbe is swīðe heard. 9. Hīe scęððað ðǣm ealdum horsum. 10. Uton niman ðās tilan giefa ǫnd hīe beran tō ūrum lēofum bearnum.

I. 1. The ships are not very fast, but they are very sturdy. 2. The good queen gives many gifts to each servant. 3. This wise king has many great halls in his kingdom. 4. No man is wise in everything. 5. On that very day (§ 98, (2)), a man found the servant who had my friend’s book. 6. All those men who have swift horses ride against the enemy. 7. Your enemies are my friends. 8. The large stone that I have in my hands is very hard. 9. They harm the old horses. 10. Let us take these valuable gifts and bring them to our beloved children.

II. 1. These holy men are wise and good. 2. Are the little children very dear to the servants (dat. without )? 3. Gifts are not given (§ 70, Note 1) to rich men. 4. All the horses that are in the king’s fields are swift. 5. These stones are very large and hard. 6. He takes the dead man’s spear and fights against the large army. 7. This new house has many doors. 8. My ways are not your ways. 9. Whosoever chooses me, him I also (ēac) choose. 10. Every man has many friends that are not wise.

II. 1. These holy men are wise and good. 2. Are the young children very dear to the servants? 3. Gifts are not given to rich men. 4. All the horses in the king’s fields are fast. 5. These stones are very large and hard. 6. He takes the dead man’s spear and fights against the large army. 7. This new house has many doors. 8. My ways are not your ways. 9. Whoever chooses me, I also choose. 10. Every person has many friends who are not wise.

1. Hālig, holy, contains, of course, the same root. “I find,” says Carlyle, “that you could not get any better definition of what ‘holy’ really is than ‘healthy—completely healthy.’”

1. Hālig, holy, shares the same root, of course. “I find,” says Carlyle, “that you couldn’t find a better definition of what ‘holy’ really is than ‘healthy—totally healthy.’”

2. This word has been much discussed. The older etymologists explained it as meaning worth stealing. A more improbable conjecture is that it means worth a stall or place. It is used of ships in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle. As applied to men, Skeat thinks it meant good or worthy at stealing; but the etymology is still unsettled.

2. This word has been talked about a lot. The earlier linguists interpreted it as meaning worth stealing. A less likely guess is that it means worth a stall or place. It’s used for ships in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle. When it comes to men, Skeat believes it meant good or worthy of stealing; however, the origin isn’t fully resolved yet.

----

----

CHAPTER XV.
Numerals.

88.

Numerals are either (a) Cardinal, expressing pure number, one, two, three; or (b) Ordinal, expressing rank or succession, first, second, third.

Numerals are either (a) Cardinal, representing a simple number, one, two, three; or (b) Ordinal, representing rank or order, first, second, third.

(a) Cardinals.

89.

The Cardinals fall into the three following syntactic groups:

The Cardinals fall into the following three syntactic groups:

    Group I.

Group 1.

1. ān

ān

2. twēgen [twain]

2. two

3. ðrīe

3. three

These numerals are inflected adjectives. Ān, one, an, a, being a long stemmed monosyllable, is declined like gōd (§ 80). The weak form, āna, means alone.

These numbers are inflected adjectives. Ān, one, an, a, being a long-stemmed monosyllable, declines like gōd (§ 80). The weak form, āna, means alone.

58

Twēgen and ðrīe, which have no singular, are thus declined:

Two and three, which have no singular form, are thus declined:

Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut.
Plur. N.A. twēgen twā twā (tū) ðrīe ðrēo ðrēo
G. twēgra twēgra twēgra ðrēora ðrēora ðrēora
D. { twǣm
(twām)
twǣm
(twām)
twǣm
(twām)
ðrīm ðrīm ðrīm
90.

Group II.

Group 2.

4. fēower
5. fīf
6. siex
7. seofon
8. eahta
9. nigon
10. tīen
11. ęndlefan
12. twęlf
13. ðrēotīene
14. fēowertīene
15. fīftīene
16. siextīene
17. seofontīene
18. eahtatīene
19. nigontīene

These words are used chiefly as uninflected adjectives: on gewitscipe ðrēora oþþe fēower bisceopa, on testimony of three or four bishops; on siex dagum, in six days; ān nǣdre ðe hæfde nigon hēafdu, a serpent which had nine heads; æðeling eahtatīene wintra, a prince of eighteen winters.

These words are mainly used as simple adjectives: on gewitscipe ðrēora oþþe fēower bisceopa, on the testimony of three or four bishops; on siex dagum, in six days; ān nǣdre ðe hæfde nigon hēafdu, a serpent that had nine heads; æðeling eahtatīene wintra, a prince of eighteen years.

91.

Group III.

Group 3.

20. twēntig
21. ān ǫnd twēntig
30. ðrītig
40. fēowertig
50. fīftig
60. siextig
70. hundseofontig
80. hundeahtatig
90. hundnigontig
100. hund
200. twā hund
1000. ðūsend
2000. twā ðūsend

All these numbers are employed as neuter singular nouns, and are followed by the genitive plural: Næfde hē þēah mā ðonne twēntig hrȳðera, and twēntig scēapa, and 59 twēntig swȳna, He did not have, however, more than twenty (of) cattle, and twenty (of) sheep, and twenty (of) swine; Hīe hæfdon hundeahtatig scipa, They had eighty ships; twā hund mīla brād, two hundred miles broad; ðǣr wǣron seofon hund gūðfanena genumen, there were seven hundred standards captured; ān ðūsend mǫnna, a thousand men; Hannibales folces wæs twā ðūsend ofslagen, Of Hannibal’s men there were two thousand slain; Hīe ācuron ęndlefan ðūsend mǫnna, They chose eleven thousand men.

All these numbers are used as neuter singular nouns and are followed by the genitive plural: He didn’t have more than twenty cattle, and twenty sheep, and twenty swine; They had eighty ships, They had eighty ships; two hundred miles wide, two hundred miles wide; there were seven hundred standards captured, there were seven hundred standards captured; a thousand men, a thousand men; Of Hannibal’s men, two thousand were slain, Of Hannibal’s men, two thousand were slain; They chose eleven thousand men, They chose eleven thousand men.

Note 1.—Group III is rarely inflected. Almost the only inflectional endings that are added are (1) -es, a genitive singular termination for the numerals in -tig, and (2) -e, a dative singular for hund. (1) The first is confined to adjectives expressing extent of space or time, as, eald, old; brād, broad; hēah, high; and lǫng, long: ðæt is ðrītiges mīla lǫng, that is thirty miles long; Hē wæs ðrītiges gēara eald, He was thirty years old. (2) The second is employed after mid: mid twǣm hunde scipa, with two hundred ships; mid ðrīm hunde mǫnna, with three hundred men; Ðǣr wearð ... Regulus gefangen mid V hunde mǫnna, There was Regulus captured with five hundred men.

Note 1.—Group III is rarely changed. The only inflectional endings that are typically added are (1) -es, which is a genitive singular form for the numerals ending in -tig, and (2) -e, which is a dative singular for hund. (1) The first is limited to adjectives that express areas of space or time, such as eald, old; brād, broad; hēah, high; and lǫng, long: ðæt is ðrītiges mīla lǫng, that is thirty miles long; Hē wæs ðrītiges gēara eald, He was thirty years old. (2) The second is used after mid: mid twǣm hunde scipa, with two hundred ships; mid ðrīm hunde mǫnna, with three hundred men; Ðǣr wearð ... Regulus gefangen mid V hunde mǫnna, There was Regulus captured with five hundred men.

The statement made in nearly all the grammars that hunde occurs as a nominative and accusative plural is without foundation.

The claim in almost all the grammar books that hunde appears as a nominative and accusative plural is baseless.

Note 2.—Many numerals, otherwise indeclinable, are used in the genitive plural with the indefinite pronoun sum, which then means one of a certain number. In this peculiar construction, the numeral always precedes sum: fēowera sum, one of four (= with three others); Hē sǣde þæt hē syxa sum ofslōge syxtig, He said that he, with five others, slew sixty (whales); Hē wæs fēowertigra sum, He was one of forty.

Note 2.—Many numbers, which typically don't change form, are used in the genitive plural with the indefinite pronoun sum, which then means one of a certain number. In this unique structure, the number always comes before sum: fēowera sum, one of four (= with three others); Hē sǣde þæt hē syxa sum ofslōge syxtig, He said that he, with five others, killed sixty (whales); Hē wæs fēowertigra sum, He was one of forty.

Note 3.—These are the most common constructions with the Cardinals. The forms in -tig have only recently been investigated. A study of Wülfing’s citations shows that Alfred occasionally uses the forms in -tig (1) as adjectives with plural inflections: mid XXXgum cyningum, with thirty kings; and (2) as nouns with plural inflections: æfter siextigum daga, after sixty days. But both constructions are rare.

Note 3.—These are the most common constructions with the Cardinals. The forms in -tig have only recently been studied. An analysis of Wülfing’s citations shows that Alfred sometimes uses the forms in -tig (1) as adjectives with plural endings: mid XXXgum cyningum, with thirty kings; and (2) as nouns with plural endings: æfter siextigum daga, after sixty days. However, both constructions are uncommon.

60

(b) Ordinals.

92.

The Ordinals, except the first two, are formed from the Cardinals. They are:

The ordinals, except for the first two, are made from the cardinals. They are:

1. forma, ǣresta, fyrsta
2. ōðer, æfterra
3. ðridda
4. fēorða
5. fīfta
6. siexta
7. seofoða
8. eahtoða
9. nigoða
10. tēoða
11. ęndlefta
12. twęlfta
13. ðrēotēoða
14. fēowertēoða
15.

fīftēoða
etc.

fifty
etc.

20. twēntigoða
21. ān ǫnd twēntigoða
30.

ðrītigoða
etc.

ðrītigoða
etc.

Note.—There are no Ordinals corresponding to hund and ðūsend.

Note.—There are no Ordinals that match hund and ðūsend.

With the exception of ōðer (§ 77), all the Ordinals are declined as Weak Adjectives; the article, however, as in Mn.E., is frequently omitted: Brūtus wæs sē forma consul, Brutus was the first consul; Hēr ęndað sēo ǣreste bōc, ǫnd onginneð sēo ōðer, Here the first book ends, and the second begins; ðȳ fīftan dæge, on the fifth day; on ðǣm tēoðan gēare hiera gewinnes, in the tenth year of their strife; Hēo wæs twęlfte, She was twelfth; Sē wæs fēorða frǫm Agusto, He was fourth from Augustus.

With the exception of other (§ 77), all the Ordinals are declined as Weak Adjectives; the article, however, as in Modern English, is often omitted: Brutus was the first consul; Brutus was the first consul; Here the first book ends, and the second begins, Here the first book ends, and the second begins; on the fifth day, on the fifth day; in the tenth year of their strife, in the tenth year of their strife; She was twelfth, She was twelfth; He was fourth from Augustus, He was fourth from Augustus.

----

----

CHAPTER XVI.
Adverbs, Prepositions, and Conjunctions.

Adverbs.

93.

(1) Adverbs are formed by adding -e or -līce to the corresponding adjectives: sōð, true; sōðe or sōðlīce, truly; earmlīc, wretched; earmlīce, wretchedly; wīd, 61 wide; wīde, widely; micel, great; micle (micele), greatly, much.

(1) Adverbs are made by adding -e or -ly to the corresponding adjectives: true, true; truly or true-ly, truly; wretched, wretched; wretchedly, wretchedly; wide, 61 wide; widely, widely; great, great; greatly (much), greatly, much.

(2) The terminations -e and -līce are replaced in some adverbs by -(l)unga or -(l)inga: eallunga, entirely; fǣringa, suddenly; grundlunga, from the ground, completely.

(2) The endings -e and -līce are replaced in some adverbs by -(l)unga or -(l)inga: eallunga, entirely; fǣringa, suddenly; grundlunga, from the ground, completely.

Note 1.—In Mn.E. headlong, darkling, and groveling, originally adverbs, we have survivals of these endings.

Note 1.—In Modern English, headlong, darkling, and groveling, which were originally adverbs, still retain these endings.

(3) The genitive case is frequently used adverbially: sūðeweardes, southwards; ealles, altogether, entirely; dæges, by day; nihtes, by night; ðæs, from that time, afterwards. Cf. hys (= his) weges in Ðonne rīdeð ǣlc hys weges, Then rides each his way.

(3) The genitive case is often used like an adverb: sūðeweardes, southwards; ealles, altogether, entirely; dæges, by day; nihtes, by night; ðæs, from that time, afterwards. Cf. hys (= his) weges in Ðonne rīdeð ǣlc hys weges, Then rides each his way.

Note 2.—The adverbial genitive is abundantly preserved in Mn.E. Always, crossways, sideways, needs (= necessarily), sometimes, etc., are not plurals, but old genitive singulars. The same construction is seen in of course, of a truth, of an evening, of old, of late, and similar phrases.

Note 2.—The adverbial genitive is still commonly found in modern English. Terms like always, crossways, sideways, needs (meaning necessarily), sometimes, and others are not plural forms, but rather old genitive singulars. The same structure appears in expressions like of course, of a truth, of an evening, of old, of late, and similar phrases.

(4) Dative and instrumental plurals may be used as adverbs: hwīlum, at times, sometimes [whilom]; stundum (stund = period), from time to time; miclum, greatly. Especially common is the suffix -mǣlum (mǣl = time, measure [meal]), preserved adverbially in Mn.E. piecemeal: dropmǣlum, drop by drop; styccemǣlum (stycce = piece), piecemeal, here and there.

(4) Dative and instrumental plurals can be used as adverbs: hwīlum, at times, sometimes [whilom]; stundum (stund = period), from time to time; miclum, greatly. Especially common is the suffix -mǣlum (mǣl = time, measure [meal]), which is preserved adverbially in Modern English as piecemeal: dropmǣlum, drop by drop; styccemǣlum (stycce = piece), piecemeal, here and there.

(5) The suffix -an usually denotes motion from:

(5) The suffix -an typically indicates movement away from:

hēr, here. hider, hither. heonan, hence.
ðǣr, there. ðider, thither. ðǫnan, thence.
hwǣr, where? hwider, whither? hwǫnan, whence?
norðan, from the north.
ēastan, from the east.
hindan, from behind.
feorran, from far.
ūtan, from without.
62

(6) The adverb rihte (riht = right, straight) denotes motion toward in norðrihte, northward, due north; ēastrihte, due east; sūðrihte, due south; westrihte, due west.

(6) The adverb rihte (riht = right, straight) indicates motion toward in norðrihte, northward, due north; ēastrihte, due east; sūðrihte, due south; westrihte, due west.

Prepositions.

94.

The nominative is the only case in O.E. that is never governed by a preposition. Of the other cases, the dative and accusative occur most frequently with prepositions.

The nominative is the only case in Old English that is never controlled by a preposition. Among the other cases, the dative and accusative are the ones that commonly appear with prepositions.

(1) The prepositions that are most frequently found with the dative are:

(1) The prepositions that are most commonly used with the dative are:

æfter, after.

after

ǣt, at.

at, at.

be (), by, near, about.

be, by, near, about.

betwēonan (betuh), between.

between

būtan (būton), except.

būtan (būton), except.

for, for.

for, for.

frǫm (fram), from, by.

from

mid, with.

mid, with.

of, of, from.

of, of, from.

, to.

to, to.

tōforan, before.

tōforan, earlier.

tōweard, toward.

tōward, toward.

(2) The following prepositions require the accusative:

(2) The following prepositions need the accusative case:

geond, throughout [be-yond].

geond, throughout [beyond].

ofer, over, upon.

offer, over, on.

, until, up to.

or, until, up to.

ðurh, through.

through, through.

ymbe, about, around [um-while, ember-days].

about, around [um-while, ember-days].

(3) The preposition on (rarely in), meaning into, is usually followed by the accusative; but meaning in, on, or during, it takes the dative or instrumental. The preposition wið, meaning toward, may be followed by the genitive, dative, or accusative; but meaning against, and implying motion or hostility, the accusative is more common.

(3) The preposition on (rarely in), meaning into, is typically followed by the accusative; but when it means in, on, or during, it takes the dative or instrumental. The preposition wið, meaning toward, can be followed by the genitive, dative, or accusative; but when it means against, and implies motion or hostility, the accusative is more common.

(4) The following phrases are used prepositionally with the dative:

(4) The following phrases are used with the dative case:

63

be norðan, north of.

north of

be ēastan, east of.

east, east of.

be sūðan, south of.

south of

be westan, west of.

be western, west of.

tō ēacan, in addition to.

to add, in addition to.

on emnlange (efn-lang = evenly long), along.

on emnlange (efn-lang = evenly long), along.

tō emnes, along.

tō emnes, along.

(5) Prepositions regularly precede the noun or pronoun that they introduce; but by their adverbial nature they are sometimes drawn in front of the verb: And him wæs mycel męnegu tō gegaderod, And there was gathered unto him a great multitude. In relative clauses introduced by ðe, the preceding position is very common: sēo scīr ... ðe hē on būde, the district, ... which he dwelt in (= which he in-habited); Hē wæs swȳðe spēdig man on ðǣm ǣhtum ðe hiera spēda on bēoð, He was a very rich man in those possessions which their riches consist in; nȳhst ðǣm tūne ðe sē dēada man on līð, nearest the town that the dead man lies in.

(5) Prepositions typically come before the noun or pronoun they introduce, but because of their adverbial nature, they can sometimes appear in front of the verb: And him wæs mycel męnegu tō gegaderod, And there was gathered unto him a great multitude. In relative clauses beginning with ðe, it’s very common for them to precede the noun: sēo scīr ... ðe hē on būde, the district, ... which he dwelt in (= which he inhabited); Hē wæs swȳðe spēdig man on ðǣm ǣhtum ðe hiera spēda on bēoð, He was a very rich man in those possessions which their riches consist in; nȳhst ðǣm tūne ðe sē dēada man on līð, nearest the town that the dead man lies in.

Conjunctions.

95.

(1) The most frequently occurring conjunctions are:

(1) The most commonly used conjunctions are:

ac, but.
ǣr, before, ere.
būtan (būton), except that, unless.
ēac, also [eke].
for ðǣm } because.
for ðǣm ðe,
for ðon,
for ðon ðe,
for ðȳ, therefore.
gif, if.
hwæðer, whether.
ǫnd (and), and.
oððe, or.
ðæt, that, so that.
ðēah, though, however.

(2) The correlative conjunctions are:

The correlative conjunctions are:

ǣgðer ge . . . .  ge, both . . . . . . . . and.
ǣgðer . . . . . . .
oððe . . . . . . . .
ōðer
oððe
} either . . . . . . . or.
64 . . . . . . . . . . , neither . . . . . nor.
sam . . . . . . . . . sam, whether . . . . or.
swā . . . . . . . . . swā { the . . . . . . . . .
as
. . . . . . . . . .
the.
as.
ðā . . . . . . . . . . .
ðonne
. . . . . . .
ðā
ðonne
{ when . . . . . . . then.

----

----

CHAPTER XVII.
Comparing Adjectives and Adverbs.

Adjectives.

96.

(1) Adjectives are regularly compared by adding -ra for the comparative, and -ost (rarely -est) for the superlative:

(1) Adjectives are usually compared by adding -ra for the comparative and -ost (sometimes -est) for the superlative:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
earm, poor earmra earmost
rīce, rich rīcra rīcost
smæl, narrow smælra smalost
brād, broad brādra (brǣdra) brādost
swift, swift swiftra swiftost

(2) Forms with i-umlaut usually have superlative in -est:

(2) Forms with i-umlaut usually have the superlative in -est:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
eald, old ieldra ieldest
lǫng, long lęngra lęngest
strǫng, strong stręngra stręngest
geong, young giengra giengest
hēah, high hīerra hīehst

(3) The following adjectives are compared irregularly:

(3) The following adjectives are compared in an irregular way:

65
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
gōd, good bętra bętst
lȳtel, little, small lǣssa lǣst
micel, great, much māra mǣst
yfel, bad wiersa wierst

(4) The positive is sometimes supplied by an adverb:

(4) Sometimes an adverb provides the positive:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
feor, far fierra fierrest
nēah, near nēarra nīehst
ǣr, before ǣrra, former ǣrest, first

(5) The comparatives all follow the Weak Declension. The superlatives, when preceded by the definite article, are weak; but when used predicatively they are frequently strong: sē lǣsta dǣl, the least part; Ðonne cymeð sē man sē ðæt swiftoste hors hafað tō ðǣm ǣrestan dǣle and tō ðǣm mǣstan, Then comes the man that has the swiftest horse to the first part and to the largest. But, ðæt bȳne land is ēasteweard brādost (not brādoste), the cultivated land is broadest eastward; and (hit) bið ealra wyrta mǣst, and it is largest of all herbs; Ac hyra (= hiera) ār is mǣst on ðǣm gafole ðe ðā Finnas him gyldað, But their income is greatest in the tribute that the Fins pay them.

(5) The comparatives all follow the Weak Declension. The superlatives, when preceded by the definite article, are weak; but when used in a predicative way, they are often strong: the least part, the least part; Then comes the man that has the swiftest horse to the first part and to the largest, Then comes the man that has the swiftest horse to the first part and the largest. But, the cultivated land is broadest eastward (not broadest), the cultivated land is broadest eastward; and (it) is largest of all herbs, and it is the largest of all herbs; But their income is greatest in the tribute that the Fins pay them, But their income is greatest in the tribute that the Fins pay them.

(6) The comparative is usually followed by ðonne and the nominative case: Sē hwæl bið micle lǣssa ðonne ōðre hwalas, That whale is much smaller than other whales; Ðā wunda ðæs mōdes bēoð dīgelran ðonne ðā wunda ðæs līchaman. The wounds of the mind are more secret than the wounds of the body.

(6) The comparative is usually followed by than and the nominative case: The whale is much smaller than other whales, That whale is much smaller than other whales; The wounds of the mind are more secret than the wounds of the body. The wounds of the mind are more secret than the wounds of the body.

But when ðonne is omitted, the comparative is followed by the dative: Ūre Ālīesend, ðe māra is ǫnd 66 mǣrra eallum gesceaftum, Our Redeemer, who is greater and more glorious than all created things; nē ongeat hē nō hiene selfne bętran ōðrum gōdum mǫnnum, nor did he consider himself better than other good men.

But when then is left out, the comparative is followed by the dative: Our Redeemer, who is greater and more glorious than all created things, nor did he consider himself better than other good men.

Adverbs.

97.

(1) Adverbs are regularly compared by adding -or for the comparative and -ost (rarely -est) for the superlative:

(1) Adverbs are usually compared by adding -or for the comparative and -ost (rarely -est) for the superlative:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
georne, willingly geornor geornost
swīðe, very, severely swīðor, more swīðost, most, chiefly
ǣr, before ǣror, formerly ǣrest, first
norð, northwards norðor norðmest1

(2) The comparatives of a few adverbs may be found by dropping -ra of the corresponding adjective form:

(2) You can find the comparatives of some adverbs by dropping -ra from the related adjective form:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
lǫnge, long lęng lęngest
micle, much mǣst
wel, well bęt bętst

Expressions of Time.

98.

(1) Duration of time and extent of space are usually expressed by the accusative case: Ealle ðā hwīle ðe ðæt līc bið inne, All the time that the body is within; twēgen dagas, for two days; ealne weg, all the way, always.

(1) Duration of time and extent of space are usually expressed by the accusative case: All the time that the body is within; for two days; all the way, always.

67

(2) Time when is more often expressed by the instrumental case when no preposition is used: ðȳ ilcan dæge, the same day; ǣlce gēare, each year; ðȳ gēare, that year; ǣlce dæge, each day.

(2) Time is often expressed using the instrumental case when no preposition is used: the same day, the same day; each year, each year; that year, that year; each day, each day.

(3) Time or space within which is expressed by on and the dative: on sumera, in summer; on wintra, in winter; on fīf dagum, in five days; on fīf mīlum, in five miles; on ðissum gēare, in this year; on ðǣm tīman, in those times. Sometimes by the genitive without a preceding preposition: ðǣs gēares, in that year.

(3) Time or space expressed by on and the dative: on sumera, in summer; on wintra, in winter; on fīf dagum, in five days; on fīf mīlum, in five miles; on ðissum gēare, in this year; on ðǣm tīman, in those times. Sometimes using the genitive without a preceding preposition: ðǣs gēares, in that year.

99.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

ðæt gefylce [folc], troop, division.

that troop [people], unit, division.

ðæt lǫnd (land), land.

that land (land), land.

sēo mīl, mile.

the milk, mile.

ōðer ... ōðer, the one ... the other; the former ... the latter.

one ... the other, the first ... the second; the former ... the latter.

sē sige, victory.

sē sige, win.

sige2 habban, to win (the) victory.

get __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, to win (the) victory.

sprecan, to speak.

sprecan, to talk.

ðæt swīn (swȳn), swine, hog.

that pig (swine, hog).

wēste, waste.

waste, waste.

100.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Hē hæfð ðrēo swīðe swift hors. 2. Ic hæbbe nigontīene scēap ǫnd mā ðonne twēntig swīna. 3. Sēo gōde cwēn cīest twā hund mǫnna. 4. Uton feohtan wið ðā Dęne mid ðrīm hunde scipa. 5. Ǫnd hīe wǣron on twǣm gefylcum: on ōðrum wæs3 Bāchsęcg ǫnd Halfdęne ðā hǣðnan cyningas, ǫnd on ōðrum wǣron ðā eorlas. 6. Ðū spricst sōðlīce. 7. Ðonne rīt ǣlc mǫn his weges. 8. Æfter mǫnigum dagum, hæfde Ælfred cyning4 sige. 9. Ðis lǫnd is wēste styccemǣlum. 10. Ðēs feld is fīftiges mīla brād. 68 11. Ælfred cyning hæfde mǫnige frīend, for ðǣm ðe hē wæs ǣgðer ge wīs ge gōd. 12. Ðā hwalas, ðe ðū ymbe spricst, sind micle lǣssan ōðrum hwalum. 13. Hēo is ieldre ðonne hiere swuster, ac mīn brōðor is ieldra ðonne hēo. 14. Wē cumað tō ðǣm tūne ǣlce gēare. 15. Ðā męn ðe ðā swiftostan hors hǣfdon wǣron mid ðǣm Dęnum fēower dagas.

I. 1. He has three very fast horses. 2. I have nineteen sheep and more than twenty pigs. 3. The good queen counts two hundred men. 4. Let’s fight the Danes with three hundred ships. 5. And they were in two divisions: in one were the heathen kings Bāchsęcg and Halfdęne, and in the other were the earls. 6. You speak truly. 7. Then every man sets off on his way. 8. After many days, King Alfred had victory. 9. This land is often desolate. 10. This field is fifty miles wide. 68 11. King Alfred had many friends because he was both wise and good. 12. The whales you speak about are much smaller than other whales. 13. She is older than her sister, but my brother is older than she is. 14. We come to that town every year. 15. The men who had the fastest horses were with the Danes for four days.

II. 1. Our army (werod) was in two divisions: one was large, the other was small. 2. The richest men in the kingdom have more () than thirty ships. 3. He was much wiser than his brother. 4. He fights against the Northumbrians with two ships. 5. After three years King Alfred gained the victory. 6. Whosoever chooses these gifts, chooses well. 7. This man’s son is both wiser and better than his father. 8. When the king rides, then ride his thanes also. 9. The richest men are not always (ā) the wisest men.

II. 1. Our army was divided into two parts: one was large, and the other was small. 2. The wealthiest men in the kingdom have more than thirty ships. 3. He was much smarter than his brother. 4. He fights against the Northumbrians with two ships. 5. After three years, King Alfred achieved victory. 6. Whoever chooses these gifts makes a good choice. 7. This man’s son is both smarter and better than his father. 8. When the king rides, his thanes ride too. 9. The richest men are not always the smartest men.

1. This is really a double superlative, m being itself an old superlative suffix. Cf. Latin opti-m-us. In Mn.E. northmost and hindmost, -m-est has been confused with -most, with which etymologically it has nothing to do.

1. This is truly a double superlative, m being an old superlative suffix. See Latin opti-m-us. In Modern English, northmost and hindmost, -m-est has been mixed up with -most, which etymologically has nothing to do with it.

2. Sige usually, but not invariably, precedes habban.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Sige usually, but not always, precedes habban.

3. See p. 100, note on gefeaht.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See p. 100, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

4. The proper noun comes first in appositive expressions: Ælfred cyning, Sidroc eorl, Hēahmund bisceop.

4. The proper noun comes first in appositive expressions: Alfred king, Sidroc earl, Heahmund bishop.

----

----

CHAPTER XVIII.
Strong Verbs: Class I. (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.)

Syntax of Moods.

101.

Of the three hundred simple verbs belonging to the O.E. Strong Conjugation, it is estimated1 that seventy-eight have preserved their strong inflections in Mn.E., that eighty-eight have become weak, and that the remaining one hundred and thirty-four have entirely disappeared, their places being taken in most cases by verbs of Latin origin introduced through the Norman-French.

Of the three hundred simple verbs in the Old English Strong Conjugation, it's estimated that seventy-eight have kept their strong inflections in Modern English, eighty-eight have turned weak, and the remaining one hundred and thirty-four have completely vanished, often replaced by Latin-derived verbs introduced via Norman French.

69

Note.—Only the simple or primitive verbs, not the compound forms, are here taken into consideration. The proportionate loss, therefore, is really much greater. O.E. abounded in formative prefixes. “Thus from the Anglo-Saxon flōwan, to flow, ten new compounds were formed by the addition of various prefixes, of which ten, only one, oferflōwan, to overflow, survives with us. In a similar manner, from the verb sittan, to sit, thirteen new verbs were formed, of which not a single one is to be found to-day.” Lounsbury, ib. Part I, p. 107.

Note.—Only the simple or primitive verbs, not the compound forms, are considered here. As a result, the actual loss is much greater. Old English was rich in formative prefixes. “From the Anglo-Saxon flōwan, to flow, ten new compounds were created by adding various prefixes, but of those ten, only one, oferflōwan, to overflow, still exists today. Similarly, from the verb sittan, to sit, thirteen new verbs were generated, but none of them are found today.” Lounsbury, ib. Part I, p. 107.

102.

Class I: The “Drive” Conjugation.

Class I: The "Drive" Conjugation.

Vowel Succession: ī, ā, i, i.

Vowel Sequence: ī, ā, i, i.

Infinitive. Preterit Sing. Preterit Plur. Past Part.
Drīf-an drāf drif-on gedrif-en, to drive.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present. Present.
Sing. 1. Ic drīf-e Sing. 1. Ic } drīf-e
2. ðū drīf-st (drīf-est) 2. ðū
3. hē drīf-ð (drīf-eð) 3.
 
Plur. 1. } (drīf-að) Plur. 1. } drīf-en
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Preterit. Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic drāf Sing. 1. Ic } drif-e
2. ðū drif-e 2. ðū
3. hē drāf 3.
 
Plur. 1. } drif-on Plur. 1. } drif-en
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Imperative. Infinitive. Present Participle.
Sing. 2. drīf drīf-an drīf-ende
Plur. 1. drīf-an
2. drīf-að Gerund. Past Participle.
tō drīf-anne (-enne) gedrif-en
70

Tense Formation of Strong Verbs.

103.

(1) It will be seen from the conjugation of drīfan that the present stem in all strong verbs is used throughout the present indicative, the present subjunctive, the imperative, the infinitive, the gerund, and the present participle. More than half of the endings, therefore, of the Strong Conjugation are added directly to the present stem.

(1) From the conjugation of drīfan, you can see that the present stem in all strong verbs is used in the present indicative, the present subjunctive, the imperative, the infinitive, the gerund, and the present participle. This means that more than half of the endings of the Strong Conjugation are directly added to the present stem.

(2) That the preterit singular stem is used in only two forms of the verb, the 1st and 3d persons singular of the preterit indicative: Ic drāf, hē drāf.

(2) That the preterit singular stem is used in only two forms of the verb, the 1st and 3rd person singular of the past indicative: I drove, he drove.

(3) That the preterit plural stem is used in the preterit plural indicative, in the second person of the preterit singular indicative, and in the singular and plural of the preterit subjunctive.

(3) That the preterit plural stem is used in the preterit plural indicative, in the second person of the preterit singular indicative, and in both the singular and plural forms of the preterit subjunctive.

(4) That the stem of the past participle (gedrif-) is used for no other form.

(4) That the stem of the past participle (gedrif-) is used for no other form.

Syntax of the Verb.

104.

The Indicative Mood2 represents the predicate as a reality. It is used both in independent and in dependent clauses, its function in O.E. corresponding with its function in Mn.E

The Indicative Mood2 represents the predicate as a reality. It's used in both independent and dependent clauses, functioning in Old English the same way it does in Modern English

105.

The Subjunctive Mood represents the predicate as an idea.3 It is of far more frequent occurrence in O.E. than in Mn.E.

The Subjunctive Mood shows the predicate as an idea.3 It appears much more often in Old English than in Modern English.

71

1. When used in independent clauses it denotes desire, command, or entreaty, and usually precedes its subject: Sīe ðīn nama gehālgod, Hallowed be Thy name; Ne swęrigen gē, Do not swear.

1. When used in independent clauses, it expresses desire, command, or request, and typically comes before its subject: Sīe ðīn nama gehālgod, Hallowed be Thy name; Ne swęrigen gē, Do not swear.

2. In dependent clauses it denotes uncertainty, possibility, or mere futurity.4 (a) Concessive clauses (introduced by ðēah, though) and (b) temporal clauses (introduced by ǣr, ǣr ðǣm ðe, before) are rarely found with any other mood than the subjunctive. The subjunctive is also regularly used in Alfredian prose (c) after verbs of saying, even when no suggestion of doubt or discredit attaches to the narration.5 “Whether the statement refer to a fact or not, whether the subject-matter be vouched for by the reporter, as regards its objective reality and truth, the subjunctive does not tell. It simply represents a statement as reported”6: ðēah man āsętte twēgen fǣtels full ealað oððe wæteres, though one set two vessels full of ale or water; ǣr ðǣm ðe hit eall forhęrgod wǣre, before it was all ravaged; Hē sǣde ðæt Norðmanna land wǣre swȳðe lang and swȳðe smæl, He said that the Norwegians’ land was very long and very narrow.

2. In dependent clauses, it indicates uncertainty, possibility, or simply the future. 4 (a) Concessive clauses (introduced by ðēah, though) and (b) temporal clauses (introduced by ǣr, ǣr ðǣm ðe, before) are seldom found with any mood other than the subjunctive. The subjunctive is also commonly used in Alfredian prose (c) following verbs of saying, even when there's no implication of doubt or discredit associated with the narration. 5 “Whether the statement refers to a fact or not, whether the subject matter is confirmed by the reporter concerning its objective reality and truth, the subjunctive does not clarify. It merely presents a statement as reported.” 6: ðēah man āsętte twēgen fǣtels full ealað oððe wæteres, though one set two vessels full of ale or water; ǣr ðǣm ðe hit eall forhęrgod wǣre, before it was all ravaged; Hē sǣde ðæt Norðmanna land wǣre swȳðe lang and swȳðe smæl, He said that the Norwegians’ land was very long and very narrow.

72
106.

The Imperative is the mood of command or intercession: Iōhannes, cum tō mē, John, come to me; And forgyf ūs ūre gyltas, And forgive us our trespasses; Ne drīf ūs fram ðē, Do not drive us from thee.

The imperative is the mood of command or request: John, come to me; And forgive us our trespasses; Do not drive us away from you.

107.

(1) The Infinitive and Participles are used chiefly in verb-phrases (§§ 138-141); but apart from this function, the Infinitive, being a neuter noun, may serve as the subject or direct object of a verb. Hātan (to command, bid), lǣtan (to let, permit), and onginnan (to begin) are regularly followed by the Infinitive: Hine rīdan lyste, To ride pleased him; Hēt ðā bǣre sęttan, He bade set down the bier;7 Lǣtað ðā lȳtlingas tō mē cuman, Let the little ones come to me; ðā ongann hē sprecan, then began he to speak.

(1) The Infinitive and Participles are mainly used in verb phrases (§§ 138-141); but besides this role, the Infinitive, as a neuter noun, can also function as the subject or direct object of a verb. Hātan (to command, bid), lǣtan (to let, permit), and onginnan (to begin) are typically followed by the Infinitive: Hine rīdan lyste, To ride pleased him; Hēt ðā bǣre sęttan, He bade set down the bier; 7 Lǣtað ðā lȳtlingas tō mē cuman, Let the little ones come to me; ðā ongann hē sprecan, then began he to speak.

(2) The Participles may be used independently in the dative absolute construction (an imitation of the Latin ablative absolute), usually for the expression of time:8 Him ðā gȳt sprecendum, While he was yet speaking; gefylledum dagum, the days having been fulfilled.

(2) The participles can be used independently in the dative absolute construction (similar to the Latin ablative absolute), usually to express time: 8 While he was still speaking, While he was yet speaking; after the days were fulfilled, the days having been fulfilled.

108.

The Gerund, or Gerundial Infinitive, is used:

The gerund, or gerundial infinitive, is used:

(1) To express purpose: Ūt ēode sē sāwere his sǣd tō sāwenne, Out went the sower his seed to sow.

(1) To express purpose: Out went the sower his seed to sow, Out went the sower his seed to sow.

(2) To expand or determine the meaning of a noun or adjective: Sȳmōn, ic hæbbe ðē tō sęcgenne sum ðing, Simon, I have something to say to thee; Hit is scǫndlīc ymb swelc tō sprecanne, It is shameful to speak about such things.

(2) To expand or clarify the meaning of a noun or adjective: Simon, I have something to say to you; It is shameful to talk about such things.

73

(3) After bēon (wesan) to denote duty or necessity: Hwæt is nū mā ymbe ðis tō sprecanne, What more is there now to say about this? ðonne is tō geðęncenne hwaet Crīst self cwæð, then it behooves to bethink what Christ himself said.

(3) After be (was) to indicate duty or necessity: What more is there now to say about this? Then we need to consider what Christ himself said.

Note.—The Gerund is simply the dative case of the Infinitive after . It began very early to supplant the simple Infinitive; hence the use of to with the Infinitive in Mn.E. As late as the Elizabethan age the Gerund sometimes replaced the Infinitive even after the auxiliary verbs:

Note.—The Gerund is just the dative case of the Infinitive after to. It started to take the place of the simple Infinitive quite early on; that's why we use to with the Infinitive in Modern English. Even during the Elizabethan era, the Gerund sometimes replaced the Infinitive, even after auxiliary verbs:

    “Some pagan shore,

“Some pagan beach,

Where these two Christian armies might combine

Where these two Christian armies could unite

The blood of malice in a vein of league,

The blood of hatred in a vein of alliance,

And not to spend it so unneighbourly.”

And not to spend it so unfriendly.”

—King John, V, ii, 39.

—King John, Act V, Scene ii, 39.

Note.—The Gerund is simply the When to lost the meaning of purpose and came to be considered as a merely formal prefix, for was used to supplement the purpose element: What went ye out for to see?9

Note.—The Gerund is simply the When to lost its meaning of purpose and became just a formal prefix, for was used to add the purpose element: What did you go out to see?9

1. Lounsbury, English Language, Part II, § 241.

1. Lounsbury, English Language, Part II, § 241.

2. Usage sanctions mood, but the better spelling would be mode. It is from the Lat. modus, whereas mood (= temper) is O.E. mōd.

2. Usage sanctions mood, but the better term would be mode. It comes from the Latin modus, while mood (meaning temper) is derived from Old English mōd.

3. Gildersleeve’s Latin Grammar, § 255.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Gildersleeve’s Latin Grammar, § 255.

4. Thus when Alfred writes that an event took place before the founding of Rome, he uses the subjunctive: ǣr ðǣm ðe Rōmeburh getimbrod wǣre = before Rome were founded; but, æfter ðǣm ðe Rōmeburh getimbrod wæs = after Rome was founded.

4. Thus, when Alfred writes that an event happened before the founding of Rome, he uses the subjunctive: ǣr ðǣm ðe Rōmeburh getimbrod wǣre = before Rome were founded; but, æfter ðǣm ðe Rōmeburh getimbrod wæs = after Rome was founded.

5. “By the time of Ælfric, however, the levelling influence of the indicative [after verbs of saying] has made considerable progress.”—Gorrell, Indirect Discourse in Anglo-Saxon (Dissertation, 1895), p. 101.

5. "By Ælfric's time, though, the leveling effect of the indicative [following verbs of saying] had made significant strides."—Gorrell, Indirect Discourse in Anglo-Saxon (Dissertation, 1895), p. 101.

6. Hotz, On the Use of the Subjunctive Mood in Anglo-Saxon (Zürich, 1882).

6. Hotz, On the Use of the Subjunctive Mood in Anglo-Saxon (Zürich, 1882).

7. Not, He commanded the bier to be set down. The Mn.E. passive in such sentences is a loss both in force and directness.

7. Not, He commanded the bier to be set down. The modern English passive in such sentences loses both impact and clarity.

8. Callaway, The Absolute Participle in Anglo-Saxon (Dissertation, 1889), p. 19.

8. Callaway, The Absolute Participle in Anglo-Saxon (Dissertation, 1889), p. 19.

9. This is not the place to discuss the Gerund in Mn.E., the so-called “infinitive in -ing.” The whole subject has been befogged for the lack of an accepted nomenclature, one that shall do violence neither to grammar nor to history.

9. This isn't the right place to talk about the gerund in Modern English, the so-called “infinitive in -ing.” The entire topic has been clouded due to the absence of a widely accepted naming system, one that won't compromise either grammar or history.

----

----

74

CHAPTER XIX.
Strong Verbs: Classes II and III.

109.

Class II: The “Choose” Conjugation.

Class II: The "Choose" Verb Form.

Vowel Succession: ēo, ēa, u, o.

Vowel Sequence: ēo, ēa, u, o.

Infinitive. 1 Pret. Sing. Pret. Plur. 2 Past Part. 2
cēos-an, cēas, cur-on gecor-en, to choose.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present. Present.
Sing. 1. Ic cēos-e Sing. 1. Ic } cēos-e
2. ðū cīest (cēos-est) 2. ðū
3. hē cīest (cēos-eð) 3.
 
Plur. 1. } cēos-að Plur. 1. } cēos-en
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Preterit. Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic cēas Sing. 1. Ic } cur-e
2. ðū cur-e 2. ðū
3. hē cēas 3.
 
Plur. 1. } cur-on Plur. 1. } cur-en
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Imperative. Infinitive. Present Participle.
Sing. 2. cēos cēos-an cēos-ende
Plur. 1. cēos-an
2. cēos-að Gerund. Past Participle.
tō cēos-anne (-enne) gecor-en
75
110.

Class III: The “Bind” Conjugation.

Class III: The “Bind” Conjugation.

Vowel Succession: i
e
} , a, u, u
o
} .

The present stem ends in m, n, l, r, or h, + one or more consonants:

The current stem ends with m, n, l, r, or h, followed by one or more consonants:

m: belimp-an, } belǫmp
belamp
} , belump-on, belump-en, to belong.
n: bind-an, } bǫnd
band
} , bund-on, gebund-en, to bind.
l: help-an, healp, hulp-on, geholp-en, to help.
r: weorð-an, wearð, wurd-on, geword-en, to become.
h: gefeoht-an, gefeaht, gefuht-on, gefoht-en, to fight.

Note 1.—If the present stem ends in a nasal (m, n) + a consonant, the past participle retains the u of the pret. plur.; but if the present stem ends in a liquid (l, r) or h, + a consonant, the past participle has o instead of u.

Note 1.—If the current stem ends with a nasal sound (m, n) followed by a consonant, the past participle keeps the u from the past plural; however, if the current stem ends with a liquid sound (l, r) or h followed by a consonant, the past participle uses o instead of u.

Note 2.—Why do we not find *halp, *warð, and *faht in the pret. sing.? Because a before l, r, or h, + a consonant, underwent “breaking” to ea. Breaking also changes every e followed by r or h, + a consonant, to eo: weorðan (< *werðan), feohtan (< *fehtan).

Note 2.—Why don’t we see *halp, *warð, and *faht in the past tense singular? Because a before l, r, or h, followed by a consonant, underwent “breaking” to ea. Breaking also changes every e followed by r or h, plus a consonant, to eo: weorðan (< *werðan), feohtan (< *fehtan).

111.

 

Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present. Present.
Sing. 1. Ic bind-e Sing. 1. Ic }
2. ðū bintst (bind-est) 2. ðū bind-e
3. hē bint (bind-eð) 3.
 
Plur. 1. } bind-að Plur. 1. } bind-en
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Preterit. Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic bǫnd Sing. 1. Ic }
2. ðū bund-e 2. ðū bund-e
3. hē bǫnd 3.
76  
Plur. 1. } bund-on Plur. 1. } bund-en
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Imperative. Infinitive. Present Participle.
Sing. 2. bind bind-an bind-ende
Plur. 1. bind-an
2. bind-að Gerund. Past Participle.
tō bind-anne (-enne) gebund-en
112.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

ðæt gefeoht, fight, battle.

that fight, fight, battle.

sēo geręcednes, narration [ręccan].

the narrative, narration [to tell].

ðæt gesceap, creation [scieppan].

that creation, creation [scieppan].

sēo hęrgung (§ 39, (3)), harrying, plundering [hęrgian].

the raid (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), harrying, plundering [hergian].

sē medu (medo) (§ 51), mead.

honey wine (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), mead.

sēo meolc, milk.

the milk, milk.

sē middangeard, world [middle-yard].

middle-earth, world.

sē munuc, monk [monachus].

monk, monk [monachus].

sēo mȳre, mare [mearh].

the mare, mare [horse].

hē sǣde, he said.

he said

hīe sǣdon, they said.

they said.

sēo spēd, riches [speed].

the speed, wealth [speed].

spēdig, rich, prosperous [speedy].

wealthy, affluent, thriving [speedy].

sēo tīd, time [tide].

the time, time [tide].

unspēdig, poor.

slow, poor.

sē westanwind, west-wind.

west wind, west wind.

ðæt wīn, wine.

that wine, wine.

ārīsan, ārās, ārison, ārisen, to arise.
bīdan, bād, bidon, gebiden, to remain, expect (with gen.)
drēogan,3 drēag, drugon, gedrogen, to endure, suffer.
drincan, drǫnc, druncon, gedruncen, to drink.
findan, fǫnd, fundon, gefunden, to find.
geswīcan geswāc, geswicon, geswicen,

to cease, cease from (with gen.)

to stop, stop from (with gen.)

iernan (yrnan), ǫrn, urnon, geurnen, to run.
onginnan, ongǫnn, ongunnon, ongunnen, to begin.
rīdan, rād, ridon, geriden, to ride.
singan, sǫng, sungon, gesungen, to sing.
wrītan, wrāt, writon, gewriten, to write.
77
113.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Æfter ðissum wordum, sē munuc wrāt ealle ðā geręcednesse on ānre bēc. 2. Ðā eorlas ridon ūp ǣr ðǣm ðe ðā Dęne ðæs gefeohtes geswicen. 3. Cædmon sǫng ǣrest be middangeardes gesceape. 4. Sē cyning ǫnd ðā rīcostan męn drincað mȳran meolc, ǫnd ðā unspēdigan drincað medu. 5. Ǫnd hē ārās ǫnd sē wind geswāc. 6. Hīe sǣdon ðæt hīe ðǣr westwindes biden. 7. Hwæt is nū mā ymbe ðās ðing tō sprecanne? 8. Ðā sęcgas ongunnon geswīcan ðǣre hęrgunga. 9. Ðā bēag ðæt lǫnd ðǣr ēastryhte, oððe sēo sǣ in on ðæt lǫnd. 10. Ðās lǫnd belimpað tō, ðǣm Ęnglum. 11. Ðēah ðā Dęne ealne dæg gefuhten, gīet hæfde Ælfred cyning sige. 12. Ǫnd ðæs (afterwards) ymbe ānne mōnað gefeaht Ælfred cyning wið ealne ðone hęre æt Wiltūne.

I. 1. After these words, the monk wrote down everything in one book. 2. The earls rode up before the Danes were defeated in battle. 3. Cædmon sang first about the creation of the world. 4. The king and the wealthiest men drank good mead, while the unfortunate drank ale. 5. And he rose up, and the wind subsided. 6. They said that they were awaiting the west wind there. 7. What more is there to say about these things now? 8. The warriors then began to flee from the devastation. 9. The land was either plundered or the sea came into the land. 10. This land belonged to the English. 11. Although the Danes fought all day, King Alfred still had victory. 12. And afterward, about a month later, King Alfred fought against the entire army at Wilton.

II. 1. The most prosperous men drank mare’s milk and wine, but the poor men drank mead. 2. I suffered many things before you began to help me (dat.). 3. About two days afterwards (Ðæs ymbe twēgen dagas), the plundering ceased. 4. The king said that he fought against all the army (hęre). 5. Although the Danes remained one month (§ 98, (1)), they did not begin to fight. 6. These gifts belonged to my brother. 7. The earls were glad because their lord was (indicative) with them. 8. What did you find? 9. Then wrote he about (be) the wise man’s deeds. 10. What more is there to endure?

II. 1. The wealthiest people drank mare's milk and wine, but the less fortunate drank mead. 2. I went through a lot before you started helping me (dat.). 3. About two days later (Ðæs ymbe twēgen dagas), the raiding stopped. 4. The king said he fought against the entire army (hęre). 5. Even though the Danes stayed for a month (§ 98, (1)), they didn't start fighting. 6. These gifts belonged to my brother. 7. The earls were happy because their lord was (indicative) with them. 8. What did you discover? 9. Then he wrote about (be) the wise man's actions. 10. What else is there to bear?

1. A few verbs of Class II have ū instead of ēo in the infinitive:

1. Some Class II verbs have ū instead of ēo in the infinitive:

brūcan, brēac, brucon, gebrocen, to enjoy [brook].
būgan, bēag, bugon, gebogen, to bend, bow.

2. By a law known as Grammatical Change, final ð, s, and h of strong verbs generally become d, r, and g, respectively, in the preterit plural and past participle.

2. According to a rule called Grammatical Change, the final ð, s, and h of strong verbs usually change to d, r, and g, respectively, in the past tense plural and past participle.

3. Cf. the Scotch “to dree one’s weird” = to endure one’s fate.

3. See the Scottish expression “to dree one’s weird” = to face one’s destiny.

----

----

78

CHAPTER XX.
Strong Verbs: Classes IV, V, VI, and VII.
Contract Verbs.

[The student can now complete the conjugation for himself (§ 103). Only the principal parts will be given.]

[The student can now complete the conjugation on their own (§ 103). Only the main forms will be provided.]

114.

Class IV: The “Bear” Conjugation.

Class IV: The "Bear" Conjugation.

Vowel Succession: e, æ, ǣ, o.

Vowel succession: e, æ, ǣ, o.

The present stem ends in l, r, or m, no consonant following:

The present stem ends in l, r, or m, with no consonant following:

l: hel-an, hæl, hǣl-on, gehol-en, to conceal.
r: ber-an, bær, bǣr-on, gebor-en, to bear.

The two following verbs are slightly irregular:

The two verbs below are a bit irregular:

m: { nim-an,
cum-an,
nōm (nam),
c(w)ōm,
nōm-on (nām-on),
c(w)ōm-on,
genum-en,
gecum-en,
to take.
to come.
115.

Class V: The “Give” Conjugation.

Class V: The “Give” Conjugation.

Succession of Vowels: e (ie), æ, ǣ, e.

Succession of Vowels: e (ie), æ, ǣ, e.

The present stem ends in a single consonant, never a liquid or nasal:

The present stem ends with a single consonant, never with a liquid or nasal:

met-an, mæt, mǣton, gemet-en, to measure, mete.
gief-an, geaf, gēaf-on, gegief-en, to give.

Note 1.—The palatal consonants, g, c, and sc, convert a following e into ie, æ into ea, and ǣ into ēa. Hence giefan (< *gefan), geaf (< *gæf), gēafon (< *gǣfon), gegiefen (< *gegefen). This change is known as Palatalization. See § 8.

Note 1.—The palatal consonants, g, c, and sc, change a following e into ie, æ into ea, and ǣ into ēa. So, giefan (< *gefan), geaf (< *gæf), gēafon (< *gǣfon), gegiefen (< *gegefen). This change is called Palatalization. See § 8.

Note 2.—The infinitives of the following important verbs are only apparently exceptional:

Note 2.—The infinitives of the following important verbs may seem unusual, but they're not truly exceptional:

biddan, bæd, bǣd-on, gebed-en, to ask for [bid].
licgan, læg, lǣg-on, geleg-en, to lie, extend.
sittan, sæt, sǣt-on, geset-en, to sit.
79

The original e reappears in the participial stems. It was changed to i in the present stems on account of a former -jan in the infinitive (bid-jan, etc.). See § 61. To the same cause is due the doubling of consonants in the infinitive. All simple consonants in O.E., with the exception of r, were doubled after a short vowel, when an original j followed.

The original e shows up again in the participial stems. It got changed to i in the present stems because of a former -jan in the infinitive (bid-jan, etc.). See § 61. The same reason explains the doubling of consonants in the infinitive. In Old English, all simple consonants, except for r, were doubled after a short vowel when an original j was present.

116.

Class VI: The “Shake” Conjugation.

Class VI: The “Shake” Conjugation.

Succession of Vowels: a, ō, ō, a.

Succession of Vowels: a, ō, ō, a.

scac-an, scōc, scōc-on, gescac-en, to shake.
far-an, fōr, fōr-on, gefar-en, to go [fare].
117.

Class VII: The “Fall” Conjugation.

Class VII: The "Fall" Conjugation.

Vowel Succession: ā
ǣ
} , ē, ē, ā
ǣ
} ; or ea
ēa
ō
} , ēo, ēo, ea
ēa
ō
} .
(1) hāt-an, hēt, hēt-on, gehāt-en, { to call, name,
command.
lǣt-an, lēt, lēt-on, gelǣt-en,   to let.
(2) feall-an, fēoll, fēoll-on, gefeall-en,   to fall.
heald-an, hēold, hēold-on, geheald-en,   to hold.
hēaw-an, hēow, hēow-on, gehēaw-en,   to hew.
grōw-an, grēow, grēow-on, gegrōw-en,   to grow.

Note 1.—This class consists of the Reduplicating Verbs; that is, those verbs that originally formed their preterits not by internal vowel change (ablaut), but by prefixing to the present stem the initial consonant + e (cf. Gk. λέ-λοιπα and Lat. dĕ-di). Contraction then took place between the syllabic prefix and the root, the fusion resulting in ē or ēo: *he-hat > heht > hēt.

Note 1.—This class includes the Reduplicating Verbs; that is, those verbs that originally formed their past tense not by changing the internal vowel (ablaut), but by adding the initial consonant + e to the present stem (cf. Gk. the rest and Lat. dĕ-di). Then, contraction happened between the syllabic prefix and the root, resulting in ē or ēo: *he-hat > heht > hēt.

Note 2.—A peculiar interest attaches to hātan: the forms hātte and hātton are the sole remains in O.E. of the original Germanic passive. They are used both as presents and as preterits: hātte = I am or was called, he is or was called. No other verb in O.E. could have a passive sense without calling in the aid of the verb to be (§ 141).

Note 2.—There's a unique interest in hātan: the forms hātte and hātton are the only remnants in Old English of the original Germanic passive. They can be used as both present and past tense: hātte = I am or was called, he is or was called. No other verb in Old English could convey a passive meaning without relying on the verb to be (§ 141).

80

Contract Verbs.

118.

The few Contract Verbs found in O.E. do not constitute a new class; they fall under Classes I, II, V, VI, and VII, already treated. The present stem ended originally in h. This was lost before -an of the infinitive, contraction and compensatory lengthening being the result. The following are the most important of these verbs:

The few Contract Verbs found in Old English don't create a new category; they fit into Classes I, II, V, VI, and VII, which have already been discussed. The present stem originally ended in h. This was dropped before -an of the infinitive, leading to contraction and compensatory lengthening. Here are the most important of these verbs:

Classes.

Classes.

I. ðēon (< *ðīhan), ðāh, ðig-on, } geðig-en
geðung-en
} , to thrive.
II. tēon (< *tēohan), tēah, tug-on, getog-en, to draw, go [tug].
V. sēon (< *sehwan), seah, sāw-on, gesew-en, to see.
VI. slēan (< *slahan), slōh, slōg-on, geslæg-en, to slay.
VII. fōn (< *fōhan), fēng, fēng-on, gefǫng-en, to seize [fang].
119.

The Present Indicative of these verbs runs as follows (see rules of i-umlaut, § 58):

The Present Indicative of these verbs is as follows (see rules of i-umlaut, § 58):

Sing. 1. Ic ðēo tēo sēo slēa
2. ðū ðīhst tīehst siehst sliehst fēhst
3. hē ðīhð tīehð siehð sliehð fēhð
Plur. 1. }
2. ðēoð tēoð sēoð slēað fōð
3. hīe

The other tenses and moods are regularly formed from the given stems.

The other tenses and moods are consistently created from the provided stems.

120.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

sēo ǣht, property, possession [āgan].

the property, property, possession [to own].

aweg, away [on weg].

, away [on weg].

sēo fierd, English army [faran].

sēo fierd, English army [go].

sē hęre, Danish army [hęrgian].

hear ye, Danish army [hęrgian].

on gehwæðre hǫnd, on both sides.

on either hand, on both sides.

sige niman (= sige habban), to win (the) victory.

go ahead (= sure, go for it), to win (the) victory.

sēo sprǣc, speech, language.

speech, speech, language.

81

tō rīce fōn, to come to the throne.1

to rise for, to come to the throne.1

ðæt wæl [Val-halla]

that wall [Val-halla]

sē wælsliht,

sē wælsliht

}

slaughter, carnage.

slaughter, carnage.

sē weall, wall, rampart.

the wall, wall, rampart.

ðæt wildor, wild beast, reindeer.

that wild deer, wild animal, reindeer.

sē wīngeard, vineyard.

vineyard, vineyard.

ābrecan,2 ābræc, ābrǣcon, ābrocen, to break down.
cweðan, cwæð, cwǣdon, gecweden, to say [quoth].
gesēon, geseah, gesāwon, gesewen, to see.
grōwan, grēow, grēowon, gegrōwen, to grow.
ofslēan, ofslōh, ofslōgon, ofslægen, to slay.
sprecan, spræc, sprǣcon, gesprecen, to speak.
stelan, stæl, stǣlon, gestolen, to steal.
stǫndan, stōd, stōdon, gestǫnden, to stand.
weaxan, wēox, wēoxon, geweaxen, to grow, increase [wax].
121.

Exercises.

Workouts.

I. 1. Æfter ðǣm sōðlīce (indeed) ealle męn sprǣcon āne (one) sprǣce. 2. Ǫnd hē cwæð: “Ðis is ān folc, ǫnd ealle hīe sprecað āne sprǣce.” 3. On sumum stōwum wīngeardas grōwað. 4. Hē hēt ðā nǣdran ofslēan. 5. Ðā Ęngle ābrǣcon ðone lǫngan weall, ǫnd sige nōmon. 6. Ǫnd ðæt sǣd grēow ǫnd wēox. 7. Ic ne geseah ðone mǫn sē ðe ðæs cnapan adesan stæl. 8. Hē wæs swȳðe spēdig man on ðǣm ǣhtum ðe hiera spēda on3 bēoð, ðæt is, on wildrum. 9. Ǫnd ðǣr wearð (was) micel wælsliht on gehwæðre hǫnd. 10. Ǫnd æfter ðissum gefeohte cōm Ælfred cyning mid his fierde, ǫnd gefeaht wið ealne ðone hęre, ǫnd sige nōm. 11. Ðēos burg hātte4 Æscesdūn (Ashdown). 12. Ðǣre cwēne līc læg on ðǣm hūse. 13. Ǫnd sē dǣl ðe ðǣr aweg cōm wæs swȳðe lȳtel. 14. Ǫnd ðæs ðrēotīene dagas Æðered tō rīce fēng.

I. 1. After that, truly, all men spoke one language. 2. And he said: “This is one people, and they all speak one language.” 3. In some places vineyards grow. 4. He commanded the serpents to be killed. 5. Then the English broke down the long wall, and victory was won. 6. And that seed grew and flourished. 7. I did not see the man who was the ruler of the community. 8. He was a very wealthy man in the possessions that were his, that is, in wild animals. 9. And there was great slaughter in every hand. 10. And after this battle came King Alfred with his army and fought against the whole army, and victory was won. 11. This city is called Ashdown. 12. The queen's body lay in the house. 13. And the part that came away was very small. 14. And on the thirteenth day, Æthelred came to power.

II. 1. The men stood in the ships and fought against the Danes. 2. Before the thanes came, the king rode away. 82 3. They said (sǣdon) that all the men spoke one language. 4. They bore the queen’s body to Wilton. 5. Alfred gave many gifts to his army (dat. without ) before he went away. 6. These men are called earls. 7. God sees all things. 8. The boy held the reindeer with (mid) his hands. 9. About six months afterwards, Alfred gained the victory, and came to the throne. 10. He said that there was very great slaughter on both sides.

II. 1. The men stood on the ships and fought against the Danes. 2. Before the thanes arrived, the king rode away. 82 3. They said that all the men spoke the same language. 4. They brought the queen’s body to Wilton. 5. Alfred gave many gifts to his army before he left. 6. These men are called earls. 7. God sees everything. 8. The boy held the reindeer with his hands. 9. About six months later, Alfred won the victory and took the throne. 10. He said that there was a lot of bloodshed on both sides.

1. Literally, to take to (the) kingdom. Cf. “Have you anything to take to?” (Two Gentlemen of Verona, IV, i, 42).

1. Basically, to take to (the) kingdom. See “Do you have anything to take to?” (Two Gentlemen of Verona, IV, i, 42).

2. Brecan belongs properly in Class V, but it has been drawn into Class IV possibly through the influence of the r in the root.

2. Brecan should actually be in Class V, but it seems to have been pulled into Class IV, probably because of the r in the root.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

----

----

CHAPTER XXI.
Weak Verbs (§ 18).

122.

The verbs belonging to the Weak Conjugation are generally of more recent origin than the strong verbs, being frequently formed from the roots of strong verbs. The Weak Conjugation was the growing conjugation in O.E. as it is in Mn.E. We instinctively put our newly coined or borrowed words into this conjugation (telegraphed, boycotted); and children, by the analogy of weak verbs, say runned for ran, seed for saw, teared for tore, drawed for drew, and growed for grew. So, for example, when Latin dictāre and breviāre came into O.E., they came as weak verbs, dihtian and brēfian.

The verbs in the Weak Conjugation generally come from a more recent origin than strong verbs, often being formed from the roots of strong verbs. The Weak Conjugation was the growing conjugation in Old English just like it is in Modern English. We naturally place our newly created or borrowed words into this conjugation (like telegraphed, boycotted); and kids, following the patterns of weak verbs, say runned for ran, seed for saw, teared for tore, drawed for drew, and growed for grew. For example, when the Latin dictāre and breviāre came into Old English, they arrived as weak verbs, dihtian and brēfian.

The Three Classes of Weak Verbs.

123.

There is no difficulty in telling, from the infinitive alone, to which of the three classes a weak verb belongs. Class III has been so invaded by Class II 83 that but three important verbs remain to it: habban, to have; libban, to live; and sęcgan, to say. Distinction is to be made, therefore, only between Classes II and I. Class II contains the verbs with infinitive in -ian not preceded by r. Class I contains the remaining weak verbs; that is, those with infinitive in -r-ian and those with infinitive in -an (not -ian).

There’s no trouble identifying the class of a weak verb just from the infinitive form. Class III has been largely taken over by Class II 83 leaving only three significant verbs: habban, to have; libban, to live; and sęcgan, to say. So, the distinction needs to be made only between Classes II and I. Class II includes verbs with an infinitive ending in -ian that aren’t preceded by r. Class I includes the remaining weak verbs; specifically, those with an infinitive in -r-ian and those with an infinitive in -an (not -ian).

Class I.

124.

The preterit singular and past participle of Class I end in -ede and -ed, or -de and -ed respectively.

The past tense singular and past participle of Class I end in -ede and -ed, or -de and -ed respectively.

Note.—The infinitives of this class ended originally in -jan (= -ian). This accounts for the prevalence of i-umlaut in these verbs, and also for the large number of short-voweled stems ending in a double consonant (§ 115, Note 2). The weak verb is frequently the causative of the corresponding strong verb. In such cases, the root of the weak verb corresponds in form to the preterit singular of the strong verb: Mn.E. drench (= to make drink), lay (= to make lie), rear (= to make rise), and set (= to make sit), are the umlauted forms of drǫnc (preterit singular of drincan), læg (preterit singular of licgan), rās (preterit singular of rīsan), and sæt (preterit singular of sittan).

Note.—The infinitives in this group originally ended in -jan (= -ian). This explains the common i-umlaut in these verbs, as well as the many short-voweled stems that end in a double consonant (§ 115, Note 2). The weak verb often serves as the causative form of the related strong verb. In these cases, the root of the weak verb matches the preterit singular form of the strong verb: Mn.E. drench (= to make drink), lay (= to make lie), rear (= to make rise), and set (= to make sit), are the umlauted forms of drǫnc (preterit singular of drincan), læg (preterit singular of licgan), rās (preterit singular of rīsan), and sæt (preterit singular of sittan).

Preterit and Past Participle in -ede and -ed.

125.

Verbs with infinitive in -an preceded by ri- or the double consonants mm, nn, ss, bb, cg (= gg), add -ede for the preterit, and -ed for the past participle, the double consonant being always made single:

Verbs with an infinitive ending in -an that are preceded by ri- or the double consonants mm, nn, ss, bb, cg (= gg) add -ede for the simple past tense and -ed for the past participle, with the double consonant always changed to a single one:

ri: nęri-an, nęr-ede, genęr-ed, to save.
mm: fręmm-an, fręm-ede, gefręm-ed, to perform [frame].
nn: ðęnn-an, ðęn-ede, geðęn-ed, to extend.
ss: cnyss-an, cnys-ede, gecnys-ed, to beat.
84 bb: swębb-an, swęf-ede, geswęf-ed, to put to sleep.
cg: węcg-an, węg-ede, gewęg-ed, to agitate.

Note.Lęcgan, to lay, is the only one of these verbs that syncopates the e: lęcgan, lęgde (lēde), gelęgd (gelēd), instead of lęgede, gelęged.

Note.Lęcgan, to lay, is the only verb among these that drops the e: lęcgan, lęgde (lēde), gelęgd (gelēd), instead of lęgede, gelęged.

Preterit and Past Participle in -de and -ed.

126.

All the other verbs belonging to Class I. add -de for the preterit and -ed for the past participle. This division includes, therefore, all stems long by nature (§ 10, (3), (a)):

All the other Class I verbs add -de for the past tense and -ed for the past participle. So, this category includes all naturally long stems (§ 10, (3), (a)):

dǣl-an, dǣl-de, gedǣl-ed, to deal out, divide [dǣl].
dēm-an, dēm-de, gedēm-ed, to judge [dōm].
grēt-an, grēt-te, gegrēt-ed, to greet.
hīer-an, hīer-de, gehīer-ed, to hear.
lǣd-an, lǣd-de, gelǣd-ed, to lead.

Note 1.—A preceding voiceless consonant (§ 9, Note) changes -de into -te: *grēt-de > grēt-te; *mēt-de > mēt-te; *īec-de > īec-te. Syncope and contraction are also frequent in the participles: gegrēt-ed > *gegrēt-d > gegrēt(t); gelǣd-ed > gelǣd(d).

Note 1.—A preceding voiceless consonant (§ 9, Note) changes -de into -te: *grēt-de > grēt-te; *mēt-de > mēt-te; *īec-de > īec-te. Syncope and contraction are also common in the participles: gegrēt-ed > *gegrēt-d > gegrēt(t); gelǣd-ed > gelǣd(d).

Note 2.Būan, to dwell, cultivate, has an admixture of strong forms in the past participle: būan, būde, gebūd (bȳn, gebūn). The present participle survives in Mn.E. husband = house-dweller.

Note 2.Būan, to live, to farm, has a mix of strong forms in the past participle: būan, būde, gebūd (bȳn, gebūn). The present participle survives in Modern English as husband = house-dweller.

127.

It includes, also, all stems long by position (§ 10, (3), (b)) except those in mm, nn, ss, bb, and cg (§ 125):

It also includes all stems that are long by position (§ 10, (3), (b)), except for those in mm, nn, ss, bb, and cg (§ 125):

sęnd-an, sęnd-e, gesęnd-ed, to send.
sętt-an, sęt-te, gesęt-ed, to set [sittan].
sigl-an, sigl-de, gesigl-ed, to sail.
spęnd-an, spęnd-e, gespęnd-ed, to spend.
trędd-an, tręd-de, getręd-ed, to tread.

Note.—The participles frequently undergo syncope and contraction: gesęnded > gesęnd; gesęted > gesęt(t); gespęnded > gespęnd; getręded > getręd(d).

Note.—The participles often experience syncope and contraction: gesęnded > gesęnd; gesęted > gesęt(t); gespęnded > gespęnd; getręded > getręd(d).

85

Irregular Verbs of Class I.

128.

There are about twenty verbs belonging to Class I that are irregular in having no umlaut in the preterit and past participle. The preterit ends in -de, the past participle in -d; but, through the influence of a preceding voiceless consonant (§ 9, Note), -ed is generally unvoiced to -te, and -d to -t. The most important of these verbs are as follows:

There are about twenty Class I verbs that are irregular because they don't have an umlaut in the past tense and past participle. The past tense ends in -de, and the past participle ends in -d; however, due to the influence of a preceding voiceless consonant (§ 9, Note), -ed is usually pronounced as -te, and -d is pronounced as -t. The most important of these verbs are as follows:

bring-an, brōh-te, gebrōh-t, to bring.
byc-gan, boh-te, geboh-t, to buy.
sēc-an, sōh-te, gesōh-t, to seek.
sęll-an, seal-de, geseal-d, to give, sell [hand-sel].
tǣc-an, tǣh-te, getǣh-t, to teach.
tęll-an, teal-de, geteal-d, to count [tell].
ðęnc-an, ðōh-te, geðōh-t, to think.
ðync-an, ðūh-te, geðūh-t, to seem [methinks].
wyrc-an, worh-te, geworh-t, to work.

Note.—Such of these verbs as have stems in c or g are frequently written with an inserted e: bycgean, sēcean, tǣcean, etc. This e indicates that c and g have palatal value; that is, are to be followed with a vanishing y-sound. In such cases, O.E. c usually passes into Mn.E. ch: tǣc(e)an > to teach; rǣc(e)an > to reach; stręcc(e)an > to stretch. Sēc(e)an gives beseech as well as seek. See § 8.

Note.—Some of these verbs with stems in c or g are often written with an added e: bycgean, sēcean, tǣcean, etc. This e shows that c and g have a palatal sound, meaning they are followed by a fading y- sound. In these cases, Old English c typically changes to Modern English ch: tǣc(e)an > to teach; rǣc(e)an > to reach; stręcc(e)an > to stretch. Sēc(e)an gives beseech as well as seek. See § 8.

Conjugation of Class I.

129.

Paradigms of nęrian, to save; fręmman, to perform; dǣlan, to divide:

Paradigms of nęrian, to save; fręmman, to perform; dǣlan, to divide:

Indicative.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic nęrie fręmme dǣle
2. ðū nęrest fręmest dǣlst
3. hē nęreð fręmeð dǣlð
 
Plur. 1. } nęriað
2. fręmmað dǣlað
3. hīe
86 Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic nęrede fręmede dǣlde
2. ðū nęredest fręmedest dǣldest
3. hē nęrede fręmede dǣlde
 
Plur. 1. } nęredon
2. fręmedon dǣldon
3. hīe
Subjunctive.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic } nęrie
2. ðū fręmme dǣle
3.
 
Plur. 1. }
2. nęrien fręmmen dǣlen
3. hīe
Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic } nęrede
2. ðū fręmede dǣlde
3.
 
Plur. 1. } nęreden
2. fręmeden dǣlden
3. hīe
Imperative.
Sing. 2. nęre fręme dǣl
Plur. 1. nęrian fręmman dǣlan
2. nęriað fręmmað dǣlað
Infinitive.
nęrian fręmman dǣlan
 
Gerund.
tō nęrianne (-enne) tō fręmmanne (-enne) tō dǣlanne (-enne)
 
Present Participle.
nęriende fręmmende dǣlende
 
Past Participle.
genęred gefręmed gedǣled
87

Note.—The endings of the preterit present no difficulties; in the 2d and 3d singular present, however, the student will observe (a) that double consonants in the stem are made single: fręmest, fręmeð (not *freęmmest, *freęmmeð); ðęnest, ðęneð; sętest (sętst), seęteð (sętt); fylst, fylð, from fyllan, to fill; (b) that syncope is the rule in stems long by nature: dǣlst (< dǣlest), dǣlð (< dǣleð); dēmst (< dēmest), dēmð (< dēmeð); hīerst (< hīerest), hīerð (< hīereð). Double consonants are also made single in the imperative 2d singular and in the past participle. Stems long by nature take no final -e in the imperative: dǣl, hīer, dēm.

Note.—The endings of the past tense are straightforward; however, in the 2nd and 3rd singular present forms, the student will notice (a) that double consonants in the stem become single: fręmest, fręmeð (not *freęmmest, *freęmmeð); ðęnest, ðęneð; sętest (sętst), seęteð (sętt); fylst, fylð, from fyllan, to fill; (b) that syncope is the norm in stems that are long by nature: dǣlst (< dǣlest), dǣlð (< dǣleð); dēmst (< dēmest), dēmð (< dēmeð); hīerst (< hīerest), hīerð (< hīereð). Double consonants are also simplified in the imperative 2nd singular and in the past participle. Stems that are long by nature do not take a final -e in the imperative: dǣl, hīer, dēm.

Class II.

130.

The infinitive of verbs belonging to this class ends in -ian (not -r-ian), the preterit singular in -ode, the past participle in -od. The preterit plural usually has -edon, however, instead of -odon:

The infinitive of verbs in this group ends in -ian (not -r-ian), the simple past singular in -ode, and the past participle in -od. The simple past plural usually has -edon, instead of -odon:

eard-ian, eard-ode, geeard-od, to dwell [eorðe].
luf-ian, luf-ode, geluf-od, to love [lufu].
rīcs-ian, rīcs-ode, gerīcs-od, to rule [rīce].
sealf-ian, sealf-ode, gesealf-od, to anoint [salve].
segl-ian, segl-ode, gesegl-od, to sail [segel].

Note.—These verbs have no trace of original umlaut, since their -ian was once -ōjan. Hence, the vowel of the stem was shielded from the influence of the j (= i) by the interposition of ō.

Note.—These verbs show no evidence of original umlaut, because their -ian used to be -ōjan. Therefore, the vowel in the stem was protected from the influence of the j (= i) by the presence of ō.

Conjugation of Class II.

131.

Paradigm of lufian, to love:

Paradigm of lufian, to love:

Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present. Present.
Sing. 1. Ic lufie Sing. 1. Ic } lufie
2. ðu lufast 2. ðū
3. hē lufað 3.
 
Plur. 1. } lufiað Plur. 1. } lufien
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
88 Preterit. Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic lufode Sing. 1. Ic } lufode
2. ðū lufodest 2. ðū
3. hē lufode 3.
 
Plur. 1. } lufedon (-odon) Plur. 1. } lufeden (-oden)
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe
Imperative. Infinitive. Present Participle.
Sing. 2. lufa lufian lufiende
Plur. 1. lufian
2. lufiað Gerund. Past Participle.
tō lufianne (-enne) gelufod

Note 1.—The -ie (-ien) occurring in the present must be pronounced as a dissyllable. The y-sound thus interposed between the i and e is frequently indicated by the letter g: lufie, or lufige; lufien, or lufigen. So also for ia: lufiað, or lufigað; lufian, or lufig(e)an.

Note 1.—The -ie (-ien) used in the present should be pronounced as two syllables. The y- sound placed between the i and e is often shown by the letter g: lufie, or lufige; lufien, or lufigen. This also applies for ia: lufiað, or lufigað; lufian, or lufig(e)an.

Note 2.—In the preterit singular, -ade, -ude, and -ede are not infrequent for -ode.

Note 2.—In the past tense singular, -ade, -ude, and -ede are not uncommon for -ode.

Class III.

132.

The few verbs belonging here show a blending of Classes I and II. Like certain verbs of Class I (§ 128), the preterit and past participle are formed by adding -de and -d; like Class II, the 2d and 3d present indicative singular end in -ast and -að, the imperative 2d singular in -a:

The few verbs in this category combine elements from Classes I and II. Similar to some verbs in Class I (§ 128), the past simple and past participle are formed by adding -de and -d; like Class II, the 2nd and 3rd person present indicative singular end in -ast and -að, and the 2nd person singular imperative ends in -a:

habb-an, hæf-de gehæf-d, to have.
libb-an, lif-de gelif-d, to live.
sęcg-an sǣd-e (sæg-de), gesǣd (gesæg-d), to say.
89

Conjugation of Class III.

133.

Paradigms of habban, to have; libban, to live; sęcgan, to say.

Paradigms of habban, to have; libban, to live; sęcgan, to say.

Indicative.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic hæbbe libbe sęcge
2. ðū hæfst (hafast) lifast sægst (sagast)
3. hē hæfð (hafað) lifað sægð (sagað)
 
Plur. 1. } habbað
2. libbað sęcgað
3. hīe
Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic hæfde lifde sǣde
2. ðū hæfdest lifdest sǣdest
3. hē hæfde lifde sǣde
 
Plur. 1. } hæfdon
2. lifdon sǣdon
3. hīe
Subjunctive.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic } hæbbe
2. ðū libbe sęcge
3.
 
Plur. 1. } hæbben
2. libben sęcgen
3. hīe
Preterit.
Sing. 1. Ic } hæfde
2. ðū lifde sǣde
3.
 
Plur. 1. } hæfden
2. lifden sǣden
3. hīe
 
Imperative.
Sing. 2. hafa lifa saga
Plur. 1. habban libban sęcgan
2. habbað libbað sęcgað
90  
Infinitive.
habban libban sęcgan
 
Gerund.
tō habbanne (-enne) tō libbanne (-enne) tō sęcganne (-enne)
 
Present Participle.
hæbbende libbende sęcgende
 
Past Participle.
gehæfd gelifd gesǣd

----

----

CHAPTER XXII.

Remaining Verbs; Verb-Phrases with habban, bēon, and weorðan.

Remaining Verbs; Verb-Phrases with have, be, and become.

Anomalous Verbs. (See § 19.)

134.

These are:

These are:

bēon (wesan), wæs, wǣron, ——, to be.
willan, wolde, woldon, ——, to will, intend.
dōn, dyde, dydon, gedōn, to do, cause.
gān, ēode, ēodon, gegān, to go.

Note.—In the original Indo-Germanic language, the first person of the present indicative singular ended in (1) ō or (2) mi. Cf. Gk. λύ-ω, εἰ-μί, Lat. am-ō, su-m. The Strong and Weak Conjugations of O.E. are survivals of the ō-class. The four Anomalous Verbs mentioned above are the sole remains in O.E. of the mi-class. Note the surviving m in eom I am, and dōm I do (Northumbrian form). These mi-verbs are sometimes called non-Thematic to distinguish them from the Thematic or ō-verbs.

Note.—In the original Indo-European language, the first person of the present indicative singular ended in (1) ō or (2) mi. For example, Gk. λύ-ω, I am, Lat. am-ō, su-m. The Strong and Weak Conjugations of Old English are remnants of the ō-class. The four Anomalous Verbs mentioned above are the only remaining examples in Old English of the mi-class. Note the remaining m in eom I am, and dōm I do (Northumbrian form). These mi-verbs are sometimes referred to as non-Thematic to distinguish them from the Thematic or ō-verbs.

91

Conjugation of Anomalous Verbs.

135.

Only the present indicative and subjunctive are at all irregular:

Only the present indicative and subjunctive forms are irregular at all:

Indicative.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic eom (bēom) wille
2. ðū eart (bist) wilt dēst gǣst
3. hē is (bið) wille dēð gǣð
 
Plur. 1. } sind(on)
2. willað dōð gāð
3. hīe
Subjunctive.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic } sīe
2. ðū wille
3.
 
Plur. 1. } sīen
2. willen dōn gān
3. hīe

Note.—The preterit subjunctive of bēon is formed, of course, not from wæs, but from wǣron. See § 103, (3).

Note.—The past subjunctive of bēon is formed, of course, not from wæs, but from wǣron. See § 103, (3).

Preterit-Present Verbs. (See § 19.)

136.

These verbs are called Preterit-Present because the present tense (indicative and subjunctive) of each of them is, in form, a strong preterit, the old present having been displaced by the new. They all have weak preterits. Most of the Mn.E. Auxiliary Verbs belong to this class.

These verbs are known as Preterit-Present because their present tense (both indicative and subjunctive) is, in form, a strong preterit, with the old present replaced by the new. They all have weak preterits. Most of the Modern English Auxiliary Verbs fall into this category.

witan, { wiste,
wisse,
} wiston, gewiten, to know [to wit, wot].
āgan, āhte, āhton, āgen (adj.), to possess [owe].
cunnan, cūðe, cūðon, { gecunnen,
cūð (adj.),
} to know, can [uncouth, cunning].
92 durran, dorste, dorston, —— to dare.
sculan, sceolde, sceoldon, —— shall.
magan, { meahte,
mihte,
meahton,
mihton,
} —— to be able, may.
mōtan, mōste, mōston, —— may, must.

Note.—The change in meaning from preterit to present, with retention of the preterit form, is not uncommon in other languages. Several examples are found in Latin and Greek (cf. nōvi and οἶδα, I know). Mn.E. has gone further still: āhte and mōste, which had already suffered the loss of their old preterits (āh, mōt), have been forced back again into the present (ought, must). Having exhausted, therefore, the only means of preterit formation known to Germanic, the strong and the weak, it is not likely that either ought or must will ever develop distinct preterit forms.

Note.—The shift in meaning from past to present, while keeping the past form, is pretty common in other languages. Several examples can be found in Latin and Greek (see nōvi and I know, I know). Modern English has gone even further: āhte and mōste, which had already lost their old past forms (āh, mōt), have been pushed back into the present (ought, must). Since it has exhausted the only ways to form the past known to Germanic, the strong and the weak forms, it is unlikely that either ought or must will ever develop distinct past forms.

Conjugation of Preterit-Present Verbs.

137.

The irregularities occur in the present indicative and subjunctive:

The irregularities happen in the present indicative and subjunctive:

Indicative.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic wāt āh cǫn (can) dear sceal mæg mōt
2. ðū wāst āhst cǫnst (canst) dearst scealt meaht mōst
3. hē wāt āh cǫn (can) dear sceal mæg mōt
 
Plur. 1. } witon
2. āgon cunnon durron sculon magon mōton
3. hīe
Subjunctive.
Present.
Sing. 1. Ic } wite
2. ðū āge cunne durre scule (scyle) mæge mōte
3.
 
Plur. 1. } witen
2. āgen cunnen durren sculen (scylen) mægen mōten
3. hīe

Note 1.Willan and sculan do not often connote simple futurity in Early West Saxon, yet they were fast drifting that way. 93 The Mn.E. use of shall only with the 1st person and will only with the 2d and 3d, to express simple futurity, was wholly unknown even in Shakespeare’s day. The elaborate distinctions drawn between these words by modern grammarians are not only cumbersome and foreign to the genius of English, but equally lacking in psychological basis.

Note 1.Willan and sculan don't usually indicate simple future tense in Early West Saxon, but they were slowly heading in that direction. 93 The modern English usage of shall only for the 1st person and will only for the 2nd and 3rd to express simple futurity wasn't known at all, not even in Shakespeare’s time. The complicated distinctions made between these words by today's grammarians are not only clunky and unfamiliar to the nature of English, but also lack a psychological foundation.

Note 2.Sculan originally implied the idea of (1) duty, or compulsion (= ought to, or must), and this conception lurks with more or less prominence in almost every function of sculan in O.E.: Dryhten bebēad Moyse hū hē sceolde beran ðā earce, The Lord instructed Moses how he ought to bear the ark; Ǣlc mann sceal be his andgietes mǣðe ... sprecan ðæt he spricð, and dōn ðæt ðæt hē dēð, Every man must, according to the measure of his intelligence, speak what he speaks, and do what he does. Its next most frequent use is to express (2) custom, the transition from the obligatory to the customary being an easy one: Sē byrdesta sceall gyldan fīftȳne mearðes fell, The man of highest rank pays fifteen marten skins.

Note 2.Sculan originally suggested the idea of (1) duty, or compulsion (= ought to, or must), and this concept is present to varying degrees in almost every use of sculan in Old English: Dryhten bebēad Moyse hū hē sceolde beran ðā earce, The Lord instructed Moses how he ought to bear the ark; Ǣlc mann sceal be his andgietes mǣðe ... sprecan ðæt he spricð, and dōn ðæt ðæt hē dēð, Every man must, according to the measure of his intelligence, speak what he speaks, and do what he does. Its next most common use is to express (2) custom, with the shift from obligatory to customary being a smooth one: Sē byrdesta sceall gyldan fīftȳne mearðes fell, The man of highest rank pays fifteen marten skins.

Note 3.Willan expressed originally (1) pure volition, and this is its most frequent use in O.E. It may occur without the infinitive: Nylle ic ðæs synfullan dēað, ac ic wille ðæt hē gecyrre and lybbe, I do not desire the sinner’s death, but I desire that he return and live. The wish being father to the intention, willan soon came to express (2) purpose: Hē sǣde ðæt hē at sumum cirre wolde fandian hū longe ðæt land norðryhte lǣge, He said that he intended, at some time, to investigate how far that land extended northward.

Note 3.Willan originally meant (1) pure desire, and this is its most common use in Old English. It can appear without the infinitive: Nylle ic ðæs synfullan dēað, ac ic wille ðæt hē gecyrre and lybbe, I do not wish for the sinner’s death, but I want him to return and live. With the wish leading to the intention, willan soon came to mean (2) purpose: Hē sǣde ðæt hē at sumum cirre wolde fandian hū longe ðæt land norðryhte lǣge, He said that he intended, at some point, to find out how far that land extended northward.

Verb-Phrases with habban, bēon (wesan), and weorðan.
Active Voice Verb Phrases.

138.

The present and preterit of habban, combined with a past participle, are used in O.E., as in Mn.E., to form the present perfect and past perfect tenses:

The present and past forms of habban, combined with a past participle, are used in Old English, just like in Modern English, to create the present perfect and past perfect tenses:

Present Perfect. Past Perfect.
Sing. 1. Ic hæbbe gedrifen Sing. 1. Ic hæfde gedrifen
2. ðū hæfst gedrifen 2. ðū hæfdest gedrifen
3. hē hæfð gedrifen 3. hē hæfde gedrifen
94  
Plur. 1. } habbað gedrifen Plur. 1. } hæfdon gedrifen
2. 2.
3. hīe 3. hīe

The past participle is not usually inflected to agree with the direct object: Norðymbre ǫnd Ēastęngle hæfdon Ælfrede cyninge āðas geseald (not gesealde, § 82), The Northumbrians and East Anglians had given king Alfred oaths; ǫnd hæfdon miclne dǣl ðāra horsa freten (not fretenne), and (they) had devoured a large part of the horses.

The past participle typically doesn’t change to match the direct object: The Northumbrians and East Anglians had given King Alfred oaths (not gesealde, § 82), and they had devoured a large part of the horses (not fretenne).

Note.—Many sentences might be quoted in which the participle does agree with the direct object, but there seems to be no clear line of demarcation between them and the sentences just cited. Originally, the participle expressed a resultant state, and belonged in sense more to the object than to habban; but in Early West Saxon habban had already, in the majority of cases, become a pure auxiliary when used with the past participle. This is conclusively proved by the use of habban with intransitive verbs. In such a clause, therefore, as oð ðæt hīe hine ofslægenne hæfdon, there is no occasion to translate until they had him slain (= resultant state); the agreement here is more probably due to the proximity of ofslægenne to hine. So also ac hī hæfdon þā hiera stemn gesętenne, but they had already served out (sat out) their military term.

Note.—Many sentences can be quoted where the participle agrees with the direct object, but there doesn’t seem to be a clear distinction between them and the sentences just mentioned. Originally, the participle indicated a resultant state and was more closely related to the object than to habban; however, in Early West Saxon, habban had mostly become a pure auxiliary when used with the past participle. This is clearly shown by the use of habban with intransitive verbs. Therefore, in a clause like oð ðæt hīe hine ofslægenne hæfdon, there’s no need to translate it as until they had him slain (= resultant state); the agreement here is more likely due to the closeness of ofslægenne to hine. Similarly, ac hī hæfdon þā hiera stemn gesętenne, but they had already served out (sat out) their military term.

139.

If the verb is intransitive, and denotes a change of condition, a departure or arrival, bēon (wesan) usually replaces habban. The past participle, in such cases, partakes of the nature of an adjective, and generally agrees with the subject: Mīne welan þe ic īo hæfde syndon ealle gewitene ǫnd gedrorene, My possessions which I once had are all departed and fallen away; wǣron þā męn uppe on lǫnde of āgāne, the men had gone up ashore; ǫnd þā ōþre wǣron hungre ācwolen, and the 95 others had perished of hunger; ǫnd ēac sē micla hęre wæs þā þǣr tō cumen, and also the large army had then arrived there.

If the verb is intransitive and represents a change of condition, a departure or arrival, bēon (wesan) usually takes the place of habban. In these cases, the past participle acts like an adjective and usually agrees with the subject: Mīne welan þe ic īo hæfde syndon ealle gewitene ǫnd gedrorene, My possessions that I once had are all gone and fallen away; wǣron þā męn uppe on lǫnde of āgāne, the men had gone ashore; ǫnd þā ōþre wǣron hungre ācwolen, and the others had died of hunger; ǫnd ēac sē micla hęre wæs þā þǣr tō cumen, and also the large army had then arrived there.

140.

A progressive present and preterit (not always, however, with distinctively progressive meanings) are formed by combining a present participle with the present and preterit of bēon (wesan). The participle remains uninflected: ǫnd hīe alle on ðone cyning wǣrun feohtende, and they all were fighting against the king; Symle hē bið lōciende, nē slǣpð hē nǣfre, He is always looking, nor does He ever sleep.

A progressive present and past tense (not always with clearly progressive meanings) are created by combining a present participle with the present and past forms of bēon (wesan). The participle stays unchanged: ǫnd hīe alle on ðone cyning wǣrun feohtende, and they all were fighting against the king; Symle hē bið lōciende, nē slǣpð hē nǣfre, He is always looking, nor does He ever sleep.

Note.—In most sentences of this sort, the subject is masculine (singular or plural); hence no inference can be made as to agreement, since -e is the participial ending for both numbers of the nominative masculine (§ 82). By analogy, therefore, the other genders usually conform in inflection to the masculine: wǣron þā ealle þā dēoflu clypigende ānre stefne, then were all the devils crying with one voice.

Note.—In most sentences like this, the subject is masculine (either singular or plural); therefore, you can’t assume agreement, since -e is the participial ending for both forms of the nominative masculine (§ 82). By analogy, the other genders typically follow the masculine in inflection: wǣron þā ealle þā dēoflu clypigende ānre stefne, then were all the devils crying with one voice.

Verb-Phrases in the Passive Voice.

141.

Passive constructions are formed by combining bēon (wesan) or weorðan with a past participle. The participle agrees regularly with the subject: hīe wǣron benumene ǣgðer ge þæs cēapes ge þæs cornes, they were deprived both of the cattle and the corn; hī bēoð āblęnde mid ðǣm þīostrum heora scylda, they are blinded with the darkness of their sins; and sē wælhrēowa Domiciānus on ðām ylcan gēare wearð ācweald, and the murderous Domitian was killed in the same year; ǫnd Æþelwulf aldormǫn wearð ofslægen, and Æthelwulf, alderman, was slain.

Passive constructions are created by combining bēon (wesan) or weorðan with a past participle. The participle consistently agrees with the subject: hīe wǣron benumene ǣgðer ge þæs cēapes ge þæs cornes, they were deprived both of the cattle and the corn; hī bēoð āblęnde mid ðǣm þīostrum heora scylda, they are blinded by the darkness of their sins; and sē wælhrēowa Domiciānus on ðām ylcan gēare wearð ācweald, and the murderous Domitian was killed in the same year; ǫnd Æþelwulf aldormǫn wearð ofslægen, and Æthelwulf, alderman, was slain.

Note 1.—To express agency, Mn.E. employs by, rarely of; M.E. of, rarely by; O.E. frǫm (fram), rarely of: Sē ðe Godes bebodu 96 ne gecnǣwð, ne bið hē oncnāwen frǫm Gode, He who does not recognise God’s commands, will not be recognized by God; Betwux þǣm wearð ofslagen Ēadwine ... fram Brytta cyninge, Meanwhile, Edwin was slain by the king of the Britons.

Note 1.—To express agency, Modern English uses by, rarely of; Middle English used of, rarely by; Old English frǫm (fram), rarely of: Sē ðe Godes bebodu 96 ne gecnǣwð, ne bið hē oncnāwen frǫm Gode, He who does not recognise God’s commands, will not be recognized by God; Betwux þǣm wearð ofslagen Ēadwine ... fram Brytta cyninge, Meanwhile, Edwin was slain by the king of the Britons.

Note 2.—O.E. had no progressive forms for the passive, and could not, therefore, distinguish between He is being wounded and He is wounded. It was not until more than a hundred years after Shakespeare’s death that being assumed this function. Weorðan, which originally denoted a passage from one state to another, was ultimately driven out by bēon (wesan), and survives now only in Woe worth (= be to).

Note 2.—Old English didn’t have progressive forms for the passive voice, so it couldn’t distinguish between He is being wounded and He is wounded. It wasn’t until more than a hundred years after Shakespeare’s death that being took on this role. Weorðan, which originally meant a transition from one state to another, was eventually replaced by bēon (wesan), and it now only survives in Woe worth (meaning be to).

142.

Vocabulary.

Vocabulary.

ðā Beormas, Permians.

Beormen, Permians.

ðā Dęeniscan, the Danish (men), Danes.

the Danes, the Danish (men), Danes.

ðā Finnas, Fins.

The Finns, Fins.

ðæt gewald, control [wealdan].

that control, control [wealdan].

sēo sǣ, sea.

the sea, sea.

sēo scīr, shire, district.

the district

sēo wælstōw, battle-field.

the battlefield, battlefield.

āgan wælstōwe gewald, to maintain possession of the battle-field.

the power to control the battle-site, to maintain possession of the battlefield.

sē wealdend, ruler, wielder.

the ruler, leader, controller.

geflīeman, geflīemde, geflīemed, to put to flight.
gestaðelian, gestaðelode, gestaðelod, to establish, restore.
gewissian, gewissode, gewissod, to guide, direct.
wīcian, wīcode, gewīcod, to dwell [wīc = village].
143.

Exercises.

Exercises.

I. 1. Ǫnd ðær wæs micel wæl geslægen on gehwæþre hǫnd, ǫnd Æþelwulf ealdormǫn wearþ ofslægen; ǫnd þā Dęniscan āhton wælstōwe gewald. 2. Ǫnd þæs ymb ānne mōnaþ gefeaht Ælfred cyning wiþ ealne þone hęre ond hine geflīemde. 3. Hē sǣde þēah þæt þæt land sīe swīþe lang norþ þǫnan. 4. Þā Beormas hæfdon swīþe wel gebūd (§ 126, Note 2) hiera land. 5. Ohthęre sǣde þæt sēo scīr hātte (§ 117, Note 2) Hālgoland, þe hē on (§ 94, (5)) būde. 6. Þā Finnas wīcedon be þǣre sǣ. 7. Dryhten, ælmihtiga (§ 78, Note) God, Wyrhta and Wealdend ealra gesceafta, ic bidde 97 ðē for ðīnre miclan mildheortnesse ðæt ðū mē gewissie tō ðīnum willan; and gestaðela mīn mōd tō ðīnum willan and tō mīnre sāwle ðearfe. 8. Þā sceolde hē ðǣr bīdan ryhtnorþanwindes, for ðǣm þæt land bēag þǣr sūðryhte, oþþe sēo sǣ in on ðæt land, hē nysse hwæðer. 9. For ðȳ, mē ðyncð bętre, gif ēow swā ðyncð, ðæt wē ēac ðās bēc on ðæt geðēode węnden ðe wē ealle gecnāwan mægen.

I. 1. There was a great slaughter on every hand, and Æthelwulf the elder was killed; and then the Danes took control of the battlefield. 2. About a month later, King Alfred fought against the whole army and drove them away. 3. He said, however, that the land was very far north from there. 4. The Beormas had been very well established (§ 126, Note 2) in their land. 5. Additionally, it was said that the district was called (§ 117, Note 2) Halgoland, where he lived (§ 94, (5)). 6. The Finnas settled by the sea. 7. Lord, Almighty (§ 78, Note) God, Creator and Ruler of all creation, I pray to you for your great mercy that you guide me according to your will; and strengthen my mind towards your will and my soul’s needs. 97 8. He should wait there for the northern wind, because the land is curved to the southeast, or whether the sea flows into that land, he does not know which. 9. Therefore, it seems better to me, if it seems so to you, that we also turn these books to the language we all can understand.

II. 1. When the king heard that, he went (= then went he) westward with his army to Ashdown. 2. Lovest thou me more than these? 3. The men said that the shire which they lived in was called Halgoland. 4. All things were made (wyrcan) by God. 5. They were fighting for two days with (= against) the Danes. 6. King Alfred fought with the Danes, and gained the victory; but the Danes retained possession of the battle-field. 7. These men dwelt in England before they came hither. 8. I have not seen the book of (ymbe) which you speak (sprecan).

II. 1. When the king heard that, he went west with his army to Ashdown. 2. Do you love me more than these? 3. The men said that the area they lived in was called Halgoland. 4. Everything was made by God. 5. They fought against the Danes for two days. 6. King Alfred battled the Danes and won; however, the Danes still held the battlefield. 7. These men lived in England before they came here. 8. I haven't seen the book you’re talking about.

98

PART III.
READING SELECTIONS.

PROSE.
Introduction.

I. The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle.

This famous work, a series of progressive annals by unknown hands, embraces a period extending from Cæsar’s invasion of England to 1154. It is not known when or where these annals began to be recorded in English.

This famous work, a series of progressive records by unknown authors, covers the time from Cæsar’s invasion of England to 1154. It's unclear when or where these records started being written in English.

“The annals from the year 866—that of Ethelred’s ascent of the throne—to the year 887 seem to be the work of one mind. Not a single year is passed over, and to several is granted considerable space, especially to the years 871, 878, and 885. The whole has gained a certain roundness and fulness, because the events—nearly all of them episodes in the ever-recurring conflict with the Danes—are taken in their connection, and the thread dropped in one year is resumed in the next. Not only is the style in itself concise; it has a sort of nervous severity and pithy rigor. The construction is often antiquated, and suggests at times the freedom of poetry; though this purely historical prose is far removed from poetry in profusion of language.” (Ten Brink, Early Eng. Lit., I.)

“The records from the year 866—when Ethelred ascended the throne—up to the year 887 seem to be created by a single author. Not a single year is skipped, and several years are given significant attention, especially 871, 878, and 885. The narrative has a certain completeness and depth because the events—almost all of them episodes in the ongoing struggle with the Danes—are presented in context, and the thread that starts in one year is picked up in the next. The style is concise and has a kind of sharp seriousness and impactful clarity. The sentence structure often feels outdated, and at times it has the freedom of poetry; however, this strictly historical prose is quite distant from poetic richness.” (Ten Brink, Early Eng. Lit., I.)

II. The Translations of Alfred.

Alfred’s reign (871-901) may be divided into four periods. The first, the period of Danish invasion, extends from 871 to 99 881; the second, the period of comparative quiet, from 881 to 893; the third, the period of renewed strife (beginning with the incursions of Hasting), from 893 to 897; the fourth, the period of peace, from 897 to 901. His literary work probably falls in the second period.*

Alfred’s reign (871-901) can be divided into four periods. The first, during the Danish invasion, lasts from 871 to 99 881; the second, a time of relative calm, goes from 881 to 893; the third, marked by renewed conflict (starting with Hasting's raids), spans from 893 to 897; and the fourth, a time of peace, stretches from 897 to 901. His literary work likely falls in the second period.*

The works translated by Alfred from Latin into the vernacular were (1) Consolation of Philosophy (De Consolatione Philosophiae) by Boëthius (475-525), (2) Compendious History of the World (Historiarum Libri VII) by Orosius (c. 418), (3) Ecclesiastical History of the English (Historia Ecclesiastica Gentis Anglorum) by Bede (672-735), and (4) Pastoral Care (De Cura Pastorali) by Pope Gregory the Great (540-604).

The works translated by Alfred from Latin into the common language were (1) Consolation of Philosophy (De Consolatione Philosophiae) by Boëthius (475-525), (2) Compendious History of the World (Historiarum Libri VII) by Orosius (c. 418), (3) Ecclesiastical History of the English (Historia Ecclesiastica Gentis Anglorum) by Bede (672-735), and (4) Pastoral Care (De Cura Pastorali) by Pope Gregory the Great (540-604).

The chronological sequence of these works is wholly unknown. That given is supported by Turner, Arend, Morley, Grein, and Pauli. Wülker argues for an exact reversal of this order. According to Ten Brink, the order was more probably (1) Orosius, (2) Bede, (3) Boëthius, and (4) Pastoral Care. The most recent contribution to the subject is from Wülfing, who contends for (1) Bede, (2) Orosius, (3) Pastoral Care, and (4) Boëthius.

The exact order of these works is completely unknown. This point is supported by Turner, Arend, Morley, Grein, and Pauli. Wülker argues for a complete reversal of this order. According to Ten Brink, the order was likely (1) Orosius, (2) Bede, (3) Boëthius, and (4) Pastoral Care. The latest input on the topic comes from Wülfing, who proposes (1) Bede, (2) Orosius, (3) Pastoral Care, and (4) Boëthius.

* There is something inexpressibly touching in this clause from the great king’s pen: gif wē ðā stilnesse habbað. He is speaking of how much he hopes to do, by his translations, for the enlightenment of his people.

* There’s something incredibly moving in this phrase from the great king’s writing: if we have that stillness. He is expressing how much he hopes to achieve, through his translations, for the enlightenment of his people.

I. THE BATTLE OF ASHDOWN.

[From the Chronicle, Parker MS. The event and date are significant. The Danes had for the first time invaded Wessex. Alfred’s older brother, Ethelred, was king; but to Alfred belongs the glory of the victory at Ashdown (Berkshire). Asser (Life of Alfred) tells us that for a long time Ethelred remained praying in his tent, while Alfred and his followers went forth “like a wild boar against the hounds.”]

[From the Chronicle, Parker MS. The event and date are significant. The Danes had invaded Wessex for the first time. Alfred’s older brother, Ethelred, was king; but the glory of the victory at Ashdown (Berkshire) belongs to Alfred. Asser (Life of Alfred) tells us that for a long time, Ethelred stayed praying in his tent, while Alfred and his followers charged out “like a wild boar against the hounds.”]

1 871. Hēr cuōm1 sē hęre tō Rēadingum on Westseaxe,

1 871. Here came the army to Reading in Wessex,

2 ǫnd þæs ymb iii niht ridon ii eorlas ūp. Þa gemētte hīe

2 And then, around three nights later, the two nobles rode up. They met each other.

100

1 Æþelwulf aldorman2 on Ęnglafelda, ǫnd him þǣr wiþ gefeaht,

1 Æþelwulf the alderman2 on Englefield, and he fought against him there,

2 ǫnd sige nam. Þæs ymb iiii niht Æþered cyning

2 and took victory. After that, four nights later, King Æthered

3 ǫnd Ælfred his brōþur3 þǣr micle fierd tō Rēadingum

3 and Alfred his brother3 led the great army to Reading.

4 gelǣddon, ǫnd wiþ þone hęre gefuhton; ǫnd þǣr wæs

4 gathered, and fought against the army; and there was

5 micel wæl geslægen on gehwæþre hǫnd, ǫnd Æþelwulf

5 a great slaughter struck every hand, and Æthelwulf

6 aldormǫn wearþ ofslægen; ǫnd þa Dęniscan āhton wælstōwe

6 Aldormön was killed; and then the Danes had a slaughter site.

7 gewald.

gewald.

8 Ǫnd þæs ymb iiii niht gefeaht Æþered cyning ǫnd

8 And after about four nights gefeaht King Æthered and

9 Ælfred his brōþur wiþ alne4 þone hęre on Æscesdūne.

9 Alfred and his brother confronted the army at Ashdown.

10 Ǫnd hīe wǣrun5 on twǣm gefylcum: on ōþrum wæs

10 And they were on two occasions: on the other was

11 Bāchsęcg ǫnd Halfdęne þā hǣþnan cyningas, ǫnd on

11 Bāchsęcg and Halfdęne the heathen kings, and on

12 ōþrum wǣron þā eorlas. Ǫnd þā gefeaht sē cyning

12 They were the earls. And then the king fought

13 Æþered wiþ þāra cyninga getruman, ǫnd þǣr wearþ sē

13 Æþered with the kings' gathering, and there was the

14 cyning Bāgsęcg ofslægen; ǫnd Ælfred his brōþur wiþ

14 King Bagsecg was killed; and Alfred, his brother, against

15 þāra eorla getruman, ǫnd þǣr wearþ Sidroc eorl ofslægen

15 Then the earls gathered, and there Sidroc the earl was slain.

16 sē alda,6 ǫnd Sidroc eorl sē gioncga,7 ǫnd Ōsbearn eorl,

16 the old man, 6 and the young earl Sidroc, 7 and Earl Ōsbearn,

17 ǫnd Frǣna eorl, ǫnd Hareld eorl; ǫnd þā hęrgas8 bēgen

17 and the noble lord Fræna, and lord Hareld; and both the armies8

18 geflīemde, ǫnd fela þūsenda ofslægenra, ǫnd onfeohtende

geflīemde, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, and attacking

19 wǣron oþ niht.

were until night.

20 Ǫnd þæs ymb xiiii niht gefeaht Æþered cyning ǫnd

20 And then after fourteen nights, King Æther fought

21 Ælfred his brōður wiþ þone hęre æt Basengum, ǫnd þǣr

21 Alfred and his brother faced the army at Basing, and there

22 þa Dęniscan sige nāmon.

the Danish victory is named.

23 Ǫnd þæs ymb ii mōnaþ gefeaht Æþered cyning ǫnd

23 And after that, two months later, King Æthered fought

24 Ælfred his brōþur wiþ þone hęre æt Męretūne, ǫnd hīe

24 Alfred and his brother fought against the army at Meretune, and they

25 wǣrun on tuǣm9 gefylcium, ǫnd hīe būtū geflīemdon, ǫnd

25 were in two places, and they both fled, and

26 lǫnge on dæg sige āhton; ǫnd þǣr wearþ micel wælsliht

26 long in the day they had victory; and there was much slaughter

27 on gehwæþere hǫnd; ǫnd þā Dęniscan āhton wælstōwe

27 on each hand; and the Danes had a slaughter place

101

1 gewald; ǫnd þær wearþ Hēahmund bisceop ofslægen,

1 violent; and there was Hēahmund bishop killed,

2 ǫnd fela gōdra mǫnna. Ǫnd æfter þissum gefeohte cuōm1

2 and many good men. And after this battle came1

3 micel sumorlida.

big summer party.

4 Ǫnd þæs ofer Ēastron gefōr Æþered cyning; ǫnd hē

4 And then, after Easter, King Æthered went; and he

5 rīcsode v gēar; ǫnd his līc līþ æt Wīnburnan.

5 He was buried in the year; and his body lay at Winburn.

6 Þā fēng Ælfred Æþelwulfing his brōþur tō Wesseaxna

6 Then Alfred, Aethelwulf's brother, went to Wessex.

7 rīce. Ǫnd þæs ymb ānne mōnaþ gefeaht Ælfred cyning

7 And about one month later, King Alfred fought.

8 wiþ alne4 þone hęre lȳtle werede10 æt Wiltūne, ǫnd hine

8 with all the4 the army little wore10 at Wilton, and him

9 lǫnge on dæg geflīemde, ǫnd þā Dęniscan āhton wælstōwe

9 long in the day shone brightly, and the Danes had a slaughter place

10 gewald.

gewald.

11 Ǫnd þæs gēares wurdon viiii folcgefeoht gefohten wiþ

11 And in that year, eight battles were fought against

12 þone hęre on þȳ cynerīce be sūþan Tęmese, būtan þām þe

12 the army in the kingdom south of the Thames, būtan þām þe

13 him Ælfred þæs cyninges brōþur ǫnd ānlīpig aldormǫn2 ǫnd

13 his brother King Alfred and a loyal ealdorman2 and

14 cyninges þegnas oft rāde onridon þe mǫn nā ne rīmde;

14 The king's thanes often behaved in a way that no one counted.

15 ǫnd þæs gēares wǣrun5 ofslægene viiii eorlas ǫnd ān cyning.

15 And that year, there were five earls and one king killed.

16 Ǫnd þȳ gēare nāmon Westseaxe friþ wiþ þone hęre.

16 And so the West Saxons named peace with the army that year.

100.8. gefeaht. Notice that the singular is used. This is the more common construction in O.E. when a compound subject, composed of singular members, follows its predicate. Cf. For thine is the kingdom, and the power, and the glory. See also p. 107, note on wæs.

100.8. fought. Notice that the singular is used. This is the more common structure in Old English when a compound subject, made up of singular parts, follows its predicate. Cf. For yours is the kingdom, the power, and the glory. See also p. 107, note on wæs.

100.18. ǫnd fela þūsenda ofslægenra, and there were many thousands of slain (§ 91).

100.18. And many thousands of slain, and there were many thousands of slain (§ 91).

101.12. būtan þām þe, etc., besides which, Alfred ... made raids against them (him), which were not counted. See § 70, Note.

101.12. without that, etc., besides which, Alfred ... launched attacks against them (him), which were not recorded. See § 70, Note.

Consult Glossary and Paradigms under Forms given below.

Consult the Glossary and Paradigms under the Forms section below.

No note is made of such variants as y (ȳ) or i (ī) for ie (īe). See Glossary under ie (īe); occurrences, also, of and for ǫnd, land for lǫnd, are found on almost every page of Early West Saxon. Such words should be sought for under the more common forms, ǫnd, lǫnd.

No notice is taken of variations like y (ȳ) or i (ī) for ie (īe). Check the Glossary under ie (īe); you'll also find instances of and for ǫnd, land for lǫnd, appearing on nearly every page of Early West Saxon. Such words should be looked up under the more common forms, ǫnd, lǫnd.

1 = cwōm.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = came.

2 = ealdormǫn.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = elder man.

3 = brōþor.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = brother.

4 = ealne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = ealne.

5 = wǣron.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = were.

6 = ealda.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = old.

7 = geonga.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = geonga.

8 = hęras.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = heras.

9 = twǣm.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = two.

10 = werode.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = we rode.

II. A PRAYER OF KING ALFRED.

[With this characteristic prayer, Alfred concludes his translation of Boëthius’s Consolation of Philosophy. Unfortunately, the only extant MS. (Bodleian 180) is Late West Saxon. I follow, therefore, Prof. A. S. Cook’s normalization on an Early West Saxon basis. See Cook’s First Book in Old English, p. 163.]

[With this characteristic prayer, Alfred wraps up his translation of Boëthius’s Consolation of Philosophy. Unfortunately, the only existing manuscript (Bodleian 180) is in Late West Saxon. I follow Prof. A. S. Cook’s normalization based on Early West Saxon. See Cook’s First Book in Old English, p. 163.]

102

1 Dryhten, ælmihtiga God, Wyrhta and Wealdend ealra

1 Lord, Almighty God, Creator and Ruler of all

2 gesceafta, ic bidde ðē for ðīnre miclan mildheortnesse,

2 creator, I ask you for your great compassion,

3 and for ðǣre hālgan rōde tācne, and for Sanctæ Marian

3 and for the holy cross sign, and for Saint Marian

4 mægðhāde, and for Sancti Michaeles gehīersumnesse, and

mægðhāde, and for Sancti __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ generosity, and

5 for ealra ðīnra hālgena lufan and hīera earnungum, ðæt

5 for all your holy ones' love and their rewards, that

6 ðū mē gewissie bęt ðonne ic āworhte tō ðē; and gewissa

6 You will guide me better than I can prepare for you; and surely

7 mē tō ðīnum willan, and tō mīnre sāwle ðearfe, bęt ðonne

7 to your will, and to my soul's need, better than

8 ic self cunne; and gestaðela mīn mōd tō ðinum willan and

8 ic self cunning; and guide my mind to your will and

9 tō mīnre sāwle ðearfe; and gestranga mē wið ðæs dēofles

9 to my soul's needs; and strengthened me against the devil

10 costnungum; and āfierr fram mē ðā fūlan gālnesse and

costnungum; and āfierr fram mē ðā fūlan gālnesse and

11 ǣlce unrihtwīsnesse; and gescield mē wið mīnum wiðerwinnum,

11 every injustice; and defend me against my adversaries,

12 gesewenlīcum and ungesewenlīcum; and tǣc mē

12 visible and invisible; and teach me

13 ðīnne willan tō wyrceanne; ðæt ic mæge ðē inweardlīce

13 I want to create in you; that I can inwardly

14 lufian tōforan eallum ðingum, mid clǣnum geðance and

14 to love above all things, with pure intentions and

15 mid clǣnum līchaman. For ðon ðe ðū eart mīn Scieppend,

15 mid clean body. Because you are my Creator,

16 and mīn Alīesend, mīn Fultum, mīn Frōfor, mīn Trēownes,

16 and my Aliesend, my Fultum, my Frōfor, my Trēownes,

17 and mīn Tōhopa. Sīe ðē lof and wuldor nū and

17 and my Tōhopa. Sīe ðē lof and glory now and

18 ā ā ā, tō worulde būtan ǣghwilcum ęnde. Amen.

18 All things in the world without any end. Amen.

102.3-4. Marian ... Michaeles. O.E. is inconsistent in the treatment of foreign names. They are sometimes naturalized, and sometimes retain in part their original inflections. Marian, an original accusative, is here used as a genitive; while Michaeles has the O.E. genitive ending.

102.3-4. Marian ... Michaeles. Old English is inconsistent in how it handles foreign names. Sometimes they are adapted to fit the language, and other times they keep some of their original forms. Marian, which is originally in the accusative case, is used here in the genitive case; meanwhile, Michaeles carries the Old English genitive ending.

102.17. Sīe ðē lof. See § 105, 1.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Thank you. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, 1.

III. THE VOYAGES OF OHTHERE AND WULFSTAN.

[Lauderdale and Cottonian MSS. These voyages are an original insertion by Alfred into his translation of Orosius’s Compendious History of the World.

[Lauderdale and Cottonian MSS. These journeys are an original addition by Alfred to his translation of Orosius’s Compendious History of the World.

“They consist,” says Ten Brink, “of a complete description of all the countries in which the Teutonic tongue prevailed at Alfred’s time, and a full narrative of the travels of two voyagers, which the king wrote down from their own lips. One of these, a Norwegian named Ohthere, had quite 103 circumnavigated the coast of Scandinavia in his travels, and had even penetrated to the White Sea; the other, named Wulfstan, had sailed from Schleswig to Frische Haff. The geographical and ethnographical details of both accounts are exceedingly interesting, and their style is attractive, clear, and concrete.”

“They consist,” says Ten Brink, “of a complete description of all the countries where the Germanic language was spoken during Alfred’s time, along with a detailed account of the journeys of two travelers, which the king recorded from their own words. One of these, a Norwegian named Ohthere, had completely circumnavigated the coast of Scandinavia during his travels and had even ventured into the White Sea; the other, named Wulfstan, had sailed from Schleswig to Frische Haff. The geographical and ethnographical details of both accounts are very interesting, and their style is appealing, clear, and straightforward.”

Ohthere made two voyages. Sailing first northward along the western coast of Norway, he rounded the North Cape, passed into the White Sea, and entered the Dwina River (ān micel ēa). On his second voyage he sailed southward along the western coast of Norway, entered the Skager Rack (wīdsǣ), passed through the Cattegat, and anchored at the Danish port of Haddeby (æt Hǣþum), modern Schleswig.

Ohthere went on two voyages. On his first trip, he sailed north along the western coast of Norway, rounded the North Cape, entered the White Sea, and navigated the Dwina River (ān micel ēa). During his second voyage, he sailed south along the western coast of Norway, entered the Skager Rack (wīdsǣ), passed through the Cattegat, and anchored at the Danish port of Haddeby (æt Hǣþum), which is now known as Schleswig.

Wulfstan sailed only in the Baltic Sea. His voyage of seven days from Schleswig brought him to Drausen (Trūsō) on the shore of the Drausensea.]

Wulfstan only sailed in the Baltic Sea. His seven-day journey from Schleswig brought him to Drausen (Trūsō) on the coast of the Drausensea.

Ohthere’s First Voyage.

1 Ōthęre sǣde his hlāforde, Ælfrede cyninge, þæt hē

1 Ōthęre said to his lord, King Alfred, that he

2 ealra Norðmǫnna norþmest būde. Hē cwæð þæt hē būde

2 A long time ago, the Northern men lived in the northmost part. He said that he lived

3 on þǣm lande norþweardum wiþ þā Westsæ. Hē sǣde

3 on the land to the north near the West Sea. He said

4 þēah þæt þæt land sīe swīþe lang norþ þonan; ac hit is

4 Although that land is very far north from here; but it is

5 eal wēste, būton on fēawum stōwum styccemælum wīciað

5 Real waste, except in a few places they are scattered.

6 Finnas, on huntoðe on wintra, ǫnd on sumera on fiscaþe

6 Finnas, in the winter they hunt, and in the summer they fish.

7 be þǣre sǣ. Hē sǣde þæt hē æt sumum cirre wolde

7 by the sea. He said that he would at some time

8 fandian hū lǫnge þæt land norþryhte lǣge, oþþe hwæðer

8 fandian hū lǫnge þæt land norþryhte lǣge, oþþe hwæðer

9 ǣnig mǫn be norðan þǣm wēstenne būde. Þā fōr hē

9 A man lived north of the desert. Then he left.

10 norþryhte be þǣm lande: lēt him ealne weg þæt wēste

10 northryhte about the land: let him all the way through that wilderness

11 land on ðæt stēorbord, ǫnd þā wīdsǣ on ðæt bæcbord þrīe

11 land on that starboard, and then wide on that backboard three

12 dagas. Þā wæs hē swā feor norþ swā þā hwælhuntan

12 days. He was as far north as the whales.

13 firrest faraþ. Þā fōr hē þā gīet norþryhte swā feor swā

13 first journey. Then he went further northeast as far as

14 hē meahte on þǣm ōþrum þrīm dagum gesiglan. Þā bēag

14 he could sail in the next three days. Then the ring

15 þæt land þǣr ēastryhte, oþþe sēo sǣ in on ðæt lǫnd, hē

þæt land þǣr ēastryhte, oþþe sēo sǣ in on ðæt lǫnd, hē

16 nysse hwæðer, būton hē wisse ðæt hē ðǣr bād westanwindes

16 He does not know whether he stayed there because he was aware that the west wind was blowing.

17 ǫnd hwōn norþan, ǫnd siglde ðā ēast be lande

17 and then northward, and sailed east by land

18 swā swā hē meahte on fēower dagum gesiglan. Þā

18 as he could within four days. Then

19 sceolde hē ðǣr bīdan ryhtnorþanwindes, for ðǣm þæt

19 He should wait there for the right north wind, because

20 land bēag þǣr sūþryhte, oþþe sēo sǣ in on ðæt land, hē

20 land ring there south, or the sea into that land, he

21 nysse hwæþer. Þā siglde hē þǫnan sūðryhte be lande

21 now whether. Then he sailed southward along the land

104

1 swā swā hē męhte1 on fīf dagum gesiglan. Ðā læg þǣr

1 just as he might have seen on five days. Then there lay there

2 ān micel ēa ūp in on þæt land. Þā cirdon hīe ūp in on

2 a great river flowing into the land. Then they circled up into

3 ðā ēa, for þǣm hīe ne dorston forþ bī þǣre ēa siglan for

3 Then they didn't dare to sail forth by the river for

4 unfriþe; for þǣm ðæt land wæs eall gebūn on ōþre healfe

4 unfriendly; because that land was all inhabited on the other side

5 þǣre ēas. Ne mētte hē ǣr nān gebūn land, siþþan hē

5 He didn't meet any settled land before he

6 frǫm his āgnum hām fōr; ac him wæs ealne weg wēste

6 frǫm his āgnum hām for; but he was always in a wasteland

7 land on þæt stēorbord, būtan fiscerum ǫnd fugelerum ōnd

7 land on the steering board, except for fishermen and birds and

8 huntum, ǫnd þæt wǣron eall Finnas; ǫnd him wæs ā

8 huntsman, ǫnd þæt wǣron all the Finns; and he had always

9 wīdsǣ on ðæt bæcbord. Þā Beormas hæfdon swīþe wel

9 wide on the backboard. The Beormas had very well

10 gebūd hira land: ac hīe ne dorston þǣr on cuman. Ac

10 They built their land: but they did not go there to come. But

11 þāra Terfinna land wæs eal wēste, būton ðǣr huntan

11 When Terfinna's land was all deserted, except for hunters.

12 gewīcodon, oþþe fisceras, oþþe fugeleras.

gewīcodon, or fishers, or birders.

13 Fela spella him sǣdon þā Beormas ǣgþer ge of hiera

13 Fela told him that the Beormas were either of their own

14 āgnum lande ge of þǣm landum þe ymb hīe ūtan wǣron;

14 the lambs of the land from the lands that were outside of them;

15 ac hē nyste hwæt þæs sōþes wæs, for þǣm hē hit self ne

15 he didn’t know hwæt þæs sōþes wæs, because he hadn’t done it himself.

16 geseah. Þā Finnas, him þūhte, ǫnd þā Beormas sprǣcon

16 he saw. Then the Finns, it seemed to him, and the Beormas spoke

17 nēah ān geþēode. Swīþost hē fōr ðider, tō ēacan þæs

17 almost one language. Most importantly, he went there to add to that

18 landes scēawunge, for þǣm horshwælum, for ðǣm hīe

18 landscape view, for the horse whales, because they

19 habbað swīþe æþele bān on hiora2 tōþum—þā tēð hīe brōhton

19 had very noble bones in their2 teeth—then they pulled them out

20 sume þǣm cyninge—ǫnd hiora hȳd bið swīðe gōd tō

``` 20 assume the king—and their hidden wealth is very good for ```

21 sciprāpum. Sē hwæl bið micle lǣssa þonne ōðre hwalas:

21 sciprāpum. The whale is much smaller than other whales:

22 ne bið hē lęngra ðonne syfan3 ęlna lang; ac on his āgnum

22 he is no longer than seven3 elbows long; but in his own

23 lande is sē bętsta hwælhuntað: þā bēoð eahta and fēowertiges

23 land is the best whaling: there are eighty-four

24 ęlna lange, and þā mǣstan fīftiges ęlna lange;

24 five lengths of an ell, and the greatest five lengths of an ell;

25 þāra hē sǣde þæt hē syxa sum ofslōge syxtig on twām

25 then he said that he syxa sum killed sixty in two

26 dagum.

dagum.

105

1 Hē wæs swȳðe spēdig man on þǣm ǣhtum þe heora2

1 He was a very wealthy man in the possessions that he had.

2 spēda on bēoð, þæt is, on wildrum. Hē hæfde þā gȳt, ðā

2 speed on bēoð, that is, in the wild. He had then, when

3 hē þone cyningc5 sōhte, tamra dēora unbebohtra syx hund.

3 He sought the king, tamer of beasts, six hundred without restraint.

4 Þā dēor hī hātað ‘hrānas’; þāra wǣron syx stælhrānas;

4 The animals they call 'hrānas'; there were six stælhrānas;

5 ðā bēoð swȳðe dȳre mid Finnum, for ðǣm hȳ fōð þā

5 they are very precious among the Finns, because they fetch then

6 wildan hrānas mid. Hē wæs mid þǣm fyrstum mannum

6 wildan hrānas mid. He was with the first people

7 on þǣm lande: næfde hē þēah mā ðonne twēntig hrȳðera,

7 in that land: he had, however, no more than twenty hounds,

8 and twēntig scēapa, and twēntig swȳna; and þæt lȳtle

8 and twenty sheep, and twenty pigs; and that little

9 þæt hē ęrede, hē ęrede mid horsan.4 Ac hyra ār is mǣst

9 that he read, he read with horses.4 But their honor is greatest

10 on þǣm gafole þe ðā Finnas him gyldað. Þæt gafol bið

10 on the tribute that the Finns pay him. That tribute is

11 on dēora fellum, and on fugela feðerum, and hwales bāne,

11 on deer hides, and on bird feathers, and whale bones,

12 and on þǣm sciprāpum þe bēoð of hwæles hȳde geworht

12 and on the skins that are made from whale hide

13 and of sēoles. Ǣghwilc gylt be hys gebyrdum. Sē byrdesta

13 and of souls. Every sin has its consequences. The most burdensome

14 sceall gyldan fīftȳne mearðes fell, and fīf hrānes,

14 kill fifteen animals of the herd, and five of the birds,

15 and ān beren fel, and tȳn ambra feðra, and berenne kyrtel

15 and a bear fur, and ten amber feathers, and a bear tunic

16 oððe yterenne, and twēgen sciprāpas; ǣgþer sȳ syxtig

16 or both, and two swords; each is sixty

17 ęlna lang, ōþer sȳ of hwæles hȳde geworht, ōþer of sīoles.6

17 a veil made from the hide of a whale, or from silk.6

18 Hē sǣde ðæt Norðmanna land wǣre swȳþe lang and

18 He said that the land of the Norsemen was very long and

19 swȳðe smæl. Eal þæt his man āðer oððe ęttan oððe ęrian

tiny. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ either eat or disturb

20 mæg, þæt līð wið ðā sǣ; and þæt is þēah on sumum

20 I can, that it flows to the sea; and that is, however, in some

21 stōwum swȳðe clūdig; and licgað wilde mōras wið ēastan

21 very clean by the dwelling; and wild moors lie to the east

22 and wið ūpp on emnlange þǣm bȳnum lande. On þǣm

22 and up along the border of the land. In the

23 mōrum eardiað Finnas. And þæt bȳne land is ēasteweard

23 The Finns live in the land of Mōrum. And that land is to the east.

24 brādost, and symle swā norðor swā smælre. Ēastewęrd7

24 broadly, and always as further north as smaller. Ēastewęrd7

25 hit mæg bīon8 syxtig mīla brād, oþþe hwēne brǣdre;

25 I might be about sixty miles wide, or perhaps a bit wider;

26 and middeweard þrītig oððe brādre; and norðeweard hē

26 and southwest thirty or broader; and northwards he

27 cwæð, þǣr hit smalost wǣre, þæt hit mihte bēon þrēora

27 he said, where it was smallest, that it could be three

28 mīla brād tō þǣm mōre; and sē mōr syðþan,9 on sumum

28 my dear brother to the marsh; and the marsh afterwards,9 on some

106

1 stōwum, swā brād swā man mæg on twām wucum oferfēran;

1 in a place as wide as one can cross in two weeks;

2 and on sumum stōwum swā brād swā man mæg

2 and in some places as wide as one can

3 on syx dagum oferfēran.

on six days overfare.

4 Ðonne is tōemnes þǣm lande sūðeweardum, on ōðre

4 Then is to the south of the land, on another

5 healfe þæs mōres, Swēoland, oþ þæt land norðeweard;

5 half of the moor, Sweden, to the land to the north;

6 and tōemnes þǣm lande norðeweardum, Cwēna land. Þā

6 and towards the land to the north, the land of the Swedes. Then

7 Cwēnas hęrgiað hwīlum on ðā Norðmęn ofer ðone mōr,

7 The warriors sometimes raid the Norsemen across the marsh,

8 hwīlum þā Norðmęn on hȳ. And þǣr sint swīðe micle

8 Sometimes the Northmen are in a hurry. And there are very many

9 męras fersce geond þā mōras; and berað þā Cwēnas hyra

9 men carry across the moors; and the queens bear their

10 scypu ofer land on ðā męras, and þanon hęrgiað on ðā

10 They scavenge over the land on the shores, and from there, they attack the...

11 Norðmęn; hȳ habbað swȳðe lȳtle scypa and swȳðe

Norsemen; they have very little __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

12 leohte.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

104.6. frǫm his āgnum hām. An adverbial dative singular without an inflectional ending is found with hām, dæg, morgen, and ǣfen.

104.6. from his own home. An adverbial dative singular without an inflectional ending is found with home, day, morning, and evening.

104.8. ǫnd þæt wǣron. See § 40, Note 3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and that was. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

104.15. hwæt þæs sōþes wæs. Sweet errs in explaining sōþes as attracted into the genitive by þæs. It is not a predicate adjective, but a partitive genitive after hwæt.

104.15. what the truth was. Sweet is wrong in interpreting truth as drawn into the genitive by the. It is not a predicate adjective; rather, it is a partitive genitive following what.

104.25. syxa sum. See § 91, Note 2.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ syxa sum. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

105.2. on bēoð. See § 94, (5).

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ are. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

105.19. Eal þæt his man. Pronominal genitives are not always possessive in O.E.; his is here the partitive genitive of hit, the succeeding relative pronoun being omitted: All that (portion) of it that may, either-of-the-two, either be grazed or plowed, etc. (§ 70, Note).

105.19. All that his person. Pronominal genitives aren't always possessive in Old English; his is here the partitive genitive of it, with the following relative pronoun left out: All that (portion) of it that can, either one, either be grazed or plowed, etc. (§ 70, Note).

106.11-12. scypa ... leohte. These words exhibit inflections more frequent in Late than in Early West Saxon. The normal forms would be scypu, leoht; but in Late West Saxon the -u of short-stemmed neuters is generally replaced by -a; and the nominative accusative plural neuter of adjectives takes, by analogy, the masculine endings; hwate, gōde, hālge, instead of hwatu, gōd, hālgu.

106.11-12. scypa ... leohte. These words show inflections that are more common in Late West Saxon than in Early West Saxon. The standard forms would be scypu, leoht; however, in Late West Saxon, the -u of short-stemmed neuters is usually replaced by -a; and the nominative accusative plural neuter of adjectives adopts the masculine endings by analogy: hwate, gōde, hālge, instead of hwatu, gōd, hālgu.

1 = meahte, mihte.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = could, might.

2 = hiera.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = here.

3 = seofon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = seven.

4 = horsum.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = horse.

5 = cyning.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = king.

6 = sēoles.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = souls.

7 = -weard.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = -weird.

8 = bēon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = be.

9 = siððan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = since.

Ohthere’s Second Voyage.

13 Ōhthęre sǣde þæt sīo1 scīr hātte Hālgoland, þe hē on

13 Ōhthęre said that the 1 district is called Hālgoland, which he

14 būde. Hē cwæð þæt nān man ne būde be norðan him.

14 He said that no one lived to the north of him.

15 Þonne is ān port on sūðeweardum þǣm lande, þone man

15 There is a port in the southern part of the land, which one man

16 hǣt Sciringeshēal. Þyder hē cwæð þæt man ne mihte

16 called Sciringeshēal. There he said that one could not

17 geseglian on ānum mōnðe, gyf man on niht wīcode, and

17 to be read in one month, if you stay awake at night, and

18 ǣlce dæge hæfde ambyrne wind; and ealle ðā hwīle hē

18 Every day had a biting wind; and all the time he

19 sceal seglian be lande. And on þæt stēorbord him bið

19 they should navigate by land. And on that starboard side, there will be

20 ǣrest Īraland, and þonne ðā īgland þe synd betux Īralande

20 first Ireland, and then the islands that are between Ireland

21 and þissum lande. Þonne is þis land, oð hē cymð

21 and this land. Then this land is, until he comes

22 tō Scirincgeshēale, and ealne weg on þæt bæcbord Norðweg.

22 to Scirincgeshēale, and all the way on that backboard North Way.

107

1 Wið sūðan þone Sciringeshēal fylð swȳðe mycel

1 In the south, there is a great swelling of the Sciringeshēal

2 sǣ ūp in on ðæt land; sēo is brādre þonne ǣnig man ofer

2 sea up in that land; it is broader than any man over

3 sēon mæge. And is Gotland on ōðre healfe ongēan, and

3 may see. And Gotland is on the other side opposite, and

4 siððan Sillęnde. Sēo sǣ līð mænig2 hund mīla ūp in on

4 after Sillende. The sea lies many2 hundred miles up in on

5 þæt land.

that land.

6 And of Sciringeshēale hē cwæð ðæt hē seglode on fīf

6 And about Sciringeshēale he said that he sailed in five

7 dagan3 tō þǣm porte þe mǫn hǣt æt Hǣþum; sē stęnt

7 grain3 to the gate that men call æt Hǣþum; it stands

8 betuh Winedum, and Seaxum, and Angle, and hȳrð in

8 betuh Winedum, and Seaxum, and Angle, and hȳrð in

9 on Dęne. Ðā hē þiderweard seglode fram Sciringeshēale,

9 on Dęne. Then he sailed there from Sciringeshale,

10 þā wæs him on þæt bæcbord Dęnamearc and on

10 then there was to him on that backboard Danes and on

11 þæt stēorbord wīdsǣ þrȳ dagas; and þā, twēgen dagas ǣr

11 the steering board was wide for three days; and then, two days before

12 hē tō Hǣþum cōme, him wæs on þæt stēorbord Gotland,

12 He came to the Heathens, there was on that steering board Gotland,

13 and Sillęnde, and īglanda fela. On þǣm landum eardodon

13 and Sillęnde, and iglanda fela. On those lands lived

14 Ęngle, ǣr hī hider on land cōman.4 And hym wæs

14 Before they arrive here on land.4 And them wæs

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ the in on

16 Dęnemearce hȳrað.

Dęnemearce hȳrað.

107.7. æt Hǣþum. “This pleonastic use of æt with names of places occurs elsewhere in the older writings, as in the Chronicle (552), ‘in þǣre stōwe þe is genęmned æt Searobyrg,’ where the æt has been erased by some later hand, showing that the idiom had become obsolete. Cp. the German ‘Gasthaus zur Krone,’ Stamboul = es tān pólin.” (Sweet.) See, also, Atterbury, § 28, Note 3.

107.7. At Heathum. “This redundant use of at with place names appears elsewhere in older writings, as in the Chronicle (552), ‘in the place that is named at Searobyrg,’ where the at has been removed by a later hand, indicating that the idiom had fallen out of use. See also the German ‘Gasthaus zur Krone,’ Stamboul = es tān polin.” (Sweet.) See also, Atterbury, § 28, Note 3.

107.14-15. wæs ... þā īgland. The singular predicate is due again to inversion (p. 100, note on gefeaht). The construction is comparatively rare in O.E., but frequent in Shakespeare and in the popular speech of to-day. Cf. There is, Here is, There has been, etc., with a (single) plural subject following.

107.14-15. was ... the islands. The singular predicate is again due to inversion (p. 100, note on gefeaht). This construction is relatively rare in Old English but common in Shakespeare and in today's informal speech. See There is, Here is, There has been, etc., followed by a (single) plural subject.

1 = sēo.

2 = mǫnig.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = many.

3 = dagum.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = dang.

4 = cōmen.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = come.

Wulfstan’s Voyage.

17 Wulfstān sǣde þæt hē gefōre of Hǣðum, þæt hē wǣre

17 Wulfstan said that he traveled from the Hæðen people, that he was

18 on Trūsō on syfan dagum and nihtum, þæt þæt scip wæs

18 on Trūsō on seven days and nights, that the ship was

19 ealne weg yrnende under segle. Weonoðland him wæs

19 running all the way under the sky. It was Weonoðland to him

108

1 on stēorbord, and on bæcbord him wæs Langaland, and

1 on starboard, and on port him was Langaland, and

2 Lǣland, and Falster, and Scōnēg; and þās land eall

2 Lolland, and Falster, and Scania; and all these lands

3 hȳrað tō Dęnemearcan. And þonne Burgenda land wæs

3 Came to Denmark. And then the land of the Burgundians was

4 ūs on bæcbord, and þā habbað him sylfe1 cyning. Þonne

4 ūs on backboard, and then he has himself 1 king. When

5 æfter Burgenda lande wǣron ūs þās land, þā synd hātene

5 After the Burgundian lands were given to us, these lands are called

6 ǣrest Blēcinga-ēg, and Mēore, and Ēowland, and Gotland

6 first Blécinga-island, and Mēore, and Ēowland, and Gotland

7 on bæcbord; and þās land hȳrað tō Swēom. And Weonodland

7 on backboard; and these lands belong to the Swedes. And Weonodland

8 wæs ūs ealne weg on stēorbord oð Wīslemūðan.

8 We traveled the entire way on the starboard side until we reached Wislemouth.

9 Sēo Wīsle is swȳðe mycel ēa, and hīo2 tōlīð Wītland and

9 The Wisle is a very large river, and it2 divides Wītland and

10 Weonodland; and þæt Wītland belimpeð tō Estum; and

10 Weonodland; and that Wītland borders on the East; and

11 sēo Wīsle līð ūt of Weonodlande, and līð in Estmęre;

11 the Wise Man lives out of Wessex, and lives in Eastmere;

12 and sē Estmęre is hūru fīftēne3 mīla brād. Þonne cymeð

12 and the Estmere is indeed fifteen miles wide. Then comes

13 Ilfing ēastan in Estmęre of ðām męre, ðe Trūsō standeð

13 Ilfing east in Estmere by the lake where Truso stands

14 in stæðe; and cumað ūt samod in Estmęre, Ilfing ēastan

14 in place; and come out together in Estmęre, Ilfing to the east

15 of Estlande, and Wīsle sūðan of Winodlande. And

15 of Eastland, and Wisle south of Windland. And

16 þonne benimð Wīsle Ilfing hire naman, and ligeð of þǣm

16 then Wise Ilfing takes her name and lies of the

17 męre west and norð on sǣ; for ðȳ hit man hǣt

17 moved west and north on the sea; because it is called man

18 Wīslemūða.

Wyslemouth.

19 Þæt Estland is swȳðe mycel, and þǣr bið swȳðe manig

19 Estonia is very large, and there are many

20 burh, and on ǣlcere byrig bið cyning. And þǣr bið

20 fortress, and in every city there is a king. And there is

21 swȳðe mycel hunig, and fiscnað; and sē cyning and þā

21 a lot of honey, and fish; and the king and the

22 rīcostan męn drincað mȳran meolc, and þā unspēdigan

22 Rich men drink sweet milk, and the unfortunate

23 and þā þēowan drincað medo.4 Þǣr bið swȳðe mycel

23 and then the servants drink mead.4 There is very much

24 gewinn betwēonan him. And ne bið ðǣr nǣnig ealo5

24 win between him. And there won’t be any beer5

25 gebrowen mid Estum, ac þǣr bið medo genōh. And þǣr

25 growing with East winds, and there is enough mead. And there

26 is mid Estum ðēaw, þonne þǣr bið man dēad, þæt hē līð

26 is mid Estum ðēaw, þonne þǣr bið man dēad, þæt hē līð

27 inne unforbærned mid his māgum and frēondum mōnað,

27 He complained among his relatives and friends,

28 ge hwīlum twēgen; and þā cyningas, and þā ōðre hēahðungene

28 sometimes two; and the kings, and the other high-ranking officials

29 męn, swā micle lęncg6 swā hī māran spēda

29 men, as long as they can, just as they seem to do

30 habbað, hwīlum healf gēar þæt hī bēoð unforbærned, and

30 they have, sometimes half a year during which they remain unburned, and

109

1 licgað bufan eorðan on hyra hūsum. And ealle þā hwīle

1 They lie above the earth in their houses. And all those times

2 þe þæt līc bið inne, þǣr sceal bēon gedrync and plega,

2 the body is inside, where sceal will be drink and play,

3 oð ðone dæg þe hī hine forbærnað. Þonne þȳ ylcan dæge

3 until the day they burn him. On the same day

4 þe hī hine tō þǣm āde beran wyllað, þonne tōdǣlað hī

4 They want to bring him to the shore, then they will divide.

5 his feoh, þæt þǣr tō lāfe bið æfter þǣm gedrynce and þǣm

5 his wealth, which there remains as leftover after the indulgence and the

6 plegan, on fīf oððe syx, hwȳlum on mā, swā swā þæs fēos

6 please, on five or six, sometimes more, just like the money

7 andēfn bið. Ālęcgað hit ðonne forhwæga on ānre mīle

7 andēfn is. Ālęcgað hit when it happens in one mile

8 þone mǣstan dǣl fram þǣm tūne, þonne ōðerne, ðonne

þone mǣstan dǣl fram þǣm tūne, þonne ōðerne, ðonne

9 þone þriddan, oþ þe hyt eall ālēd bið on þǣre ānre mīle;

9 the third, until it is all poured out in the same mile;

10 and sceall bēon sē lǣsta dǣl nȳhst þǣm tūne ðe sē dēada

10 and shall be the least part tonight of the town that the dead

11 man on lið. Ðonne sceolon7 bēon gesamnode ealle ðā

11 man on lið. Then shall7 be gathered all the

12 męnn ðe swyftoste hors habbað on þǣm lande, forhwæga

12 men who have the fastest horses in the land, anyway

13 on fīf mīlum oððe on syx mīlum fram þǣm fēo. Þonne

13 five miles or six miles from the cattle. Then

14 ærnað hȳ ealle tōweard þǣm fēo: ðonne cymeð sē man

14 as soon as they all come to the treasure: then the man will come

15 sē þæt swiftoste hors hafað tō þǣm ǣrestan dǣle and tō

15 the fastest horse has to the first part and to

16 þǣm mǣstan, and swā ǣlc æfter ōðrum, oþ hit bið eall

16 the most, and so each after the other, until it is all

17 genumen; and sē nimð þone lǣstan dǣl sē nȳhst þǣm

17 genumen; and you take the last part closest to the

18 tūne þæt feoh geærneð. And þonne rīdeð ǣlc hys weges

18 then the money is earned. And then everyone rides their own way

19 mid ðǣm fēo, and hyt mōtan8 habban eall; and for ðȳ

19 in the wealth, and it must8 have everything; and because of that

20 þǣr bēoð þā swiftan hors ungefōge dȳre. And þonne his

20 There are the swift horses, incredibly expensive. And then his

21 gestrēon bēoð þus eall āspęnded, þonne byrð man hine ūt,

21 treasure is all spent when a person brings it out,

22 and forbærneð mid his wǣpnum and hrægle; and swīðost

22 and defended with his weapons and armor; and most importantly

110

1 ealle hys spēda hȳ forspęndað mid þǣm langan legere

1 all his wealth he spends with the long-winded speaker

2 þæs dēadan mannes inne, and þæs þe hȳ be þǣm wegum

2 of the dead man inside, and of those who travel along the paths

3 ālęcgað, þe ðā fręmdan tō ærnað, and nimað. And þæt

3 gather, those who work to achieve, and take. And that

4 is mid Estum þēaw þæt þǣr sceal ǣlces geðēodes man

4 this is the custom of the East that every person of every nation should

5 bēon forbærned; and gyf þār9 man ān bān findeð unforbærned,

5 to be burned; and if there 9 man ān bān findeð unforbærned,

6 hit sceolan7 miclum gebētan. And þǣr is mid

6 hit schools7 greatly improve. And there is with

7 Estum ān mǣgð þæt hī magon cyle gewyrcan; and þȳ

7 They think that they can create a cool atmosphere; and so

8 þǣr licgað þā dēadan męn swā lange, and ne fūliað, þæt

8 the dead lie there so long, and do not decay, that

9 hȳ wyrcað þone cyle him on. And þēah man āsętte

9 they create the cold for themselves. And even if someone sets

10 twēgen fǣtels full ealað oððe wæteres, hȳ gedōð þæt

10 two vessels full of ale or water, they do that

11 ǣgþer bið oferfroren, sam hit sȳ sumor sam winter.

11 Both will be overcome, whether it’s summer or winter.

108.1-4. him ... ūs. Note the characteristic change of person, the transition from indirect to direct discourse.

108.1-4. him ... us. Notice the typical shift in person, moving from indirect to direct speech.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ can. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

109.7. Ālęcgað hit. Bosworth illustrates thus:

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Allegedly it. Bosworth illustrates thus:

see end of text
Where the
horsemen
assemble.
The six parts of
the property placed
within one mile.

“The horsemen assemble five or six miles from the property, at d or e, and run towards c; the man who has the swiftest horse, coming first to 1 or c, takes the first and largest part. The man who has the horse coming second takes part 2 or b, and so, in succession, till the least part, 6 or a, is taken.”

“The horsemen gather about five or six miles from the property, at d or e, and race toward c; the rider with the fastest horse, arriving first at 1 or c, claims the first and biggest portion. The rider with the second fastest horse takes part 2 or b, and so on, until the smallest part, 6 or a, is claimed.”

110.5-6. man ... hī. Here the plural refers to the singular man. Cf. p. 109, ll. 18-19, ǣlc ... mōtan. In Exodus xxxii, 24, we find “Whosoever hath any gold, let them break it off”; and Addison writes, “I do not mean that I think anyone to blame for taking due care of their health.” The construction, though outlawed now, has been common in all periods of our language. Paul remarks (Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, 3d ed., § 186) that “When a word is used as an indefinite [one, man, somebody, etc.] it is, strictly speaking, incapable of any distinction of number. Since, however, in respect of the external form, a particular number has to be chosen, it is a matter of indifference which this is.... Hence a change of numbers is common in the different languages.” Paul fails to observe that the change is always from singular to plural, not from plural to singular. See Note on the Concord of Collectives and Indefinites (Anglia XI, 1901). See p. 119, note on ll. 19-21.

110.5-6. man ... they. Here the plural they refers to the singular man. See also p. 109, ll. 18-19, each ... may. In Exodus 32:24, we find “Whoever has any gold, let them break it off”; and Addison writes, “I do not mean that I think anyone to blame for taking proper care of their health.” The construction, though not accepted today, has been common throughout all periods of our language. Paul notes (Principles of Language History, 3rd ed., § 186) that “When a word is used as an indefinite [one, man, somebody, etc.] it is, strictly speaking, incapable of any distinction of number. Since, however, with regard to its external form, a specific number must be chosen, it does not matter which one is used.... Hence a change of numbers is common in different languages.” Paul does not notice that the change always goes from singular to plural, not the other way around. See Note on the Concord of Collectives and Indefinites (Anglia XI, 1901). See p. 119, note on ll. 19-21.

1 = selfe.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = selfie.

2 = hēo.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = she.

3 = fīftīene.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = fifteen.

4 = medu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = medu.

5 = ealu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = ealu.

6 = lęng.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = length.

7 = sculon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = sculon.

8 = mōton.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = car.

9 = ðǣr.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = there.

111

IV. THE STORY OF CÆDMON.

[From the so-called Alfredian version of Bede’s Ecclesiastical History. The text generally followed is that of MS. Bodley, Tanner 10. Miller (Early English Text Society, No. 95, Introd.) argues, chiefly from the use of the prepositions, that the original O.E. MS. was Mercian, composed possibly in Lichfield (Staffordshire). At any rate, O.E. idiom is frequently sacrificed to the Latin original.

[From the so-called Alfredian version of Bede’s Ecclesiastical History. The text generally used is that of MS. Bodley, Tanner 10. Miller (Early English Text Society, No. 95, Introd.) argues, mainly based on the prepositions, that the original Old English manuscript was Mercian, probably written in Lichfield (Staffordshire). In any case, Old English style is often compromised for the sake of the Latin original.]

“Cædmon, as he is called, is the first Englishman whose name we know who wrote poetry in our island of England; and the first to embody in verse the new passions and ideas which Christianity had brought into England.... Undisturbed by any previous making of lighter poetry, he came fresh to the work of Christianising English song. It was a great step to make. He built the chariot in which all the new religious emotions of England could now drive along.” (Brooke, The History of Early English Literature, cap. XV.) There is no reason to doubt the historical existence of Cædmon; for Bede, who relates the story, lived near Whitby, and was seven years old when Cædmon died (A.D. 680)].

“Cædmon, as he is called, is the first Englishman whose name we know who wrote poetry on our island of England; and the first to put into verse the new passions and ideas that Christianity had introduced to England.... Uninfluenced by any previous creation of lighter poetry, he approached the task of Christianizing English song with a fresh perspective. It was a significant leap to take. He created the platform where all the new religious feelings of England could now flourish.” (Brooke, The History of Early English Literature, cap. XV.) There is no reason to doubt Cædmon's historical existence; for Bede, who tells the story, lived near Whitby and was seven years old when Cædmon died (AD 680).

1 In ðysse abbudissan mynstre wæs sum brōðor syndriglīce

1 In ðysse abbudissan there was a certain brother who was unique

2 mid godcundre gife gemǣred ǫnd geweorðad, for þon

2 in divine gifts, distinguished and honored, therefore

3 he gewunade gerisenlīce lēoð wyrcan, þā ðe tō ǣfęstnisse1

3 he started to create poems that were meant for solemnity1

4 ǫnd tō ārfæstnisse belumpon; swā ðætte swā hwæt swā

4 and to modesty we cling; just as whatever

5 hē of godcundum stafum þurh bōceras geleornode, þæt hē

5 he learned divine knowledge through books, that he

6 æfter medmiclum fæce in scopgereorde mid þā mǣstan

6 after a small trick in the poet's language with the greatest

7 swētnisse ǫnd inbryrdnisse geglęngde, ǫnd in Ęngliscgereorde

7 sweetness and inwardness succeeded, and in English language

8 wel geworht forþ brōhte. Ǫnd for his lēoþsǫngum

8 well worth bringing forth. And for his songs

112

1 mǫnigra mǫnna mōd oft to worulde forhogdnisse ǫnd tō

1 Many people's minds are often filled with worldly distractions and to

2 geþēodnisse þæs heofonlīcan līfes onbærnde wǣron. Ǫnd

2 The connections of heavenly life were revealed. And

3 ēac swelce2 mǫnige ōðre æfter him in Ǫngelþēode ongunnon

3 And many others after him began in English.

4 ǣfęste lēoð wyrcan, ac nǣnig hwæðre him þæt gelīce

make a strong song, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

5 dōn ne meahte; for þon hē nālæs frǫm mǫnnum nē ðurh

5 dōn ne meahte; because he is neither from humans nor through

6 mǫn gelǣred wæs þæt hē ðone lēoðcræft leornade, ac hē

6 was trained to learn the art of poetry, but he

7 wæs godcundlīce gefultumod, ǫnd þurh Godes gife þone

7 was divinely helped, and through God's grace the

8 sǫngcræft onfēng; ǫnd hē for ðon nǣfre nōht lēasunge,

8 He embraced the art of song; and for that reason, he never engaged in any deceit,

9 nē īdles lēoþes wyrcan ne meahte, ac efne þā ān ðā ðē tō

9 I couldn't create an idle song, but only the one that you to

ǣfęstnisse__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ belumpon __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

11 singan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

12 Wæs hē, sē mǫn, in weoruldhāde3 gesęted oð þā tīde þe

12 He was, the man, seated in the worldly state until the time when

13 hē wæs gelȳfdre ylde, ǫnd nǣfre nǣnig lēoð geleornade.

13 He was a firm believer, and never learned any songs.

14 Ǫnd hē for þon oft in gebēorscipe, þonne þǣr wæs blisse

14 And he often went to feasts when there was blisse

15 intinga gedēmed, þæt hēo4 ealle sceolden þurh ęndebyrdnesse

15 intinga lamented that she4 should have to endure everything through hardship.

16 be hearpan singan, þonne hē geseah þā hearpan him

16 to play the harp, when he saw the harp before him

17 nēalēcan, þonne ārās hē for scǫme frǫm þǣm symble,

17 approaching, when he arose in shame from the feast,

18 ǫnd hām ēode tō his hūse. Þā hē þæt þā sumre tīde

18 and went home to his house. Then he þæt þā sumre tīde

19 dyde, þæt hē forlēt þæt hūs þæs gebēorscipes, ǫnd ūt wæs

19 dyde, þæt hē forlēt the house of the feast, and outside was

113

1 gǫngende tō nēata scipene, þāra heord him wæs þǣre

gǫngende to animals ship, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

2 nihte beboden; þā hē ðā þǣr on gelimplīcre tīde his

2 nihte beboden; then he when there at the suitable time his

3 leomu5 on ręste gesętte ǫnd onslēpte, þa stōd him sum

3 leomu5 on rest set and unlocked, then stood him some

4 mǫn æt þurh swefn, ǫnd hine hālette ǫnd grētte, ǫnd hine

4 he saw through a dream, and called to him and greeted him, and him

5 be his nǫman nęmnde: “Cædmǫn, sing mē hwæthwugu.”

5 his name is called: “Cædmǫn, sing me something.”

6 Þā ǫndswarede hē, ǫnd cwæð: “Ne cǫn ic nōht singan;

6 Then he answered and said, “I can’t sing at all;

7 ǫnd ic for þon of þyssum gebēorscipe ūt ēode ǫnd hider

7 And so I left this gathering and came here.

8 gewāt, for þon ic nāht singan ne cūðe.” Eft hē cwæð sē ðe

8 went, because I couldn't sing at all.” Then he said the one who

9 wið hine sprecende wæs: “Hwæðre þū meaht mē singan.”

9 speaking to him was: “But you can sing for me.”

10 Þā cwæð hē: “Hwæt sceal ic singan?” Cwæð hē: “Sing

10 Then he said: "What should I sing?" He said: "Sing

11 mē frumsceaft.” Þā hē ðā þās andsware onfēng, þā

11 mē frumsceaft.” Then he received this answer, when

12 ongǫn hē sōna singan, in hęrenesse Godes Scyppendes,

12 Then he will truly sing, in the presence of God the Creator,

13 þā fers ǫnd þā word þe hē nǣfre ne gehȳrde, þāra ęndebyrdnes

13 Then he felt the breath and the words that he had never heard, þāra ęndebyrdnes

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__:

15 Nū sculon hęrigean6     heofonrīces Weard,

Nū we must praise __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ the guardian of heaven,

16 Metodes meahte     ǫnd his mōdgeþanc,

Methods of thought and his mindset,

17 weorc Wuldorfæder,     swā hē wundra gehwæs,

work Father God, as he __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

18 ēce Drihten     ōr onstealde.

ēce Drihten ōr onstealde.

114

1 Hē ǣrest scēop     eorðan bearnum

He first created for the children of earth.

2 heofon tō hrōfe,     hālig Scyppend;

heaven to the roof, holy Creator;

3 þā middangeard     mǫnncynnes Weard,

þā middangeard mǫnncynnes Weard,

4 ēce Drihten,     æfter tēode

ēce Drihten, æfter tēode

5 fīrum foldan,     Frēa ælmihtig.

fīrum foldan, Frēa almighty.

6 Þā ārās hē frǫm þǣm slǣpe, ǫnd eal þā þe hē slǣpende

6 Then he started from sleep, and all that he sleeping

7 sǫng fæste in gemynde hæfde; ǫnd þǣm wordum sōna

song stuck in memory; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ soon

8 mǫnig word in þæt ilce gemet Gode wyrðes sǫnges

8 many a word in that same measure is worthy of God's song

9 tōgeþēodde. Þā cōm hē on morgenne tō þǣm tūngerēfan,

9 tōgeþēodde. Then he came in the morning to the town council,

10 sē þe his ealdormǫn wæs: sægde him hwylce gife hē

10 said to his nobleman: told him what gifts he

11 onfēng; ǫnd hē hine sōna tō þǣre abbudissan gelǣdde,

11 and he was soon led to the abbess,

12 ǫnd hire þæt cȳðde ǫnd sægde. Þā heht hēo gesǫmnian

12 and she showed it and said. Then he commanded her to gather

13 ealle þā gelǣredestan męn ǫnd þā leorneras, ǫnd him

13 all the learned men and the scholars, and they

14 ǫndweardum hēt sęcgan þæt swefn, ǫnd þæt lēoð singan,

14 And said to them to tell about the dream, and to sing the song,

15 þæt ealra heora7 dōme gecoren wǣre, hwæt oððe hwǫnan

15 that the choice of all their7 judgment was, what or where

16 þæt cumen wǣre. Þā wæs him eallum gesewen, swā swā

that would come. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, just like

17 hit wæs, þæt him wǣre frǫm Drihtne sylfum heofonlīc

17 It was that it was from the Lord Himself heavenly

115

1 gifu forgifen. Þā ręhton hęo4 him ǫnd sægdon sum hālig

1 Gifu forgiven. Then they reached out to him and said some holy

2 spell ǫnd godcundre lāre word: bebudon him þā, gif hē

2 spell and divine learning word: command him then, if he

3 meahte, þæt hē in swīnsunge lēoþsǫnges þæt gehwyrfde.

3 made it so that he transformed it into a pig's song.

4 Þā hē ðā hæfde þā wīsan onfǫngne, þā ēode hē hām tō

4 Then, after he had received the wisdom, he went home to

5 his hūse, ǫnd cwōm eft on morgenne, ǫnd þȳ bętstan

his house, and came back the next morning, and the best

6 lēoðe geglęnged him āsǫng ǫnd āgeaf þæt him beboden

6 a song was sung to him and he was given what was commanded

7 wæs.

wæs.

8 Ðā ongan sēo abbudisse clyppan ǫnd lufigean8 þā Godes

8 Then the abbess began to embrace and love8 the God

9 gife in þǣm męn, ǫnd hēo hine þā mǫnade ǫnd lǣrde

gift in the men, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and educated

10 þæt hē woruldhād forlēte ǫnd munuchād onfēnge: ǫnd

10 that he gives up worldly matters and munuchād onfēnge: and

11 hē þæt wel þafode. Ǫnd hēo hine in þæt mynster onfēng

11 He accepted that well. And she received him into the monastery.

12 mid his gōdum, ǫnd hine geþēodde tō gesǫmnunge þāra

12 in his happiness, and he gathered for the meeting of those

13 Godes þēowa, ǫnd heht hine lǣran þæt getæl þæs hālgan

13 God's servant, and he commanded him to learn the count of the holy

14 stǣres ǫnd spelles. Ǫnd hē eal þā hē in gehȳrnesse

14 places and words. And he hears everything.

15 geleornian meahte, mid hine gemyndgade, ǫnd swā swā

15 to learn, while remembering him, and just as

16 clǣne nēten9 eodorcende in þæt swēteste lēoð gehwyrfde.

16 clean animals9 turned into the sweetest song.

17 Ǫnd his sǫng ǫnd his lēoð wǣron swā wynsumu tō gehȳranne,

17 And his song and his poem were so pleasant to hear,

18 þætte þā seolfan10 his lārēowas æt his mūðe writon

18 his teachers wrote at his mouth

19 ǫnd leornodon. Sǫng hē ǣrest be middangeardes gesceape,

19 and learned. He first sang about the creation of the world,

20 ǫnd bī fruman mǫncynnes, ǫnd eal þæt stǣr Genesis (þæt

20 and by the beginning of humankind, and all that star Genesis (that

21 is sēo ǣreste Moyses bōc); ǫnd eft bī ūtgǫnge Israhēla

21 is the first book of Moses); and again about the exodus of Israel

22 folces of Ǣgypta lǫnde, ǫnd bī ingǫnge þæs gehātlandes;

22 forces of Egypt land, and by entering the promised land;

23 ǫnd bī ōðrum mǫnegum spellum þæs hālgan gewrites

23 and by many other tales of the holy writings

116

1 canōnes bōca; ǫnd bī Crīstes męnniscnesse, ǫnd bī his

1 canōnes bōca; and by Christ's humanity, and by his

2 þrōwunge, ǫnd bī his ūpāstīgnesse in heofonas; ǫnd bī

2 suffering, and by his ascension into heaven; and by

3 þæs Hālgan Gāstes cyme, ǫnd þāra apostola lāre; ǫnd eft

3 the coming of the Holy Spirit, and the teachings of the apostles; and again

4 bī þǣm dæge þæs tōweardan dōmes, ǫnd bī fyrhtu þæs

4 by the day of the upcoming judgment, and by the fear of that

5 tintreglīcan wītes, ǫnd bī swētnesse þæs heofonlīcan rīces,

5 heavenly wisdom, and by the sweetness of the heavenly kingdom,

6 hē monig lēoð geworhte; ǫnd swelce2 ēac ōðer mǫnig be

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; and also __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ many others

7 þǣm godcundan fręmsumnessum ǫnd dōmum hē geworhte.

7 He created the divine wonders and deeds.

8 In eallum þǣm hē geornlīce gēmde11 þæt hē męn ātuge

8 In all of that, he eagerly gathered11 that he took men out

9 frǫm synna lufan ǫnd māndǣda, ǫnd tō lufan ǫnd tō

9 from the love of sin and wrongdoing, and to love and to

10 geornfulnesse āwęhte gōdra dǣda, for þon hē wæs, sē

10 Greed led to good actions, because he was, the

11 mǫn, swīþe ǣfęst ǫnd regollīcum þēodscipum ēaðmōdlīce

11 man, very serious and devoted to the laws of the land, humbly

12 underþēoded; ǫnd wið þǣm þā ðe in ōðre wīsan dōn woldon,

12 subjugated; and against those who wanted to do otherwise,

13 hē wæs mid welme12 micelre ęllenwōdnisse onbærned.

13 he was with warmth12 great courage burned.

14 Ǫnd hē for ðon fægre ęnde his līf betȳnde ǫnd geęndade.

14 And he therefore beautifully ended his life and journeyed on.

111.1. ðysse abbudissan. The abbess referred to is the famous Hild, or Hilda, then living in the monastery at Streones-halh, which, according to Bede, means “Bay of the Beacon.” The Danes afterward gave it the name Whitby, or “White Town.” The surroundings were eminently fitted to nurture England’s first poet. “The natural scenery which surrounded him, the valley of the Esk, on whose sides he probably lived, the great cliffs, the billowy sea, the vast sky seen from the heights over the ocean, played incessantly upon him.” (Brooke.)

111.1. these abbesses. The abbess mentioned here is the well-known Hild, or Hilda, who was living in the monastery at Streones-halh, which Bede tells us means “Bay of the Beacon.” Later, the Danes named it Whitby, or “White Town.” The area was perfectly suited to nurture England’s first poet. “The natural scenery that surrounded him, the valley of the Esk, where he likely lived, the towering cliffs, the rolling sea, and the vast sky visible from the heights above the ocean, influenced him constantly.” (Brooke.)

Note, also, in this connection, the numerous Latin words that the introduction of Christianity (A.D. 597) brought into the vocabulary of O.E.: abbudisse, mynster, bisceop, Lǣden, prēost, æstel, mancus.

Note, also, in this connection, the numerous Latin words that the introduction of Christianity (A.D. 597) brought into the vocabulary of O.E.: abbudisse, mynster, bisceop, Lǣden, prēost, æstel, mancus.

112.4-5. The more usual order of words would be ac nǣnig, hwæðre, ne meahte ðæt dōn gelīce him.

112.4-5. The more common word order would be ac nǣnig, hwæðre, ne meahte ðæt dōn gelīce him.

112.10-11. ǫnd his ... singan, and which it became his (the) pious tongue to sing.

112.10-11. and his ... sing, and which became his (the) holy tongue to sing.

112.14-15. blisse intinga, for the sake of joy; but the translator has confused laetitiae causā (ablative) and laetitiae causa (nominative). The proper form would be for blisse with omission of intingan, just as for my sake is usually for mē; for his (or their) sake, for him. Cf. Mark vi, 26: “Yet for his oath’s sake, and for their sakes which sat with him, he would not reject her,” for ðǣm āðe, ǫnd for ðǣm þe him mid sǣton. For his sake is frequently for his ðingon (ðingum), rarely for his intingan. Þingon is regularly used when the preceding genitive is a noun denoting a person: for my wife’s sake, for mīnes wīfes ðingon (Genesis xx, 11), etc.

112.14-15. for joy, for the sake of joy; but the translator has mixed up laetitiae causā (ablative) and laetitiae causa (nominative). The correct form would be for joy with the omission of for the sake of, just as for my sake is usually for me; for his (or their) sake, for him. See Mark vi, 26: “Yet for his oath’s sake, and for those who sat with him, he would not reject her,” for the oath, and for those who sat with him. For his sake is often for his reasons (reasons), rarely for his sake. Reasons is typically used when the preceding genitive is a noun referring to a person: for my wife’s sake, for my wife's reasons (Genesis xx, 11), etc.

112.18-19. þæt ... þæt hē forlēt. The substantival clause introduced by the second þæt amplifies by apposition the first þæt: When he then, at a certain time (instrumental case, § 98, (2)), did that, namely, when he left the house. The better Mn.E. would be this ... that: “Added yet this above all, that he shut up John in prison” (Luke iv, 20).

112.18-19. that ... that he left. The noun clause introduced by the second that adds to the first that: When he then, at a certain time (instrumental case, § 98, (2)), did that, specifically, when he left the house. The better modern English would be this ... that: “Added yet this above all, that he shut up John in prison” (Luke iv, 20).

113.1-2. þāra ... beboden. This does not mean that Cædmon was a herdsman, but that he served in turn as did the other secular attendants at the monastery.

113.1-2. Then ... commanded. This doesn’t mean that Cædmon was a herdsman, but that he took his turn serving like the other secular helpers at the monastery.

113.13-14. þāra ęndebyrdnes þis is. Bede writes Hic est sensus, non autem ordo ipse verborum, and gives in Latin prose a translation of the hymn from the Northumbrian dialect, in which Cædmon wrote. The O.E. version given above is, of course, not the Northumbrian original (which, however, with some variations is preserved in several of the Latin MSS. of Bede’s History), but a West Saxon version made also from the Northumbrian, not from the Latin.

113.13-14. This is the end of the matter. Bede writes This is the meaning, not the actual order of the words, and provides a Latin prose translation of the hymn from the Northumbrian dialect in which Cædmon wrote. The Old English version given above is, of course, not the Northumbrian original (which, however, with some variations is preserved in several of the Latin manuscripts of Bede’s History), but a West Saxon version also made from the Northumbrian, not from the Latin.

113.15. Nū sculon hęrigean, Now ought we to praise. The subject is omitted in the best MSS. Note the characteristic use of synonyms, or epithets, in this bit of O.E. poetry. Observe that it is not the thought that is repeated, but rather the idea, the concept, God. See p. 124.

113.15. Now we should praise, Now ought we to praise. The subject we is left out in the best manuscripts. Note the typical use of synonyms or descriptive words in this piece of Old English poetry. Observe that it is not the thought that is repeated, but rather the idea, the concept, God. See p. 124.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wonder of nature. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

114.7-9. ǫnd þǣm wordum ... tōgeþēodde, and to those words he soon joined, in the same meter, many (other) words of song worthy of God. But the translator has not only blundered over Bede’s Latin (eis mox plura in eundem modum verba Deo digna carminis adjunxit), but sacrificed still more the idiom of O.E. The predicate should not come at the end; in should be followed by the dative; and for Gode wyrðes sǫnges the better O.E. would be sǫnges Godes wyrðes. When used with the dative wyrð (weorð) usually means dear (= of worth) to.

114.7-9. And to those words ... joined together, and to those words he soon added, in the same meter, many (other) words of song worthy of God. But the translator has not only made mistakes with Bede’s Latin (eis mox plura in eundem modum verba Deo digna carminis adjunxit), but also compromised the idiom of Old English even more. The predicate should not come at the end; in should be followed by the dative; and for Gode wyrðes sǫnges the better Old English would be sǫnges Godes wyrðes. When used with the dative wyrð (weorð) usually means dear (= of worth) to.

114.16. þā ... gesewen. We should expect frǫm him eallum; but the translator has again closely followed the Latin (visumque est omnibus), as later (in the Conversion of Edwin) he renders Talis mihi videtur by þyslīc mē is gesewen. Talis (þyslīc) agreeing with a following vita (līf). Ælfric, however, with no Latin before him, writes that John wearð ðā him [= frǫm Drihtene] inweardlīce gelufod. It would seem that in proportion as a past participle has the force of an adjective, the to relation may supplant the by relation; just as we say unknown to instead of unknown by, unknown being more adjectival than participial. Gesewen, therefore, may here be translated visible, evident, patent (= gesynelīc, sweotol); and gelufod, dear (= weorð, lēof).

114.16. Then ... seen. We should expect from him all; but the translator has again closely followed the Latin (and it was seen by all), as later (in the Conversion of Edwin) he translates It seems to me as this seems to me. It (this) agrees with a following life (life). Ælfric, however, with no Latin in front of him, writes that John then became to him [= from the Lord] internally believed. It seems that as a past participle takes on the role of an adjective, the to relationship may replace the by relationship; just like we say unknown to instead of unknown by, with unknown being more adjectival than participial. Seen, therefore, can be translated as visible, evident, clear (= visible, clear); and believed, dear (= worthy, beloved).

A survival of adjectival gesewen is found in Wycliffe’s New Testament (1 Cor. xv, 5-8): “He was seyn to Cephas, and aftir these thingis to enleuene; aftirward he was seyn to mo than fyue hundrid britheren togidere ... aftirward he was seyn to James, and aftirward to alle the apostlis. And last of alle he was seyn to me, as to a deed borun child.” The construction is frequent in Chaucer.

A form of the adjective gesewen can be found in Wycliffe’s New Testament (1 Cor. xv, 5-8): “He was seen by Cephas, and after these things by the eleven; afterward he was seen by more than five hundred brothers gathered together ... afterward he was seen by James, and then by all the apostles. And finally he was seen by me, as by a child born dead.” This construction is common in Chaucer.

115.9-10. ǫnd hēo hine þā mǫnade ... munuchād onfēnge. Hild’s advice has in it the suggestion of a personal experience, for she herself had lived half of her life (thirty-three years) “before,” says Bede, “she dedicated the remaining half to our Lord in a monastic life.”

115.9-10. And she then accepted him into the monastery ... Hild’s advice seems to come from personal experience, as she had lived half of her life (thirty-three years) “before,” says Bede, “she dedicated the remaining half to our Lord in a monastic life.”

116.6. hē mǫnig lēoð geworhte. The opinion is now gaining ground that of these “many poems” only the short hymn, already given, has come down to us. Of other poems claimed for Cædmon, the strongest arguments are advanced in favor of a part of the fragmentary poetical paraphrase of Genesis.

116.6. he composed many poems. The belief is now becoming more common that out of these “many poems,” only the short hymn, which has already been shared, has survived. For other poems attributed to Cædmon, the most convincing arguments are in favor of a portion of the incomplete poetic paraphrase of Genesis.

1 = ǣfæstnesse.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = steadfastness.

2 = swilce.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = swilce.

3 = woruldhāde.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = world-building.

4 = hīe.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hi.

5 = limu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = seaweed.

6 = hęrian.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hęrian.

7 = hiera.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = here.

8 = lufian.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = lufian.

9 = nīeten.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = nīeten.

10 = selfan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = self.

11 = gīemde.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = gīemde.

12 = wielme.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = wielme.

V. ALFRED’S PREFACE TO THE PASTORAL CARE.

[Based on the Hatton MS. Of the year 597, the Chronicle says: “In this year, Gregory the Pope sent into Britain Augustine with very many monks, who gospelled [preached] God’s word to the English folk.” Gregory I, surnamed “The Great,” has ever since been considered the apostle of English Christianity, and his Pastoral Care, which contains instruction in conduct and doctrine for all bishops, was a work that Alfred could not afford to leave untranslated. For this translation Alfred wrote a Preface, the historical value of which it would be hard to overrate. In it he describes vividly the intellectual ruin that the Danes had wrought, and develops at the same time his plan for repairing that ruin.

[Based on the Hatton MS. of the year 597, the Chronicle states: “In this year, Pope Gregory sent Augustine along with many monks to Britain, who preached God’s word to the English people.” Gregory I, known as “The Great,” has since been regarded as the apostle of English Christianity, and his Pastoral Care, which offers guidance on conduct and doctrine for all bishops, was a work that Alfred could not leave untranslated. For this translation, Alfred wrote a Preface, the historical significance of which is hard to overstate. In it, he vividly describes the intellectual devastation caused by the Danes and also outlines his plan for restoring that damage.]

117

This Preface and the Battle of Ashdown (p. 99) show the great king in his twofold character of warrior and statesman, and justify the inscription on the base of the statue erected to him in 1877, at Wantage (Berkshire), his birth-place: “Ælfred found Learning dead, and he restored it; Education neglected, and he revived it; the laws powerless, and he gave them force; the Church debased, and he raised it; the Land ravaged by a fearful Enemy, from which he delivered it. Ælfred’s name will live as long as mankind shall respect the Past.”]

This Preface and the Battle of Ashdown (p. 99) show the great king in his dual role as a warrior and a statesman, and support the inscription on the base of the statue erected to him in 1877, at Wantage (Berkshire), his birthplace: “Ælfred found Learning dead, and he restored it; Education neglected, and he revived it; the laws powerless, and he gave them strength; the Church debased, and he elevated it; the Land ravaged by a terrifying Enemy, from which he rescued it. Ælfred’s name will endure as long as humanity values the Past.”

1 Ælfred kyning hāteð grētan Wærferð biscep1 his wordum

1 Ælfred kyning hates greeted Wærferð bishop1 with his words

2 luflīce ǫnd frēondlīce; ǫnd ðē cȳðan hāte ðæt mē cōm

2 lovingly and friendly; ǫnd ðē cȳðan hāte that came to me

3 swīðe oft on gemynd, hwelce2 witan īu3 wǣron giond4

3 very often in mind, which2 know you3 were throughout4

4 Angelcynn, ǣgðer ge godcundra hāda ge woruldcundra;

4 Angelcynn, both divine beings and worldly beings;

5 ǫnd hū gesǣliglīca tīda ðā wǣron giond Angelcynn; ǫnd

5 and how happily times were throughout the Anglo-Saxon people; and

6 hū ðā kyningas ðe ðone onwald hæfdon ðæs folces on

6 how the kings who had power over the people

7 ðām dagum Gode ǫnd his ǣrendwrecum hērsumedon5;

7 In those days, God and His messengers gathered together5;

8 ǫnd hū hīe ǣgðer ge hiora sibbe ge hiora siodo6 ge hiora

8 and how they both have their kin and their way6 and their

9 onweald innanbordes gehīoldon,4 ǫnd ēac ūt hiora ēðel

9 They kept their possessions inside, and also outside their estate.

10 gerȳmdon; ǫnd hū him ðā spēow ǣgðer ge mid wīge ge

10 gerȳmdon; and how he then fought both with weapons and

11 mid wīsdōme; ǫnd ēac ða godcundan hādas hū giorne

11 with wisdom; and also the divine qualities how eagerly

12 hīe wǣron ǣgðer ge ymb lāre ge ymb liornunga, ge ymb

12 they were both about learning and about teaching, and about

13 ealle ðā ðīowotdōmas ðe hīe Gode dōn scoldon; ǫnd hū

13 all those servants who should serve God; and how

14 man ūtanbordes wīsdōm ǫnd lāre hieder on lǫnd sōhte,

14 man sought wisdom and learning from beyond the borders here in the land,

15 ǫnd hū wē hīe nū sceoldon ūte begietan, gif wē hīe habban

15 and how we should now obtain it outside, if we have it

16 sceoldon. Swǣ7 clǣne hīo wæs oðfeallenu on Angelcynne

16 should. She was completely pure in the Anglo-Saxon people.

17 ðæt swīðe fēawa wǣron behionan Humbre ðe hiora ðēninga

17 there were very few beyond the Humber who sought their offerings

18 cūðen understǫndan on Ęnglisc oððe furðum ān ǣrendgewrit

18 to understand in English or any other language.

19 of Lǣdene on Ęnglisc āręccean; ǫnd ic wēne ðætte

19 of Lǣdene on Ęnglisc āręccean; ǫnd ic wēne ðætte

20 nōht mǫnige begiondan Humbre nǣren. Swǣ7 fēawa

20 not many began to nourish the Humbre. So7 few

21 hiora wǣron ðæt ic furðum ānne ānlēpne8 ne mæg geðencean

21 there were that I might further one single8 cannot think

118

1 be sūðan Tęmese, ðā ðā ic tō rīce fēng. Gode ælmihtegum

1 from the south of the Thames, when I came to power. To God Almighty

2 sīe ðǫnc ðætte wē nū ǣnigne onstāl habbað

2 see that we now have any hostility

3 lārēowa. Ǫnd for ðon ic ðē bebīode ðæt ðū dō swǣ7 ic

3 lord. And so I command you to do so7 I

4 gelīefe ðæt ðū wille, ðæt ðū ðē ðissa woruldðinga tō ðǣm

4 help you want, that you turn these worldly things to the

5 geǣmetige, swǣ ðū oftost mæge, ðæt ðū ðone wīsdōm ðe

5 measure, as you often mæge, that you the wisdom that

6 ðē God sealde ðǣr ðǣr ðū hiene befæstan mæge, befæste.

6 God gave there where you confirmed mæge, confirmed.

7 Geðęnc hwelc9 wītu ūs ðā becōmon for ðisse worulde, ðā

7 Which of us will receive wisdom for this world, then

8 ðā wē hit nōhwæðer nē selfe ne lufodon, nē ēac ōðrum

8 then we loved neither ourselves nor anyone else.

9 mǫnnum ne lēfdon10: ðone naman ānne wē lufodon ðætte

9 the men did not allow10: ðone naman another we loved that

10 wē Crīstne wǣren, ǫnd swīðe fēawe ðā ðēawas.

we were Christians, and very __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

11 Ðā ic ðā ðis eall gemunde, ðā gemunde ic ēac hū ic

11 When I remembered all this, I also remembered how I

12 geseah, ǣr ðǣm ðe hit eall forhęrgod wǣre ǫnd forbærned,

12 he saw, before it was completely destroyed and burned down,

13 hū ðā ciricean giond eall Angelcynn stōdon

13 how the churches throughout all of England stood

14 māðma ǫnd bōca gefylda, ǫnd ēac micel męnigeo11 Godes

14 The treasure is abundant and the book is filled, and also, a great multitude of God.

15 ðīowa; ǫnd ðā swīðe lȳtle fiorme ðāra bōca wiston, for

15 They; and the very few contents of those books knew, for

16 ðǣm ðe hīe hiora nānwuht12 ongietan ne meahton, for

16 those who could not comprehend anything, for

17 ðǣm ðe hīe nǣron on hiora āgen geðīode awritene.

17 that they weren't written in their own language.

18 Swelce13 hīe cwǣden: “Ure ieldran, ðā ðe ðās stōwa ǣr

18 Swelce13 they said: "Our elders, those who were here before

19 hīoldon, hīe lufodon wīsdōm, ǫnd ðurh ðone hīe begēaton

19 they held, they loved wisdom, and through that they gained

20 welan, ǫnd ūs lǣfdon. Hēr mǫn mæg gīet gesīon hiora

20 well, and we are left. Here one can still see their

21 swæð, ac wē him ne cunnon æfter spyrigean,14 ǫnd for

21 swæð, ac wē him ne cunnon æfter spyrigean,14 ǫnd for

22 ðǣm wē habbað nū ǣgðer forlǣten ge ðone welan ge ðone

22 Now we have either abandoned both wealth and the

23 wīsdōm, for ðǣm ðe wē noldon tō ðǣm spore mid ūre

23 wisdom, because we didn't want to follow that path with our

24 mōde onlūtan.”

mood outside."

25 Ðā ic ðā ðis eall gemunde, ðā wundrade ic swīðe swīðe

25 Then, when I remembered all this, I was very, very amazed.

26 ðāra gōdena wiotona15 ðe gīu wǣron giond Angelcynn, ǫnd

26 those golden wires that you once had across England, and

27 ðā bēc ealla be fullan geliornod hæfdon, ðæt hīe hiora ðā

27 When all had been fully instructed, they...

119

1 nǣnne dǣl noldon on hiora āgen geðīode węndan. Ac

1 none of them wanted to change in their own language. But

2 ic ðā sōna eft mē selfum andwyrde, ǫnd cwæð: “Hīe ne

2 And then it immediately answered me and said: “They do not

3 wēndon þætte ǣfre męnn sceolden swǣ7 reccelēase weorðan,

3 we wondered if people should ever be without care,

4 ǫnd sīo lār swǣ oðfeallan; for ðǣre wilnunga hīe

4 and the teaching sways away; for their longing they

5 hit forlēton, ǫnd woldon ðæt hēr ðȳ māra wīsdōm on

5 let go, and wanted that here the greater wisdom on

6 lǫnde wǣre ðȳ wē mā geðēoda cūðon.”

6 the land would be where we knew more languages.”

7 Ðā gemunde ic hū sīo ǣ wæs ǣrest on Ebrēisc geðīode

7 Then I remembered how the law was first in the Hebrew language.

8 funden, ǫnd eft, ðā hīe Crēacas geliornodon, ðā węndon

8 found, and again, when they became aware of the Creacas, they thought

9 hīe hīe on hiora āgen geðīode ealle, ǫnd ēac ealle ōðre

9 they all in their own language, and also all others

10 bēc. Ǫnd eft Lǣdenware swǣ same, siððan hīe hīe geliornodon,

10 bēc. And then the Leather people the same, after they learned from them,

11 hīe hīe węndon ealla ðurh wīse wealhstōdas

11 they all went through the wise places

12 on hiora āgen geðīode. Ǫnd ēac ealla ōðra Crīstena

12 on their own language. And also all other Christians

13 ðīoda sumne dǣl hiora on hiora āgen geðīode węndon.

13 Some of the people expected a part of their own language.

14 For ðȳ mē ðyncð bętre, gif īow swǣ ðyncð, ðæt wē ēac

14 For me, it seems better if īow also seems so, that we too

15 suma bēc, ðā ðe nīedbeðearfosta sīen eallum mǫnnum

15 just so, those who are most in need among all people

16 tō wiotonne,16 ðæt wē ðā on ðæt geðīode węnden ðe wē

16 to witness, 16 ðæt wē ðā on that journey which we

17 ealle gecnāwan mægen, ǫnd gedōn swǣ wē swīðe ēaðe

17 we can all realize strength, and gedōn thus we can very easily

18 magon mid Godes fultume, gif wē ðā stilnesse habbað,

18 with God's help, if we have that peace,

19 ðætte eall sīo gioguð ðe nū is on Angelcynne friora

that all __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ that now __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ on Anglo-Saxon land

20 mǫnna, ðāra ðe ðā spēda hæbben ðæt hīe ðǣm befēolan

20 men, those who are speeding have that hīe them surrounding

21 mægen, sīen tō liornunga oðfæste, ðā hwīle ðe hīe tō

21 power, sīen to liornunga steadfast, during the time when they are to

120

1 nānre ōðerre note ne mægen, oð ðone first ðe hīe wel

1 no other note they might, until the first that they well

2 cunnen Ęnglisc gewrit ārǣdan: lǣre mǫn siððan furður

2 can read and write English: lǣre mǫn since further

3 on Lǣdengeðīode ðā ðe mǫn furðor lǣran wille, ǫnd tō

3 on Language that those who want to learn more, and to

4 hīerran hāde dōn wille. Ðā ic ðā gemunde hū sīo lār

4 I want to do this task. Then I remembered how the teaching

5 Lǣdengeðīodes ǣr ðissum āfeallen wæs giond Angelcynn,

5 The leadership of the kingdom had fallen throughout England,

6 ǫnd ðeah mǫnige cūðon Ęnglisc gewrit ārǣdan, ðā

6 And although many could read English writing, then

7 ongan ic ongemang oðrum mislīcum ǫnd manigfealdum

7 I am among other diverse spirits and many kinds

8 bisgum ðisses kynerīces ðā bōc węndan on Ęnglisc ðe is

8 this book of the kingdom will be translated into English which is

9 genęmned on Lǣden “Pastoralis,” ǫnd on Ęnglisc “Hierdebōc,”

9 named in Latin “Pastoralis,” and in English “Pastoral Book,”

10 hwīlum word be worde, hwīlum andgit of andgiete,

10 sometimes word for word, sometimes understanding for understanding,

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ at __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

12 ærcebiscepe, ǫnd æt Assere mīnum biscepe, ǫnd æt Grimbolde

12 archbishop, and at Assere my bishop, and at Grimbolde

13 mīnum mæsseprīoste, ǫnd æt Iōhanne mīnum mæsseprēoste.

13 my mass priest, and at Iōhanne my mass priest.

14 Siððan ic hīe ðā geliornod hæfde, swǣ swǣ

14 After I had learned them, just as

15 ic hīe forstōd, ǫnd swǣ ic hīe andgitfullīcost āręccean

15 I understand them, and so I will explain them as clearly as I can.

16 meahte, ic hīe on Ęnglisc āwęnde; ǫnd tō ǣlcum biscepstōle

16 I could change them into English; and to each bishopric

17 on mīnum rīce wille āne onsęndan; ǫnd on ǣlcre

17 in my kingdom will send one; and in every

18 bið ān æstel, sē bið on fīftegum mancessa. Ǫnd ic bebīode

18 There is one vessel, which is of fifteenth quality. And I command

19 on Godes naman ðæt nān mǫn ðone æstel frǫm

19 on God's name that no one should touch the point from

20 ðǣre bēc ne dō, nē ðā bōc frǫm ðǣm mynstre; uncūð hū

20 The book does not say, nor does the book from the monastery; we are uncertain how

21 lǫnge ðǣr swǣ gelǣrede biscepas sīen, swǣ swǣ nū, Gode

21 long there were as many trained bishops as there are now, God

22 ðonc, wel hwǣr siendon. For ðȳ ic wolde ðætte hīe ealneg

22 So, well, where they are. Because I wanted that they always

121

1 æt ðǣre stōwe wǣren, būton sē biscep hīe mid him

1 æt ðǣre stōwe were, except the bishop they were with him

2 habban wille, oððe hīo hwǣr tō lǣne sīe, oððe hwā ōðre

2 want to have, or they are somewhere to lend, oððe hwā ōðre

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

117.1-2. Ælfred kyning hāteð ... hāte. Note the change from the formal and official third person (hāteð) to the more familiar first person (hāte). So Ælfric, in his Preface to Genesis, writes Ælfric munuc grēt Æðelwærd ealdormann ēadmōdlīce. Þū bǣde mē, lēof, þæt ic, etc.: Ælfric, monk, greets Æthelweard, alderman, humbly. Thou, beloved, didst bid me that I, etc.

117.1-2. King Alfred commands ... commands. Note the change from the formal and official third person (commands) to the more familiar first person (commands). So Ælfric, in his Preface to Genesis, writes Ælfric the monk greets Æthelweard the alderman humbly. You, dear one, asked me to, etc.: Ælfric, monk, greets Æthelweard, alderman, humbly. You, beloved, asked me to, etc.

118.5. Notice that mæge (l. 5) and mæge (l. 6) are not in the subjunctive because the sense requires it, but because they have been attracted by gǣmetige and befæste. Sīen (p. 119, l. 15) and hæbben (p. 119, l. 20) illustrate the same construction.

118.5. Notice that mæge (l. 5) and mæge (l. 6) aren't in the subjunctive because the context requires it, but because they have been influenced by gǣmetige and befæste. Sīen (p. 119, l. 15) and hæbben (p. 119, l. 20) show the same structure.

118.9-10. We liked only the reputation of being Christians, very few (of us) the Christian virtues.

118.9-10. We cared more about the status of being Christians than actually (among us) living by Christian values.

119.14. Alfred is here addressing the bishops collectively, and hence uses the plural īow (= ēow), not þē.

119.14. Alfred is speaking to the bishops as a group, so he uses the plural īow (= ēow), not þē.

119.16. ðæt wē ðā. These three words are not necessary to the sense. They constitute the figure known as epanalepsis, in which “the same word or phrase is repeated after one or more intervening words.” Þā is the pronominal substitute for suma bēc.

119.16. that we then. These three words aren't essential to the meaning. They form the literary device called epanalepsis, where “the same word or phrase is repeated after one or more intervening words.” Then is the pronoun that stands in for some books.

119.17. Gedōn is the first person plural subjunctive (from infinitive gedōn). It and węnden are in the same construction. Two things seem “better” to Alfred: (1) that we translate, etc., (2) that we cause, etc.

119.17. Gedōn is the first-person plural subjunctive form (derived from the infinitive gedōn). It is used in the same way as węnden. Alfred sees two things as “better”: (1) that we translate, etc., (2) that we cause, etc.

119.19-21. sīo gioguð ... is ... hīe ... sīen. Notice how the collective noun, gioguð, singular at first both in form and function, gradually loses its oneness before the close of the sentence is reached, and becomes plural. The construction is entirely legitimate in Mn.E. Spanish is the only modern language known to me that condemns such an idiom: “Spanish ideas of congruity do not permit a collective noun, though denoting a plurality, to be accompanied by a plural verb or adjective in the same clause” (Ramsey, Text-Book of Modern Spanish, § 1452).

119.19-21. that collective noun ... is ... they ... seen. Notice how the collective noun, collective, starts off singular both in form and function, but gradually loses its singularity before the end of the sentence and becomes plural. This construction is perfectly acceptable in modern English. Spanish is the only modern language I know that restricts this kind of structure: “Spanish ideas of congruity do not allow a collective noun, even if it indicates a plurality, to be paired with a plural verb or adjective in the same clause” (Ramsey, Text-Book of Modern Spanish, § 1452).

120.2. lǣre mǫn. See § 105, 1.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ learn more. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

120.11-13. That none of these advisers of the king, except Plegmond, a Mercian, were natives, bears out what Alfred says about the scarcity of learned men in England when he began to reign. Asser, to whose Latin Life of Alfred, in spite of its mutilations, we owe almost all of our knowledge of the king, came from St. David’s (in Wales), and was made Bishop of Sherborne.

120.11-13. That none of the king's advisers, except for Plegmond, a Mercian, were locals supports what Alfred said about the lack of educated people in England when he started his reign. Asser, who wrote the Latin Life of Alfred, which, despite its edits, gives us almost all we know about the king, came from St. David’s in Wales and became Bishop of Sherborne.

121.1. Translate ǣt ðǣre stōwe by each in its place. The change from plural hīe (in hīe ... wǣren) to singular hīe (in the clauses that follow) will thus be prepared for.

121.1. Translate at that place by each in its place. The shift from plural they (in they ... were) to singular they (in the following clauses) will thus be set up.

121.2-3. oððe hwā ōðre bī wrīte, or unless some one wish to copy a new one (write thereby another).

121.2-3. or someone else wants to write, or unless someone wants to create a new one (write another one).

1 = bisceop.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = bishop.

2 = hwilce.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hwilce.

3 = gīu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = gift.

4 = For all words with io (īo), consult Glossary under eo (ēo).

4 = For all words with io (īo), check the Glossary under eo (ēo).

5 = hīersumedon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hīersumedon.

6 = sidu (siodu).

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = sidu (siodu).

7 = swā.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = yeah.

8 = ānlīpigne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = online.

9 = hwilc.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hwilc.

10 = līefdon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = livelihood.

11 = męnigu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = men.

12 = nānwiht.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = nonhuman entity.

13 = swilce.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = swilce.

14 = spyrian.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = spyrian.

15 = witena.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = council.

16 = witanne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = witness.

122

POETRY.
INTRODUCTION.

In Section II., Structure, the stress markers ´ and ` are intended to display above the macron – or (rarely) breve ˘:

In Section II., Structure, the stress markers ´ and ` are designed to appear above the macron – or (rarely) the breve ˘:

–́ × –̀

–́ × –̀

Some computers will instead show them after (to the right of) the macron. “Resolved stress” (two short syllables acting as one long) is shown with a double breve below the syllables:

Some computers will instead show them after (to the right of) the macron. “Resolved stress” (two short syllables acting as one long) is shown with a double breve below the syllables:

˘́͜×

˘́͜×

If your computer does not have this character, it will probably display a box or question mark between the two syllables.

If your computer doesn't have this character, it will likely show a box or question mark between the two syllables.

I. HISTORY.

(a) Old English Poetry as a Whole.

Northumbria was the home of Old English poetry. Beginning with Cædmon and his school A.D. 670, Northumbria maintained her poetical supremacy till A.D. 800, seven years before which date the ravages of the Danes had begun. When Alfred ascended the throne of Wessex (871), the Danes had destroyed the seats of learning throughout the whole of Northumbria. As Whitby had been “the cradle of English poetry,” Winchester (Alfred’s capital) became now the cradle of English prose; and the older poems that had survived the fire and sword of the Vikings were translated from the original Northumbrian dialect into the West Saxon dialect. It is, therefore, in the West Saxon dialect that these poems1 have come down to us.

Northumberland was the birthplace of Old English poetry. Starting with Cædmon and his school around CE 670, Northumbria held its status as a center of poetry until CE 800, just seven years before the Danish invasions began. When Alfred became king of Wessex in 871, the Danes had already destroyed the centers of learning across Northumbria. While Whitby had been known as “the cradle of English poetry,” Winchester (Alfred’s capital) transformed into the cradle of English prose. The older poems that managed to survive the destruction brought by the Vikings were translated from the original Northumbrian dialect into the West Saxon dialect. Therefore, it is in the West Saxon dialect that these poems1 have reached us.

Old English poetry contains in all only about thirty thousand lines; but it includes epic, lyric, didactic, 123 elegiac, and allegorical poems, together with war-ballads, paraphrases, riddles, and charms. Of the five elegiac poems (Wanderer, Seafarer, Ruin, Wife’s Complaint, and Husband’s Message), the Wanderer is the most artistic, and best portrays the gloomy contrast between past happiness and present grief so characteristic of the Old English lyric.

Old English poetry has only about thirty thousand lines in total; however, it features epic, lyric, instructional, elegiac, and allegorical poems, along with war ballads, paraphrases, riddles, and charms. Among the five elegiac poems (Wanderer, Seafarer, Ruin, Wife’s Complaint, and Husband’s Message), the Wanderer stands out as the most artistic, effectively depicting the stark contrast between past happiness and present sorrow that is so typical of Old English lyric. 123

Old English literature has no love poems. The central themes of its poets are battle and bereavement, with a certain grim resignation on the part of the hero to the issues of either. The movement of the thought is usually abrupt, there being a noticeable poverty of transitional particles, or connectives, “which,” says Ten Brink, “are the cement of sentence-structure.”

Old English literature doesn't have love poems. The main themes for its poets are war and loss, with a sense of grim acceptance from the hero regarding these matters. The flow of ideas is often sudden, lacking many transitional words or connections, which, as Ten Brink says, "are the glue of sentence structure."

(b) Beowulf.

The greatest of all Old English poems is the epic, Beowulf.2 It consists of more than three thousand lines, and probably assumed approximately its present form in Northumbria about A.D. 700. It is a crystallization of continental myths; and, though nothing is said of England, the story is an invaluable index to the social, political, and ethical ideals of our Germanic ancestors before and after they settled along the English coast. It is most poetical, and its testimony is historically most valuable, in the character-portraits that it contains. The fatalism that runs through it, 124 instead of making the characters weak and less human, serves at times rather to dignify and elevate them. “Fate,” says Beowulf (l. 572), recounting his battle with the sea-monsters, “often saves an undoomed man if his courage hold out.”

The greatest of all Old English poems is the epic, Beowulf.2 It has more than three thousand lines and likely reached its current form in Northumbria around CE 700. It captures continental myths, and while it doesn't mention England, the story is an invaluable representation of the social, political, and ethical ideals of our Germanic ancestors before and after they settled along the English coast. It's highly poetic, and its historical value is particularly evident in the character portrayals it features. The sense of fate that runs through the poem does not make the characters weak or less relatable; instead, it sometimes dignifies and elevates them. “Fate,” says Beowulf (l. 572), recounting his battle with the sea-monsters, “often saves an undoomed man if his courage holds out.”

“The ethical essence of this poetry,” says Ten Brink, “lies principally in the conception of manly virtue, undismayed courage, the stoical encounter with death, silent submission to fate, in the readiness to help others, in the clemency and liberality of the prince toward his thanes, and the self-sacrificing loyalty with which they reward him.”

“The ethical essence of this poetry,” says Ten Brink, “is mainly found in the idea of masculine virtue, unwavering courage, the stoic acceptance of death, quiet submission to fate, the willingness to help others, the kindness and generosity of the prince toward his warriors, and the selfless loyalty with which they repay him.”

Note 1.—Many different interpretations have been put upon the story of Beowulf (for argument of story, see texts). Thus Müllenhoff sees in Grendel the giant-god of the storm-tossed equinoctial sea, while Beowulf is the Scandinavian god Freyr, who in the spring drives back the sea and restores the land. Laistner finds the prototype of Grendel in the noxious exhalations that rise from the Frisian coast-marshes during the summer months; Beowulf is the wind-hero, the autumnal storm-god, who dissipates the effluvia.

Note 1.—Many different interpretations have been made of the story of Beowulf (for discussion of the story, see texts). Müllenhoff sees Grendel as the giant-god of the stormy equinoctial sea, while Beowulf represents the Scandinavian god Freyr, who drives back the sea and restores the land in spring. Laistner finds the basis for Grendel in the harmful vapors that rise from the Frisian coastal marshes during summer; Beowulf is the wind-hero, the autumn storm-god, who dispels the foul air.

1. This does not, of course, include the few short poems in the Chronicle, or that portion of Genesis (Genesis B) supposed to have been put directly into West Saxon from an Old Saxon original. There still remain in Northumbrian the version of Cædmon’s Hymn, fragments of the Ruthwell Cross, Bede’s Death-Song, and the Leiden Riddle.

1. This doesn’t include the few short poems in the Chronicle, or that part of Genesis (Genesis B) thought to have been translated directly into West Saxon from an Old Saxon original. In Northumbrian, we still have the version of Cædmon’s Hymn, fragments of the Ruthwell Cross, Bede’s Death-Song, and the Leiden Riddle.

2. The word bēowulf, says Grimm, meant originally bee-wolf, or bee-enemy, one of the names of the woodpecker. Sweet thinks the bear was meant. But the word is almost certainly a compound of Bēow (cf. O.E. bēow = grain), a Danish demigod, and wulf used as a mere suffix.

2. The word bēowulf, according to Grimm, originally meant bee-wolf or bee-enemy, which is one of the names for the woodpecker. Sweet believes it referred to a bear. However, it’s most likely a combination of Bēow (see O.E. bēow = grain), a Danish demigod, and wulf used simply as a suffix.

II. STRUCTURE.

(a) Style.

In the structure of Old English poetry the most characteristic feature is the constant repetition of the idea (sometimes of the thought) with a corresponding variation of phrase, or epithet. When, for example, the Queen passes into the banquet hall in Beowulf, she is designated at first by her name, Wealhþēow; she is then described in turn as cwēn Hrōðgāres (Hrothgar’s queen), gold-hroden (the gold-adorned), frēolīc wīf 125 (the noble woman), ides Helminga (the Helmings’ lady), bēag-hroden cwēn (the ring-adorned queen), mōde geþungen (the high-spirited), and gold-hroden frēolīcu folc-cwēn (the gold-adorned, noble folk-queen).

In the structure of Old English poetry, the most notable feature is the constant repetition of an idea (sometimes a thought) with different variations of phrasing or descriptions. For instance, when the Queen enters the banquet hall in Beowulf, she is initially referred to by her name, Wealhþēow; she is then described in various ways as cwēn Hrōðgāres (Hrothgar’s queen), gold-hroden (the gold-adorned), frēolīc wīf (the noble woman), ides Helminga (the Helmings’ lady), bēag-hroden cwēn (the ring-adorned queen), mōde geþungen (the high-spirited), and gold-hroden frēolīcu folc-cwēn (the gold-adorned, noble folk-queen).

And whenever the sea enters largely into the poet’s verse, not content with simple (uncompounded) words (such as , lagu, holm, strēam, męre, etc.), he will use numerous other equivalents (phrases or compounds), such as waþema gebind (the commingling of waves), lagu-flōd (the sea-flood), lagu-strǣt (the sea-street), swan-rād (the swan-road), etc. These compounds are usually nouns, or adjectives and participles used in a sense more appositive than attributive.

And whenever the sea plays a big part in the poet’s writing, not satisfied with simple words (like , lagu, holm, strēam, męre, etc.), he will use many other equivalents (phrases or compounds), such as waþema gebind (the commingling of waves), lagu-flōd (the sea-flood), lagu-strǣt (the sea-street), swan-rād (the swan-road), etc. These compounds are usually nouns or adjectives and participles used in a sense that’s more descriptive than simply attributive.

It is evident, therefore, that this abundant use of compounds, or periphrastic synonyms, grows out of the desire to repeat the idea in varying language. It is to be observed, also, that the Old English poets rarely make any studied attempt to balance phrase against phrase or clause against clause. Theirs is a repetition of idea, rather than a parallelism of structure.

It’s clear, then, that this frequent use of compounds or roundabout synonyms comes from the wish to express the same idea using different wording. It’s also noticeable that Old English poets seldom try to carefully balance one phrase against another or one clause against another. They focus on repeating the idea rather than creating a parallel structure.

Note 1.—It is impossible to tell how many of these synonymous expressions had already become stereotyped, and were used, like many of the epithets in the Iliad and Odyssey, purely as padding. When, for example, the poet tells us that at the most critical moment Beowulf’s sword failed him, adding in the same breath, īren ǣr-gōd (matchless blade), we conclude that the bard is either nodding or parroting.

Note 1.—It’s impossible to know how many of these synonymous phrases had already become clichés and were used, like many of the descriptors in the Iliad and Odyssey, purely as filler. For instance, when the poet tells us that at the most critical moment Beowulf’s sword let him down, adding at the same time, īren ǣr-gōd (matchless blade), we can infer that the bard is either dozing off or just repeating himself.

(b) Meter.

[Re-read § 10, (3).]

[Re-read __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.]

Primary Stress.

Old English poetry is composed of certain rhythmically ordered combinations of accented and unaccented 126 syllables. The accented syllable (the arsis) is usually long, and will be indicated by the macron with the acute accent over it (–́); when short, by the breve with the same accent (˘́). The unaccented syllable or syllables (the thesis) may be long or short, and will be indicated by the oblique cross (×).

Old English poetry is made up of specific rhythmic patterns of stressed and unstressed syllables. The stressed syllable (the arsis) is typically long, marked by a macron with an acute accent over it (–́); when it's short, it’s marked with a breve and the same accent (˘́). The unstressed syllable or syllables (the thesis) can be either long or short, and are indicated by an oblique cross (×).

Secondary Stress.

A secondary accent, or stress, is usually put upon the second member of compound and derivative nouns, adjectives, and adverbs. This will be indicated by the macron with the grave accent, if the secondary stress falls on a long syllable (–̀); by the breve with the same accent, if the secondary stress falls on a short syllable (˘̀). Nouns:

A secondary accent, or stress, is usually placed on the second part of compound and derivative nouns, adjectives, and adverbs. This will be marked by the macron with the grave accent, if the secondary stress is on a long syllable (–̀); or by the breve with the same accent, if the secondary stress is on a short syllable (˘̀). Nouns:

Hrōðgāres (–́–̀×), fēondgrāpum (–́–̀×), frēomǣgum (–́–̀×), Ēast-Dęna (–́˘̀×), Helminga (–́–̀×), Scyldinga (–́–̀×), ānhaga (–́˘̀×), Ecgþēowes (–́–̀×), sinc-fato (–́˘̀×).

Hrōðgāres (–́–̀×), fēondgrāpum (–́–̀×), frēomǣgum (–́–̀×), Ēast-Dęna (–́˘̀×), Helminga (–́–̀×), Scyldinga (–́–̀×), ānhaga (–́˘̀×), Ecgþēowes (–́–̀×), sinc-fato (–́˘̀×).

Adjectives:1

Adjectives: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

ǣghwylcne (–́–̀×), þrīsthȳdig (–́–̀×), gold-hroden (–́˘̀×), drēorigne (–́–̀×), gyldenne (–́–̀×), ōðerne (–́–̀×), gǣstlīcum (–́–̀×), wynsume (–́˘̀×), ǣnigne (–́–̀×).

each (–́–̀×), thirty (–́–̀×), golden (–́˘̀×), bloody (–́–̀×), golden (–́–̀×), another (–́–̀×), spiritual (–́–̀×), charming (–́˘̀×), any (–́–̀×).

Adverbs:2

Adverbs: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

unsōfte (–́–̀×), heardlīce (–́–̀×), sęmninga (–́–̀×).

unsōfte (–́–̀×), heardlīce (–́–̀×), sęmninga (–́–̀×).

127

The Old English poets place also a secondary accent upon the ending of present participles (-ende), and upon the penultimate of weak verbs of the second class (§ 130), provided the root-syllable is long.3 Present participles:

The Old English poets also put a secondary emphasis on the endings of present participles (-ende) and on the second-to-last syllable of weak verbs of the second class (§ 130), as long as the root syllable is long.3 Present participles:

slǣpendne (–́–̀×), wīs-hycgende (–́–́–̀×), flēotendra (–́–̀×), hrēosende (–́–̀×).

sleeping, wise-thinking, floaters, fallers.

Weak verbs:

Weak verbs:

swynsode (–́˘̀×), þancode (–́˘̀×), wānigean (–́˘̀×), scēawian (–́˘̀×), scēawige (–́˘̀×), hlīfian (–́˘̀×).

swynsode (–́˘̀×), þancode (–́˘̀×), wānigean (–́˘̀×), scēawian (–́˘̀×), scēawige (–́˘̀×), hlīfian (–́˘̀×).

Resolved Stress.

A short accented syllable followed in the same word by an unaccented syllable (usually short also) is equivalent to one long accented syllable (˘́× = –́). This is known as a resolved stress, and will be indicated thus, ˘́͜×;

A short stressed syllable followed by an unstressed syllable (usually also short) in the same word counts as one long stressed syllable (˘́× = –́). This is called a resolved stress and will be shown like this: ˘́͜×;

hæleða (˘́͜͜××), guman (˘́͜×), Gode (˘́͜×), sęle-ful (˘́͜××), ides (˘́͜×), fyrena (˘́͜××), maðelode (˘́͜ע̀×), hogode (˘́͜××), mægen-ęllen (˘́͜×–̀×), hige-þihtigne (˘́͜×–́–̀×), Metudes (˘́͜××), lagulāde (˘́͜×–̀×), unlyfigendes (–́˘́͜×–̀×), biforan (ע́͜×), forþolian (ע́͜××), baðian (˘́͜××), worolde (˘́͜–×).

hæleða (˘́͜͜××), woman (˘́͜×), God (˘́͜×), blessing (˘́͜××), lady (˘́͜×), fire (˘́͜××), leader (˘́͜ע̀×), thoughtful (˘́͜××), powerful (˘́͜×–̀×), deserving (˘́͜×–́–̀×), Lord (˘́͜××), lawful (˘́͜×–̀×), unliving (–́˘́͜×–̀×), before (ע́͜×), suffer (ע́͜××), pray (˘́͜××), world (˘́͜–×).

Resolution of stress may also attend secondary stresses:

Resolution of stress can also affect secondary stresses:

sinc-fato (–́˘̀͜×), dryht-sęle (–́˘̀͜×), ferðloca (–́˘̀͜×), forðwege (–́˘̀͜×).

sinc-fato (–́˘̀͜×), dryht-sęle (–́˘̀͜×), ferðloca (–́˘̀͜×), forðwege (–́˘̀͜×).

128
The Normal Line.

Every normal line of Old English poetry has four primary accents, two in the first half-line and two in the second half-line. These half-lines are separated by the cesura and united by alliteration, the alliterative letter being found in the first stressed syllable of the second half-line. This syllable, therefore, gives the cue to the scansion of the whole line. It is also the only alliterating syllable in the second half-line. The first half-line, however, usually has two alliterating syllables, but frequently only one (the ratio being about three to two in the following selections). When the first half-line contains but one alliterating syllable, that syllable marks the first stress, rarely the second. The following lines are given in the order of their frequency:

Every normal line of Old English poetry has four main accents, with two in the first half-line and two in the second half-line. These half-lines are separated by a pause and connected by alliteration, with the alliterative letter found in the first stressed syllable of the second half-line. This syllable cues the scansion of the entire line. It is also the only alliterating syllable in the second half-line. The first half-line typically has two alliterating syllables, but sometimes only one (with the ratio being about three to two in the following selections). When the first half-line has only one alliterating syllable, that syllable indicates the first stress, rarely the second. The following lines are listed in order of their frequency:

(1) þǣr wæs hǽleða hléahtor; hlýn swýnsode.

there was healer's hidden light; lyn sway.

(2) mṓde geþúngen, médo-ful ætbǽr.

(b)(i)mature, (i)fruitful harvest.

(3) sṓna þæt onfúnde fýrena hýrde.

sound that uncovered fierce beasts.

Any initial vowel or diphthong may alliterate with any other initial vowel or diphthong; but a consonant requires the same consonant, except st, sp, and sc, each of which alliterates only with itself.

Any initial vowel or diphthong can alliterate with any other initial vowel or diphthong; but a consonant must match the same consonant, except for st, sp, and sc, which only alliterate with themselves.

Remembering, now, that either half-line (especially the second) may begin with several unaccented syllables (these syllables being known in types A, D, and E as the anacrusis), but that neither half-line can end with more than one unaccented syllable, the student may begin at once to read and properly accentuate Old English poetry. It will be found that the alliterative 129 principle does not operate mechanically, but that the poet employs it for the purpose of emphasizing the words that are really most important. Sound is made subservient to sense.

Remember that each half-line (especially the second) can start with several unstressed syllables (these unstressed syllables are referred to as anacrusis in types A, D, and E). However, neither half-line can end with more than one unstressed syllable. This allows the student to begin reading and correctly stressing Old English poetry right away. It turns out that the alliterative 129 principle doesn't work in a rigid way; instead, the poet uses it to highlight the words that matter most. Sound serves the meaning.

When, from the lack of alliteration, the student is in doubt as to what word to stress, let him first get the exact meaning of the line, and then put the emphasis on the word or words that seem to bear the chief burden of the poet’s thought.

When a student isn't sure which word to stress due to the absence of alliteration, they should first understand the exact meaning of the line and then emphasize the word or words that seem to carry the main weight of the poet's message.

Note 1.—A few lines, rare or abnormal in their alliteration or lack of alliteration, may here be noted. In the texts to be read, there is one line with no alliteration: Wanderer 58; three of the type a ··· b | a ··· b: Beowulf 654, 830, 2746; one of the type a ··· a | b ··· a: Beowulf 2744; one of the type a ··· a | b ··· c: Beowulf 2718; and one of the type a ··· b | c ··· a: Beowulf 2738.

Note 1.—A few lines, which are rare or unusual for their alliteration or lack of it, can be noted here. In the texts being examined, there is one line without alliteration: Wanderer 58; three lines of the type a ··· b | a ··· b: Beowulf 654, 830, 2746; one line of the type a ··· a | b ··· a: Beowulf 2744; one line of the type a ··· a | b ··· c: Beowulf 2718; and one line of the type a ··· b | c ··· a: Beowulf 2738.

The Five Types.

By an exhaustive comparative study of the metrical unit in Old English verse, the half-line, Professor Eduard Sievers,4 of the University of Leipzig, has shown that there are only five types, or varieties, 130 employed. These he classifies as follows, the perpendicular line serving to separate the so-called feet, or measures:

By conducting a thorough comparative study of the metrical unit in Old English poetry, the half-line, Professor Eduard Sievers, 4 of the University of Leipzig, revealed that there are only five types or varieties used. He classifies these as follows, with the vertical line indicating the separation of the so-called feet or measures:

1. A   –́ × | –́ ×
2. B   × –́ | × –́
3. C   × –́ | –́ ×
4. D { D1 –́ | –́ –̀ ×
D2 –́ | –́ × –̀
5. E { E1 –́ –̀ × | –́
E2 –́ × –̀ | –́

It will be seen (1) that each half-line contains two, and only two, feet; (2) that each foot contains one, and only one, primary stress; (3) that A is trochaic, B iambic; (4) that C is iambic-trochaic; (5) that D and E consist of the same feet but in inverse order.

It will be clear (1) that each half-line has two, and only two, feet; (2) that each foot has one, and only one, primary stress; (3) that A is trochaic, B is iambic; (4) that C is iambic-trochaic; (5) that D and E have the same feet but in reverse order.

The Five Types Illustrated.

[All the illustrations, as hitherto, are taken from the texts to be read. The figures prefixed indicate whether first or second half-line is cited. B = Beowulf; W = Wanderer.]

[All the illustrations, as before, are taken from the texts to be read. The figures at the beginning indicate whether the first or second half-line is cited. B = Beowulf; W = Wanderer.]

1. Type A, –́ × | –́ ×

1. Type A, –́ × | –́ ×

Two or more unaccented syllables (instead of one) may intervene between the two stresses, but only one may follow the last stress. If the thesis in either foot is the second part of a compound it receives, of course, a secondary stress.

Two or more unstressed syllables (instead of one) can come between the two stressed syllables, but only one can follow the last stressed syllable. If the thesis in either foot is the second part of a compound, it naturally gets a secondary stress.

(2) ful gesealde, B. 616, –́ × | –́ ×
(1) wīdre gewindan, B. 764, –́ × × | –́ ×
(1)5 Gemunde þā sē gōda, B. 759, × | –́ × × × | –́ ×
(1)5 swylce hē on ealder-dagum, B. 758, × × × × | –́ × | ˘́ ×
(1) ȳþde swā þisne eardgeard, W. 85, –́ × × × × | –́ –̀
(1) wīs-fæst wordum, B. 627, –́ –̀ | –́ ×
(1) gryre-lēoð galan, B. 787, ˘́͜× –̀ | ˘́ ×
(2) sǫmod ætgædre, W. 39, ˘́͜× × | –́ ×
131 (1) duguðe ǫnd geogoðe, B. 622, ˘́͜× × × | ˘́͜× ×
(1) fǣger fold-bold, B. 774, –́ × | –́ –̀
(1) atelīc ęgesa, B. 785, ˘́͜× –̀ | ˘́͜× ×
(2) goldwine mīnne, W. 22, –́ ˘̀͜× | –́ ×
(1) ęgesan þēon [> *þīhan: § 118], B. 2737, ˘́͜× × | –́ ×

Note.—Rare forms of A are –́ –̀ × | –́ × (does not occur in texts), –́ –̀ × | –́ –̀ (occurs once, B. 781 (1)), and –́ × –̀ | –́ × (once, B. 2743 (1)).

Note.—Rare forms of A are –́ –̀ × | –́ × (not found in texts), –́ –̀ × | –́ –̀ (occurs once, B. 781 (1)), and –́ × –̀ | –́ × (once, B. 2743 (1)).

2. Type B, × –́ | × –́

2. Type B, × –́ | × –́

Two, but not more than two, unaccented syllables may intervene between the stresses. The type of B most frequently occurring is × × –́ | × –́

Two, but no more than two, unstressed syllables can come between the stressed ones. The most common type of B that occurs is × × –́ | × –́

(1) ǫnd þā frēolīc wīf, B. 616, × × –́ | × –́
(2) hē on lust geþeah, B. 619, × × –́ | × –́
(2) þā se æðeling gīong, B. 2716, × × ˘́͜× | × –́
(2) seah on ęnta geweorc, B. 2718, × × –́ | × × –́
(1) ofer flōda genipu, B. 2809, × × –́ | × × ˘́͜×
(1) forþam mē wītan ne þearf, B. 2742, × × × –́ | × × –́
(2) þaes þe hire se willa gelamp, B. 627, × × × × × –́ | × × –́
(1) forþon ne mæg weorþan wīs, W. 64, × × × × –́ | × –́
(1) Nǣfre ic ǣnegum [= ǣn’gum] męn, B. 656, × × × –́ | × –́

Note.—In the last half-line Sievers substitutes the older form ǣngum, and supposes elision of the e in Nǣfre (= Nǣfr-ic: ××–́ | ×–́).

Note.—In the last half-line, Sievers replaces the older form ǣngum and suggests that the e in Nǣfre (= Nǣfr-ic: ××–́ | ×–́) was dropped.

3. Type C, × –́ | –́ ×

3. Type C, × –́ | –́ ×

The conditions of this type are usually satisfied by compound and derivative words, and the second stress (not so strong as the first) is frequently on a short syllable. The two arses rarely alliterate. As in B, two unaccented syllables in the first thesis are more common than one.

The conditions for this type are usually met by compound and derivative words, with the second stress (which is not as strong as the first) often on a short syllable. The two arses rarely alliterate. As in B, two unaccented syllables in the first thesis are more common than one.

132
(1) þæt hēo on ǣnigne, B. 628, × × × –́ | –́ ×
(1) þæt ic ānunga, B. 635, × × –́ | –́ ×
(2) ēode gold-hroden, B. 641, × × –́ | ˘́ ×
(1) gemyne mǣrðo, B. 660, × ˘́͜× | –́ ×
(1) on þisse meodu-healle, B. 639, × × × ˘́͜× | –́ ×
(2) æt brimes nosan, B. 2804, × ˘́͜× | ˘́ ×
(2) æt Wealhþéon [= -þēowan], B. 630, × –́ | –́ ×
(1) geond lagulāde, W. 3, × ˘́͜× | –́ ×
(1) Swā cwæð eardstapa, W. 6, × × –́ | ˘́ ×
(2) ēalā byrnwiga, W. 94, × × –́ | ˘́ ×
(2) nō þǣr fela bringeð, W. 54, × × ˘́͜× | –́ ×
4. Type D, { D1 –́ | –́ –̀ ×
D2 –́ | –́ × –̀

Both types of D may take one unaccented syllable between the two primary stresses (–́ × | –́ –̀ ×, –́ × | –́ × –̀). The secondary stress in D1 falls usually on the second syllable of a compound or derivative word, and this syllable (as in C) is frequently short.

Both types of D may take one unaccented syllable between the two primary stresses (–́ × | –́ –̀ ×, –́ × | –́ × –̀). The secondary stress in D1 usually falls on the second syllable of a compound or derivative word, and this syllable (as in C) is often short.

(a) D1 –́ | –́ –̀ ×

(a) D1 –́ | –́ –̀ ×

(1) cwēn Hrōðgāres, B. 614, –́ | –́ –̀ ×
(2) dǣl ǣghwylcne, B. 622, –́ | –́ –̀ ×
(1) Bēowulf maðelode, B. 632, –́ × | ˘́͜× ˘̀ ×
(2) slāt unwearnum, B. 742, –́ | –́ –̀ ×
(1) wrāþra wælsleahta, W. 7, –́ × | –́ –̀ ×
(1) wōd wintercearig [= wint’rcearig], W. 24, –́ | –́ ˘̀ ×
(1) sōhte sęle drēorig, W. 25, –́ × | ˘́͜× –̀ ×
(1) ne sōhte searo-nīðas, B. 2739, × | –́ × | ˘́͜× –̀ ×

Note.—There is one instance in the texts (B. 613, (1)) of apparent –́ × × | –́ ˘̀ ×: word wǣron wynsume. (The triple alliteration has no significance. The sense, besides, precludes our stressing wǣron.) The difficulty is avoided by bringing the line under the A type: –́ × × | –́ ˘́͜×.

Note.—There is one instance in the texts (B. 613, (1)) of apparent –́ × × | –́ ˘̀ ×: word wǣron wynsume. (The triple alliteration doesn't matter. The meaning, besides, prevents us from emphasizing wǣron.) The difficulty is resolved by categorizing the line under the A type: –́ × × | –́ ˘́͜×.

133

(b) D2 –́ | –́ × –̀

(b) D2 –́ | –́ × –̀

(2) Forð nēar ætstōp, B. 746, –́ | –́ × –̀
(2) eorl furður stōp, B. 762, –́ | –́ × –̀
(2) Dęnum eallum wearð, B. 768, ˘́͜× | –́ × –̀
(1) grētte Gēata lēod, B. 626, –́ × | –́ × –̀
(1) ǣnig yrfe-weard, B. 2732, –́ × | –́ × –̀
(1) hrēosan hrīm and snāw, W. 48, –́ × | –́ × –̀
(2) swimmað eft on weg, W. 53, –́ × | –́ × –̀

Very rarely is the thesis in the second foot expanded.

Very rarely is the thesis in the second foot elaborated on.

(2) þegn ungemete till, B. 2722, –́ | –́ × × × –̀
(1) hrūsan heolster biwrāh, W. 23, –́ × | –́ × × –̀
5. Type E, { E1 –́ –̀ × | –́
E2 –́ × –̀ | –́

The secondary stress in E1 falls frequently on a short syllable, as in D1.

The secondary stress in E1 often lands on a short syllable, like in D1.

(a) E1 –́ –̀ × | –́

E1 –́ –̀ × | –́

(1) wyrmlīcum fāh, W. 98, –́ –̀ × | –́
(2) medo-ful ætbær, B. 625, ˘́͜× ˘̀ × | –́
(1) sǣ-bāt gesæt, B. 634, –́ –̀ × | –́
(1) sige-folca swēg, B. 645, ˘́͜× –̀ × | –́
(2) Norð-Dęnum stōd, B. 784, –́ ˘̀ × | –́
(1) fēond-grāpum fæst, B. 637, –́ –̀ × | –́
(2) wyn eal gedrēas, W. 36, –́ –̀ × | –́
(2) feor oft gemǫn, W. 90, –́ –̀ × | –́

As in D2, the thesis in the first foot is very rarely expanded.

As in D2, the argument in the first foot is rarely elaborated on.

(1) wīn-ærnes geweald, B. 655, –́ –̀ × × | –́
(1) Hafa nū ǫnd geheald, B. 659, ˘́͜× –̀ × × | –́
(1) searo-þǫncum besmiðod, B. 776, ˘́͜× –̀ × × | ˘́͜×
134

Note.—Our ignorance of Old English sentence-stress makes it impossible for us to draw a hard-and-fast line in all cases between D2 and E1. For example, in these half-lines (already cited),

Note.—Our lack of knowledge about Old English sentence stress makes it impossible for us to clearly define a strict boundary in every case between D2 and E1. For instance, in these half-lines (already mentioned),

wyn eal gedrēas

win all falls

feor oft gemǫn

far often remembered

Forð nēar ætstōp

Come closer

if we throw a strong stress on the adverbs that precede their verbs, the type is D2. Lessen the stress on the adverbs and increase it on the verbs, and we have E1. The position of the adverbs furnishes no clue; for the order of words in Old English was governed not only by considerations of relative emphasis, but by syntactic and euphonic considerations as well.

if we place a strong emphasis on the adverbs that come before their verbs, the type is D2. If we reduce the emphasis on the adverbs and increase it on the verbs, we get E1. The placement of the adverbs doesn’t provide any clues; because in Old English, the order of words was influenced not just by considerations of relative emphasis, but also by syntax and sound considerations.

(b) E2 –́ × –̀ | –́

(b) E2 –́ × –̀ | –́

This is the rarest of all types. It does not occur in the texts, there being but one instance of this type (l. 2437 (2)), and that doubtful, in the whole of Beowulf.

This is the rarest of all types. It doesn't appear in the texts, with only one instance of this type (l. 2437 (2)), and that one is questionable, in the entire Beowulf.

Abnormal Lines.

The lines that fall under none of the five types enumerated are comparatively few. They may be divided into two classes, (1) hypermetrical lines, and (2) defective lines.

The lines that don’t fit into any of the five types listed are relatively few. They can be divided into two categories: (1) hypermetrical lines, and (2) defective lines.

(1) Hypermetrical Lines.

Hypermetrical Lines.

Each hypermetrical half-line has usually three stresses, thus giving six stresses to the whole line instead of two. These lines occur chiefly in groups, and mark increased range and dignity in the thought. Whether the half-line be first or second, it is usually of the A type without anacrusis. To this type belong the last five lines of the Wanderer. Lines 92 and 93 are also unusually long, but not hypermetrical. The 135 first half-line of 65 is hypermetrical, a fusion of A and C, consisting of (–́××ע́͜– | –́×).

Each hypermetrical half-line usually has three stresses, giving a total of six stresses for the whole line instead of two. These lines mainly appear in groups and indicate a greater range and dignity in the thought. Whether the half-line is first or second, it typically follows the A type without anacrusis. The last five lines of the Wanderer belong to this type. Lines 92 and 93 are also unusually long, but not hypermetrical. The 135 first half-line of 65 is hypermetrical, a fusion of A and C, made up of (–́××ע́͜– | –́×).

(2) Defective Lines.

Faulty Lines.

The only defective lines in the texts are B. 748 and 2715 (the second half-line in each). As they stand, these half-lines would have to be scanned thus:

The only faulty lines in the texts are B. 748 and 2715 (the second half-line in each). As they are, these half-lines would need to be scanned like this:

rǣhte ongēan –́ × | × –́
bealo-nīð wēoll ˘́͜× –̀ | –́

Sievers emends as follows:

Sievers edits as follows:

rǣhte tōgēanes –́ × × | –́ × = A
bealo-nīðe wēoll ˘́͜× –́ × | –́ = E1

These defective half-lines are made up of syntactic combinations found on almost every page of Old English prose. That they occur so rarely in poetry is strong presumptive evidence, if further evidence were needed, in favor of the adequacy of Sievers’ five-fold classification.

These flawed half-lines consist of syntactic combinations that appear on nearly every page of Old English prose. The fact that they show up so infrequently in poetry strongly suggests, if more evidence is necessary, that Sievers' five-fold classification is effective.

Note.—All the lines that could possibly occasion any difficulty to the student have been purposely cited as illustrations under the different types. If these are mastered, the student will find it an easy matter to scan the lines that remain.

Note.—All the lines that could possibly cause any trouble for the student have been intentionally included as examples under the different categories. If these are understood, the student will find it easy to analyze the remaining lines.

1. It will be seen that the adjectives are chiefly derivatives in -ig, -en, -er, -līc, and -sum.

1. You’ll notice that the adjectives mainly come from the endings -ig, -en, -er, -līc, and -sum.

2. Most of the adverbs belonging here end in -līce, -unga, and -inga, § 93, (1), (2): such words as æt-gǽdere, on-gḗan, on-wég, tō-gḗanes, tō-míddes, etc., are invariably accented as here indicated.

2. Most of the adverbs that belong here end in -ly, -ing, and -ing, § 93, (1), (2): words like together, against, along, towards, in the middle, etc., are always stressed as indicated here.

3. It will save the student some trouble to remember that this means long by nature (līcodon), or long by position (swynsode), or long by resolution of stress (maðelode),—see next paragraph.

3. It will help the student to remember that this means long by nature (līcodon), or long by position (swynsode), or long by resolution of stress (maðelode),—see the next paragraph.

4. Sievers’ two articles appeared in the Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur, Vols. X (1885) and XII (1887). A brief summary, with slight modifications, is found in the same author’s Altgermanische Metrik, pp. 120-144 (1893).

4. Sievers’ two articles were published in the Contributions to the History of the German Language and Literature, Vols. X (1885) and XII (1887). A brief summary, with minor changes, can be found in the same author's Old German Metrics, pp. 120-144 (1893).

Before attempting to employ Sievers’ types, the student would do well to read several pages of Old English poetry, taking care to accentuate according to the principles already laid down. In this way his ear will become accustomed to the rhythm of the line, and he will see more clearly that Sievers’ work was one primarily of systematization. Sievers himself says: “I had read Old English poetry for years exactly as I now scan it, and long before I had the slightest idea that what I did instinctively could be formulated into a system of set rules.” (Altgermanische Metrik, Vorwort, p. 10.)

Before trying to use Sievers’ types, students should read some pages of Old English poetry, making sure to emphasize the rhythm based on the principles already explained. This way, they’ll get used to the line’s rhythm and understand better that Sievers’ work was mostly about creating a system. Sievers himself says: “I had read Old English poetry for years exactly as I now scan it, and long before I had the slightest idea that what I did instinctively could be formulated into a system of set rules.” (Altgermanische Metrik, Vorwort, p. 10.)

5. The first perpendicular marks the limit of the anacrusis.

5. The first perpendicular indicates the end of the anacrusis.

136

READING LIST.

----

----

VI. EXTRACTS FROM BEOWULF.

The Banquet in Heorot. [Lines 612-662.]

[The Heyne-Socin text has been closely followed. I have attempted no original emendations, but have deviated from the Heyne-Socin edition in a few cases where the Grein-Wülker text seemed to give the better reading.

[The Heyne-Socin text has been closely followed. I haven't made any original changes, but I have diverged from the Heyne-Socin edition in a few instances where the Grein-Wülker text appeared to provide a better reading.]

The argument preceding the first selection is as follows: Hrothgar, king of the Danes, or Scyldings, elated by prosperity, builds a magnificent hall in which to feast his retainers; but a monster, Grendel by name, issues from his fen-haunts, and night after night carries off thane after thane from the banqueting hall. For twelve years these ravages continue. At last Beowulf, nephew of Hygelac, king of the Geats (a people of South Sweden), sails with fourteen chosen companions to Dane-land, and offers his services to the aged Hrothgar. “Leave me alone in the hall to-night,” says Beowulf. Hrothgar accepts Beowulf’s proffered aid, and before the dread hour of visitation comes, the time is spent in wassail. The banquet scene follows.]

The argument before the first selection goes like this: Hrothgar, the king of the Danes, filled with success, builds an impressive hall where he can feast with his warriors. However, a monster named Grendel emerges from his marshy home and, night after night, takes away one thane after another from the banquet hall. This goes on for twelve years. Finally, Beowulf, the nephew of Hygelac, king of the Geats (a people from South Sweden), sails with fourteen select companions to Denmark and offers his help to the old Hrothgar. “Let me stay in the hall alone tonight,” says Beowulf. Hrothgar agrees to Beowulf’s offer of assistance, and before the terrifying hour of the attack arrives, they spend the time celebrating. The banquet scene follows.

Þǣr wæs hæleþa hleahtor,     hlyn swynsode,

Þær was hero laughter, sound of swine.

word wǣron wynsume.     Ēode Wealhþēow forð,

word wǣron wynsume.     Ēode Wealhþēow forð,

cwēn Hrōðgāres,     cynna gemyndig;

queen of Hrothgar, mindful of kin;

615 grētte gold-hroden     guman on healle,

grētte gold-clad man in hall,

ǫnd þā frēolīc wīf     ful gesealde

ǫnd þā frēolīc wīf     ful gesealde

ǣrest Ēast-Dęna     ēþel-wearde,

First East-Danes homeland,

bæd hine blīðne     æt þǣre bēor-þęge,

bad him happy at the beer-drinking,

lēodum lēofne;     hē on lust geþeah

lēodum lēofne;     hē on lust geþeah

620 symbel ǫnd sęle-ful,     sige-rōf kyning.

symbol and joyful, victorious king.

Ymb-ēode þā     ides Helminga

Helminga's woman approached then

duguðe ǫnd geogoðe     dǣl ǣghwylcne,

dugðe and geology each part

137

sinc-fato sealde,     oð þæt sǣl ālamp

sinc-fato sealde,     until that time, the sea was calm

þæt hīo1 Bēowulfe,     bēag-hroden cwēn,

the queen adorned with rings, Beowulf,

625 mōde geþungen,     medo2-ful ætbær;

matured, full-bodied __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ drink;

grētte Gēata lēod,     Gode þancode

grateful people, thank God

wīs-fæst wordum,     þæs þe hire se willa gelamp,

wīs-fæst words, since her desire was fulfilled,

þæt hēo on ǣnigne     eorl gelȳfde

that she believed in any lord

fyrena frōfre.     Hē þæt ful geþeah,

fyrena frōfre. He got it,

630 wæl-rēow wiga,     æt Wealhþēon,

wæl-rēow wiga, æt Wealhþēon,

ǫnd þā gyddode     gūðe gefȳsed;

and then sang, battle ready;

Bēowulf maðelode,     bearn Ecgþēowes:

Beowulf spoke, son of Ecgtheow:

“Ic þæt hogode,     þā ic on holm gestāh,

“I thought that when I climbed onto the sea,”

sǣ-bāt gesæt     mid mīnra sęcga gedriht,

sǣ-båt sætte     with my men’s company,

635 þæt ic ānunga     ēowra lēoda

þæt ic ānunga     your people

willan geworhte,     oððe on wæl crunge

willan geworhte,     oððe on wæl crunge

fēond-grāpum fæst.     Ic gefręmman sceal

fēond-grāpum fæst. Ic gefręmman sceal

eorlīc ęllen,     oððe ęnde-dæg

eorlīc ęllen, or __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0____A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1____A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ wait.

640 Þām wīfe þā word     wel līcodon,

640 The woman found the words very pleasing,

gilp-cwide Gēates;     ēode gold-hroden

gilp-cwide Gēates; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gold-clad

frēolicu folc-cwēn     tō hire frēan sittan.

Happy people's queen to her lord __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Þā wæs eft swā ǣr     inne on healle

Þā wæs eft swā ǣr     inne on healle

þrȳð-word sprecen,3     þēod on sǣlum,

þrȳð-word sprecen,__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ people on seas,

645 sige-folca swēg,     oþ þæt sęmninga

sige-folca sound, until suddenly

138

sunu Healfdęnes     sēcean wolde

sunu Healfdęnes wanted to seek

ǣfen-ræste;     wiste þǣm āhlǣcan4

evening rest; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ the holy __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

tō þǣm hēah-sęle     hilde geþinged,

to the high hall assembled,

siððan hīe sunnan lēoht     gesēon ne meahton

since they couldn't see the sunlight

650 oððe nīpende     niht ofer ealle,

or creeping night over all,

scadu-helma gesceapu     scrīðan cwōman,5

scadu-helma gear scrīðan __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

wan under wolcnum.     Werod eall ārās;

wan under wolcnum.     Werod eall ārās;

grētte þā giddum     guma ōðerne

greets the gift man another

Hrōðgār Bēowulf,     ǫnd him hǣl ābēad,

Hrothgar Beowulf, and he offered him health,

655 wīn-ærnes geweald,     ǫnd þæt word ācwæð:

655 the power of wine, and that word said:

“Nǣfre ic ǣnegum6 męn     ǣr ālȳfde,

“Nǣfre ic ǣnegum__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ męn ǣr

siððan ic hǫnd ǫnd rǫnd     hębban mihte,

siððan ic hǫnd ǫnd rǫnd     hębban mihte,

ðrȳþ-ærn Dęna     būton þē nū þā.

Dryden Dena, but not you.

Hafa nū ǫnd geheald     hūsa sēlest,

Hafa nu ond geheald húsa selest,

660 gemyne mǣrþo,7     mægen-ęllen cȳð,

gemyne mǣrþo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ mægen-ellen cȳð,

waca wið wrāðum.     Ne bið þē wilna gād,

waca with wrath. There won't be a wish to go,

gif þū þæt ęllen-weorc     aldre8 gedīgest.”

if you achieve that heroic deed     lifetime8 will be fulfilled.”

623. sinc-fato sealde. Banning (Die epischen Formeln im Beowulf) shows that the usual translation, gave costly gifts, must be given up; or, at least, that the costly gifts are nothing more than beakers of mead. The expression is an epic formula for passing the cup.

623. sinc-fato sealde. Banning (The Epic Formulas in Beowulf) shows that the usual translation, gave costly gifts, needs to be reconsidered; or, at the very least, that the costly gifts are simply beakers of mead. The phrase is an epic formula for passing the cup.

638-39. ęnde-ðæg ... mīnne. This unnatural separation of noun and possessive is frequent in O.E. poetry, but almost unknown in prose.

638-39. end of the day ... my. This unusual separation of noun and possessive happens often in Old English poetry, but is almost never seen in prose.

641-42. ēode ... sittan. The poet might have employed tō sittanne (§ 108, (1)); but in poetry the infinitive is often used for the gerund. Alfred himself uses the infinitive or the gerund to express purpose after gān, gǫngan, cuman, and sęndan.

641-42. went ... to sit. The poet could have used to sit (§ 108, (1)); but in poetry, the infinitive is often used like a gerund. Alfred himself uses the infinitive or the gerund to express purpose after go, to go, come, and send.

647-51. wiste ... cwōman. A difficult passage, even with Thorpe’s inserted ne; but there is no need of putting a period after geþinged, or of translating oððe by and: He (Hrothgar) knew that battle was in store (geþinged) for the monster in the high hall, after [= as soon as] they could no longer see the sun’s light, or [= that is] after night came darkening over all, and shadowy figures stalking. The subject of cwōman [= cwōmon] is niht and gesceapu.

647-51. wiste ... cwōman. It's a tricky passage, even with Thorpe’s added ne; but there's no need to end with a period after geþinged, nor should oððe be translated as and: He (Hrothgar) knew that battle was coming (geþinged) for the monster in the great hall, after [= as soon as] they could no longer see the light of the sun, or [= that is] after night fell, darkening everything, and shadowy figures moving around. The subject of cwōman [= cwōmon] is niht and gesceapu.

The student will note that the infinitive (scrīðan) is here employed as a present participle after a verb of motion (cwōman). This construction with cuman is frequent in prose and poetry. The infinitive expresses the kind of motion: ic cōm drīfan = I came driving.

The student will notice that the infinitive (scrīðan) is used here as a present participle after a verb of motion (cwōman). This construction with cuman is common in both prose and poetry. The infinitive indicates the type of motion: ic cōm drīfan = I came driving.

1 = hēo.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = she.

2 = medu-.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = medu-.

3 = gesprecen.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = discuss.

4 = āglǣcan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = play.

5 = cwōmon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = common.

6 = ǣnigum.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = anyone.

7 = mǣrþe (acc. sing.).

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = fame (acc. sing.).

8 = ealdre (instr. sing.)

139
The Fight Between Beowulf and Grendel. [Lines 740-837.]

[The warriors all retire to rest except Beowulf. Grendel stealthily enters the hall. From his eyes gleams “a luster unlovely, likest to fire.” The combat begins at once.]

[The warriors all go to sleep except Beowulf. Grendel sneaks into the hall. A dreadful glow shines from his eyes, "similar to fire." The fight starts immediately.]

740 Ne þæt se āglǣca     yldan þōhte,

Ne __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ se āglǣca yldan þōhte,

ac hē gefēng hraðe     forman sīðe

as he quickly took hold on the first journey

slǣpendne rinc,     slāt unwearnum,

sleeping warrior, silent strike,

bāt bān-locan,     blōd ēdrum dranc,

bat bān-locan, blood in streams flowed,

syn-snǣdum swealh;     sōna hæfde

syn-snǣdum swealh; sōna hæfde

745 unlyfigendes     eal gefeormod

unlyfigendes eal gefeormod

fēt ǫnd folma.     Forð nēar ætstōp,

fate and fortune. Go near __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

nam þā mid handa     hige-þihtigne

nam þā mid handa hige-þihtigne

rinc on ræste;     rǣhte ongēan

rinc on ræste; rǣhte against

fēond mid folme;     hē onfēng hraþe

fēond mid folme;     hē onfēng hraþe

750 inwit-þancum     ǫnd wið earm gesæt.

in wit and with gratitude.

Sōna þæt onfunde     fyrena hyrde,

fyrena hyrde,

þæt hē ne mētte     middan-geardes,

þæt hē ne mētte __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

eorðan scēatta,     on ęlran męn

earth's shadow on earlier humans

mund-gripe māran;     hē on mōde wearð

mund-gripe māran;     hey, in spirit, it became

140

755 forht, on ferhðe;     nō þȳ ǣr fram meahte.

forht, on journey; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Hyge wæs him hin-fūs,     wolde on heolster flēon,

Hyge was eager to escape, wanted to flee into hiding,

sēcan dēofla gedræg;     ne wæs his drohtoð þǣr,

sēcan demons' pull; his following wasn't there,

swylce hē on ealder1-dagum     ǣr gemētte.

swylce hē on ealder1-dagum     ǣr gemētte.

Gemunde þā se gōda     mǣg Higelāces

Gemunde þá se góða mǣg Higeláces

760 ǣfen-sprǣce,     ūp-lang āstōd

evening speech, long ago

ǫnd him fæste wiðfēng;     fingras burston;

ǫnd him fæste wiðfēng;     fingras burston;

eoten wæs ūt-weard;     eorl furþur stōp.

eoten was out-bound; earl further stepped.

Mynte se mǣra,     hwǣr hē meahte swā,

Mynte se mǣra,     hwǣr hē meahte swā,

wīdre gewindan     ǫnd on weg þanon

wīdre gewindan and on weg þanon

765 flēon on fęn-hopu;     wiste his fingra geweald

765 flee on fen-hop;     knew his fingers' power

on grames grāpum.     Þæt wæs gēocor sīð,

on grames grāpum.     That was a great journey,

þæt se hearm-scaþa     tō Heorute2 ātēah.

the harm-shadow drew to Heorute__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dryht-sęle dynede;     Dęnum eallum wearð

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; All was doomed

ceaster-būendum,     cēnra gehwylcum,

ceaster-būendum, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

770 eorlum ealu-scerwen.     Yrre wǣron bēgen

eorlum ale-brewers. Yrre were both

141

rēþe rēn-weardas.     Ręced hlynsode;

rēþe rēn-weardas. Ręced hlynsode;

þā wæs wundor micel,     þæt se wīn-sęle

þā wæs wundor micel,     þæt se wīn-sęle

wiðhæfde heaþo-dēorum,     þæt hē on hrūsan ne fēol,

wiðhæfde heaþo-dēorum,     þæt hē on hrūsan ne fēol,

fǣger fold-bold;     ac hē þæs fæste wæs

fǣger fold-bold;     ac hē þæs fæste wæs

775 innan ǫnd ūtan     īren-bęndum

innan ǫnd ūtan īren-bęndum

searo-þǫncum besmiðod.     Þǣr fram sylle ābēag

searo-þǫncum besmiðod.     Þǣr fram sylle ābēag

medu-bęnc mǫnig,     mīne gefrǣge,

medu-bęnc many, my question,

golde geregnad,     þǣr þā graman wunnon;

golde geregnad,     there the enemies lived;

þæs ne wēndon ǣr     witan Scyldinga,

þæs ne wēndon ǣr     witan Scyldinga,

780 þæt hit ā mid gemete     manna ǣnig,

780 that hit always with moderation     of any man,

betlīc ǫnd bān-fāg,     tōbrecan meahte,

betlic and ban-fag, tobrecan meahte,

listum tōlūcan,     nymþe līges fæðm

listum tōlūcan, nymþe līges fæðm

swulge on swaþule.     Swēg ūp āstāg

swulge on swaþule.     Swēg ūp āstāg

nīwe geneahhe;     Norð-Dęnum stōd

nīwe geneahhe; Norð-Dęnum stood

785 atelīc ęgesa,     ānra gehwylcum,

atelīc ęgesa, each one,

þāra þe of wealle     wōp gehȳrdon,

þāra þe of wealle     wōp gehȳrdon,

gryre-lēoð galan     Godes ǫndsacan,

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ hero God's end challenge,

sige-lēasne sang,     sār wānigean

sickly song, painful lament

hęlle hæfton.3     Hēold hine fæste,

hęlle __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ Held him tight,

790 sē þe manna wæs     mægene stręngest

790 it was the strongest of men

on þǣm dæge     þysses līfes.

on this day of this life.

Nolde eorla hlēo     ǣnige þinga

Nolde eorla hlēo ǣnige þinga

þone cwealm-cuman     cwicne forlǣtan,

let the killer go,

nē his līf-dagas     lēoda ǣnigum

nē his lifedays to anyone

142

795 nytte tealde.     Þǣr genehost brǣgd

nytte tealde. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ genehost brǣgd

eorl Bēowulfes     ealde lāfe,

eorl Beowulf's old __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

wolde frēa-drihtnes     feorh ealgian,

would serve the lord's life,

mǣres þēodnes,     ðǣr hīe meahton swā.

famous people, wherever they could.

800 heard-hicgende     hilde-męcgas,

heard-hicgende hilde-męcgas,

ǫnd on healfa gehwone     hēawan þōhton,

and on either side each thought about heaven,

sāwle sēcan:     þone syn-scaðan

search for the sinner

ǣnig ofer eorðan     īrenna cyst,

Any over the earth iron's choice,

gūþ-billa nān,     grētan nolde;

gūþ-billa nān, grētan nolde;

805 ac hē sige-wǣpnum     forsworen hæfde,

ac hē had sworn off weapons,

ęcga gehwylcre.     Scolde his aldor4-gedāl

Each one. Should his leader __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-share.

on ðǣm dæge     þysses līfes

on the day of this life

earmlīc wurðan5     ǫnd se ęllor-gāst

earmlīc wurðan__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and the all-gast

on fēonda geweald     feor sīðian.

on enemy control far journey.

810 Þā þæt onfunde,     sē þe fela ǣror

810 Then he realized, the one who had learned much earlier

mōdes myrðe     manna cynne

mood slayer of mankind

fyrene gefręmede     (hē wǣs fāg wið God),

fire prevented him (he was fierce against God),

þæt him se līc-hǫma     lǣstan nolde,

þæt him se līc-hǫma     lǣstan nolde,

ac hine se mōdega6     mǣg Hygelāces

ac hine se mōdega__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__     mǣg Hygelāces

815 hæfde be hǫnda;     wæs gehwæþer ōðrum

815 had hands; was either to the other

lifigende lāð.     Līc-sār gebād

lifigende lāð. Līc-sār gebād

atol ǣglǣca7;     him on eaxle wearð

atol ǣglǣca7;     him on eaxle wearð

143

syn-dolh sweotol;     seonowe onsprungon;

syn-dolh sweet; seonowe sprung;

burston bān-locan.     Bēowulfe wearð

burston bān-locan. Bēowulf became

820 gūð-hrēð gyfeðe.     Scolde Gręndel þǫnan

gūð-hrēð gyfeðe. Scolde Gręndel þǫnan

feorh-sēoc flēon     under fęn-hleoðu,8

feorh-sēoc flēon under fęn-hleoðu,__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

sēcean wyn-lēas wīc;     wiste þē geornor,

searching for a joyless place;    you wished for it more eagerly,

þæt his aldres9 wæs     ęnde gegǫngen,

that his lifetime __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ had come to an end,

dōgera dæg-rīm.     Dęnum eallum wearð

dōgera day-count. Dęnum all became

825 æfter þām wæl-rǣse     willa gelumpen.

after the slaughter will happen.

Hæfde þā gefǣlsod,     sē þe ǣr feorran cōm,

Him had gathered, he who came from afar,

snotor ǫnd swȳð-ferhð,     sęle Hrōðgāres,

snotor and swift, good fortune to Hrothgar,

genęred wið nīðe.     Niht-weorce gefeh,

generated with malice. Night work rejoiced,

ęllen-mǣrþum;     hæfde Ēast-Dęnum

ęllen-mǣrþum; hæfde East-Danes

830 Gēat-męcga lēod     gilp gelǣsted;

Geat warriors' fame achieved;

swylce oncȳððe     ealle gebētte,

swylce once revealed all corrected,

inwid-sorge,     þe hīe ǣr drugon

inwid-sorge, the they before dragged

ǫnd for þrēa-nȳdum     þolian scoldon,

and for three needs endure should,

torn unlȳtel.     Þæt wæs tācen sweotol,

torn unlit. That was a clear sign,

835 syððan hilde-dēor     hǫnd ālęgde,

syððan warrior   hand laid down,

earm ǫnd eaxle     (þǣr wæs eal geador

earm and axel (there was all gathered

Gręndles grāpe)     under gēapne hrōf.

Grendels __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__) under open roof.

740. þæt, the direct object of yldan, refers to the contest about to ensue. Beowulf, in the preceding lines, was wondering how it would result.

740. that, the direct object of yield, refers to the upcoming contest. Beowulf, in the previous lines, was contemplating how it would turn out.

746. ætstōp. The subject of this verb and of nam is Grendel; the subject of the three succeeding verbs (rǣhte, onfēng, gesæt) is Beowulf.

746. ætstōp. The subject of this verb and of nam is Grendel; the subject of the next three verbs (rǣhte, onfēng, gesāt) is Beowulf.

751-52. The O.E. poets are fond of securing emphasis or of stimulating interest by indirect methods of statement, by suggesting more than they affirm. This device often appears in their use of negatives (ne, l. 13; p. 140, l. 3; , p. 140, l. 1), and in the unexpected prominence that they give to some minor detail usually suppressed because understood; as where the narrator, wishing to describe the terror produced by Grendel’s midnight visits to Heorot, says (ll. 138-139), “Then was it easy to find one who elsewhere, more commodiously, sought rest for himself.” It is hard to believe that the poet saw nothing humorous in this point of view.

751-52. Old English poets often emphasize their points or spark interest through indirect statements, suggesting more than they directly say. This technique frequently appears in their use of negatives (ne, l. 13; p. 140, l. 3; , p. 140, l. 1) and in how they highlight certain minor details that are usually overlooked because they are understood. For example, when the narrator describes the fear caused by Grendel's nighttime visits to Heorot, he states (ll. 138-139), “Then was it easy to find one who elsewhere, more conveniently, sought rest for himself.” It’s hard to believe the poet didn’t find some humor in this perspective.

755. nō ... meahte, none the sooner could he away. The omission of a verb of motion after the auxiliaries magan, mōtan, sculan, and willan is very frequent. Cf. Beowulf’s last utterance, p. 147, l. 17.

755. nō ... meahte, he couldn't leave any faster. It's quite common to omit a motion verb after the auxiliaries magan, mōtan, sculan, and willan. See. Beowulf’s last words, p. 147, l. 17.

768. The lines that immediately follow constitute a fine bit of description by indication of effects. The two contestants are withdrawn from our sight; but we hear the sound of the fray crashing through the massive old hall, which trembles as in a blast; we see the terror depicted on the faces of the Danes as they listen to the strange sounds that issue from their former banqueting hall; by these sounds we, too, measure the progress and alternations of the combat. At last we hear only the “terror-lay” of Grendel, “lay of the beaten,” and know that Beowulf has made good his promise at the banquet (gilp gelǣsted).

768. The lines that follow are a great example of description by hinting at effects. The two fighters are out of our sight, but we can hear the chaos of the battle echoing through the massive old hall, which shakes like it’s under attack; we can see the fear on the faces of the Danes as they listen to the strange noises coming from what used to be their banquet hall; through these sounds, we can also sense the back-and-forth of the fight. Finally, we are left with only the “terror-lay” of Grendel, the “lay of the defeated,” and we know that Beowulf has fulfilled his promise made at the banquet (gilp gelǣsted).

769. cēnra gehwylcum. The indefinite pronouns (§ 77) may be used as adjectives, agreeing in case with their nouns; but they frequently, as here, take a partitive genitive: ānra gehwylcum, to each one (= to each of ones); ǣnige (instrumental) þinga, for any thing (= for any of things); on healfa gehwone, into halves (= into each of halves); ealra dōgra gehwām, every day (= on each of all days); ūhtna gehwylce, every morning (= on each of mornings).

769. to each. The indefinite pronouns (§ 77) can function as adjectives, matching their nouns in case; however, they often, as shown here, use a partitive genitive: to each one (i.e. to each of the ones); for any thing (instrumental) things, (i.e. for any of the things); into halves, (i.e. into each of the halves); every day, (i.e. on each of all the days); every morning, (i.e. on each of the mornings).

780. Notice that hit, the object of tōbrecan, stands for wīn-sęle, which is masculine. See p. 39, Note 2. Manna is genitive after gemete, not after ǣnig.

780. Notice that hit, the object of tōbrecan, represents wīn-sęle, which is masculine. See p. 39, Note 2. Manna is in the genitive case after gemete, not after ǣnig.

787-89. gryre-lēoð ... hæfton [= hæftan]. Note that verbs of hearing and seeing, as in Mn.E., may be followed by the infinitive. They heard God’s adversary sing (galan) ... hell’s captive bewail (wānigean). Had the present participle been used, the effect would have been, as in Mn.E., to emphasize the agent (the subject of the infinitive) rather than the action (the infinitive itself).

787-89. song of sorrow ... captive [= captivate]. Note that verbs of hearing and seeing, like in modern English, can be followed by the infinitive. They heard God’s enemy singing (sing) ... the captive of hell lamenting (lament). If the present participle had been used, it would emphasize the doer (the subject of the infinitive) rather than the action (the infinitive itself), like in modern English.

795-96. þǣr ... lāfe. Beowulf’s followers now seem to have seized their swords and come to his aid, not knowing that Grendel, having forsworn war-weapons himself, is proof against the best of swords. Then many an earl of Beowulf’s (= an earl of B. very often) brandished his sword. That no definite earl is meant is shown by the succeeding hīe meahton instead of hē meahte. See p. 110, Note.

795-96. there ... remains. Beowulf's followers now seem to have grabbed their swords and rushed to his aid, unaware that Grendel, who had sworn off weapons himself, is immune to even the finest blades. Then many of Beowulf's earls (= an earl of B. very often) waved their swords. The fact that no specific earl is being referred to is indicated by the following they might instead of he might. See p. 110, Note.

799. They did not know this (ðæt), while they were fighting; but the first Hīe refers to the warriors who proffered help; the second hīe, to the combatants, Beowulf and Grendel. In apposition with ðǣt, stands the whole clause, þone synscaðan (object of grētan) ... nolde. The second, or conjunctional, ðæt is here omitted before þone. See p. 112, note on ll. 18-19.

799. They didn't know this (that), while they were fighting; but the first Hīe refers to the warriors who offered help; the second hīe refers to the fighters, Beowulf and Grendel. In apposition with ðǣt, stands the whole clause, þone synscaðan (object of grētan) ... nolde. The second, or conjunctional, ðæt is here left out before þone. See p. 112, note on ll. 18-19.

837. grāpe = genitive singular, feminine, after eal.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ grape = genitive singular, feminine, after all.

1 = ealdor-.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = leader-

2 = Heorote.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = Heorot.

3 = hæftan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = to help.

4 = ealdor-.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = ruler-.

5 = weorðan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = to become.

6 = mōdiga.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = brave.

7 = āglǣca.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = warrior.

8 = -hliðu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = -hike.

9 = ealdres.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = elders.

Beowulf Fatally Wounded. [Lines 2712-2752.]

[Hrothgar, in his gratitude for the great victory, lavishes gifts upon Beowulf; but Grendel’s mother must be reckoned with. Beowulf finds her at the sea-bottom, and after a desperate struggle slays her. Hrothgar again pours treasures into Beowulf’s lap. Beowulf, having now accomplished his mission, returns to Sweden. After a reign of fifty years, he goes forth to meet a fire-spewing dragon that is ravaging his kingdom. In the struggle Beowulf is fatally wounded. Wiglaf, a loyal thane, is with him.]

[Hrothgar, grateful for the great victory, showers Beowulf with gifts; however, Grendel’s mother is still a threat. Beowulf finds her at the bottom of the sea, and after a fierce fight, he kills her. Hrothgar once again bestows treasures upon Beowulf. Having completed his mission, Beowulf returns to Sweden. After reigning for fifty years, he faces a fire-breathing dragon that is terrorizing his kingdom. In the battle, Beowulf is mortally wounded. Wiglaf, a loyal warrior, stands by his side.]

144

        Þā sīo1 wund ongǫn,

Then the __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wound began,

þe him se eorð-draca     ǣr geworhte,

þe him se eorð-draca     ǣr geworhte,

swēlan ǫnd swellan.     Hē þǣt sōna onfand,

swēlan ǫnd swellan.     Hē þǣt sōna onfand,

2715 þǣt him on brēostum     bealo-nīð wēoll

2715 that in his chest a bitter hatred swelled

āttor on innan.     Þā se æðeling gīong,2

āttor on innan. Þā __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gīong,__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

þæt hē bī wealle,     wīs-hycgende,

that he by the wall, wise-thinking,

gesæt on sesse;     seah on ęnta geweorc,

sat down; looked at __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

hū þā stān-bogan     stapulum fæste

hū the stone bows are firmly fastened

2720 ēce eorð-ręced     innan healde.

ēce eorð-ręced     innen __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Hyne þā mid handa     heoro-drēorigne,

Hyne then with hand heoro-drenched,

þēoden mǣrne,     þegn ungemete till,

famous king, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

wine-dryhten his     wætere gelafede,

wine-dryhten his water poured,

hilde-sædne,     ǫnd his helm onspēon.

hilde-sædne, and his helmet shone.

2725 Bīowulf3 maðelode;     hē ofer bęnne spræc,

Bīowulf__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ spoke; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__,

145

wunde wæl-blēate;     wisse hē gearwe,

wounded whale-blood; he knew well,

þæt hē dæg-hwīla     gedrogen hæfde

that he had endured for a while during the day

eorðan wynne;     þā wæs eall sceacen

earth's joy; then all was peaceful

dōgor-gerīmes,     dēað ungemete nēah:

dōgor-gerīmes, death very near:

2730 “Nū ic suna mīnum     syllan wolde

2730 “Now I want to give my son

gūð-gewǣdu,     þǣr mē gifeðe swā

battle gear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ provides so

ǣnig yrfe-weard     æfter wurde

any heir after word

līce gelęnge.     Ic ðās lēode hēold

līce __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. I supported these people.

fīftig wintra;     næs se folc-cyning

fifty winters;     not the folk-king

2735 ymbe-sittendra     ænig þāra,

ymbe-sittendra any of those,

þe mec gūð-winum     grētan dorste,

the me battle-friends greet dared,

ęgesan ðēon.     Ic on earde bād

ęgesan ðēon.     Ic on earde bād

mǣl-gesceafta,     hēold mīn tela,

mæl-creation, held my own,

nē sōhte searo-nīðas,     nē mē swōr fela

nē sōhte searo-nīðas,     nē mē swōr fela

2740 āða on unriht.     Ic ðæs ealles mæg,

2740 and that is not right. I can do all of that,

feorh-bęnnum sēoc,     gefēan habban;

feorh-bęnnum sēoc, gefēan habban;

for-þām mē wītan ne ðearf     Waldend4 fīra

So we don't need to worry about the ruler.

morðor-bealo5 māga,     þonne mīn sceaceð

morðor-bealo__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ family, when my angers

līf of līce.     Nū ðū lungre geong6

life of body. Now you longer geong6

2745 hord scēawian     under hārne stān,

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__     under hard stone,

Wīglāf lēofa,     nū se wyrm ligeð,

Wēglaf, my dear, now the dragon lies,

swefeð sāre wund,     since berēafod.

suffered a painful wound, ever since being robbed.

146

Bīo7 nū on ofoste,     þæt ic ǣr-welan,

Bīo7 now often, that I earlier well,

gold-ǣht ongite,     gearo scēawige

gold insight, ready observe

2750 swegle searo-gimmas,     þæt ic ðȳ sēft mæge

2750 sweep sea-gems, so that I may softly

æfter māððum-welan     mīn ālǣtan

after treasure-hunting __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

līf ǫnd lēod-scipe,     þone ic lǫnge hēold.”

līf and song, I have held onto for a long time.

2716. se æðeling is Beowulf.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ the noble one is Beowulf.

2718. ęnta geweorc is a stereotyped phrase for anything that occasions wonder by its size or strangeness.

2718. ęnta geweorc is a standard expression for anything that impresses us with its size or uniqueness.

2720. healde. Heyne, following Ettmüller, reads hēoldon, thus arbitrarily changing mood, tense, and number of the original. Either mood, indicative or subjunctive, would be legitimate. As to the tense, the narrator is identifying himself in time with the hero, whose wonder was “how the stone-arches ... sustain the ever-during earth-hall”: the construction is a form of oratio recta, a sort of miratio recta. The singular healde, instead of healden, has many parallels in the dependent clauses of Beowulf, most of these being relative clauses introduced by þāra þe (= of those that ... + a singular predicate). In the present instance, the predicate has doubtless been influenced by the proximity of eorð-ręced, a quasi-subject; and we have no more right to alter to healden or hēoldon than we have to change Shakespeare’s gives to give in

2720. healde. Heyne, following Ettmüller, interprets hēoldon, thus arbitrarily altering the mood, tense, and number of the original. Either mood, indicative or subjunctive, would be appropriate. Regarding the tense, the narrator is aligning himself in time with the hero, whose wonder was “how the stone-arches ... sustain the ever-during earth-hall”: the construction is a form of oratio recta, a kind of miratio recta. The singular healde, instead of healden, has many parallels in the dependent clauses of Beowulf, most of these being relative clauses introduced by þāra þe (= of those that ... + a singular predicate). In this case, the predicate has likely been influenced by the nearby eorð-ręced, a quasi-subject; and we have no more reason to change it to healden or hēoldon than we do to alter Shakespeare’s gives to give in

“Words to the heat of deeds too cold breath gives.”

“Words cool down action that needs to be heated up.”

(Macbeth, II, I, 61.)

(Macbeth, II, I, 61.)

2722. The þegn ungemete till is Wiglaf, the bravest of Beowulf’s retainers.

2722. The thain unmeasured until is Wiglaf, the bravest of Beowulf’s followers.

2725. hē ofer bęnne spræc. The editors and translators of Beowulf invariably render ofer in this passage by about; but Beowulf says not a word about his wound. The context seems to me to show plainly that ofer (cf. Latin supra) denotes here opposition = in spite of. We read in Genesis, l. 594, that Eve took the forbidden fruit ofer Drihtenes word. Beowulf fears (l. 2331) that he may have ruled unjustly = ofer ealde riht; and he goes forth (l. 2409) ofer willan to confront the dragon.

2725. he spoke about. The editors and translators of Beowulf always translate ofer in this passage as about; but Beowulf doesn’t mention his wound at all. The context clearly indicates that ofer (cf. Latin supra) here means opposition = in spite of. We read in Genesis, l. 594, that Eve took the forbidden fruit ofer the Lord's word. Beowulf fears (l. 2331) that he may have ruled unjustly = ofer old rights; and he goes forth (l. 2409) ofer will to confront the dragon.

2731-33. þǣr mē ... gelęnge, if so be that (þǣr ... swā) any heir had afterwards been given me (mē gifeðe ... æfter wurde) belonging to my body.

2731-33. there I ... belong, if that is the case (there ... so) any heir had later been given to me (me gives ... afterwards became) connected to my body.

2744-45. geong [= gǫng] ... scēawian. See note on ēode ... sittan, p. 137, ll. 19-20. In Mn.E. Go see, Go fetch, etc., is the second verb imperative (coördinate with the first), or subjunctive (that you may see), or infinitive without to?

2744-45. geong [= gǫng] ... scēawian. See note on ēode ... sittan, p. 137, ll. 19-20. In modern English, Go see, Go fetch, etc., is the second verb in the imperative form (coordinated with the first), or subjunctive (that you may see), or infinitive without to?

2751-52. mīn ... līf. See note on ęnde-dæg ... mīnne, p. 137, ll. 16-17.

2751-52. my ... life. See note on end-day ... my, p. 137, ll. 16-17.

1 = sēo.

2 = gēong.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = young.

3 = Bēowulf.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = Beowulf.

4 = Wealdend.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = Wealdend.

5 = morðor-bealu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = murder curse.

6 = gǫng (gang).

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = gang.

7 = Bēo.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = Be.

Beowulf’s Last Words. [Lines 2793-2821.]

[Wiglaf brings the jewels, the tokens of Beowulf’s triumph. Beowulf, rejoicing to see them, reviews his career, and gives advice and final directions to Wiglaf.]

[Wiglaf brings the jewels, the symbols of Beowulf’s victory. Beowulf, happy to see them, reflects on his life and offers guidance and final instructions to Wiglaf.]

        Bīowulf1 maðelode,

Beowulf__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ spoke,

gǫmel on giohðe     (gold scēawode):

gǫmel on giohðe (gold showed):

2795 “Ic þāra frætwa     Frēan ealles ðanc,

2795 “I am the treasure of the Lord of all ðanc,

Wuldur-cyninge,     wordum sęcge

Wuldur-king, with words __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

ęcum Dryhtne,     þe ic hēr on starie,

ęcum Dryhtne,     þe ic hēr on starie,

þæs þe ic mōste     mīnum lēodum

þæs þe ic mōste     mīnum lēodum

ǣr swylt-dæge     swylc gestrȳnan.

On the day of death, such things happen.

147

frōde feorh-lęge,     fręmmað gē

wise life, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ now

lēoda þearfe;     ne mæg ic hēr lęng wesan.

lēoda þearfe;     ne mæg ic hēr lęng wesan.

Hātað heaðo-mǣre     hlǣw gewyrcean,

Build a barrow for the famous warrior,

beorhtne æfter bǣle     æt brimes nosan;

beorhtne after fire at the ocean's nose;

2805 sē scel2 tō gemyndum     mīnum lēodum

I will remember my people

hēah hlīfian     on Hrǫnes næsse,

on Hrǫnes peninsula,

þæt hit sǣ-līðend     syððan hātan3

that __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ sea traveler after command __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Bīowulfes1 biorh1     þā þe brentingas

Bīowulfes__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ beer__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ that the Brentingas

ofer flōda genipu     feorran drīfað.”

ofer flōda genipu feorran drīfað.

2810 Dyde him of healse     hring gyldenne

Dyde __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ of health gold ring

þīoden1 þrīst-hȳdig;     þegne gesealde,

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0____A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ thrice-worthy; gave to the thane,

geongum gār-wigan,     gold-fāhne helm,

battle-axe, gold-plated helmet

bēah ǫnd byrnan,     hēt hyne brūcan well.

bēah and byrnan, he let them use well.

“Þū eart ęnde-lāf     ūsses cynnes,

"You are the last of our kind,"

2815 Wǣgmundinga;     ealle wyrd forswēop

Wǣgmundinga; all fate is sealed

mīne māgas     tō metod-sceafte,

my friend, your method setup,

eorlas on ęlne;     ic him æfter sceal.”

eorlas on ęlne;    __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.”

Þæt wæs þām gǫmelan     gingeste word

Þæt wæs þām gǫmelan     gingeste word

brēost-gehygdum,     ǣr hē bǣl cure,

breast thoughts, before he chooses flame,

148

2820 hāte heaðo-wylmas;     him of hreðre gewāt

hate health threats; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

sāwol sēcean     sōð-fæstra dōm.

soul __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__     true judgment.

2795-99. The expression sęcgan þanc takes the same construction as þancian; i.e., the dative of the person (Frēan) and the genitive (a genitive of cause) of the thing (þāra frætwa). Cf. note on biddan, p. 45. The antecedent of þe is frætwa. For the position of on, see § 94, (5). The clause introduced by þæs þe (because) is parallel in construction with frætwa, both being causal modifiers of sęcge þanc. The Christian coloring in these lines betrays the influence of priestly transcribers.

2795-99. The phrase sęcgan þanc uses the same structure as þancian; that is, the dative of the person (Frēan) and the genitive (a genitive of cause) of the thing (þāra frætwa). See the note on biddan, p. 45. The antecedent of þe is frætwa. For the position of on, refer to § 94, (5). The clause introduced by þæs þe (because) parallels the structure with frætwa, both serving as causal modifiers of sęcge þanc. The Christian influence in these lines reveals the impact of priestly scribes.

2800. Now that I, in exchange for (on) a hoard of treasures, have bartered (bebohte) the laying down (-lęge > licgan) of my old life. The ethical codes of the early Germanic races make frequent mention of blood-payments, or life-barters. There seems to be here a suggestion of the “wergild.”

2800. Now that I, in exchange for (on) a treasure trove, have traded (bebohte) the surrender (-lęge > licgan) of my old life. The ethical codes of the early Germanic tribes often refer to blood payments or life exchanges. There appears to be a hint of the “wergild” here.

2801. fręmmað gē. The plural imperative (as also in Hātað) shows that Beowulf is here speaking not so much to Wiglaf in particular as, through Wiglaf, to his retainers in general,—to his comitatus.

2801. fręmmað gē. The plural imperative (as also in Hātað) shows that Beowulf is here speaking not just to Wiglaf specifically but, through Wiglaf, to his followers in general,—to his comitatus.

2806. The desire for conspicuous burial places finds frequent expression in early literatures. The tomb of Achilles was situated “high on a jutting headland over wide Hellespont that it might be seen from off the sea.” Elpenor asks Ulysses to bury him in the same way. Æneas places the ashes of Misenus beneath a high mound on a headland of the sea.

2806. The wish for prominent burial sites is often evident in early writings. Achilles' tomb was located “high on a jutting headland over wide Hellespont so it could be seen from the sea.” Elpenor asks Ulysses to bury him similarly. Æneas lays Misenus' ashes beneath a high mound on a headland by the sea.

2807. hit = hlǣw, which is masculine. See p. 39, Note 2.

2807. hit = hlǣw, which is masculine. See p. 39, Note 2.

2810-11. him ... þīoden. The reference in both cases is to Beowulf, who is disarming himself (do-of > doff) for the last time; þegne = to Wiglaf.

2810-11. him ... king. The reference in both cases is to Beowulf, who is taking off his armor (do of > doff) for the last time; þegne = to Wiglaf.

Note, where the personal element is strong, the use of the dative instead of the more colorless possessive; him of healse, not of his healse.

Note, where the personal element is strong, the use of the dative instead of the more neutral possessive; him of healse, not of his healse.

2817. ic ... sceal. See note on nō ... meahte, p. 140, l. 1.

2817. ic ... shall. See note on no ... might, p. 140, l. 1.

2820. him of hreðre. Cf. note on him ... þīoden, p. 147, ll. 10-11.

2820. him of hreðre. Cf. note on him ... þīoden, p. 147, ll. 10-11.

2820-21. For construction of gewāt ... sēcean, see note on ēode ... sittan, p. 137, ll. 19-20.

2820-21. For building gewāt ... sēcean, check the note on ēode ... sittan, p. 137, ll. 19-20.

1 = īo, io = ēo, eo.

1 = io, io = eo, eo.

2 = sceal.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = shall.

3 = hāten.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hat.

VII. THE WANDERER.

[Exeter MS. “The epic character of the ancient lyric appears especially in this: that the song is less the utterance of a momentary feeling than the portrayal of a lasting state, perhaps the reflection of an entire life, generally that of one isolated, or bereft by death or exile of protectors and friends.” (Ten Brink, Early Eng. Lit., I.) I adopt Brooke’s threefold division (Early Eng. Lit., p. 356): “It opens with a Christian prologue, and closes with a Christian epilogue, but the whole body of the poem was written, it seems to me, by a person who thought more of the goddess Wyrd than of God, whose life and way of thinking were uninfluenced by any distinctive Christian doctrine.”

[Exeter MS. “The epic nature of ancient lyric poetry is particularly evident in this: the song expresses more than just a fleeting emotion; it captures a lasting state, possibly reflecting an entire life, often that of someone who is alone, or has lost their protectors and friends due to death or exile.” (Ten Brink, Early Eng. Lit., I.) I agree with Brooke’s three-part division (Early Eng. Lit., p. 356): “It begins with a Christian prologue and ends with a Christian epilogue, but the main part of the poem seems to have been written by someone who valued the goddess Wyrd more than God, whose life and worldview were not shaped by any specific Christian beliefs.”

The author is unknown.]

The author is unknown.

Prologue.

Oft him ānhaga     āre gebīdeð,

Often a solitary one waits for favor,

Metudes1 miltse,     þēah þe hē mōdcearig

Metudes__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ miltse, though he is troubled

geond lagulāde     lǫnge sceolde

geond lagulāde lǫnge sceolde

hrēran mid hǫndum     hrīmcealde sǣ,

stir with hands     frost-cold sea,

5 wadan wræclǣstas:     wyrd bið ful ārǣd!

5 wadan wræclǣstas:     fate is fully determined!

Swā cwæð eardstapa     earfeþa2 gemyndig,

So said the wanderer, mindful of hardships __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

wrāþra wælsleahta,     winemǣga hryres:

wrath of the slaughters, dear kin __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__:

Plaint of the Wanderer.

“Oft ic sceolde āna     ūhtna gehwylce

“Often I had to be alone __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

mīne ceare cwīþan;     nis nū cwicra nān,

mīne ceare cwīþan;     nis nū cwicra nān,

149

10 þe ic him mōdsefan     mīnne durre

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ mood safe my door

sweotule3 āsęcgan.     Ic tō sōþe wāt

sweotule__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ascent. I really know

þæt biþ in eorle     indryhten þēaw,

þæt biþ in eorle     indryhten þēaw,

þæt hē his ferðlocan     fæste binde,

þæt hē his ferðlocan fæste binde,

healde his hordcofan,     hycge swā hē wille;

he held his treasure-chest, think as he wants;

15 ne mæg wērig mōd     wyrde wiðstǫndan

15 no weary mind can withstand fate

nē sē hrēo hyge     helpe gefręmman:

nē sē hrēo hyge     helpe gefręmman:

for ðon dōmgeorne     drēorigne oft

for that judgement often bloody

in hyra brēostcofan     bindað fæste.

in rent chest bindings secure.

Swā ic mōdsefan     mīnne sceolde

So I should mind my mind

20 oft earmcearig     ēðle bidǣled,

oft earmcearig ēðle bidǣled,

frēomǣgum feor     feterum sǣlan,

from far away, to send chains,

siþþan gēara iū     goldwine mīnne

since some years ago my gold friend

hrūsan heolster biwrāh,     and ic hēan þǫnan

hrūsan heolster biwrāh,     and ic hēan þǫnan

wōd wintercearig     ofer waþema gebind,

wōd wintercearig over waves' bond,

25 sōhte sęle drēorig     sinces bryttan,

sought the bloody treasure master,

hwǣr ic feor oþþe nēah     findan meahte

hwǣr ic feor oþþe nēah     findan meahte

þone þe in meoduhealle4     miltse wisse

the one who in the mead hall4     miltse knew

oþþe mec frēondlēasne     frēfran wolde,

or would comfort me friendless,

węnian mid wynnum.     Wāt sē þe cunnað

węnian mid wynnum.     Wāt sē þe cunnað

30 hū slīþen bið     sorg tō gefēran

30 how slender is     sorrow to endure

þām þe him lȳt hafað     lēofra geholena:

þām þe him lȳt hafað     lēofra geholena:

warað hine wræclāst,     nāles wunden gold,

warað hine wræclāst,     nāles wunden gold,

ferðloca frēorig,     nālæs foldan blǣd;

journey cold, no earth's bounty;

gemǫn hē sęlesęcgas     and sincþęge,

gemǫn hē selećgas and sincþęge,

35 hū hine on geoguðe     his goldwine

35 how youth is on the rise his gold friend

węnede tō wiste:     wyn eal gedrēas!

went to feast: all was gathered!

150

For þon wāt sē þe sceal     his winedryhtnes

For that wāt he who must his lord's

lēofes lārcwidum     lǫnge forþolian,

lēofes lārcwidum lǫnge forþolian,

ðonne sorg and slǣp     sǫmod ætgædre

ðonne sorg and slǣp     sǫmod ætgædre

40 earmne ānhagan     oft gebindað:

earmen ahagan oft gebindas:

þinceð him on mōde     þæt hē his mǫndryhten

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__     that he his lord

clyppe and cysse,     and on cnēo lęcge

clyppe and cysse, and on knee lay

hǫnda and hēafod,     swā hē hwīlum ǣr

hǫnda and hēafod,     so he sometimes before

in gēardagum     giefstōles brēac;

in ancient days, wore the gift throne;

45 ðonne onwæcneð eft     winelēas guma,

then wakes again a wine-less man,

gesihð him biforan     fealwe wǣgas,

he saw before him yellow waves,

baþian brimfuglas,     brǣdan feþra,

bathe the seabirds, spread wings,

hrēosan hrīm and snāw     hagle gemęnged.

hrēosan hrīm and snāw hagle gemęnged.

Þonne bēoð þȳ hęfigran     heortan bęnne,

Þonne bēoð þȳ hęfigran heortan bęnne,

50 sāre æfter swǣsne;     sorg bið genīwad;

50 sorrow follows sweetness; sorrow is renewed;

þonne māga gemynd     mōd geondhweorfeð,

when the memory of kin brings to mind,

grēteð glīwstafum,     georne geondscēawað.

greets joyfully, eagerly observes.

Sęcga geseldan     swimmað eft on weg;

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ swims back the same way;

flēotendra ferð5     nō þǣr fela bringeð

flēotendra ferð5 nor does it bring many

55 cūðra cwidegiedda;     cearo6 bið genīwad

courage __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; fear __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ is revealed

151

þām þe sęndan sceal     swīþe geneahhe

þām þe sęndan sceal     swīþe geneahhe

ofer waþema gebind     wērigne sefan.

offer a tide binding weary spirit.

For þon ic geþęncan ne mæg     geond þās woruld

Because I cannot think beyond this world

for hwan mōdsefa     mīn ne gesweorce,

for hwan môdsefa mīn ne gesweorce,

60 þonne ic eorla līf     eal geondþęnce,

60 when I consider the lives of nobles,

hū hī fǣrlīce     flęt ofgēafon,

hū he fiercely fought,

mōdge maguþegnas.     Swā þēs middangeard

mōdge maguþegnas. Swā this middangeard

ealra dōgra gehwām     drēoseð and fealleþ;

ealra dōgra gehwām drēoseð and fealleþ;

for þon ne mæg weorþan wīs     wer, ǣr hē āge

for that cannot become wise man, before he has

65 wintra dǣl in woruldrīce.     Wita sceal geþyldig,

winter part in the world. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,

ne sceal nō tō hātheort     nē tō hrædwyrde,

ne sceal nō tō hātheort nē tō hrædwyrde,

nē tō wāc wiga     nē tō wanhȳdig,

nē tō wāc wiga    nē tō wanhȳdig,

nē tō forht nē tō fægen     nē tō feohgīfre,

nē tō afraid nē tō joyful nē tō greedy for wealth,

nē nǣfre gielpes tō georn,     ǣr hē geare cunne.

nē nǣfre gielpes tō georn,     ǣr hē geare cunne.

70 Beorn sceal gebīdan,     þonne hē bēot spriceð,

70 Beorn must wait when he makes a promise,

oþ þæt collenferð     cunne gearwe

oþ þæt collenferð cunne gearwe

hwider hreþra gehygd     hweorfan wille.

hwider hreþra gehygd hweorfan wille.

Ongietan sceal glēaw hæle     hū gǣstlīc bið,

Ongietan skal kloker helt hvordan åndelig det er,

þonne eall þisse worulde wela     wēste stǫndeð,

þonne eall þisse verdens velfærd wēste stǫndeð,

75 swā nū missenlīce     geond þisne middangeard

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ message across this world

winde biwāune7     weallas stǫndaþ,

winde biwāune__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ walls stand,

152

hrīme bihrorene,8     hryðge þā ederas.

hrīme bihrorene,__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ croaked then

Wōriað þā wīnsalo,9     waldend licgað

Wōriað the wine hall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ lord lies

drēame bidrorene10;     duguð eal gecrǫng

drēame bidrorene__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;     duguð eal gecrǫng

80 wlǫnc bī wealle:     sume wīg fornōm,

80 I watched by the wall: some warriors were taken,

fęrede in forðwege;     sumne fugel11 oþbær

carried on the journey; some bird11 other

ofer hēanne holm;     sumne sē hāra wulf

ofer heanne holm; sumne se hāra wulf

dēaðe gedǣlde;     sumne drēorighlēor

death divided; some sorrowful face

in eorðscræfe     eorl gehȳdde:

in the earth's grave the lord hid:

85 ȳþde swā þisne eardgeard     ælda Scyppend,

85 Just as the Creator shaped this home,

oþ þæt burgwara     breahtma lēase

oþ þæt burgwara breahtma lēase

eald ęnta geweorc     īdlu stōdon.

old giant work stood idle.

Sē þonne þisne wealsteal     wīse geþōhte,

Sē þonne þisne wealsteal     wīse geþōhte,

and þis deorce līf     dēope geondþęnceð,

and this dark life deeply reflects,

90 frōd in ferðe12     feor oft gemǫn

wise in spirit __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ often meet

wælsleahta worn,     and þās word ācwið:

wælsleahta worn, and þās word ācwið:

‘Hwǣr cwōm mearg? hwǣr cwōm mago13? hwǣr cwōm māþþumgyfa?

‘Where did the horse go? Where did the warrior go? Where did the treasure giver go?

hwǣr cwōm symbla gesetu?     hwǣr sindon sęledrēamas?

where __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__? where are the treasures?

Ēalā beorht bune!     ēalā byrnwiga!

Hello bright warrior!

95 ēalā þēodnes þrym!     hū sēo þrāg gewāt,

95 O glory of the king! How the time has passed,

genāp under nihthelm,     swā hēo nō wǣre!

genāp under nihthelm, so she was not!

Stǫndeð nū on lāste     lēofre duguþe

Stǫndeð nū on lāste leofre duguþe

weal wundrum hēah,     wyrmlīcum fāh:

wealth wonder high, serpent-colored:

eorlas fornōmon     asca þrȳþe,

eorlas forenamed asca strength,

153

100 wǣpen wælgīfru,     wyrd sēo mǣre;

wæpen wælgīfru, wyrd sēo mǣre;

and þās stānhleoþu14     stormas cnyssað;

and these stone songs__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__     storms strike;

hrīð hrēosende     hrūsan bindeð,

hrith hreosende hrusan bindeð,

wintres wōma,     þonne wǫn cymeð,

winter's coming, when the sun returns,

nīpeð nihtscūa,     norþan onsęndeð

night shadows, northern lights

105 hrēo hæglfare     hæleþum on andan.

hrēo hailstorm for heroes in defiance.

Eall is earfoðlīc     eorþan rīce,

Life is hard on Earth,

onwęndeð wyrda gesceaft     weoruld under heofonum:

onwęndeð wyrda gesceaft weoruld under heofonum:

hēr bið feoh lǣne,     hēr bið frēond lǣne,

hér is wealth temporary,     hér are friends temporary,

hēr bið mǫn lǣne,     hēr bið mǣg lǣne;

hére is man temporary, hére is kin temporary;

110 eal þis eorþan gesteal     īdel weorþeð!’”

110 “Realize that this earthly place will ultimately become empty!”

Epilogue.

Swā cwæð snottor on mōde,     gesæt him sundor æt rune.

Then the wise one spoke in thought, gesæt him sundor æt rune.

Til biþ sē þe his trēowe gehealdeð;     ne sceal nǣfre his torn tō rycene

Til bið se þe his treowe geheald; ne sceal nǣfre his torn to rycene

beorn of his brēostum ācȳþan,     nemþe hē ǣr þā bōte cunne;

beorn of his brēostum ācȳþan,     nemþe hē ǣr þā bōte

eorl mid ęlne gefręmman.     Wel bið þām þe him āre sēceð,

eorl mid ęlne gefręmman. Blessed are those who seek mercy,

115 frōfre tō Fæder on heofonum,     þǣr ūs eal sēo fæstnung stǫndeð.

115 comfort to Father in heaven,     where the whole community stands firm.

7. The MS. reading is hryre (nominative), which is meaningless.

7. The manuscript reading is hryre (nominative), which has no meaning.

8. For ūhtna gehwylce, see note on cēnra gehwylcum, p. 140.

8. For ūhtna gehwylce, check the note on cēnra gehwylcum, p. 140.

10. þe ... him. See § 75 (4). Cf. Merchant of Venice, II, v, 50-51.

10. the ... him. See § 75 (4). Cf. Merchant of Venice, II, v, 50-51.

27. For mine (MS. in), which does not satisfy metrical requirements, I adopt Kluge’s plausible substitution of miltse; miltse witan = to show (know, feel), pity. The myne wisse of Beowulf (l. 169) is metrically admissible.

27. For mine (MS. in), which doesn’t meet the meter requirements, I accept Kluge’s reasonable replacement of miltse; miltse witan = to show (know, feel), pity. The myne wisse of Beowulf (l. 169) is metrically acceptable.

37. The object of wāt is þinceð him on mōde; but the construction is unusual, inasmuch as both þæt’s (þæt pronominal before wāt and þæt conjunctional before þinceð) are omitted. See p. 112, ll. 18-19.

37. The purpose of wāt is þinceð him on mōde; however, the structure is unusual because both þæt’s (þæt as a pronoun before wāt and þæt as a conjunction before þinceð) are left out. See p. 112, ll. 18-19.

41. þinceð him on mōde (see note on him ... þīoden, p. 147). “No more sympathetic picture has been drawn by an Anglo-Saxon poet than where the wanderer in exile falls asleep at his oar and dreams again of his dead lord and the old hall and revelry and joy and gifts,—then wakes to look once more upon the waste of ocean, snow and hail falling all around him, and sea-birds dipping in the spray.” (Gummere, Germanic Origins, p. 221.)

41. he thinks to himself (see note on him ... thīoden, p. 147). “No more relatable image has been created by an Anglo-Saxon poet than when the wanderer in exile falls asleep at his oar and dreams again of his deceased lord, the old hall, the celebrations, joy, and gifts,—then wakes to see once again the desolate ocean, snow and hail falling all around him, and seabirds dipping in the spray.” (Gummere, Germanic Origins, p. 221.)

53-55. Sęcga ... cwidegiedda = But these comrades of warriors [= those seen in vision] again swim away [= fade away]; the ghost of these fleeting ones brings not there many familiar words; i.e. he sees in dream and vision the old familiar faces, but no voice is heard: they bring neither greetings to him nor tidings of themselves.

53-55. Sęcga ... cwidegiedda = But these warrior comrades [= those seen in vision] swim away again [= fade away]; the spirit of these fleeting ones doesn’t bring many familiar words; that is, he sees the old familiar faces in dreams and visions, but no voice is heard: they bring him neither greetings nor news of themselves.

65. Wita sceal geþyldig. Either bēon (wesan) is here to be understood after sceal, or sceal alone means ought to be. Neither construction is to be found in Alfredian prose, though the omission of a verb of motion after sculan is common in all periods of Old English. See note on nō ... meahte, p. 140.

65. One must be patient. Either to be (to exist) is to be understood after must, or must alone means should be. Neither construction is found in Alfredian prose, though the omission of a verb of motion after must is common in all periods of Old English. See note on not ... could, p. 140.

75. swā nū. “The Old English lyrical feeling,” says Ten Brink, citing the lines that immediately follow swā nū, “is fond of the image of physical destruction”; but I do not think these lines have a merely figurative import. The reference is to a period of real devastation, antedating the Danish incursions. “We might fairly find such a time in that parenthesis of bad government and of national tumult which filled the years between the death of Aldfrith in 705 and the renewed peace of Northumbria under Ceolwulf in the years that followed 729.” (Brooke, Early Eng. Lit., p. 355.)

75. so now. “The Old English lyrical feeling,” says Ten Brink, citing the lines that immediately follow so now, “is fond of the image of physical destruction”; but I don’t think these lines are just metaphorical. The reference is to a time of real devastation, before the Danish invasions. “We might fairly find such a time in that period of poor leadership and national chaos that filled the years between the death of Aldfrith in 705 and the renewed peace of Northumbria under Ceolwulf in the years that followed 729.” (Brooke, Early Eng. Lit., p. 355.)

93. cwōm ... gesetu. Ettmüller reads cwōmon; but see p. 107, note on wæs ... þā īgland. The occurrence of hwǣr cwōm three times in the preceding line tends also to hold cwōm in the singular when its plural subject follows. Note the influence of a somewhat similar structural parallelism in seas hides of these lines (Winter’s Tale, IV, IV, 500-502):

93. came ... gatherings. Ettmüller reads came; but see p. 107, note on was ... the islands. The occurrence of where came three times in the preceding line also tends to keep came in the singular when its plural subject follows. Note the influence of a somewhat similar structural parallelism in seas hides of these lines (Winter’s Tale, IV, IV, 500-502):

“Not for ... all the sun sees or

“Not for ... all the sun sees or

The close earth wombs or the profound seas hides

The nearby earth wombs or the deep seas hides

In unknown fathoms, will I break my oath.”

In unknown depths, I will break my promise.”

111. gesæt ... rūne, sat apart to himself in silent meditation.

111. gesæt ... rūne, sat alone in quiet reflection.

114. eorl ... gefręmman. Supply sceal after eorl.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ eorl ... gefręmman. Supply must after eorl.

1 = Metodes.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = Methods.

2 = earfoþa.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = Earth.

3 = sweotole.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = sweotole.

4 = medu-.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = medu-.

5 = ferhð.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = ferhð.

6 = cearu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = clarity.

7 = See bewāwan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = See bewāwan.

8 = See behrēosan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = See behrēosan.

9 = wīnsalu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = wine sale.

10 = See bedrēosan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = See break down.

11 = fugol.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = bird.

12 = ferhðe.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = ferhðe.

13 = magu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = magu.

14 = -hliðu.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = -unwind.

155

I. GLOSSARY.

----

----

OLD ENGLISH—MODERN ENGLISH.

[The order of words is strictly alphabetical, except that ð follows t. The combination æ follows ad.

[The order of words is strictly alphabetical, except that ð comes after t. The combination æ comes after ad.

Gender is indicated by the abbreviations, m. (= masculine), f. (= feminine), n. (= neuter). The usual abbreviations are employed for the cases, nom., gen., dat., acc., and instr. Other abbreviations are sing. (= singular), pl. (= plural), ind. (= indicative mood), sub. (= subjunctive mood), pres. (= present tense), pret. (= preterit tense), prep. (= preposition), adj. (= adjective), adv. (= adverb), part. (= participle), conj. (= conjunction), pron. (= pronoun), intrans. (= intransitive), trans. (= transitive).

Gender is indicated by the abbreviations m. (= masculine), f. (= feminine), n. (= neuter). The usual abbreviations are used for the cases: nom. (= nominative), gen. (= genitive), dat. (= dative), acc. (= accusative), and instr. (= instrumental). Other abbreviations include sing. (= singular), pl. (= plural), ind. (= indicative mood), sub. (= subjunctive mood), pres. (= present tense), pret. (= preterite tense), prep. (= preposition), adj. (= adjective), adv. (= adverb), part. (= participle), conj. (= conjunction), pron. (= pronoun), intrans. (= intransitive), and trans. (= transitive).

Figures not preceded by § refer to page and line of the texts.

Figures not preceded by § refer to the page and line of the texts.

A.

ā, ever, always, aye.

ah, forever, always, yes.

abbudisse, f., abbess [Lat. abbatissa].

abbudisse, f., abbess [Lat. abbatissa].

ābēodan (§ 109), bid, offer;

ābēodan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bid, offer;

him hǣl ābēad 138, 9 = bade him hail, wished him health.

him hǣl ābēad 138, 9 = wished him well, hoped he was healthy.

ābrecan (§ 120, Note 2), break down, destroy.

ābrecan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), break, destroy.

ābūgan (§ 109, Note 1), give way, start [bow away].

ābūgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), yield, begin [bow away].

ac, conj., but.

ac, conj., but.

ācweðan (§ 115), say, speak.

ācweðan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), say, speak.

ācȳðan (§ 126), reveal, proclaim [cūð].

ācȳðan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), reveal, announce [cūð].

ād, m., funeral pile.

ād, m., cremation pyre.

adesa, m., adze, hatchet.

adesa, m., adze, hatchet.

ǣ (ǣw), f., law.

ǣ (ǣw), f., law.

155b

ǣdre (ēdre), f., stream, canal, vein;

stream, canal, vein

blōd ēdrum dranc 139, 4 = drank blood in streams (instr.).

blōd ēdrum dranc 139, 4 = drank blood in streams (instr.).

ǣfæstnis, f., piety.

ǣfæstnis, f., faith.

ǣfen-ræst, f., evening rest.

Evening rest.

ǣfen-sprǣc, f., evening speech.

Evening chat.

ǣfęst (ǣwfęst), law-abiding, pious.

æfest (æwfest), law-abiding, devout.

ǣfęstnis, see ǣfæstnis.

ǣfęstnis, see ǣfæstnis.

ǣfre, ever, always.

ever, always

ǣfter, prep. (§ 94, (1)), after;

after

ǣfter ðǣm, after that, thereafter;

After that, thereafter

æfter ðǣm ðe, conj., after.

after, conj., after.

æfter, adv., after, afterwards.

after, adv., after, afterwards.

ǣghwā (§ 77, Note), each, every.

everyone (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), each, every.

ǣghwilc (§ 77, Note), each, any.

each (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), any.

ǣglǣca, see āglǣca.

ǣglǣca, see āglǣca.

156

ǣgðer (ǣghwæðer, āðer) (§ 77, Note), each, either;

ǣgðer (ǣghwæðer, āðer) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), each, either;

ǣgðer ... ōðer ... ōðer, either ... or ... or;

either ... or ... or, either ... or ... or;

ǣgðer ge ... ge (§ 95, (2)), both ... and;

both... and (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), both... and;

ǣgðer ge ... ge ... ge, both ... and ... and.

both ... and ... and, both ... and ... and.

ǣht, f., property, possession [āgan].

ǣht, f., property, possession [āgan].

ǣlc (§ 77), each.

each (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

ælde (ielde) (§ 47), m. pl., men; gen. pl., ælda.

ælde (ielde) (§ 47), m. pl., men; gen. pl., ælda.

ælmihtig, almighty.

almighty, almighty.

ǣmetta, m., leisure [empti-ness].

ǣmetta, m., leisure [emptiness].

ǣnig (§ 77), any;

any (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

ǣnige ðinga 141, 22 = for anything.

Anything __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = for anything.

(See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.)

ǣr, adv., before, formerly, sooner;

before

nō þȳ ǣr 140, 1 = none the sooner;

not any faster __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = not any faster;

ǣror, comparative, before, formerly;

earlier, comparative, before, formerly;

ǣrest, superlative, first.

ǣrest, superlative, first.

ǣr, conj. (§ 105, 2), ere, before = ǣr ðǣm ðe.

ær, conj. (§ 105, 2), ere, before = ær ðām ðe.

ǣr, prep, with dat., before (time);

ǣr, prep, with dat., before;

ǣr ðǣm ðe, conj. (§ 105, 2), before.

Before, conj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, 2), before.

ærcebisceop, m., archbishop [Lat. archiepiscopus].

archbishop, m., archbishop [Lat. archiepiscopus].

ǣrendgewrit, n., message, letter.

ǣrendgewrit, n., message, letter.

ǣrendwreca (-raca), m., messenger.

ǣrendwreca (-raca), m., messenger.

ǣrest, adj. (§ 96, (4)), first.

earliest, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), first.

ærnan (§ 127), ride, gallop [iernan].

ærnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ride, gallop [iernan].

ǣrra, adj. (§ 96, (4)), former.

ǣrra, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), earlier.

ǣrwela, m., ancient wealth.

ǣrwela, m., ancient riches.

æsc, m., ash, spear; gen. pl., asca.

æsc, m., ash tree, spear; gen. pl., asca.

Æscesdūn, f., Ashdown (in Berkshire).

Æscesdūn, f., Ashdown (Berkshire).

æstel, m., book-mark [Lat. hastula].

æstel, m., bookmark [Lat. hastula].

156b

æt (§ 94, (1)), at, in;

at

with leornian, to learn, geðicgan, to receive, and other verbs of similar import,

with leornian, to learn, geðicgan, to receive, and other verbs with similar meanings,

æt = from: 115, 18; 137, 8, etc.

from: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, etc.

ætberan (§ 114), bear to, hand.

ætberan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), carry, support.

ætgæd(e)re, adv., together.

together.

ætsteppan (§ 116), step up, advance; pret. sing., ætstōp.

ætsteppan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), step up, advance; past tense, ætstōp.

æðele, noble, excellent.

noble, excellent.

æðeling, m., a noble, prince.

æðeling, m., a noble, prince.

Æðelwulfing, m., son of Ethelwulf.

Æðelwulfing, m., son of Ethelwulf.

Æðered, m., Ethelred.

Ethelred, m., Ethelred.

āfeallan (§ 117), fall.

āfeallan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fall.

āfierran (§ 127), remove [feor].

āfierran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), delete [feor].

āgan (§ 136), to own, possess.

āgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to own, possess.

āgen, adj.-part., own; dat. sing., āgnum [āgan].

āgen, adj.-part., own; dat. sing., āgnum [āgan].

āgiefan (§ 115), give back.

āgiefan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), give back.

āglǣca (ǣglǣca), m., monster, champion.

āglǣca (ǣglǣca), m., monster, warrior.

āhton, see āgan.

āhton, see āgan.

ālǣtan (§ 117), let go, leave.

ālǣtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), let go, release.

aldor, see ealdor.

leader, see ancestor.

ālęcgan (§ 125, Note), lay down [licgan]; past part., ālēd.

ālęcgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), lie down [licgan]; past part., ālēd.

Ālīesend, m., Redeemer [ālīesan = release, ransom].

Ālīesend, m., Redeemer [ālīesan = release, ransom].

ālimpan (§ 110), befall, occur.

ālimpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), happen.

ālȳfan (§ 126), entrust, permit.

ālȳfan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), trust, allow.

ambor, m., measure; gen. pl., ambra (§ 27, (4)).

ambor, m., measure; gen. pl., ambra (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ambyre, favorable.

ambyre, good vibe.

ān (§ 89), one;

ān (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), one;

āna, alone, only;

āna, alone, just;

ānra gehwylcum 141, 15 = to each one.

to each __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = to each one.

(See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.)

anda, m., zeal, injury, indignation;

anda, m., passion, harm, anger;

hæleðum on andan 153, 6 = harmful to men.

harmful to men __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = harmful to men.

andēfn, f., proportion, amount.

andēfn, f., ratio, quantity.

andgiet (-git), n., sense, meaning.

andgiet (-git), n., sense, meaning.

157

andgitfullīce, intelligibly;

and honestly, clearly;

-gitfullīcost, superlative.

-gitfullīcost, most expensive.

andswaru, f., answer.

andswaru, f., response.

andwyrdan (§ 127), to answer; pret., andwyrde.

andwyrdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to answer; past tense, andwyrde.

Angel, n., Anglen (in Denmark); dat. sing., Angle (§ 27 (4)).

Angel, n., Anglen (in Denmark); dat. sing., Angle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Angelcynn, n., English kin, English people, England.

Angelcynn, n., English kin, English people, England.

ānhaga (-hoga), m., a solitary, wanderer [ān + hogian, to meditate].

ānhaga (-hoga), m., a solitary, wanderer [ān + hogian, to meditate].

ānlīpig, single, individual.

unplugged, solo, individual.

ānunga (§ 93, (2)), once for all [ān].

ānunga (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), once and for all [ān].

apostol, m., apostle [Gr. ἀπόστολος].

apostol, m., apostle [Gr. ἀπόστολος].

ār, f., honor, property, favor;

ār, f., honor, assets, favor;

āre gebīdeð 148, 3 = waits for divine favor (gen.).

are gebīdeð __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = waits for divine favor (gen.).

ārǣd, adj., inexorable.

ārǣd, adj., unstoppable.

ārǣdan (§ 126), read.

ārǣdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), read.

āręcc(e)an (§ 128), translate, expound.

āręcc(e)an (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), translate, explain.

ārfæstnis, f., virtue.

ārfæstnis, f., virtue.

ārīsan (§ 102), arise.

ārīsan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wake up.

asca, see aesc.

asca, see aesc.

āsęcgan (§ 132), say, relate.

ascribe (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), say, relate.

āsęttan (§ 127), set, place.

assert (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), set, place.

āsingan (§ 110), sing.

āsingan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sing.

āspęndan (§ 127), spend, expend.

āspęndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), spend, expend.

āstīgan (§ 102), ascend, arise.

āstīgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), rise, climb.

āstǫndan (§ 116), stand up.

āstǫndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), get up.

ātēah, see ātēon.

ātēah, see ātēon.

atelīc, horrible, dire.

atelier, awful, terrible.

ātēon (§ 118), draw, draw away, take (as a journey).

ātēon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sketch, pull away, take (as a journey).

atol, horrible, dire.

atol, terrible, urgent.

āttor, n., poison.

āttor, n., toxin.

ātuge, see ātēon.

atuge, see ateon.

āð, m., oath.

āð, m., oath.

āðer, see ǣgðer.

Either, see either.

157b

āwęccan (§ 128), awake, arouse; pret. sing., āweahte, āwęhte.

awaken (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wake, stir; past tense, awoke, waked.

aweg, away.

aweg, away.

āwęndan (§ 127), turn, translate.

āwęndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), rotate, convert.

āwrītan (§ 102), write, compose.

āwrītan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), written, composed.

āwyrcan (§ 128), work, do, perform.

āwyrcan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), work, do, perform.

B.

Bāchsęcg, m., Bagsac.

Bāchsęcg, m., Bagsac.

bæcbord, n., larboard, left side of a ship.

bæcbord, n., port, left side of a ship.

bǣl, n., funeral fire, funeral pile.

bǣl, n., cremation fire, cremation pyre.

bān, n., bone.

bān, n., bone.

bān-fāg, adorned with bones or antlers.

bān-fāg, decorated with bones or antlers.

bān-loca, m., flesh [bone-locker].

bān-loca, m., meat [bone-locker].

Basengas, m. pl., Basing (in Hantshire).

Basengas, m. pl., Basing (in Hampshire).

be () (§ 94, (1)), by, about, concerning, near, along, according to;

be () (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), by, about, concerning, near, along, according to;

be norðan þǣm wēstenne (§ 94, (4)), north of the waste (desert);

north of the wasteland (§ 94, (4)), north of the waste (desert);

be fullan, fully, perfectly.

be complete, totally, flawlessly.

bēag, see būgan.

bēag, see būgan.

bēag-hroden, ring-adorned.

ringed, decorated with rings.

bēah (bēag), m., ring, bracelet, collar [būgan].

bēah (bēag), m., ring, bracelet, collar [būgan].

bealo-nīð, m., dire hatred, poison, venom.

bealo-nīð, m., dire hatred, poison, venom.

bearn, n., child, son [bairn].

bairn, n., child, son.

bebēodan (§ 109), command, bid, entrust (with dat.).

bebēodan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), command, order, trust (with dat.).

bebīo-, see bebēo-.

bebīo-, see bebēo-.

bebohte, see bebycgan.

bebohte, see bebycgan.

bebycgan (§ 128), sell.

become (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sell.

bēc, see bōc.

bēc, see bōc.

becuman (§ 114), come, arrive, befall.

become (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), come, arrive, befall.

bedǣlan (§ 126), separate, deprive.

distribute (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), separate, deprive.

158

bedrēosan (§ 109), deprive; past part. pl., bedrorene (bidrorene) [dross, dreary].

bedrēosan (§ 109), deprive; past part. pl., bedrorene (bidrorene) [dross, dreary].

befǣstan (§ 127), fasten, implant.

befǣstan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fasten, implant.

befēolan (§ 110), apply one’s self;

befēolan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), apply yourself;

ðāra ðe ðā spēda hæbben ðǣt hīe ðǣm befēolan mægen 119, 20 = of those who have the means by which they may apply themselves to it.

those who have the means by which they can apply themselves to it 119, 20 = of those who have the means by which they may apply themselves to it.

beforan, prep. with dat., before.

before, prep. with dat., before.

bēgen (declined like twēgen, § 89), both.

bēgen (declined like twēgen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), both.

begeondan (begiondan), prep. with dat., beyond.

begeondan (begiondan), prep. with dat., beyond.

begietan (§ 115), get, obtain, find.

find (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), get, obtain.

beginnan (§ 110), begin.

start (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), begin.

beheonan (behionan), prep. with dat., on this side of.

beheonan (behionan), prep. with dat., on this side of.

behreōsan (§ 109), fall upon, cover; past part. pl., behrorene (bihrorene).

behreōsan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fall upon, cover; past part. pl., behrorene (bihrorene).

belimpan (§ 110), pertain, belong.

belimpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), relate, belong.

beniman (§ 114), take, derive.

beniman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grab, get.

bęnn, f., wound [bana = murderer].

bęnn, f., injury [bana = killer].

bēon (bīon) (§ 134), be, consist.

be (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), exist, consist.

beorh (beorg, biorh), m., mound [barrow].

mound

beorht, bright, glorious.

bright, bright, glorious.

Beormas, m. pl., Permians.

Beormas, m. pl., Permians.

beorn, m., man, hero, chief.

beorn, m., man, hero, leader.

bēor-þęgu, f., beer-drinking [þicgan = receive].

bēor-þęgu, f., beer-drinking [þicgan = receive].

bēot, n., boast.

bēot, n., brag.

beran (§ 114), bear.

bear (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bear.

berēafian (§ 130), bereave;

bereave (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to lose someone;

since berēafod 145, 22 = bereft of treasure.

since bereafod __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = deprived of treasure.

beren, adj., of a bear, bear.

bear, adj., of a bear, bear.

berstan (§ 110), burst, crack.

break (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), burst, crack.

158b

besmiðian (§ 130), make hard (as at the forge of a smith).

besmiðian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), forge (like at a blacksmith's shop).

bęt, see wel (§ 97, (2)).

bęt, check wel (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

bētan (§ 126), make good, requite; past part. pl., gebētte.

bētan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), make amends, repay; past part. pl., gebētte.

bętera (bętra), see gōd (§ 96, (3)).

bętera (bętra), see good (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

betlīc, excellent.

lit, awesome.

bętsta, see gōd (§ 96, (3)).

best, see good (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

betuh (betux) (§ 94, (1)), between.

betuh (betux) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), between.

betwēonan (§ 94, (1)), between.

between (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), between.

betȳnan (§ 126), close, end [tūn = enclosure].

betȳnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), close, end [tūn = enclosure].

bewāwan (§ 117), blow upon; past part. pl., bewāune (biwāune, bewāwene).

bewāwan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), blow upon; past participle plural, bewāune (biwāune, bewāwene).

bewrēon (§ 118, 1), enwrap; pret. 3d sing., bewrāh (biwrāh).

bewrēon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, 1), enwrap; past tense 3rd person singular, bewrāh (biwrāh).

, see be.

, see be.

bi-, see be-.

bi-, see be-.

bīdan (§ 102), bide, await, expect, endure (with gen.).

wait (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bide, await, expect, endure (with gen.).

biddan (§ 115, Note 2), bid, pray, request (§ 65, Note 3);

ask (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bid, please, request (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__);

bæd hine blīðne 136, 7 = bade him be blithe.

bæd hine blīðne 136, 7 = asked him to be cheerful.

bindan (§ 110), bind.

bind (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bind.

bīo, see bēo (imperative sing.).

bīo, see bēo (command form).

bisceop (biscep), m., bishop [Lat. episcopus].

bishop, m., bishop [Lat. episcopus].

bisceop-stōl, m., episcopal seat, bishopric.

bishop's seat, m., episcopal seat, bishopric.

bisigu, f., business, occupation; dat. pl., bisgum.

bisigu, f., business, occupation; dat. pl., bisgum.

bītan (§ 102), bite, cut.

bite (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bite, cut.

biwrāh, see bewrēon.

biwrāh, see bewrēon.

blǣd, m., glory, prosperity [blāwan = blow, inflate].

blǣd, m., glory, prosperity [blāwan = blow, inflate].

Blēcinga-ēg, f., Blekingen.

Blēcinga-ēg, f., Blekingen.

bliss, f., bliss [blīðe].

bliss, f., bliss [bliss].

blīðe, blithe, happy.

blithe, blithe, happy.

159

blōd, n., blood.

blood, n., blood.

bōc (§ 68, (1), Note 1), f., book.

bōc (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), f., book.

bōcere, m., scribe [bōc].

bōcere, m., writer [bōc].

bǫna (bana), m., murderer [bane].

bǫna (bana), m., killer [bane].

bōt, f., boot, remedy, help, compensation.

bōt, f., boot, remedy, help, compensation.

brād (§ 96, (1)), broad.

brād (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), widespread.

brǣdan (§ 126), extend, spread [brād].

brǣdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), extend, spread [brād].

brǣdra, see brād.

brǣdra, see brād.

brægd, see bregdan.

brægd, see bregdan.

brēac, see brūcan.

brēac, see brūcan.

breahtm, m., noise, revelry;

breamth, m., noise, celebration;

burgwara breahtma lēase 152, 10 = bereft of the revelries of citizens.

burgwara breahtma lēase 152, 10 = deprived of the celebrations of the people.

bregdan (§ 110), brandish, draw [braid]; pret. ind. 3d sing., brægd.

bregdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), show off, pull [braid]; past tense 3rd sing., brægd.

brenting, m., high ship.

brenting, m., luxury yacht.

brēost, n., breast (the pl. has the same meaning as the sing.).

brēost, n., breast (the plural means the same as the singular).

brēost-cofa, m., breast-chamber, heart, mind.

brēost-cofa, m., chest, heart, mind.

brēost-gehygd, n., breast-thought, thought of the heart, emotion.

brēost-gehygd, n., heartfelt thought, emotion.

brim, n., sea, ocean.

brim, n., sea, ocean.

brimfugol, m., sea-fowl.

brimfugol, m., seabird.

bringan (§ 128), bring.

bring (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bring.

brōhte, brōhton, see bringan.

brōhte, brōhton, see bring.

brōðor (brōður) (§ 68, (2)), m., brother.

brōðor (brōður) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m., brother.

brūcan (§ 109, Note 1), use, enjoy (§ 62, Note 1; but Alfred frequently employs the acc. with brūcan).

brūcan (§ 109, Note 1), use, enjoy (§ 62, Note 1; but Alfred often uses the accusative with brūcan).

brycg, f., bridge.

bridge, f., bridge.

brȳcð, see brūcan.

brȳcð, see brūcan.

brytta, m., distributor, dispenser [brēotan = break in pieces].

brytta, m., distributor, dispensing agent [brēotan = break apart].

159b

būan (§ 126, Note 2), dwell, cultivate [bower].

home (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), live, grow [bower].

būde, see būan.

būde, see būan.

bufan, prep. with dat. and acc., above.

bufan, prep. with dat. and acc., above.

būgan (§ 109, Note 1), bow, bend, turn.

būgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bow, bend, turn.

bune, f., cup.

bune, f., cup.

burg (burh) (§ 68, (1), Note), f., city, borough; dat. sing., byrig.

burg (burh) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), f., city, borough; dat. sing., byrig.

Burgenda, m. gen. pl., of the Burgundians;

Burgenda, m. gen. pl., of the Burgundians;

Burgenda land, Bornholm.

Burgenda land, Bornholm.

burgware (§ 47), m. pl., burghers, citizens.

burgware (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. pl., burghers, citizens.

burh, see burg.

burh, see fortress.

būtan (būton), prep. (§ 94, (1)), without, except, except for, but.

but, prep. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), without, except, except for, but.

būtan (būton), conj., except that, unless.

būtan (būton), conj., except that, unless.

būtū, both (= bothtwo.

būtū, both (= bothtwo.

The word is compounded of the combined neuters of bēgen and twēgen, but is m. and f. as well as n.).

The word is made up of the combined neuter forms of bēgen and twēgen, but it can also be masculine and feminine as well as neuter.

bȳn (§ 126, Note 2), cultivated.

bȳn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grown.

byrde, adj., of high rank, aristocratic.

noble

byrig, see burg.

byrig, see town.

byrne, f., byrnie, corselet, coat of mail.

byrne, f., byrnie, corselet, mail coat.

byrnwiga, m., byrnie-warrior, mailed soldier.

byrnwiga, m., chainmail warrior, armored soldier.

byrð, see beran.

burden, see bear.

C.

canōn, m., sacred canon, Bible [Lat. canon, Gr. κανών].

canon, m., sacred canon, Bible [Lat. canon, Gr. κανών].

cearu (cearo), f., care.

cearu (cearo), f., worry.

ceaster-būend, m., castle-dweller.

castle dweller, m., castle dweller.

cēne, keen, bold, brave.

dinner, eager, confident, courageous.

160

cēosan (§ 109), choose, accept, encounter.

choose (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), select, accept, encounter.

cild, n., child.

child, n., child.

cirice, f., church; nom. pl., ciricean.

church, f.; nom. pl., churches.

cirr (cierr), m., turn, time, occasion [char, chore, ajar = on char, on the turn].

cirr (cierr), m., turn, time, occasion [char, chore, ajar = on char, on the turn].

cirran (§ 127), turn.

cirran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), switch.

clǣne, clean, pure.

clean, pure.

clǣne, adv., entirely [“clean out of the way,” Shaks.].

clǣne, adv., completely [“clean out of the way,” Shaks.].

clūdig, rocky [having boulders or masses like clouds].

clūdig, rocky [having boulders or masses like clouds].

clyppan (§ 127), embrace, accept [clip = clasp for letters, papers, etc.].

clyppan (§ 127), embrace, accept [clip = a fastener for letters, papers, etc.].

cnapa, m., boy [knave].

cnapa, m., kid [knave].

cnēo (cnēow), n., knee; acc. pl., cnēo.

knee, n.; acc. pl., knee.

cniht, m., knight, warrior.

knight, m., knight, warrior.

cnyssan (§ 125), beat.

cnyssan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), victory.

collenferð (-ferhð), proud-minded, fierce.

collenferð (-ferhð), proud, fierce.

costnung, f., temptation.

costnung, f., temptation.

Crēcas (Crēacas), m. pl., Greeks.

Crēcas (Crēacas), m. pl., Greeks.

cringan (§ 110), cringe, fall.

cringan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), cringe, fall.

Crīst, m., Christ.

Christ, m., Christ.

Crīsten, Christian; nom. pl. m., Crīstene, Crīstne.

Christian; nom. pl. m., Christians.

cuma, m., new-comer, stranger.

cuma, m., newbie, outsider.

cuman (§ 114), come. (See p. 138, Note on ll. 2-6.)

now (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), come. (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

cunnan (§ 137), know, can, understand.

can (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), know, can, understand.

cunnian (§ 130), make trial of, experience [cunnan].

cunnian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), try out, experience [cunnan].

cure, see cēosan.

cure, see choose.

cūð, well-known, familiar [past part. of cunnan: cf. uncouth].

cūð, well-known, familiar

cūðe, cūðen, cūðon, see cunnan.

cūðe, cūðen, cūðon, see cunnan.

cwǣden, cwǣdon, see cweðan.

cwǣden, cwǣdon, see cweðan.

160b

cwalu, f., death, murder [cwelan].

cwalu, f., death, murder [cwelan].

cwealm-cuma, m., murderous comer.

cwealm-cuma, m., killer arrival.

cwelan (§ 114), die [to quail].

cwelan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), die [to fear].

cwēn, f., queen.

cwēn, f., queen.

Cwēnas, m. pl., a Finnish tribe.

Cwēnas, m. pl., a Finnish tribe.

cweðan (§ 115), say, speak [quoth, bequeath].

say (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), say, speak [quoth, bequeath].

cwic, living, alive [quicksilver; the quick and the dead].

cwic, living, alive [quicksilver; the quick and the dead].

cwidegiedd, n., word, utterance [cweðan and gieddian, both meaning to speak].

cwidegiedd, n., word, utterance [cweðan and gieddian, both meaning to speak].

cwīðan (§ 126), bewail (trans.).

cwīðan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grieve (trans.).

cwōm, see cuman.

cwōm, see cuman.

cyle (ciele), m., cold [chill];

cycle (ciele), m., chill;

cyle gewyrcan 110, 7 = produce cold, freeze.

cycle produce __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = produce cold, freeze.

cyme, m., coming [cuman].

cyme, m., upcoming [cuman].

cyn(n), n., kin, race.

cyn(n), n., family, group.

cyn(n), adj. (used only in pl.), fitting things, etiquette, proprieties, courtesies;

cyn(n), adj. (used only in pl.), fitting things, etiquette, social norms, courtesies;

cynna gemyndig 136, 3 = mindful of courtesies.

cynna gemyndig __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = mindful of courtesies.

cynerīce, n., kingdom.

cynerīce, n., kingdom.

cyning, m., king.

cyning, m., king.

cyssan (§ 125), kiss.

cyssan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), kiss.

cyst, f., the choice, the pick, the best [cēosan].

cyst, f., the choice, the pick, the best [choose].

cȳðan (§ 126), make known, display, [cūð];

cȳðan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), reveal, show, [cūð];

2d sing. imperative, cȳð.

2nd sing. imperative, cȳð.

D.

dǣd, f., deed.

dǣd, f., act.

dæg, m., day.

day, m., day.

dæg-hwīl, f., day-while, day;

dæg-hwīl, f., day-while, day;

hē dæg-hwīla gedrogen hæfde eorðan wynne 145, 2 = he had spent his days of earth’s joy.

he had spent his days of earth’s joy 145, 2 = he had spent his days of earth’s joy.

161

dæg-rīm, n., number of days [day-rime];

dæg-rīm, n., days count [day-rime];

dōgera daeg-rīm 143, 7 = the number of his days.

dōgera daeg-rīm 143, 7 = the number of his days.

dæl, n., dale.

dell, n., valley.

dǣl, m., part, deal, division.

part, m., deal, division.

dēad, dead.

dead, dead.

dēað, m., death.

death, m., death.

dēman (§ 126), deem, judge.

dēman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), consider, evaluate.

Dęnamearc, see Dęnemearc.

Dęnamearc, check Dęnemearc.

Dęne (§ 47), m. pl., Danes.

Dęne (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. pl., Danes.

Dęnemearc (Dęnemearce), f., Denmark; dat. sing., Dęnemearce (strong), Dęnemearcan (weak).

Dęnemearc (Dęnemearce), f., Denmark; dat. sing., Dęnemearce (strong), Dęnemearcan (weak).

Dęnisc, Danish;

Danish, Danish;

ðā Dęniscan, the Danes.

the Danes.

dēofol, m., n., devil; gen. sing., dēofles (§ 27, (4)).

dēofol, m., devil; gen. sing., dēofles (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

dēope, deeply, profoundly [dēop].

deep, deeply, profoundly [deep].

dēor, n., wild animal [deer].

dēor, n., wild animal [deer].

deorc, dark, gloomy.

dark, gloomy.

dōgor, n., day; gen. pl., dōgora, dōgera, dōgra.

dōgor, n., day; gen. pl., dōgora, dōgera, dōgra.

dōgor-gerīm, n., number of days, lifetime.

dōgor-gerīm, n., days, lifespan.

dōm, m., doom, judgment, glory.

dōm, m., doom, judgment, glory.

dōmgeorn, adj., eager for glory [doom-yearning].

dōmgeorn, adj., glory-seeking [doom-yearning].

dōn (§ 135), do, cause, place, promote, remove.

do (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), do, cause, place, promote, remove.

dorste, dorston, see durran.

doorstep, doorstep, see durran.

drēam, m., joy, mirth [dream].

dream, n., joy, fun [dream].

drēogan (§ 109), endure, enjoy, spend [Scotch dree].

drēogan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), endure, enjoy, spend [Scotch dree].

drēorig, dreary, sad.

bloody, gloomy, unhappy.

drēorighlēor, adj., with sad face [hlēor = cheek, face, leer].

drēorighlēor, adj., sorrowful face [hlēor = cheek, face, leer].

drēosan (§ 109), fall, perish [dross].

drēosan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fall, die [dross].

drīfan (§ 102), drive.

drive (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__),

drihten, see dryhten.

drihten, see dryhten.

drincan (§ 110), drink.

drink (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), drink.

161b

drohtoð (-að), m., mode of living, occupation [drēogan].

drohtoð (-að), m., way of life, career [drēogan].

drugon, see drēogan.

drugon, see drēogan.

dryhten (drihten), m., lord, Lord; dat. sing., dryhtne.

dryhten (drihten), m., lord, Lord; dat. sing., dryhtne.

dryht-sęle, m., lordly hall.

dryht-sęle, m., lord's hall.

duguð, f., warrior-band, host, retainers [doughtiness].

duguð, f., warrior group, troop, followers [doughtiness].

In duguð and geogoð, the higher (older) and lower (younger) ranks are represented, the distinction corresponding roughly to the mediæval distinction between knights and squires.

In duguð and geogoð, the higher (older) and lower (younger) ranks are represented, which roughly corresponds to the medieval distinction between knights and squires.

durran (§ 137), dare.

durran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), challenge.

duru, f., door.

duru, f., door.

dyde, see dōn.

dyde, see done.

dynnan (§ 125), resound [din].

dynnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), resound [noise].

dȳre (dīere, dēore, dīore), dear, costly.

dear, costly

E.

ēa, f., river; gen. sing., ēas; dat. and acc. sing., ēa.

ēa, f., river; gen. sing., ēas; dat. and acc. sing., ēa.

ēac, also, likewise [a nickname = an eek-name. See § 65, Note 2];

also, too, similarly [a nickname = an eek-name. See § 65, Note 2];

ēac swilce (swelce) 112, 3 = also.

also __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ =

ēaca, m., addition [ēac];

addition

tō ēacan = in addition to (§ 94, (4)).

tō ēacan = plus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ēage, n., eye.

eye

eahta, eight.

8, eight.

ēalā, oh! alas!

Oh no!

ealað, see ealu.

ealað, see ealu.

eald (§ 96, (2)), old.

ancient (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), old.

ealdor (aldor), n., life;

life

gif ðū ðæt ęllenweorc aldre gedīgest 138, 17 = if thou survivest that feat with thy life (instr.).

if you survive that feat with your life 138, 17 = if you survive that feat with your life (instr.).

ealdor-dæg (aldor-, ealder-), m., day of life.

ealdor-dæg (aldor-, ealder-), m., day of life.

162

ealdor-gedāl (aldor-), n., death [life-deal].

ealdor-gedāl (aldor-), n., death [life-deal].

ealdormǫn, m., alderman, chief, magistrate.

ealdormǫn, m., alderman, chief, official.

ealgian, (§ 130), protect, defend.

Belgian, (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), protect, defend.

eall (eal), all;

eall (eal), all;

ealne weg, all the way (§ 98, (1));

ealne weg, all the way (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

ealneg (< ealne weg), always;

ealneg (always);

ealles (§ 98, (3)), adv., altogether, entirely.

ealles (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), adv., totally, completely.

Eall (eal) is frequently used with partitive gen. = all of: 143, 19; 145, 3.

All is often used with the partitive genitive = all of: 143, 19; 145, 3.

ealu (ealo) (§ 68), n., ale; gen. sing., ealað.

ealu (ealo) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n., ale; gen. sing., ealað.

ealu-scerwen, f., mortal panic [ale-spilling].

ealu-scerwen, f., mortal panic [ale overflow].

eard, m., country, home [eorðe].

earth, n., country, home [eorðe].

eardgeard, m. earth [earth-yard].

eardgeard, m. earth [earth yard].

eardian (§ 130), dwell [eard].

guardian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), live [earth].

eardstapa, m., wanderer [earth-stepper].

eardstapa, m., wanderer [earth traveler].

ēare, n., ear.

ear, n., ear.

earfoð (earfeð), n. hardship, toil; gen. pl., earfeða.

earfoð (earfeð), n. struggle, effort; gen. pl., earfeða.

earfoðlīc, adj., full of hardship, arduous.

difficult, adj., full of hardship, arduous.

earm, m., arm.

earm, m., arm.

earm, adj., poor, wretched.

earm, adj., poor, wretched.

earmcearig, wretched, miserable.

earmcearig, awful, unhappy.

earmlīc, wretched, miserable.

earmlīc, wretched, miserable.

earnung, f., merit [earning].

earning, f., merit [earning].

ēast, east.

east

ēastan (§ 93, (5)), from the east.

ēastan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), from the east.

Ēast-Dęne (§ 47), East-Danes.

East-Dane (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), East-Danes.

ēasteweard, eastward.

eastward

ēastrihte (ēastryhte) (§ 93, (6)), eastward.

ēastrihte (ēastryhte) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), east.

Ēastron, pl., Easter.

Easter, pl., Easter.

ēaðe, easily.

easy

ēaðmōdlīce, humbly.

humbly

eaxl, f., shoulder [axle].

eaxl, f., shoulder [axle].

Ebrēisc, adj., Hebrew.

Ebrēisc, adj., Hebrew.

162b

ēce, eternal, everlasting.

edge, eternal, everlasting.

ęcg, f., sword [edge].

ęcg, f., sword [blade].

edor, m., enclosure, dwelling; nom. pl., ederas.

edor, m., housing, residence; nom. pl., ederas.

ēdrum, see ǣdre.

ēdrum, see ǣdre.

efne, adv., just, only [evenly].

efne, adv., just, only [evenly].

eft, adv., again, afterwards [aft].

eft, adv., again, later [aft].

ęgesa, m., fear, terror [awe].

ėgesa, m., fear, terror [awe].

ęllen, n., strength, courage;

ęllen, n., strength, bravery;

mid ęlne = boldly;

mid ęlne = boldly;

on ęlne 147, 17 = mightily, suddenly, or in their (earls’) strength (prime).

on ęlne __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = mightily, suddenly, or in their (earls’) strength (prime).

ęllen-mǣrðu, f. fame for strength, feat of strength.

ęllen-mǣrðu, f. fame for strength, demonstration of strength.

ęllen-weorc, n., feat of strength.

ellen-work, n., feat of strength.

ęllenwōdnis, f., zeal, fervor.

ęllenwōdnis, f., enthusiasm, passion.

ęllor-gāst, m., inhuman monster [alien ghost].

ęllor-gāst, m., inhuman monster [alien ghost].

ęln, f., ell [el-bow].

ęln, f., ell [el-bow].

ęlne, see ęllen.

elne, look ellen.

ęlra, adj. comparative, another [*ęle cognate with Lat. alius];

ęlra, adj. comparative, another [*ęle related to Lat. alius];

on ęlran męn 139, 14 = in another man.

on other men __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = in another person.

emnlong (-lang), equally long;

emnlong (-lang), the same length;

on emnlange = along (§ 94, (4)).

on emnlange = along (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ęnde, m., end.

end, m., end.

ęndebyrdnes, f., order.

ęndebyrdnes, f., sequence.

ęnde-dæg, m., end-day, day of death.

end-day, m., day of death.

ęnde-lāf, f., last remnant [end-leaving].

ęnde-lāf, f., last remnant [end-leaving].

ęngel, m., angel [Lat. angelus].

ęngel, m., angel [Lat. angelus].

Ęnglafeld (§ 51), m., Englefield (in Berkshire).

Englefield (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m., Englefield (in Berkshire).

Ęngle (§ 47), m. pl., Angles.

Angle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. pl., Angles.

Ęnglisc, adj., English;

English, adj., English;

on Ęnglisc 117, 18 and 19 = in English, into English.

on Ęnglisc 117, 18 and 19 = in English, into English.

Ęngliscgereord, n., English language.

English, n., English language.

163

ęnt, m., giant.

Ent, m., giant.

ēode, see gān.

went, see go.

eodorcan (§ 130), ruminate.

eodorcan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), think deeply.

eorl, m., earl, warrior, chieftain.

eorl, m., earl, warrior, leader.

eorlīc, earl-like, noble.

earl-like, noble.

eorð-draca, m., dragon [earth-drake].

eorð-draca, m., dragon [earth-dragon].

eorðe, f., earth.

eorðe, f., earth.

eorð-ręced, n., earth-hall.

eorð-ręced, n., earth hall.

eorðscræf, n., earth-cave, grave.

eorðscræf, n., earth cave, grave.

eoten, m., giant, monster.

eoten, m., giant, monster.

ēow, see ðū.

you, see you.

Ēowland, n., Öland (an island in the Baltic Sea).

Ēowland, n., Öland (an island in the Baltic Sea).

ęrian (§ 125), plow [to ear].

ęrian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), plow [to cultivate].

Estland, n., land of the Estas (on the eastern coast of the Baltic Sea).

Estland, n., land of the Estas (on the eastern coast of the Baltic Sea).

Estmęre, m., Frische Haff.

Estmęre, m., Fresh Haff.

Estum, dat. pl., the Estas.

Estum, dat. pl., the Estas.

etan (§ 115), eat [ort].

etan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), eat [ort].

ęttan (§ 127), graze [etan].

ęttan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), graze [etan].

ēðel, m., territory, native land [allodial].

ēðel, m., territory, homeland [allodial].

ēðel-weard, m., guardian of his country.

ēðel-weard, m., country guardian.

F.

fæc, n., interval, space.

fæc, n., gap, area.

fæder (§ 68, (2)), m., father.

father (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m.

fægen, fain, glad, exultant.

happy, joyful, glad, elated.

fæger (fǣger), fair, beautiful.

fair, beautiful

fǣlsian (§ 130), cleanse.

fǣlsian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), purify.

fǣrlīce, suddenly [fǣr = fear].

fǣrlīce, suddenly [fǣr = fear].

fæst, fast, held fast.

fast, fast, held tight.

fæste, adv., fast, firmly.

fæste, adv., fast, securely.

fæstnung, f., security, safety.

fæstnung, f., security, safety.

fæt, n., vessel [wine-fat, vat].

fæt, n., wine vat.

fǣtels, m., vessel; acc. pl., fǣtels.

fǣtels, m., vessel; acc. pl., fǣtels.

fæðm, m., embrace, bosom [fathom = the space embraced by the extended arms].

fæðm, m., embrace, bosom [fathom = the space enveloped by the outstretched arms].

163b

fāg (fāh), hostile;

fāg (fāh), aggressive;

hē wæs fāg wið God 142, 18 = he was hostile to God.

he was hostile to God 142, 18 = he was hostile to God.

fāh (fāg), variegated, ornamented.

fāh (fāg), colorful, decorative.

Falster, Falster (island in the Baltic Sea).

Falster, Falster (island in the Baltic Sea).

fandian (§ 130), try, investigate [findan].

restaurant (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), try, explore [findan].

faran (§ 116), go [fare].

faran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), let's go [fare].

feallan (§ 117), fall, flow.

fall (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fall, flow.

fealu, fallow, pale, dark; nom. pl. m., fealwe.

fealu, fallow, pale, dark; nom. pl. m., fealwe.

fēawe (fēa, fēawa), pl., few.

few

fela (indeclinable), much, many (with gen.).

fela (indeclinable), a lot, many (with gen.).

feld (§ 51), m., field.

feld (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n., field.

fell (fel), n., fell, skin, hide.

fell (fel), n., skin, hide.

fēng, see fōn.

fēng, see fōn.

fęn-hlið, n., fen-slope.

fen-slope, n., fen-slope.

fęn-hop, n., fen-retreat.

fęn-hop, n., fen getaway.

feoh, n., cattle, property [fee]; gen. and dat. sing., fēos, fēo.

feoh, n., cattle, property [fee]; gen. and dat. sing., fēos, fēo.

feohgīfre, greedy of property, avaricious.

feohgīfre, property greedy, greedy.

feohtan (§ 110), fight.

feohtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), battle.

fēol, see feallan.

fēol, see feallan.

fēond (§ 68, (3)), m., enemy, fiend.

fēond (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m., enemy, fiend.

fēond-grāp, f., fiend-grip.

fiend-grip, f., fiend-grip.

feor (§ 96, (4)), adj., far, far from (with dat.).

feor (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), adj., distant, away from (with dat.).

feor, adv., far, far back (time).

feor, adv., far, a long time ago.

feorh, m., n., life.

feorh, m., n., life.

feorh-bęnn, f., life-wound, mortal wound.

feorh-bęnn, f., life wound, fatal wound.

feorh-lęgu, f., laying down of life. (See p. 146, Note on l. 13.)

feorh-lęgu, f., giving up of life. (See p. 146, Note on l. 13.)

feorh-sēoc, life-sick, mortally wounded.

feorh-sēoc, critically ill, mortally wounded.

feorm (fiorm), f., use, benefit (food, provisions) [farm].

feorm (fiorm), f., use, benefit (food, provisions) [farm].

164

feormian (§ 130), eat, devour.

feormian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), eat, consume.

feorran, from afar.

from afar

fēowertig, forty; gen., fēowertiges (§ 91, Note 1).

forty; gen., forty's (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ferhð (ferð), m., heart, mind, spirit.

ferhð (ferð), m., heart, mind, spirit.

fęrian (§ 125), carry, transport [to ferry];

fęrian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), transport, ferry;

fęrede in forðwege 152, 5 = carried away.

fęrede in forðwege __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = carried away.

fers, n., verse [Lat. versus].

fers, n., verse [Lat. versus].

fersc, fresh.

fersc, fresh.

ferðloca (ferhð-), m., heart, mind, spirit [heart-locker].

ferðloca (ferhð-), m., heart, mind, spirit [heart-locker].

fēt, see fōt.

fēt, see fōt.

fetor, f., fetter [fōt]; instr. pl., feterum.

, f., fetter [fōt]; instr. pl., feterum.

feðer, f., feather; acc. pl., feðra.

feðer, f., feather; acc. pl., feðra.

fierd, f., English army [faran].

fierd, f., English army [faran].

fīf, five.

fīf, five.

fīftīene, fifteen.

fifteen

fīftig, fifty; gen. sing., fīftiges (§ 91, Note 1); dat. pl., fīftegum (§ 91, Note 3).

fifty; gen. sing., fifty's (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__); dat. pl., fifties (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

findan (§ 110), find.

findan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), discover.

finger, m., finger.

finger, n., finger.

Finnas, m. pl., Fins.

Finns, m. pl., Fins.

fiorm, see feorm.

fiorm, see feorm.

fīras, m. pl., men [feorh]; gen. pl., fīra; dat. pl., fīrum.

fīras, m. pl., men [feorh]; gen. pl., fīra; dat. pl., fīrum.

firrest (fierrest), see feor (§ 96, (4)).

fierrest, see feor (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

first, m., time, period.

first, m., time, duration.

fiscað (fiscnað), m., fishing.

fiscað (fiscnað), m., fishery.

fiscere, m., fisherman.

fiscere, m., fisher.

fiscnað, see fiscað.

fiscnað, see fiscað.

flēon (§ 118, II.), flee.

flee (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, II.), flee.

flēotan (§ 109), float.

flēotan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), float.

flęt, n., floor of the hall.

flęt, n., hall floor.

flōd, m., flood, wave.

flood, m., flood, wave.

folc, n., folk, people.

folc, n., folk, people.

folc-cwēn, f., folk-queen.

folk queen, f., folk queen.

folc-cyning, m., folk-king.

folk-king, m., folk-king.

164b

folcgefeoht, n., folk-fight, battle, general engagement.

folcgefeoht, n., folk fight, battle, general engagement.

fold-bold, n., earth-building, hall.

fold-bold, n., earth structure, gathering space.

folde, f., earth, land, country [feld].

folde, f., earth, land, country [feld].

folm, f., hand [fēlan = feel].

folm, f., hand [fēlan = feel].

fōn (§ 118), seize, capture, take [fang];

phone (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), seize, capture, take [fang];

tō rīce fōn = come to (ascend) the throne.

tō rīce fōn = ascend the throne.

for (§ 94, (1)), for, on account of;

for (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), for, because of;

for ðǣm (ðe), for ðon (ðe), because;

for the, because;

for ðon, for ðȳ, for ðǣm (for-ðām), therefore.

therefore.

fōr, see faran.

for, see faran.

forbærnan (§ 127), burn thoroughly [for is intensive, like Lat. per].

forbærnan (§ 127), burn completely [for is intensive, similar to Latin per].

forgiefan (-gifan) (§ 115), give, grant.

forgiefan (-gifan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), give, grant.

forhęrgian (§ 130), harry, lay waste.

forhęrgian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), Harry, destroy everything.

forhogdnis, f., contempt.

forhogdnis, f., disdain.

forht, fearful, afraid.

forward, fearful, scared.

forhwæga, about, at least.

forhwæga, regarding, minimum.

forlǣtan (§ 117), abandon, leave.

forlǣtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), abandon, leave.

forlēt, forlēton, see forlǣtan.

forlēt, forlēton, see forlǣtan.

forma, first;

form, first;

forman sīðe, the first time (instr.).

first time (instr.).

forniman (§ 114), take off, destroy.

forniman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), remove, eliminate.

forspęndan (§ 127), spend, squander.

forspęndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), spend, waste.

forstǫndan (-standan) (§ 116), understand.

forstǫndan (-standan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), understand.

forswāpan (§ 117), sweep away; pret. 3d sing. indic., forswēop.

forswāpan (§ 117), sweep away; past tense 3rd person singular indicative, forswēop.

forswęrian (§ 116), forswear (with dat.); past part., forsworen.

forswear (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), forswear (with dat.); past part., forsworn.

forð, forth, forward.

forð, forth, forward.

forðolian (§ 130), miss, go without (with dat.) [not to thole or experience].

forðolian (§ 130), miss, go without (with dat.) [not to endure or experience].

165

forðweg, m., way forth;

beyond, m., way forward;

in forðwege, away.

in forðwege, away.

fōt (§ 68, (1)), m. foot.

fōt (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n. foot.

Frǣna, m., Frene.

Frǣna, m., Frene.

frætwe, f. pl., fretted armor, jewels [fret].

frætwe, f. pl., decorative armor, gems [fret].

fram, see frǫm.

fram, see frǫm.

frēa, m., lord, Lord.

frēa, m., lord, Lord.

frēa-drihten, m., lord, master.

frēa-drihten, m., lord, master.

frēfran (§ 130), console, cheer [frōfor].

frēfran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), console, cheer [frōfor].

fręmde, strange, foreign;

weird, strange, foreign;

ðā fręmdan, the strangers.

the strangers.

fręmman (§ 125), accomplish, perform, support [to frame].

framing (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), accomplish, perform, support [to frame].

fręmsumnes (-nis), f., kindness, benefit.

fręmsumnes (-nis), f., kindness, benefit.

frēo (frīo), free; gen. pl., frēora (frīora).

frēo (frīo), free; gen. pl., frēora (frīora).

frēodōm, m., freedom.

frēodōm, m., freedom.

frēolīc, noble [free-like].

frēolīc, noble [free-spirited].

frēomǣg, m., free kinsman.

frēomǣg, m., free relative.

frēond (§ 68, (3)), m., friend.

frēond (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n., friend.

frēondlēas, friendless.

friendless, friendless.

frēondlīce, in a friendly manner.

friendly

frēorig, cold, chill [frēoran].

frēorig, cold, chilly [frēoran].

frīora, see frēo.

frīora, see frēo.

frið, m., n., peace, security [bel-fry].

frið, m., n., peace, security [bel-fry].

frōd, old, sage, prudent.

wisdom, ancient, wise, cautious.

frōfor, f., comfort, consolation, alleviation;

frōfor, f., comfort, support, relief;

fyrena frōfre 137, 7 = as an alleviation of outrages (dat.).

fyrena frōfre 137, 7 = as a relief from wrongs (dat.).

frǫm (fram) (§ 94, (1)), from, by.

from, by

frǫm, adv., away, forth.

frǫm, adv., away, out.

fruma, m., origin, beginning [frǫm].

fruma, m., origin, start [frǫm].

frumsceaft, f., creation.

frumsceaft, f., creation.

fugela, see fugol.

fugela, see fugol.

fugelere, m., fowler.

fugelere, m., bird hunter.

fugol (fugel), m., fowl, bird; gen. pl., fugela.

fowl, bird; gen. pl., fugela.

165b

ful, n., cup, beaker.

full, n., cup, beaker.

fūl, foul.

foul, foul.

fūlian (§ 130), grow foul, decompose.

fūlian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), rot, decay.

full (ful), adj., full (with gen.);

full (ful), adj., full (with gen.);

be fullan, fully, perfectly.

be fullan, fully, perfectly.

full (ful) adv., fully, very.

full (ful) adv., completely, really.

fultum, m., help.

fultum, m., support.

furðor (furður), adv., further.

further

furðum, adv., even.

furðum, adv., also.

fylð, see feallan.

fylð, see fall.

fyren (firen), f., crime, violence, outrage.

fyren (firen), f., crime, violence, outrage.

fyrhtu, f., fright, terror; dat. sing., fyrhtu.

fyrhtu, f., fright, terror; dat. sing., fyrhtu.

fyrst, adj., superlative, first, chief.

first, adj., superlative, first, chief.

fȳsan (§ 126), make ready, prepare [fūs = ready];

fȳsan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), get ready, prepare [fūs = ready];

gūðe gefȳsed 137, 9 = ready for battle.

battle-ready __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = ready for battle.

G.

gād, n., lack.

gād, n., lack.

gǣst, see gāst.

guest, see ghost.

gafol, n., tax, tribute.

gafol, n., tax, fee.

galan (§ 116), sing [nightingale].

handsome guy (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sing [nightingale].

gālnes, f., lust, impurity.

gālnes, f., desire, impurity.

gān (§ 134), go.

gān (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), let's go.

gār, m., spear [gore, gar-fish].

gār, m., spear [gore, garfish].

gār-wiga, m., spear-warrior.

gār-wiga, m., spear fighter.

gāst (gǣst), m., spirit, ghost.

gāst (gǣst), m., spirit, ghost.

gāstlīc (gǣstlīc), ghastly, terrible.

ghastly, terrible

ge, and; see ǣgðer.

ge, and; see ǣgðer.

, ye; see ðū.

gē, ye; see ðū.

geador, together.

gear, together.

geǣmetigian (§ 130), disengage from (with acc. of person and gen. of thing) [empty].

geǣmetigian (§ 130), disengage from (with the person in accusative and the thing in genitive) [empty].

geærnan (§ 127), gain by running [iernan].

geærnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), gain by running [iernan].

gēap, spacious.

gēap, roomy.

166

gēar, n., year; gen. pl., gēara, is used adverbially = of yore, formerly.

gēar, n., year; gen. pl., gēara, is used adverbially = in the past, previously.

gēardæg, m., day of yore.

gēardæg, m., day of the past.

geare (gearo, gearwe), readily, well, clearly [yarely].

gear (gear, gearwe), easily, well, clearly [yarely].

Gēat, m., a Geat, the Geat (i.e. Beowulf).

Geat, m., a Geat, the Geat (i.e. Beowulf).

Gēatas, m. pl., the Geats (a people of South Sweden).

Geats, m. pl., the Geats (a group from South Sweden).

Gēat-mecgas, m. pl., Geat men (= the fourteen who accompanied Beowulf to Heorot).

Geat warriors, m. pl., Geat men (= the fourteen who accompanied Beowulf to Heorot).

gebēorscipe, m., banquet, entertainment.

feast

gebētan (§ 126), make amends for [bōt].

gebētan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), make amends for [bōt].

gebīdan (§ 102), wait, bide one’s time (intrans.); endure, experience (trans., with acc.).

gebīdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wait, bide (intrans.); endure, experience (trans., with acc.).

gebind, n., commingling.

gebind, n., mixing.

gebindan (§ 110), bind.

Bundle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), connect.

gebrēowan (§ 109), brew.

brewer (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), brew.

gebrowen, see gebrēowan.

gebrowen, see gebrēowan.

gebūd, gebūn, see būan (§ 126, Note 2).

gebūd, gebūn, see būan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

gebyrd, n., rank, social distinction.

gebird, n., status, social standing.

gecēosan (§ 109), choose, decide.

choose (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), select, determine.

gecnāwan (§ 117), know, understand.

gēcnāwan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), know, understand.

gecoren, see gecēosan.

chosen, see choose.

gecringan (§ 110), fall, die [cringe].

gecringan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fall, die [cringe].

gedǣlan (§ 126), deal out, give;

gedǣlan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), distribute, give;

dēaðe gedǣlde 152, 7 = apportioned to death (dat.), or, tore (?) in death (instr.).

dēaðe gedǣlde 152, 7 = assigned to death (dat.), or, torn apart in death (instr.).

gedafenian (§ 130), become, befit, suit (impersonal, usually with dat., but with acc. 112, 10).

gedafenian (§ 130), become, befit, suit (used without a personal subject, usually with dat., but with acc. 112, 10).

gedīgan (§ 126), endure, survive.

gedīgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), endure, survive.

166b

gedōn (§ 135), do, cause, effect.

gedōn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), do, cause, effect.

gedræg, n., company.

gedræg, n., group.

gedrēosan (§ 109), fall, fail.

gedrēosan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), collapse, fail.

gedriht (gedryht), n., band, troop.

gedriht (gedryht), n., group, squad.

gedrogen, see drēogan.

dried, see drēogan.

gedrync, n., drinking.

gedrync, n., drinking.

geęndian (§ 130), end, finish.

gender (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), end, finish.

gefaran (§ 116), go, die.

fear (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), go, die.

gefēa, m., joy.

gefēa, m., joy.

gefeaht, see gefeohtan.

fight, see fighting.

gefeh, see gefēon.

gefeh, see gefēon.

gefēng, see gefōn.

gefēng, see gefōn.

gefeoht, n., fight, battle.

gefeoht, n., fight, battle.

gefeohtan (§ 110), fight.

gefeohtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), battle.

gefēon (§ 118, v.), rejoice at (with dat.); pret. 3d sing., gefeah, gefeh.

gefēon (§ 118, v.), rejoice at (with dat.); past tense 3rd singular, gefeah, gefeh.

gefēra, m., companion, comrade [co-farer].

gefēra, m., companion, friend [co-traveler].

geflīeman (§ 126), put to flight [flēon].

warrior (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), scattered [flee].

gefohten, see gefeohtan.

fought, see fight.

gefōn (§ 118, vii.), seize.

gefōn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, vii.), take.

gefōr, see gefaran.

gefōr, see gefaran.

gefrǣge, n., hearsay, report;

gossip, n., hearsay, report;

mīne gefrǣge (instr.) 141, 7 = as I have heard say, according to my information.

my inquiry (instr.) 141, 7 = as I have heard, according to what I know.

gefręmman (§ 125), perform, accomplish, effect.

gefręmman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), do, achieve, bring about.

gefultumian (§ 130), help [fultum].

helping (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), assist [support].

gefylce, n., troop, division [folc]; dat. pl., gefylcum, gefylcium.

gefylce, n., group, division [folc]; dat. pl., gefylcum, gefylcium.

gefyllan (§ 127), fill (with gen.); past part. pl., f., gefylda.

gefyllan (§ 127), fill (with gen.); past participle plural, feminine, gefylda.

geglęngan (§ 127), adorn.

arranged (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), decorated.

gehātland, n., promised land [gehātan = to promise].

gehātland, n., promised land [gehātan = to promise].

gehealdan (§ 117), hold, maintain.

guard (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), hold, maintain.

167

gehīeran (gehȳran) (§ 126), hear.

gehīeran (gehȳran) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), listen.

gehīersumnes, f., obedience.

gehīersumnes, f., compliance.

gehola, m., protector [helan].

gehola, m., protector [helan].

gehwā (§ 77, Note), each;

go (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), each;

on healfa gehwone 142, 7 (see Note 140, 15. Observe that the pron. may, as here, be masc. and the gen. fem.).

on healfa gehwone 142, 7 (see Note 140, 15. Note that the pronoun can be masculine, as it is here, and the genitive can be feminine).

gehwæðer (§ 77, Note), each, either, both.

either (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), each, either, both.

gehwylc (gehwilc) (§ 77, Note), each (with gen. pl. See Note 140, 15).

gehwylc (gehwilc) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), each (with gen. pl. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

gehwyrfan (§ 127), convert, change.

multiverse (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), convert, change.

gehȳdan (§ 126), hide, conceal, consign.

inform (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), hide, conceal, consign.

gehygd, f., n., thought, purpose.

gehygd, f., n., thought, intention.

gehȳran, see gehīeran.

gehȳran, see gehīeran.

gehȳrnes, f., hearing;

hearing

eal ðā hē in gehȳrnesse geleornian meahte 115, 14 = all things that he could learn by hearing.

when he could learn in hearing 115, 14 = all things that he could learn by hearing.

gelǣdan (§ 126), lead.

gelǣdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), lead.

gelǣred, part.-adj., learned; superlative, gelǣredest.

learned, part.-adj., learned; superlative, most learned.

gelafian (§ 130), lave.

gelafian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wash.

gelęnge, along of, belonging to (with dat.).

challenge, along with, belonging to (with dat.).

geleornian (-liornian) (§ 130), learn.

geleornian (-liornian) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), learn.

gelīce, likewise; in like manner to (with dat.).

gelīce, similarly; in the same way as (with dat.).

gelīefan (gelȳfan) (§ 126), believe;

believe

ðæt hēo on ǣnigne eorl gelȳfde 137, 6 = that she believed in any earl.

that she believed in any earl 137, 6 = that she believed in any earl.

gelimpan (§ 110), happen, be fulfilled.

gelimpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), occur, be realized.

gelimplīc, proper, fitting.

gelimplīc, appropriate, suitable.

gelȳfan, see gelīefan.

gelȳfan, see gelīefan.

167b

gelȳfed, weak, infirm [left (hand)].

gelȳfed, weak, infirm [left hand].

gēmde, see gīeman.

game, see gamer.

gemet, n., meter, measure, ability.

gemet, n., meter, measure, skill.

gemētan (§ 126), meet.

meet (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

gemǫn, see gemunan.

gemǫn, see gemunan.

gemunan (§ 136), remember; indic. pres. 1st and 3d sing., gemǫn; pret. sing., gemunde.

gemunan (§ 136), remember; present indicative 1st and 3rd person singular, gemǫn; past tense singular, gemunde.

gemynd, n., memory, memorial;

memory

tō gemyndum 147, 5 = as a memorial.

to remember __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = as a memorial.

gemyndgian (-mynian) (§ 130), remember;

gemyndgian (-mynian) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), remember;

mid hine gemyndgade 115, 15 = he treasured in his memory;

mid hine gemyndgade 115, 15 = he kept in his memory;

gemyne mǣrðo 138, 15 = be mindful of glory (imperative 2d sing.).

gemyne mǣrðo 138, 15 = remember the glory (imperative 2d sing.).

gemyndig, mindful of (with gen.).

gemyndig, mindful of.

genāp, see genīpan.

genāp, see genīpan.

geneahhe, enough, often;

geneahhe, enough, often;

genehost, superlative, very often.

genehost, outstanding, frequently.

genip, n., mist, darkness.

genip, n., mist, darkness.

genīpan (§ 102), grow dark.

genīpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grow dark.

genīwian (§ 130), renew.

genīwian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), refresh.

genōh, enough.

genōh, that's plenty.

genumen, see niman.

genumen, see niman.

geoc, n., yoke.

geoc, n., yoke.

gēocor, dire, sad.

geocor, urgent, upsetting.

geogoð, f., youth, young people, young warriors. (See duguð.)

geogoð, f., youth, young people, young warriors. (See duguð.)

geond (giond) (§ 94, (2)), throughout [yond].

geond (giond) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), throughout [beyond].

geondhweorfan (§ 110), pass over, traverse, recall;

geondhweorfan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pass over, traverse, remember;

ðonne māga gemynd mōd geondhweorfeð 150, 15 = then his mind recalls the memory of kinsmen.

Then his mind recalls the memory of kinsmen 150, 15 = then his mind recalls the memory of kinsmen.

geondscēawian (§ 130), survey, review;

geondscēawian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), survey, review;

georne geondscēawað 150, 16 = eagerly surveys them.

eagerly surveys __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = eagerly surveys them.

168

geondðęnc(e)an (§ 128), think over, consider.

credence (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), think over, consider.

geong (§ 96, (2)), young;

geong (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), youth;

giengest, (gingest), superlative, youngest, latest, last.

giengest, (gingest), superlative, youngest, newest, latest.

geong = gǫng, see gǫngan (imperative 2d sing.).

geong = gǫng, see gǫngan (imperative 2nd singular).

gēong (gīong), see gǫngan (pret. 3d sing.).

gēong (gīong), see gǫngan (past tense 3rd person singular).

georn (giorn), eager, desirous, zealous, sure [yearn].

georn (giorn), eager, desirous, zealous, certain [yearn].

georne, eagerly, certainly;

keen, eagerly, definitely;

wiste ðē geornor 143, 5 = knew the more certainly.

knew more definitely __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = knew more definitely.

geornfulnes, f., eagerness, zeal.

geornfulnes, f., enthusiasm, zeal.

geornlīce, eagerly, attentively.

eagerly, eagerly, attentively.

geornor, see georne.

geornor, see georne.

geręcednes, f., narration [ręccan].

geręcednes, f., storytelling [ręccan].

gerisenlīc, suitable, becoming.

stylish, appropriate, flattering.

gerȳman (§ 126), extend, (trans.) [rūm].

gerȳman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), expand, (trans.) [rūm].

gesǣliglīc, happy, blessed [silly].

blessed, happy, silly.

gesamnode, see gesǫmnian.

gesamnode, see gesǫmnian.

gesceaft, f., creature, creation, destiny [scieppan].

gesceaft, f., creature, creation, destiny [scieppan].

gesceap, n., shape, creation, destiny [scieppan].

gesceap, n., form, creation, fate [scieppan].

gescieldan (§ 127), shield, defend.

gescieldan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), shield, protect.

gesealde, see gesęllan.

gesealde, see gesęllan.

geseglian (§ 130), sail.

geseglian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to sail.

geselda, m., comrade.

geselda, m., friend.

gesęllan (§ 128), give.

friend (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), give.

gesēon (gesīon) (§ 118), see, observe; pres. indic. 3d sing., gesihð.

gesēon (gesīon) (§ 118), see, observe; present indicative 3rd singular, gesihð.

geset, n., habitation, seat.

settlement, n., home, residence.

gesęttan (§ 127), set, place, establish.

gesęttan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), set, place, establish.

gesewen, see sēon, gesēon (past part.).

seen, see see, seen (past part.).

168b

gesewenlīc, seen, visible [seen-like].

easily, seen, visible [seen-like].

gesiglan (§ 127), sail.

gesiglan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), navigate.

gesihð, see gesēon.

gesihð, see gesēon.

gesittan (§ 115, Note 2), sit (trans., as to sit a horse, to sit a boat, etc.); sit, sit down (intrans.).

gesittan (§ 115, Note 2), sit (trans., as to sit a horse, to sit a boat, etc.); sit, sit down (intrans.).

geslægen, see slēan (§ 118).

slain, see slēan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

gesǫmnian (§ 130), assemble, collect.

gesǫmnian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), gather, collect.

gesǫmnung, f., collection, assembly.

gesǫmnung, f., collection, assembly.

gestāh, see gestīgan.

gestāh, see gestīgan.

gestaðelian (§ 130), establish, restore [standan].

gestaðelian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), establish, restore [standan].

gesteal, n., establishment, foundation [stall].

gesteal, n., establishment, foundation [stall].

gestīgan (§ 102), ascend, go [stile, stirrup, sty (= a rising on the eye)].

gestīgan (§ 102), climb, go [style, stirrup, sty (= a rising on the eye)].

gestrangian (§ 130), strengthen.

gestrangian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), boost.

gestrēon, n., property.

gestrēon, n., asset.

gestrȳnan (§ 126), obtain, acquire [gestrēon].

to acquire (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), obtain, acquire [gestrēon].

gesweorcan (§ 110), grow dark, become sad;

to mourn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grow dark, become sad;

For ðon ic geðęncan ne mæg geond ðās woruld for hwan mōdsefa mīn ne gesweorce 151, 3-4 = Therefore in this world I may not understand wherefore my mind does not grow “black as night.” (Brooke.)

Therefore in this world I may not understand why my mind does not grow “black as night.” 151, 3-4 = Therefore in this world I may not understand wherefore my mind does not grow “black as night.” (Brooke.)

geswīcan (§ 102), cease, cease from (with gen.).

interrupt (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), stop, stop from (with gen.).

getæl, n., something told, narrative.

tale, n., something told, narrative.

getruma, m., troop, division.

getruma, m., unit, division.

geðanc, m., n., thought.

thought, m., n., thought.

geðeah, see geðicgan.

geðeah, see geðicgan.

geðęnc(e)an (§ 128), think, remember, understand, consider.

to reflect (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), think, remember, understand, consider.

169

geðēodan (§ 126), join.

geðēodan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), connect.

geðēode (-ðīode), n., language, tribe.

geðēode (-ðīode), n., language, tribe.

geðēodnis, f., association;

geðēodnis, f., community;

but in 112, 2 this word is used to render the Lat. appetitus = desire.

but in 112, 2 this word is used to express the Lat. appetitus = desire.

geðicg(e)an (§ 115, Note 2), take, receive; pret. indic. 3d sing., geðeah.

geðicg(e)an (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), take, receive; past tense 3rd sing., geðeah.

geðungen, part.-adj., distinguished, excellent [ðēon, to thrive].

exceptional, part.-adj., distinguished, excellent [ðēon, to thrive].

geðyldig, patient [ðolian].

generous, patient [ðolian].

geweald (gewald), n., control, possession, power [wield].

geweald (gewald), n., control, ownership, power [wield].

geweorc, n., work, labor.

geweorc, n., work, job.

geweorðian (§ 130), honor [to attribute worth to].

honor (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to attribute worth to.

gewīcian (§ 130), dwell.

geek out (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), dwell.

gewin(n), n., strife, struggle.

win, n., conflict, battle.

gewindan (§ 110), flee [wend].

win (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), escape [go].

gewissian (§ 130), guide, direct.

gewissian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), guide, lead.

gewītan (§ 102), go, depart.

gewītan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), go, leave.

geworht, see gewyrcan.

geworked, see gewyrcan.

gewrit, n., writing, Scripture.

written, n., writings, Scripture.

gewunian (§ 130), be accustomed, be wont.

gewunian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), be used to, be inclined to.

gewyrc(e)an (§ 128), work, create, make, produce.

gewyrc(e)an (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), work, create, make, produce.

gid(d), n., word, speech.

gid(d), n., term, expression.

giefan (§ 115), give.

giefan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), give.

giefstōl, m., gift-stool, throne.

gift-stool, m., throne.

giefu (gifu), f., gift.

giefu (gifu), f., present.

gielp (gilp), m., n., boast [yelp].

gielp (gilp), m., n., boast [yelp].

gīeman (gēman) (§ 126), endeavor, strive.

gīeman (gēman) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), try, strive.

gīet (gīt, gȳt), yet, still.

gīet (gīt, gȳt), yet, still.

gif (gyf), if [not related to give].

gif (gyf), if [not related to give].

gifeðe (gyfeðe), given, granted.

given, granted

gilp, see gielp.

gilp, see gielp.

gilp-cwide, m., boasting speech [yelp-speech].

gilp-cwide, m., bragging speech [yelp-speech].

gingest, see geong (adj.).

gingest, see geong (adj.).

169b

giohðo (gehðu), f., care, sorrow, grief.

giohðo (gehðu), f., care, sorrow, grief.

giū (), formerly, of old.

giū (), previously, in the past.

glæd (glǣd), glad.

glad

glēaw, wise, prudent.

clever, smart, cautious.

glīwstæf, m., glee, joy; instr. pl. (used adverbially), glīwstafum 150, 16 = joyfully.

glīwstæf, m., glee, joy; instr. pl. (used adverbially), glīwstafum 150, 16 = joyfully.

God, m., God.

God, m., God.

gōd (§ 96, (3)), good;

good (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), good;

mid his gōdum 115, 12 = with his possessions (goods).

with his things __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = with his things (goods).

godcund, divine [God].

godcund, divine [God].

godcundlīce, divinely.

gold, n., gold.

gold, n., gold.

gold-ǣht, f., gold treasure.

gold-ǣht, f., gold treasure.

gold-fāh, gold-adorned.

gold-fah, gold-adorned.

gold-hroden, part.-adj., gold-adorned.

gold-hroden, part.-adj., gold-decorated.

goldwine, m., prince, giver of gold, lord [gold-friend].

goldwine, m., prince, giver of gold, lord [gold-friend].

gomel (gomol), old, old man.

gomel (gomol), elderly, senior.

gǫngan (gangan) (§ 117), go [gang]; imperative 2d sing., geong; pret. sing., gēong, gīong, gēng; past part., gegǫngen, gegangen.

gǫngan (gangan) (§ 117), go [gang]; 2nd person singular imperative, geong; past tense singular, gēong, gīong, gēng; past participle, gegǫngen, gegangen.

The most commonly used pret. is ēode, which belongs to gān (§ 134).

The most commonly used past tense is ēode, which comes from gān (§ 134).

Gotland, n., Jutland (in Ohthere’s Second Voyage), Gothland (in Wulfstan’s Voyage).

Gotland, n., Jutland (in Ohthere’s Second Voyage), Gothland (in Wulfstan’s Voyage).

gram, grim, angry, fierce, the angry one.

gram, grim, mad, fierce, the mad one.

grāp, f., grasp, clutch, claw.

grāp, f., grasp, clutch, claw.

grētan (§ 126), greet, attack, touch.

greet (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), greet, attack, touch.

grōwan (§ 117, (2)), grow.

grow (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grow.

gryre-lēoð, n., terrible song [grisly lay].

gryre-lēoð, n., gruesome song [grisly lay].

guma, m., man, hero [groom; see § 65, Note 1].

guy, m., man, hero [groom; see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__].

170

gūð, f., war, battle.

gūð, f., war, combat.

gūð-bill, n., sword [war-bill].

gūð-bill, n., sword [war sword].

gūð-gewǣde, n., armor [war-weeds].

gūð-gewǣde, n., armor [battle gear].

gūð-hrēð, f., war-fame.

gūð-hrēð, f., battle glory.

gūð-wine, m., sword [war-friend].

gūð-wine, m., sword [battle buddy].

gyddian (§ 130), speak formally, chant [giddy; the original meaning of giddy was mirthful, as when one sings].

gyddian (§ 130), speak formally, chant [giddy; the original meaning of giddy was mirthful, as when one sings].

gyf, see gif.

gyf, see gif.

gyfeðe, see gifeðe.

gyfeðe, see gifeðe.

gyldan (gieldan) (§ 110), pay; indic. 3d sing., gylt.

gyldan (gieldan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pay; indicative 3rd person singular, gylt.

gylden, golden [gold].

golden [gold].

H.

habban (§ 133), have.

have (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), have.

hād, m., order, rank, office, degree [-hood, -head].

, m., order, rank, office, degree [-hood, -head].

hæfta, m., captive.

hæfta, m., prisoner.

hægel (hagol), m., hail; instr. sing., hagle.

hægel (hagol), m., hail; instr. sing., hagle.

hæglfaru, f., hail-storm [hail-faring].

hæglfaru, f., hailstorm [hail-faring].

hæle, see hæleð.

healer, see healing.

hǣl, f., hail, health, good luck.

hail, f., health, good luck.

hæleð (hæle), m., hero, warrior.

hæleð (hæle), m., hero, fighter.

hǣt, see hātan.

hǣt, see hātan.

hǣðen, heathen.

heathen

Hǣðum (æt Hǣðum), Haddeby (= Schleswig).

Hǣðum (at Hǣðum), Haddeby (= Schleswig).

hāl, hale, whole.

whole, healthy, complete.

hālettan (§ 127), greet, salute [to hail].

hail (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), greet, salute [to hail].

Halfdęne, Halfdane (proper name).

Halfdęne, Halfdane (name).

hālga, m., saint.

hālga, m., saint.

Hālgoland, Halgoland (in ancient Norway).

Hālgoland, Halgoland (in ancient Norway).

hālig, holy.

, holy.

hālignes, f., holiness.

hālignes, f., holiness.

170b

hām, m., home; dat. sing., hāme, hām (p. 104, Note);

home, m., home; dat. sing., home, home (p. 104, Note);

used adverbially in hām ēode 112, 18 = went home.

went home __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

hand, see hǫnd.

hand, see hǫnd.

hār, hoary, gray.

hair, old, gray.

hāt, hot.

hat, hot.

hātan (§ 117, Note 2), call, name, command; pret. sing., heht, hēt.

hātan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), call, name, command; past tense, heht, hēt.

hātheort, hot-hearted.

, fired-up.

hātte, see hātan.

, see .

, hēo, hit (§ 53), he, she, it.

he, she, it (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), he, she, it.

hēafod, n., head.

head, n., head.

hēah (§ 96, (2)), high; acc. sing, m., hēanne.

hēah (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), high; acc. sing, m., hēanne.

hēah-sęle, m., high hall.

high hall

hēahðungen, highly prosperous, aristocratic [hēah + past part. of ðēon (§ 118)].

hēahðungen, very wealthy, elite [hēah + past part. of ðēon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)].

healdan (§ 117), hold, govern, possess;

healdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), hold, manage, own;

144, 9 = hold up, sustain.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = hold up, sustain.

healf, adj., half.

half

healf, f., half, side, shore.

half, side, shore.

heall, f., hall.

heall, f., hall.

heals, m., neck.

heals, m., neck.

hēan, abject, miserable.

low, wretched, hopeless.

hēanne, see hēah.

hēanne, see hēah.

heard, hard.

heard, difficult.

heard-hicgende, brave-minded [hard-thinking].

heard-hiccough, brave-minded [thoughtful].

hearm-scaða, m., harmful foe [harm-scather].

hearm-scaða, m., harmful enemy [harm-scather].

hearpe, f., harp.

harp, f., harp.

heaðo-dēor, battle-brave.

war beast, battle brave.

heaðo-mǣre, famous in battle.

heaðo-mǣre, battle famous.

heaðo-wylm, m., flame-surge, surging of fire [battle-welling].

heaðo-wylm, m., fire surge [battle welling].

hēawan (§ 117), hew, cut.

heaven (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), hewn, cut.

hębban, hōf, hōfon, gehafen (§ 117), heave, lift, raise.

hheben, hhof, hhofon, gehafen (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), heave, lift, raise.

171

hęfig, heavy, oppressive.

hefty, heavy, oppressive.

heht, see hātan.

heht, check out hātan.

helan (§ 114), conceal.

hidden (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), cover up.

hęll, f., hell.

, f., hell.

helm, m., helmet.

helmet, m., helmet.

Helmingas, m. pl., Helmings (Wealtheow, Hrothgar’s queen, is a Helming).

Helmingas, m. pl., Helmings (Wealtheow, Hrothgar's queen, is a Helming).

help, f., help.

assist, f., assist.

helpan (§ 110), help (with dat.).

help (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), help (with dat.).

heofon, m., heaven.

heaven

heofonlīc, heavenly.

heavenly

heofonrīce, n., kingdom of heaven.

heofonrīce, n., heaven.

hēold, see healdan.

held, see healdan.

heolstor (-ster), n., darkness, concealment, cover [holster].

heolstor (-ster), n., darkness, concealment, cover [holster].

heora (hiera), see .

heora (hiera), see hē.

heord, f., care, guardianship [hoard].

heord, f., care, guardianship [hoard].

heoro-drēorig, bloody [sword-dreary].

bloody, bloody [sword-dreary].

Heorot, Heorot, Hart (the famous hall which Hrothgar built).

Heorot, Heorot, Hart (the legendary hall that Hrothgar constructed).

heorte, f., heart.

heorte, f., heart.

hēr, here, hither;

here

in the Chronicle the meaning frequently is at this date, in this year: 99, 1.

in the Chronicle, the meaning often is at this date, in this year: 99, 1.

hęre, m., Danish army.

here, m., Danish army.

hęrenis, f., praise.

hęrenis, f., commendation.

hęrgian (§ 130), raid, harry, ravage [hęre].

hęrgian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), raid, attack, plunder [hęre].

hęrgung, f., harrying, plundering.

, f., harrying, looting.

hęrian (hęrigean) (§ 125), praise.

hęrian (hęrigean) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), appreciation.

hērsumedon, see hīersumian.

hērsumedon, see hīersumian.

hēt, see hātan.

, see .

hider (hieder), hither.

(), here.

hiera, see .

hiera, see he.

hīeran (hȳran) (§ 126), hear, belong.

() (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), hear, belong.

hierde, m., shepherd, instigator [keeper of a herd].

shepherd, instigator [keeper of a herd].

hierdebōc, f., pastoral treatise 171b [shepherd-book, a translation of Lat. Cura Pastoralis].

hierdebōc, f., pastoral treatise 171b [shepherd-book, a translation of Lat. Cura Pastoralis].

hīerra, see hēah.

, see .

hīersumian (hȳr-, hēr-) (§ 130), obey (with dat.).

hīersumian (hȳr-, hēr-) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), follow (with dat.).

hige (hyge), m., mind, heart.

(hyge), n., mind, heart.

hige-ðihtig, bold-hearted.

big-hearted, brave-hearted.

hild, f., battle.

Child, f., battle.

hilde-dēor, battle-brave.

Hilde-deor, warrior.

hilde-mecg, m., warrior.

, m., fighter.

hilde-sæd, battle-sated.

, battle-sated.

hin-fūs, eager to be gone [hence-ready].

hin-fūs, eager to leave [hence-ready].

hira, see .

Hira, see he.

hlǣw (hlāw), m., mound, burial mound [Ludlow and other place-names, low meaning hill].

hlǣw (hlāw), m., mound, burial mound [Ludlow and other place-names, low meaning hill].

hlāford, m., lord, master [loaf-ward?].

lord, m., lord, master [loaf-ward?].

hleahtor, m., laughter.

hleahtor, m., laugh.

hlēo, m., refuge, protector [lee].

hlēo, m., refuge, protector [shelter].

hlīfian (§ 130), rise, tower.

hlīfian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ascend, spire.

hlyn, m., din, noise.

hlyn, m., din, noise.

hlynsian (§ 130), resound.

hlynsian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), echo.

hof, n., court, abode.

hof, n., court, home.

hogode, see hycgan.

hogode, see hycgan.

holm, m., sea, ocean.

holm, m., sea, ocean.

hǫnd (hand), f., hand;

hǫnd (hand), f., hand;

on gehwæðre hǫnd, on both sides.

on each hand, on both sides.

hord, m., n., hoard, treasure.

, m., n., hoard, treasure.

hordcofa, m., breast, heart [hoard-chamber]

hordcofa, m., breast, heart [hoard-chamber]

hors, n., horse.

horse, n., horse.

horshwæl, m., walrus.

walrus

hrædwyrde, hasty of speech [hræd = quick].

hasty of speech

hrægel, n., garment; dat. sing., hrægle.


, n., garment; dat. sing.,
.

hrān, m., reindeer.


, m., reindeer.

hraðe, quickly, soon [rath-er].

fast, quickly, soon [rath-er].

hrēo (hrēoh), rough, cruel, sad.

hrēo (hrēoh), rough, harsh, sad.

hrēosan (§ 109), fall.

hrēosan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), falling.

172

hrēran126), stir.

hrēran126), stir.

hreðer, m., n., breast, purpose; dat. sing., hreðre.

hreðer, m., n., chest, intention; dat. sing., hreðre.

hrīm, m., rime, hoarfrost.


, m., rime, frost.

hrīmceald, rime-cold.

rime-cold

hring, m., ring, ring-mail.

, n., ring, chainmail.

hrīð, f. (?), snow-storm.

hrīð, f. (?), snowstorm.

hrōf, m., roof.

hrōf, m., roof.

Hrones næss, literally Whale’s Ness, whale’s promontory;

Whale's Ness, literally Whale’s Ness, whale’s promontory;

see næss.

see næss.

hrūse, f., earth [hrēosan: deposit].


, f., earth [hrēosan: deposit].

hryre, m., fall, death [hrēosan].

hryre, m., autumn, death [hrēosan].

hrȳðer, n., cattle [rinder-pest].

hrȳðer, n., cattle [cattle disease].

hryðig, ruined (?), storm-beaten; nom. pl. m., hryðge.

hryðig, ruined (?), storm-beaten; nom. pl. m., hryðge.

, how.

hey, what's up.

Humbre, f., river Humber.

Humber, f., river Humber.

hund, hundred.

dog, hundred.

hunig, n., honey.

honey, n., honey.

hunta, m., hunter.

hunta, m., hunter.

huntoð (-tað), m., hunting.

(-tað), m., hunting.

hūru, adv., about.

hūru, adv., around.

hūs, n., house.

house

hwā, hwæt (§ 74), who? what? swā hwæt swā (§ 77, Note), whatsoever;

who, what (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), who? what? whatever (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), anything;

indefinite, any one, anything;

indefinite, anyone, anything;

for hwan (instr.), wherefore.

for hwan (instr.), why.

hwæl, m., whale.

hwæl, m., whale.

hwælhunta, m., whale-hunter.

hwælhunta, m., whale hunter.

hwælhuntað, m., whale-fishing.

whale hunting, m., whale-fishing.

hwǣr, where? hwǣr ... swā, wheresoever;

where, where? where ... so, wheresoever;

wel hwǣr, nearly everywhere.

well, where, almost everywhere.

hwæthwugu, something.

hwæthwugu, something.

hwæðer, whether, which of two?

whether, which of two?

hwæðre, however, nevertheless.

however, nevertheless.

hwēne, see hwōn.

hwēne, see hwōn.

hweorfan (§ 110), turn, go.

turn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), turn, go.

hwider, whither.

where, to where.

172b

hwīl, f., while, time;

while, f., while, time;

ealle ðā hwīle ðe, all the while that;

all the while that, all the while that;

hwīlum (instr. pl.), sometimes.

sometimes

hwilc (hwylc, hwelc) (§ 74, Note 1), which? what?

hwilc (hwylc, hwelc) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), which? what?

hwōn, n., a trifle;

hwōn, n., a little thing;

hwēne (instr. sing.), somewhat, a little.

hwēne (instr. sing.), somewhat, a little.

hwǫnan, when.

when

, see hīe.

hi, see they.

hycgan (§ 132), think, resolve; pret. 3d sing., hogode.

hycgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), think, resolve; past tense 3rd person singular, hogode.

hȳd, f., hide, skin.

hide, f., skin.

hyge, see hige.

hyge, see hige.

hyra (hiera), see .

hyra (hiera), see he.

hȳran, see hīeran.

hȳran, see hīeran.

hyrde, see hierde.

hyrde, see hierde.

hys (his), see .

(his), see .

hyt (hit), see .

(), see .

I.

ic (§ 72), I.

IC (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), I.

īdel, idle, useless, desolate.

idle, useless, desolate.

ides, f., woman, lady.

Ides, f., woman, lady.

ieldra, adj., see eald.

ieldra, adj., see eald.

ieldra, m., an elder, parent, ancestor.

Eldra, m., an elder, parent, ancestor.

iernan (yrnan) (§ 112), run.

Brian (Bryan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), run.

īglǫnd (īgland), n., island.

īglǫnd (īgland), n., island.

ilca (ylca), the same [of that ilk].

ilca (ylca), the same [of that kind].

Ilfing, the Elbing.

Ilfing, the Elbing.

in, in, into (with dat. and acc.);

in, in, into (with dat. and acc.);

in on, in on, to, toward.

in on, in on, to, toward.

inbryrdnis (-nes), f., inspiration, ardor.

inbryrdnis (-nes), f., inspiration, passion.

indryhten, very noble.

Indryhten, super noble.

ingǫng, m., entrance.

ingǫng, m., entry.

innan, adv., within, inside;

innan, adv., within, inside;

on innan, within.

on in, inside.

innanbordes, adv.-gen., within borders, at home.

innanbordes, adv.-gen., within borders, at home.

inne, adv., within, inside.

inside, adv., within, inside.

intinga, m., cause, sake.

intinga, m., reason, purpose.

173

inweardlīce, inwardly, fervently.

inwardly, fervently

inwid-sorg (inwit-sorh), f., sorrow caused by an enemy.

inwid-sorg (inwit-sorh), f., sorrow caused by an enemy.

inwit-ðanc, m., hostile intent.

inwit-ðanc, m., malicious intent.

Īraland, n., Ireland (but in Ohthere’s Second Voyage, Iceland is probably meant).

Īraland, n., Ireland (but in Ohthere’s Second Voyage, it likely refers to Iceland).

īren, n., iron, sword; gen. pl., īrenna, īrena.

iron, n., iron, sword; gen. pl., īrenna, īrena.

īren-bęnd, m., f., iron-band.

iron band, m., f., iron band.

īu, see gīu.

īu, check out gīu.

K.

kynerīce, see cynerīce.

kinfolk, see kin.

kyning, see cyning.

king, see cyning.

kyrtel, m., kirtle, coat.

kirtle, coat.

L.

Lǣden, Latin.

Lead, Latin.

Lǣdengeðēode (-ðīode), n., Latin language.

Lǣdengeðēode (-ðīode), n., Latin.

Lǣdenware (§ 47), m. pl., Latin people, Romans.

Lǣdenware (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. pl., Latins, Romans.

lǣfan (§ 126), leave.

lǣfan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), leave.

lǣge, see licgan.

lie, see lie.

Lǣland, n., Laaland (in Denmark).

Lǣland, n., Laaland (in Denmark).

lǣn, n., loan;

loan, n., loan;

tō lǣne 121, 2 = as a loan.

to loan __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = as a loan.

lǣne, adj., as a loan, transitory, perishable.

lǣne, adj., as a loan, temporary, ephemeral.

lǣran (§ 126), teach, advise, exhort [lār].

lǣran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), teach, advise, encourage [lār].

lǣssa, lǣsta, see lȳtel.

less, least, see little.

lǣstan (§ 127), last, hold out (intrans.); perform, achieve (trans.).

last (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), last, hold out (intrans.); perform, achieve (trans.).

lǣtan (§ 117), let, leave.

let (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), let, leave.

lāf, f., something left, remnant, heirloom (often a sword);

lāf, f., leftover, remnant, heirloom (often a sword);

tō lāfe, as a remnant, remaining.

to live, as a remnant, remaining.

173b

lagulād, f., sea [lake-way, lād = leading, direction, way].

lagulād, f., sea [lake-path, lād = leading, direction, path].

land, see lǫnd.

land, see lǫnd.

lang, see lǫng.

lang, refer to lǫng.

Langaland, n., Langeland (in Denmark).

Langaland, n., Langeland (in Denmark).

lār, f., lore, teaching.

lār, f., lore, teaching.

lārcwide, m., precept, instruction, [cwide < cweðan].

lārcwide, m., rule, guideline, [cwide < cweðan].

lārēow, m., teacher [lār + ðēow].

lārēow, m., teacher [lār + ðēow].

lāst, m., track, footprint [shoemaker’s last];

last, m., track, footprint [shoemaker’s last];

on lāst(e), in the track of, behind (with dat.).

on last, in the path of, behind (with dat.).

lāð, loathsome, hateful.

loathe, disgusting, detestable.

lēas, loose, free from, bereft of (with gen.).

less, loose, free from, bereft of (with gen.).

lēasung, f., leasing, deception, falsehood.

lēasung, f., lease, deception, falsehood.

lęcgan (§ 125, Note), lay.

legacy (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), lie.

lēfdon, see līefan.

leefdon, see liefan.

leger, n., lying in, illness [licgan].

leger, n., lying down, sick [licgan].

lęng, see lǫnge.

long, see length.

lęngra, see lǫng.

lęngra, see lǫng.

lēod, m., prince, chief.

lēod, m., leader, chief.

lēod, f., people, nation (the plural has the same meaning).

lēod, f., people, nation (the plural has the same meaning).

lēod-scipe, m., nation [people-ship].

lēod-scipe, m., nation [people-ship].

lēof, dear [lief].

dear, dear [lief].

leoht, adj., light.

leoht, adj., light.

lēoht, n., light, brightness.

light, n., brightness.

leornere, m., learner, disciple.

learner, disciple.

leornian (§ 130), learn.

learn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), learn.

leornung (liornung), f., learning.

learning

lēoð, n., song [lay?].

lēoð, n., song [lay].

lēoðcræft, m., poetic skill [lay-craft].

lēoðcræft, m., poetry skill [lay-craft].

lēoðsǫng, n., song, poem.

lēoðsǫng, n., song, poem.

lēt, see lǣtan.

let, see let.

libban (§ 133), live; pres. part., lifigende, living, alive.

libban (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), live; pres. part., lifigende, living, alive.

174

līc, n., body, corpse [lich-gate, Lichfield].

līc, n., body, corpse [lich-gate, Lichfield].

licgan (§ 115, Note 2), lie, extend, flow, lie dead;

lie (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), extend, flow, lie still;

3d sing. indic. pres., ligeð, līð.

3rd sing. indic. pres., ligeð, līð.

līchama (-hǫma), m., body [body-covering].

līchama (-hǫma), m., body [body covering].

līcian (§ 130), please (with dat.) [like].

like (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), please (with dat.) [like].

līc-sār, n., body-sore, wound in the body.

līc-sār, n., body ache, body wound.

līefan (lēfan) (§ 126), permit, allow (with dat.) [grant leave to].

līefan (lēfan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), permit, allow (with dat.) [grant leave to].

līf, n., life.

life, n., life.

līf-dagas, m. pl., life-days.

life days, m. pl., life days.

lifigende, see libban.

lifigende, see libban.

līg, m., flame, fire.

līg, m., flame, fire.

ligeð, see licgan.

lie, see lie down.

lim, n., limb.

lim, n., limb.

list, f., cunning; dat. pl., listum, is used adverbially = cunningly.

list, f., cunning; dat. pl., listum, is used adverbially = cunningly.

līð, see licgan.

līð, see lie.

lof, m., praise, glory.

lof, n., praise, glory.

lǫnd (land), n., land, country.

land, n., land, country.

lǫng (lang) (§ 96, (2)), long.

long (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), long.

lǫnge (lange) (§ 97, (2)), long;

long

lǫnge on dæg, late in the day.

long on day, late in the day.

lufan, see lufu.

lufan, check out lufu.

lufian (lufigean) (§ 131), love.

lufian (lufigean) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), love.

luflīce, lovingly.

sweetly, lovingly.

lufu, f., love; dat. sing. (weak), lufan.

lufu, f., love; dat. sing. (weak), lufan.

lungre, quickly.

lungre, fast.

lust, m., joy [lust];

desire, m., joy [desire];

on lust, joyfully.

on desire, happily.

lȳt, indeclinable, little, few (with partitive gen.).

lȳt, indeclinable, little, few (with partitive gen.).

lȳtel (lītel) (§ 96, (2)), little, small.

little, small.

M.

, see micle (§ 97, (2)).

, check out micle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

174b

mæg, see magan.

mæg, see magan.

mǣg, m., kinsman; nom. pl., māgas (§ 27, (2)).

mǣg, m., kinsman; nom. pl., māgas (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

mægen n., strength, power [might and main].

mægen n., strength, power [might and main].

mægen-ęllen, n., main strength, mighty courage.

mægen-ęllen, n., main strength, mighty courage.

mǣgð, f., tribe.

mǣgð, f., clan.

mægðhād, m., maidenhood, virginity.

mægðhād, m., maidenhood, virginity.

mǣl-gesceaft, f., appointed time [mǣl = meal, time].

mǣl-gesceaft, f., appointed time [mǣl = meal, time].

mǣran (§ 126), make famous, honor.

mǣran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), promote, honor.

mǣre, famous, glorious, notorious.

mǣre, famous, glorious, infamous.

mǣrðo (mǣrðo, mǣrð), f., glory, fame.

mǣrðo (mǣrðo, mǣrð), f., glory, fame.

mæsseprēost, m., mass-priest.

mass priest, m., mass priest.

mǣst, see micel.

most, see big.

magan (§ 137), be able, may.

magan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), able, might.

māgas, see mǣg.

māgas, see mǣg.

magu (mago), m., son, man.

magu (mago), m., son, man.

maguðegn, m., vassal, retainer.

maguðegn, m., vassal, retainer.

man(n), see mǫn(n).

man, see moon.

mancus, m., mancus, half-crown; gen. pl., mancessa.

mancus, m., mancus, half-crown; gen. pl., mancessa.

māndǣd, f., evil deed.

māndǣd, f., malicious act.

manig, see mǫnig.

many, see many.

manigfeald, see mǫnigfeald.

manifold, see multifold.

māra, see micel.

mara, see micel.

maðelian (§ 130), harangue, speak.

maðelian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), rant, talk.

māðum (māððum), m., gift, treasure, jewel; gen. pl., māðma.

māðum (māððum), m., gift, treasure, jewel; gen. pl., māðma.

māððumgyfa, m., treasure-giver, lord.

māððumgyfa, m., treasure-distributor, lord.

māððum-wela, m., wealth of treasure.

māððum-wela, m., treasure wealth.

, see ic.

mē, see ic.

meaht, f., might, power.

might, f., strength, power.

meahte, see magan.

meahte, see magan.

175

mearc, f., boundary, limit [mark, march].

mearc, f., boundary, limit [mark, march].

mearg (mearh), m., horse; nom. pl., mēaras.

mearg (mearh), m., horse; nom. pl., mēaras.

mearð, m., marten.

mearð, m., marten.

mec, see ic.

me, see I see.

medmicel, moderately large, short, brief.

medmicel, medium-sized, short, brief.

medu (medo), m., mead.

medu (medo), m., mead.

medu-bęnc, f., mead-bench.

mead-bench, f., mead-bench.

medu-ful, n., mead-cup.

medu-ful, n., mead cup.

medu-heall, f., mead-hall.

mead-hall, f., mead-hall.

męn, see mǫn(n).

men, see mǫn(n).

męngan (§ 127), mingle, mix.

mingle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), mingle, mix.

męnigu (męnigeo), f., multitude [many].

męnigu (męnigeo), f., multitude [many].

męnniscnes, f., humanity, incarnation [man].

męnniscnes, f., humanity, human form [man].

meolc, f., milk.

meolc, f., milk.

Mēore, Möre (in Sweden).

Mēore, Möre (in Sweden).

męre, m., lake, mere, sea [mermaid].

mere, m., lake, mere, sea [mermaid].

Meretūn, m., Merton (in Surrey).

Meretūn, m., Merton (in Surrey).

mētan (§ 126), meet, find.

mētan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), meet, discover.

Metod (Meotod, Metud), m., Creator, God.

Metod (Meotod, Metud), m., Creator, God.

metod-sceaft, f., appointed doom, eternity.

metod-sceaft, f., destined fate, eternity.

micel (§ 96, (3)), great, mighty, strong, large [mickle];

micel (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), great, mighty, strong, huge [mickle];

māra, more, stronger, larger.

house, more, stronger, larger.

micle (micele), greatly, much.

micle (micele), really, a lot.

miclum, (§ 93, (4)), greatly.

miclum, (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), awesome.

mid, with, amid, among (with dat. and acc.).

mid, with, amid, among (with dat. and acc.).

middangeard, m., earth, world [middle-yard].

middangeard, m., earth, world [middle-earth].

middeweard, midward, toward the middle.

middeweard, midward, toward the center.

Mierce, m. pl., Mercians.

Mierce, m. pl., Mercians.

mihte, see magan.

might, see might.

mīl, f., mile [Lat. mille].

mile, f., mile [Lat. mille].

175b

mildheortnes, f., mild-heartedness, mercy.

mildheortnes, f., compassion, mercy.

milts, f., mildness, mercy.

milts, f., gentleness, compassion.

mīn (§ 76), my, mine.

mine (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), my, mine.

mislīc, various.

mislead, various.

missenlīc, various.

missenlīc, various.

mōd, n., mood, mind, courage.

mood, mind, courage.

mōdcearig, sorrowful of mind.

mōdcearig, sad.

mōdega, mōdga, see mōdig.

mōdega, mōdga, see mōdig.

mōdgeðanc, m., purpose of mind.

mōdgeðanc, m., thoughtfulness.

mōdig, moody, brave, proud.

courageous, moody, brave, proud.

mōdor, f., mother.

mom, f., mother.

mōdsefa, m., mind, heart.

mōdsefa, m., mind, heart.

mǫn(n) (man, mann) (§ 68; § 70, Note), m., man, one, person, they.

mǫn(n) (man, mann) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), m., man, one, person, they.

mōna, m., moon.

mōna, m., moon.

mōnað (§ 68, (1), Note), m., month [mōna]; dat. sing., mōnðe.

month (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m., month [mōna]; dat. sing., mōnðe.

mǫn(n)cynn, n., mankind.

mǫn(n)cynn, n., humanity.

mǫndryhten, m., liege lord.

liege lord

mǫnian (manian) (§ 130), admonish.

mǫnian (manian) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), warn.

mǫnig (manig, mǫneg, mænig), many.

many

mǫnigfeald (manig-), manifold, various.

mǫnigfeald (manig-), manifold, diverse.

mōnðe, see mōnað.

month, see month.

mōr, m., moor.

mōr, m., moor.

morgen, m., morning; dat. sing., morgen(n)e.

morning, m., morning; dat. sing., morning(e).

morðor-bealu (-bealo), n., murder [murder-bale];

murder-bealu (-bealo), n., murder [murder-curse];

see ðurfan.

see dürfan.

mōste, see mōtan.

mōste, see mōtan.

mōtan (§ 137), may, be permitted, must.

mōtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), may, be allowed, must.

mund-gripe, m., hand-grip.

hand grip

munuc, m., monk [Lat. monachus].

munuc, m., monk [Lat. monk].

munuchād, m., monkhood, monastic rank.

munuchād, m., monkhood, monastic status.

176

mūð, m., mouth.

mūð, m., mouth.

myntan (§ 127), be minded, intend; pret. indic. 3d sing., mynte.

myntan (§ 127), be aware, mean; past indicative 3rd singular, meant.

mynster, n., monastery [Lat. monasterium]; dat. sing., mynstre.

mynster, n., monastery [Lat. monasterium]; dat. sing., mynstre.

mȳre, f., mare [mearh].

mare, f., mare [mearh].

myrð, f., joy, mirth;

myrð, f., joy, happiness;

mōdes myrðe 142, 17 = with joy of heart.

modes myrðe __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = with a joyful heart.

N.

(), not [ne ā = n-ever];

(), not [ne ā = n-ever];

nā ne, not, not at all.

no way, not, not at all.

nabban (p. 32, Note), not to have.

nabban (p. 32, Note), to lack.

nǣdre, f., serpent, adder.

, f., snake, viper.

næfde, see nabban.

næfde, see nabban.

nǣfre, never.

never

nǣnig (§ 77), no one, no, none.

nǣnig (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), no one, no, none.

nǣre, nǣren, nǣron, see § 40, Note 2.

nǣre, nǣren, nǣron, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

næs = ne wæs, see § 40, Note 2.

næs = wasn't, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

næss, m., ness, headland.

næss, m., ness, headland.

nāht, see nōht.

night, see nothing.

nālæs (nāles), not at all [nā ealles].

nālæs (nāles), not at all [nā ealles].

nam, see niman.

nam, see niman.

nama, see nǫma.

name, see nǫma.

nāmon, see niman.

nāmon, see niman.

nān, not one, no, none [ne ān].

nān, not one, no, none

nānwuht, n., nothing [no whit].

nānwuht, n., nothing [no way].

ne, not.

ne, not.

, nor;

nē, nor;

nē ... nē, neither ... nor.

neither ... nor

nēah (§ 96, (4)), near.

near (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

nēah, adv., nigh, near, nearly, almost; comparative, nēar, nearer.

near, adv., near, nearer

neaht, see niht.

nearest, see night.

nēalēcan (-lǣcan) (§ 126), draw near to, approach (with dat.).

nēalēcan (-lǣcan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), get closer to, come near (with dat.).

176b

nēar, see nēah, adv.

near, see nēah, adv.

nēat, n., neat, cattle.

cattle, n., neat.

nęmnan (§ 127), name.

nęmnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), name.

nemðe, (nymðe), except, unless.

nemðe, (nymðe), except, unless.

nęrian (§ 125), save, preserve.

nęrian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), save, maintain.

nēten, see nīeten.

nēten, see nīeten.

nīedbeðearf, needful, necessary.

nīedbeðearf, needful, necessary.

nīehst, see nēah (§ 96, (4)).

closest, see near (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

nīeten (nēten), n., neat, beast, cattle.

neaten (neaten), n., neat, beast, cattle.

nigontīene, nineteen.

nigontīene, 19.

niht (neaht) (§ 68, (1), Note), night.

niht (neaht) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), night.

nihthelm, m., night-helm, shade of night.

nihthelm, m., night-helm, dark of night.

nihtscūa, m., shadow of night.

nihtscūa, m., night shadow.

niht-weorc, n., night-work.

night work, n. night work.

niman (§ 114), take, gain [nimble, numb].

niman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grab, acquire [nimble, numb].

nīpan (§ 102), grow dark, darken.

nīpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grow dark, darken.

nis, see § 40, Note 2.

nis, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

nīð, m., malice, violence.

nīð, m., malice, violence.

nīwe, new, novel, startling.

new, new, novel, startling.

, see .

, see .

nōht (nāht, nā-wiht), n., not a whit, naught, nothing; not, not at all.

nōht (nāht, nā-wiht), n., not at all, nothing, zero; not, not in the least.

nōhwæðer (nāhwæðer), neither;

nōhwæðer (nāhwæðer), neither;

nōhwæðer nē ... ne ... nē ... ne 118, 8 = neither ... nor.

nōhwæðer nē ... ne ... nē ... ne 118, 8 = neither ... nor.

nolde, noldon = ne wolde, ne woldon, see willan.

nolde, noldon = would not, would not, see willan.

nǫma (nama), m., name.

nǫma (nama), m., name.

norð (§ 97, (1)), north, in the north, northwards.

northern (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), north, to the north, northbound.

norðan (§ 93, (5)), from the north;

from the north

be norðan, see § 94, (4).

to the north, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Norð-Dęne, m. pl., North-Danes.

North-Danes, m. pl., North-Danes.

norðeweard, northward.

northward

Norðhymbre, m. pl., Northumbrians.

Northumbrians.

Norðmanna, see Norðmǫn.

Norwegians, see Norðmǫn.

177

Norðmęn, see Norðmǫn.

Norðmęn, see Norðmǫn.

norðmest, see norð.

, see .

Norðmǫn (-man) (§ 68, (1)), Norwegian.

Norðmǫn (-man) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), Norwegian.

norðor, see norð.

norðor, see north.

norðryhte, northward.

northward

norðweard, northward.

northward

Norðweg, Norway.

Norway, Norway.

nose, f., cape, naze [ness, nose].

nose, f., cape, naze [ness, nose].

notu, f., office, employment.

notu, f., job, work.

, now; now that, seeing that;

now, now that, seeing that

nū ðā 138, 13 = now then.

now then __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = now then.

nȳhst (nīehst), see nēah.

nȳhst (nīehst), see nēah.

nymðe, see nemðe.

nymðe, see nemðe.

nysse, see nytan.

nysse, see nytan.

nyste, see nytan.

nyste, see nytan.

nyt(t), useful, profitable.

nyt(t), helpful, lucrative.

nytan (nitan < ne witan, § 136), not to know;

not knowing (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), not to know;

3d sing. pret., nysse, nyste.

3rd sing. pret., nysse, nyste.

O.

of (§ 94, (1)), of, from, concerning.

of (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), of, from, about.

ofer (§ 94, (2)), over, across, after, in spite of (see 144, 14);

offer (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), over, across, after, despite (see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__);

ofer eorðan 142, 9 = on earth.

on earth __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = on earth.

ofer, adv., over, across.

ofer, adv., over, across.

oferfēran (§ 126), go over, traverse.

oferfēran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), go over, traverse.

oferfrēosan (§ 109), freeze over.

oferfrēosan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), frozen over.

oferfroren, see oferfrēosan.

oferfroren, see oferfrēosan.

ofgiefan (§ 115), give up, relinquish.

ofgiefan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), give up, let go.

ofost, f., haste.

ofost, f., urgency.

ofslægen, see ofslēan.

ofslægen, see ofslēan.

ofslēan (§ 118), slay off, slay.

ofslēan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), slay off, slay.

ofslōge, see ofslēan.

ofslōge, see ofslēan.

oft, oft, often; superlative, oftost.

often; superlative, oftmost.

on (§ 94, (3)), in, into, on, against, to, among, during;

on (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in, into, on, against, to, among, during;

on fīf oððe 177b syx 109, 6 = into five or six parts;

on five or six 177b parts 109, 6 = into five or six parts;

on weg 140, 10 = away;

on weg __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = gone;

on innan 144, 5 = within;

on innan __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = inside;

on unriht 145, 15 = falsely.

on unriht __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = wrongly.

onbærnan (§ 126), kindle, inspire.

onbærnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ignite, inspire.

oncȳðð, f., distress, suffering.

oncȳðð, f., stress, pain.

ǫnd (and), and.

ǫnd (and), and.

ǫndsaca, m., adversary.

ǫndsaca, m., opponent.

ǫndswarian (§ 130), answer.

ǫndswarian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), response.

ǫndweard, adj., present.

ǫndweard, adj., now.

onfēng, see onfōn.

onfēng, see onfōn.

onfeohtan (§ 110), fight.

onfeohtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), battle.

onfindan (§ 110), find out, discover; pret. indic. 3d sing., onfunde.

onfindan (§ 110), find out, discover; past tense indicative third person singular, onfunde.

onfōn (§ 118), receive, seize violently.

phone (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), get, grab.

onfunde, see onfindan.

onfunde, see onfindan.

ongēan, prep., against, towards (with dat. and acc.).

ongēan, prep., against, towards (with dat. and acc.).

ongēan, adv., just across, opposite.

ongēan, adv., across, opposite.

Ǫngelcynn (Angel-), n., Angle kin, English people, England.

Ǫngelcynn (Angel-), n., Angle kin, English People, England.

Ǫngelðēod (Angel-), f., the English people or nation.

Ǫngelðēod (Angel-), f., the English people or nation.

ongemang (-mǫng), among (with dat.).

ongemang (-mǫng), among (with dat.).

ongietan (-gitan) (§ 115), perceive, see, understand.

ongietan (-gitan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), perceive, see, understand.

onginnan (§ 110), begin, attempt.

onginnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), start, try.

onlūtan (§ 109), bow, incline (intrans.) [lout = a stooper].

ignore (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bow, lean (intrans.) [lout = a stooper].

onrīdan (§ 102), ride against, make a raid on.

onrīdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), raid

onsęndan (§ 127), send.

onsęndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), send.

onslǣpan (onslēpan) (§ 126), fall asleep, sleep.

onslǣpan (onslēpan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fall asleep, sleep.

onspǫnnan (§ 117), loosen [unspan]; pret. 3d sing. indic., onspēon.

onspǫnnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), loosen [unspan]; past tense 3rd person singular, onspēon.

onspringan (§ 110), spring apart, unspring.

onspringan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), spring apart, unspring.

178

onstāl, m., institution, supply.

onstāl, m., institution, provision.

onstęllan (§ 128), establish; pret. 3d sing. indic., onstealde.

onstęllan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), establish; past tense 3rd person singular, onstealde.

onwæcnan (§ 127), awake (intrans.).

wake up (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), awake (intrans.).

onweald (-wald), m., power, authority [wield].

onweald (-wald), m., power, authority [wield].

onwęndan (§ 127), change, overturn [to wind].

onwęndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), change, overturn [to wind].

ōr, n., beginning.

ōr, n., start.

(§ 94, (2)), until, as far as (of time and place);

(§ 94, (2)), until, as far as (in terms of time and place);

oð ðæt, oð ðe, until.

or that, or the, until.

oðberan (§ 114), bear away.

oðberan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), carry away.

ōðer, other, second;

other, second

ōðer ... ōðer, the one ... the other.

other ... other, the one ... the other.

oðfæstan (§ 127), set to (a task).

oðfæstan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), assigned (a task).

oðfeallan (§ 117) fall off, decline.

oðfeallan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__) fall off, decline.

oððe, or;

or, or;

oððe ... oððe, either ... or.

either ... or.

P.

plega, m., play, festivity.

plega, m., game, celebration.

port, m., port [Lat. portus].

port, m., port [Latin portus].

R.

rād, f., raid.

rād, f., raid.

rǣcan (§ 126), reach; pret. 3d sing., rǣhte.

rǣcan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), reach; pret. 3rd sing., rǣhte.

ræst, see ręst.

ræst, see ręst.

Rēadingas, m. pl., Reading (in Berkshire).

Rēadingas, m. pl., Reading (in Berkshire).

ręccan (§ 128), narrate, tell; pret. pl. indic., ręhton, reahton.

reckon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), narrate, tell; past plural indicative, reckon, recounted.

ręccelēas, reckless, careless.

reckless, reckless, careless.

ręced, n., house, hall.

ręced, n., home, entryway.

regnian (rēnian) (§ 130), adorn, prepare; past part., geregnad.

regnian (rēnian) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), decorate, get ready; past part., geregnad.

regollīc (-lec), according to rule, regular.

regollīc (-lec), by the rules, standard.

rēn-weard, m., mighty warden, guard, champion.

rēn-weard, m., powerful guardian, protector, hero.

178b

ręst (ræst), f., rest, resting-place, bed.

rest (ræst), f., rest, resting-place, bed.

rēðe, fierce, furious.

angry, intense, outraged.

rīce, rich, powerful, aristocratic.

wealthy, rich, powerful, aristocratic.

rīce, n., realm, kingdom [bishopric].

rīce, n., realm, kingdom [bishopric].

rīcsian (§ 130), rule.

rich (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), rule.

rīdan (§ 102), ride.

ride (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ride.

rīman (§ 126), count [rime].

rīman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), count [rhyme].

rinc, m., man, warrior.

rinc, m., man, fighter.

rōd, f., rood, cross;

rod, f., rood, cross;

rōde tācen, sign of the cross.

cross sign, sign of the cross.

Rōmware, m. pl., Romans.

Rōmware, m. pl., Romans.

rǫnd (rand), m., shield.

rǫnd (rand), m., shield.

rūn, f., rune, secret meditation [to round = to whisper].

rūn, f., rune, secret meditation [to round = to whisper].

rycene (ricene), quickly, rashly.

rycene (ricene), swiftly, impulsively.

ryhtnorðanwind, m., straight north-wind.

ryhtnorðanwind, m., north wind.

S.

, f., sea.

, f., ocean.

sǣ-bāt, m., sea-boat.

sǣ-bāt, m., boat.

sǣd, n., seed.

seed, n., seed.

sǣde, see sęcgan.

, see .

sǣl, m., f., time, happiness [sil-ly];

sǣl, m., f., time, happiness [silly];

on sǣlum 137, 22 = joyous, merry.

on sǣlum __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = joyful, cheerful.

sǣlan (§ 126), bind.

sail (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), bind.

sǣ-līðend (§ 68, (3)), m., seafarer (nom. and acc. pl. same as nom. and acc. sing.).

sǣ-līðend (§ 68, (3)), m., seafarer (nominative and accusative plural form is the same as nominative and accusative singular).

sam ... sam, whether ... or.

sam ... sam, whether ... or.

same, similarly;

same, similarly;

swā same, just the same, in like manner.

same, just the same, in the same way.

samod, see sǫmod.

samod, see sǫmod.

sanct, m., f., saint [Lat. sanctus]; gen. sing., sanctæ, f., sancti, m.

sanct, m., f., saint [Lat. sanctus]; gen. sing., sanctæ, f., sancti, m.

sang, see sǫng.

sang, see sǫng.

sār, f., n., sore, pain, wound.

sār, f., n., ache, hurt, injury.

sār, adj., sore, grievous.

sār, adj., hurt, serious.

sāre, sorely.

sore, sorely.

179

sāwan (§ 117,) sow.

sow (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,) sow.

sāwol, f., soul; oblique cases, sing., sāwle (§ 39, Note).

sāwol, f., soul; oblique cases, sing., sāwle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

scacan (sceacan) (§ 116), shake, go, depart; past part., scacen, sceacen.

scacan (sceacan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), shake, go, leave; past part., scacen, sceacen.

scadu-helm, m., cover of night, shadow-covering [shadow-helm];

scadu-helm, m., night cover, shadow cover [shadow-helm];

scadu-helma gesceapu, see Note on 138, 2-6.

Scadu-helma gesceapu, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

sceal, see sculan.

sceal, see sculan.

scēap, n., sheep.

sheep, n.

scēat, m., corner, region, quarter [sheet];

corner

eorðan scēatta 139, 14 = in the regions of earth (gen. used as locative).

eorðan scēatta 139, 14 = in the areas of the earth (gen. used as locative).

scēawi(g)an (§ 130), view, see [shew].

scēawi(g)an (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), view, see [show].

scēawung, f., seeing.

scēawung, f., sight.

sceolde, see sculan.

should, see shall.

scēop (scōp), see scieppan.

scēop (scōp), see scieppan.

scēowyrhta, m., shoe-maker.

shoemaker, m.

scęððan (§ 116), injure, scathe (with dat.).

scęððan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), injure, scathe (with dat.).

scieppan (§ 116), create.

scieppan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), make.

Scieppend, m., Creator.

Scieppend, m., Creator.

scīnan (§ 102), shine.

scīnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), shine.

scip (scyp), n., ship.

scip (scyp), n., ship.

scipen, n., stall.

scipen, n., delay.

sciprāp, m., ship-rope, cable.

sciprāp, m., ship rope, cable.

scīr, f., shire, district.

shire, district

Sciringeshēal, m., Sciringesheal (in Norway).

Sciringeshēal, n., Sciringesheal (in Norway).

scolde, see sculan.

scold, see sculan.

scǫmu, f., shame, dishonor.

scǫmu, f., shame, disgrace.

Scōnēg, f., Skaane (southern district of the Scandinavian peninsula).

Scōnēg, f., Skaane (southern area of the Scandinavian peninsula).

scopgereord, n., poetic language.

scopgereord, n., poetic expression.

scrīðan (§ 102), stride, stalk.

slide (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), stride, stalk.

sculan (§ 136; § 137, Note 2), shall, have to, ought.

sculan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), will, must, should.

179b

Scyldingas, m. pl., Scyldings, Danes.

Scyldings, Danes.

scyp, see scip.

scyp, see scip.

Scyppend, see Scieppend.

Scyppend, see Scieppend.

, sēo, ðæt (§ 28; § 28, Note 3), the; that; he, she, it; who, which, that;

sē, sēo, ðæt (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), the; that; he, she, it; who, which, that;

ðæs, from then, afterwards, therefore;

that, from then, afterwards, therefore;

ðæs ðe (p. 110, l. 2), with what;

that (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), with what;

ðȳ ... ðæt (p. 110, ll. 7-8), for this reason ... because;

that ... that (p. 110, ll. 7-8), for this reason ... because;

tō ðǣm ... swā, to such an extent ... as;

to the ... such, to such an extent ... as;

ðy (ðē), the (adverbial, with comparatives);

thy (thee), the (adverbial, with comparatives);

ðȳ ... ðȳ, the ... the.

the ... the, the ... the.

seah, see sēon.

seah, see see.

sealde, see sęllan.

sealed, see sell.

searo-gimm, m., artistic gem, jewel.

searo-gimm, n., artistic gem, jewel.

searo-nīð, m., cunning hatred, plot.

searo-nīð, m., clever malice, scheme.

searo-ðǫnc, m., cunning thought, device.

searo-ðǫnc, m., clever thought, tool.

Seaxe, m. pl., Saxons, Saxony.

Seaxe, m. pl., Saxons, Saxony.

sēc(e)an (§ 128), to seek, visit, meet.

sēc(e)an (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to search, visit, meet.

sęcg, m., man, warrior.

sęcg, m., man, fighter.

sęcgan (§ 132), say, tell.

sęcgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), say, tell.

sefa, m., mind, spirit.

sefa, m., mind, spirit.

sēfte, more easily (comparative of sōfte).

sēfte, more easily

segel, m., n., sail; dat. sing. = segle.

segel, m., n., sail; dat. sing. = segle.

seglian (§ 130), sail.

sea (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), navigate.

sęle, m., hall.

cell, m., hall.

sęledrēam, m., hall joy, festivity.

sęledrēam, m., celebration, festivity.

sęle-ful, n., hall cup.

sēlē-ful, n., hall cup.

sęlesęcg, m., hall warrior, retainer.

sēlesēcg, m., hall warrior, retainer.

sēlest, best (no positive).

worst, best (no positive).

self (sylf), self, himself (declined as strong or weak adjective).

self (sylf), self, himself (declined as strong or weak adjective).

180

sęllan (syllan) (§ 128), give [sell, han(d)sel].

sęllan (syllan) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), give [sell, hand over].

sęmninga, forthwith, straightway.

meaning, immediately, right away.

sęndan (§ 127), send.

send (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), send.

sēo, see .

sēo, see .

sēoc, sick.

sick, .

seofon (syfan), seven.

seofon (syfan), 7.

seolh, m., seal; gen. sing. = sēoles (§ 27, (3)).

seolh, m., seal; gen. sing. = sēoles (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

sēon (§ 118), see, look.

see (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), see, look.

seonu, f., sinew; nom. pl., seonowe.

seonu, f., sinew; nom. pl., seonowe.

sess, m., seat.

session, m., place.

sibb, f., friendship, peace [gossip].

sibb, f., friendship, peace [gossip].

sidu (siodu), m., custom, morality, good conduct.

sidu (siodu), m., custom, ethics, good behavior.

sīe, see bēon.

się, see being.

siex, six;

six, six;

syxa (siexa) sum, see sum.

syxa (siexa) sum, see sum.

siextig, sixty.

sixty, sixty.

sige, m., victory.

sige, m., win.

sige-folc, n., victorious people.

sige-folc, n., winning people.

sige-lēas, victory-less, of defeat.

victory-less, defeated.

sige-rōf, victory-famed, victorious.

sige-rōf, famous for victory, victorious.

sige-wǣpen, n., victory-weapon.

victory weapon, n.

siglan (§ 127), sail.

signal (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), set sail.

Sillende, Zealand.

Sillende, Zealand.

sinc, n., treasure, prize.

sinc, n., gem, reward.

sinc-fǣt, n., see 137, 1 [treasure-vat].

sinc-fǣt, n., see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ [treasure chest].

sinc-ðęgu, f., receiving of treasure [ðicgan].

sinc-ðęgu, f., treasure receiving [ðicgan].

sind, sint, sindon, see bēon.

sind, sint, sindon, see be.

singan (§ 110), sing.

singing (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sing.

sittan (§ 115, Note 2), sit, take position.

sit (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sit, take a seat.

sīð, m., journey, time;

sīð, m., journey, time;

forman sīðe 139, 2 = the first time (instr. sing.).

first time __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = the first time (singular instrumental).

sīðian (§ 130), journey.

journey (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), trip.

siððan, after that, afterwards, after.

after

180b

slǣp, m., sleep.

sleep, m., sleep.

slǣpan (§ 117), sleep.

slǣpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sleep.

slēan (§ 118), slay [slow-worm].

lean (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), slay [slow-worm].

slītan (§ 102), slit, tear to pieces.

slītan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), slit, tear apart.

slīðen, savage, perilous.

slick, wild, dangerous.

smæl, narrow.

small, narrow.

smalost, see smæl.

smalost, see smæl.

snāw, m., snow.

snow

snot(t)or, wise, prudent.

snot(t)or, smart, cautious.

sōhte, see sēcan.

sōhte, see sēcan.

sǫmod (samod), together.

sǫmod (samod), together.

sōna, soon.

sōna, soon.

sǫng, m., n., song, poem.

song, m., n., song, poem.

sǫngcræft, m., art of song and poetry.

sǫngcræft, m., the art of singing and poetry.

sorg (sorh), f., sorrow.

sorg (sorh), f., sadness.

sōð, true.

true, true.

sōð, n., truth;

sōð, n., truth;

tō sōðe, for a truth, truly, verily.

to be honest, for real, really, honestly.

sōð-fæst, truthful, just.

soðfast, truthful, just.

sōðlīce, truly.

truly.

spēd, f., possessions, success, riches [speed].

spēd, f., wealth, success, riches [speed].

spēdig, rich, prosperous.

wealthy, rich, thriving.

spell, n., story, tale [gospel].

spell, n., story, tale [gospel].

spēow, see spōwan.

spēow, see spōwan.

spere, n., spear.

spear, n., spear.

spor, n., track, footprint.

spor, n., track, footprint.

spōwan (§ 117), succeed (impersonal with dat.).

spōwan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to succeed (impersonal with dat.).

sprǣc, f., speech, language.

sprǣc, f., speech, language.

sprecan (§ 115), speak.

speaking (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), speak.

spyrian (spyrigean) (§ 130), follow (intrans.) [spor].

spyrian (spyrigean) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), follow (intrans.) [spor].

stæf, staff, rod; pl. = literature, learning.

staff, staff, rod; pl. = literature, learning.

stælhrān, m., decoy-reindeer.

stælhrān, m., decoy reindeer.

stælwierðe, serviceable (see p. 56, Note 2).

stælwierðe, useful (see p. 56, Note 2).

stǣr, n., story, narrative [Lat. historia].

stǣr, n., story, narrative [Lat. historia].

stæð, n., shore.

stæð, n., shore.

181

stān, m., stone, rock.

stone, m., stone, rock.

stān-boga, m., stone-arch [stone-bow].

stān-boga, m., stone bow.

standan, see stǫndan.

standan, see stǫndan.

stānhlið (-hleoð), n., stone-cliff.

stānhlið (-hleoð), n., stone cliff.

stapol, m., column [staple].

stapol, n., staple [staple].

starian (§ 125), stare, gaze.

starian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), stare, look.

stęde, m., place.

place, m., location.

stelan (§ 114), steal.

steal (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), steal.

stęnt, see stǫndan.

stęnt, see stǫndan.

stēorbord, n., starboard, right side of a ship.

starboard, n., starboard, right side of a ship.

stęppan (§ 116), step, advance; pret. indic. 3d sing., stōp.

stęppan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), step, advance; past tense, 3rd person singular, stōp.

stilnes, f., stillness, quiet.

stillness, f., stillness, quiet.

stǫndan (§ 116), stand.

stand (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), stand.

stōp, see stęppan.

stop, see step.

storm, m., storm.

storm, n., storm.

stōw, f., place [stow, and in names of places].

stōw, f., place [stow, and in the names of places].

strang, see strǫng.

strang, see strǫng.

stręngest, see strǫng.

strongest, see strong.

strǫng (§ 96, (2)), strong.

strong (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), strong.

styccemǣlum, here and there.

styccemǣlum, here and there.

sum (§ 91, Note 2), some, certain, a certain one;

total (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), some, specific, one specific;

hē syxa sum 104, 25 = he with five others.

he syxa sum 104, 25 = he with five others.

sumera, see sumor.

sumera, check out sumor.

sumor, m., summer; dat. sing. = sumera.

sumor, m., summer; dat. sing. = sumera.

sumorlida, m., summer-army.

sumorlida, m., summer squad.

sundor, apart.

split, apart.

sunne, f., sun.

sun, f., sun.

sunu, m., son.

son, m., son.

sūð, south, southwards.

south

sūðan (§ 93, (5)), from the south;

sūðan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), from the south;

be sūðan, south of (§ 94, (4)).

south of (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

sūðeweard, southward.

southward

sūðryhte, southward.

southward

swā (swǣ), so, as, how, as if;

so, as, how, as if;

swā swā, just as, as far as;

so so, just like, as far as;

181b

swā ... swā, the ... the, as ... as;

so ... so, the ... the, as ... as;

swā hwæt swā, whatsoever (§ 77, Note).

whatever (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

swǣs, beloved, own.

sweets, loved one, mine.

swæð, n., track, footprint [swath].

swath, n., track, footprint [swath].

swaðul, m.? n.?, smoke.

swaðul, m.? n.?, smoke.

swealh, see swelgan.

swealh, see swelgan.

swefan (§ 115), sleep, sleep the sleep of death.

swefan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sleep, eternal sleep.

swefn, n., sleep, dream.

swefn, n., sleep, dream.

swēg, m., sound, noise.

sweg, m., sound, noise.

swegle, bright, clear.

toss, vivid, transparent.

swēlan (§ 126), burn [sweal].

swēlan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), burn [sweal].

swelgan (§ 110), swallow; pret. indic. 3d sing., swealh; subj., swulge.

swelgan (§ 110), swallow; past indicative 3rd singular, swealh; subjunctive, swulge.

swellan (§ 110), swell.

cool (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), awesome.

Swēoland, n., Sweden.

Sweden, n., Sweden.

Swēom, m., dat. pl., the Swedes

Swedes

sweotol, clear.

sweotol, transparent.

sweotole, clearly.

sweotole, obviously.

swęrian (§ 116), swear.

swęrian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), swear.

swēte, sweet.

sweet

swētnes (-nis), f., sweetness.

sweetness

swift (swyft), swift.

swift (swyft), quick.

swilc (swylc) (§ 77), such.

swilc (swylc) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), like that.

swilce, in such manner, as, likewise; as if, as though (with subj.).

swilce, in that way, as, also; as if, as though (with subj.).

swimman (§ 110), swim.

swimmer (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), swim.

swīn (swȳn), n., swine, hog.

swine, hog

swīnsung, f., melody, harmony.

swīnsung, f., tune, harmony.

swīðe (swȳðe), very, exceedingly, greatly.

very, exceedingly, greatly.

swīðost, chiefly, almost.

most, mainly, nearly.

swōr, see swęrian.

swore, see swear.

swulge, see swelgan.

swulge, see swelgan.

swuster (§ 68, (2)), f., sister.

swuster (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), f., sister.

swylce (swelce), see swilce.

swylce (swelce), see swilce.

swȳn, see swīn.

swīn, see swīn.

swynsian (§ 130), resound.

swynsian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), echo.

182

swȳðe, see swīðe.

very, see very.

swȳð-ferhð, strong-souled.

strong-souled.

sylf, see self.

sylf, see self.

syll, f., sill, floor.

syll, f., sill, floor.

syllan, see sęllan.

syllan, see sęllan.

symbel, n., feast, banquet.

symbel, n., feast, gathering.

symle, always.

smile, always.

synd, see bēon.

synd, see be.

syn-dolh, n., ceaseless wound, incurable wound.

syn-dolh, n., endless wound, untreatable wound.

syndriglīce, specially.

syndriglīce, especially.

synn, f., sin.

sin, noun, sin.

syn-scaða, m., ceaseless scather, perpetual foe.

syn-scaða, m., relentless scather, eternal foe.

syn-snǣd, f., huge bit [ceaseless bit].

syn-snǣd, f., massive piece [endless piece].

syððan, see siððan.

syððan, see siððan.

syx, see siex.

syx, check out siex.

syxtig, see siextig.

sixty, see sixty.

T.

tācen, n., sign, token; dat. sing., tācne (§ 33, Note).

tācen, n., sign, token; dat. sing., tācne (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

tǣcan (§ 128), teach.

teach (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), teach.

tam, tame.

tam, tame.

tela, properly, well [til].

screen, accurately, correctly [til].

tęllan (§ 128), count, deem [tell]; pret. 3d sing., tealde.

tell (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), count, consider [tell]; past tense 3rd sing., told.

Tęmes, f., the Thames.

Thames, f., the Thames.

tēon, arrange, create; pret. sing., tēode.

tēon, arrange, create; past simple, tēode.

Terfinna, m., gen. pl., the Terfins.

Terfinna, m., gen. pl., the Terfins.

tēð, see tōð.

tēð, see tooth.

tīd, f., tide, time, hour.

tide, f., time, hour.

tīen (tȳn), ten.

tīen (tȳn), ten.

til(l), good.

until, great.

tīma, m., time.

time, m., time.

tintreglīc, full of torment.

tintreglīc, full of suffering.

(§ 94, (1)), to, for, according to, as;

(__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to, for, according to, as;

tō hrōfe 114, 2 = for (as) a roof [cf. Biblical to wife, modern to boot].

tō hrōfe 114, 2 = for (as) a roof [cf. Biblical to wife, modern to boot].

182b

, adv., too.

too

tōbrecan (p. 81, Note 2), break to pieces, knock about.

tōbrecan (p. 81, Note 2), break into pieces, toss around.

tōdǣlan (§ 126), divide.

tōdǣlan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), split.

tōemnes (tō emnes) (§ 94, (4)), along, alongside.

tōemnes (tō emnes) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), with, beside.

tōforan (§ 94, (1)), before.

tōforan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), prior.

tōgeðēodan (§ 126), join.

tōgeðēodan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), connect.

tōhopa, m., hope.

tōhopa, m., hope.

tōlicgan (§ 115, Note 2), separate, lie between;

tōlicgan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), split, lie in between;

3d sing, indic. = tōlīð.

3d sing, indic. = tōlīð.

tōlīð, see tōlicgan.

tōlīð, see tōlicgan.

tolūcan (§ 109, Note 1), destroy [the prefix reverses the meaning of lūcan, to lock].

tolūcan (§ 109, Note 1), destroy [the prefix changes the meaning of lūcan, to lock].

torn, m., anger, insult.

torn, m., frustration, offense.

tōð (§ 68, (1)), m., tooth.

tooth (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n.

tōweard (§ 94, (1)), toward.

toward (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), toward.

tōweard, adj., approaching, future.

tōweard, adj., coming, upcoming.

trēow, f., pledge, troth.

trēow, f., commitment, promise.

trēownes, f., trust.

trēownes, f., trust.

Trūsō, Drausen (a city on the Drausensea).

Trūsō, Drausen (a city on the Drausen Sea).

tūn, m., town, village.

tūn, m., town, village.

tunge, f., tongue.

tunge, f., tongue.

tūngerēfa, m., bailiff [town-reeve; so sheriff = shire-reeve].

tūngerēfa, m., bailiff [town-reeve; so sheriff = county-representative].

tungol, n., star.

tungol, n., star.

twā, see twēgen.

twā, see twēgen.

twēgen, (§ 89), two, twain.

two, (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), two, two.

twēntig, twenty.

twenty

tȳn, see tīen.

tȳn, see tīen.

Ð.

ðā, then, when;

then;

ðā ... ðā, when ... then;

then ... now, when ... then;

ðā ðā, then when = when.

then when = when.

ðā, see .

Then, see see.

ðǣr, there, where;

there, where;

ðǣr ðǣr, there where = where;

where

ðǣr ... 183 swā 142, 4 = wheresoever; 145, 6 = if so be that.

there ... 183 so __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = wherever; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ = if that’s the case.

ðæs, afterwards, therefore, thus, because;

that, later, so, therefore, because;

see .

see .

ðæt (ðætte = ðæt ðe), that, so that.

that (that = that the), that, so that.

ðafian (§ 130), consent to.

approve (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), consent to.

ðanc, see ðǫnc.

then, see thence.

ðancian (ðǫncian) (§ 130), thank.

(__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ðanon, see ðǫnan.

then, see then.

ðās, see ðēs.

these, see these.

ðē, see (instr. sing.) and ðū.

the, see (instr. sing.) and you.

ðe (§ 75), who, whom, which, that.

the (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), who, whom, which, that.

ðēah, though, although;

though

ðēah ðe, though, although.

though, although

ðearf, see ðurfan.

dear, see need.

ðearf, f., need, benefit.

dearf, f., need, benefit.

ðēaw, m., habit, custom [thews].

thews, m., habit, custom.

ðegn (ðegen), m., servant, thane, warrior.

ðegn (ðegen), m., servant, thane, warrior.

ðęnc(e)an (§ 128), think, intend.

decent (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), think, mean.

ðening (-ung), f., service;

Setting (-ing), f., service;

the pl. may mean book of service (117, 17).

the pl. may mean book of service (117, 17).

ðēod, f., people, nation.

ðēod, f., people, nation.

ðēoden, m., prince, lord.

theoden, m., prince, lord.

ðēodscipe, m., discipline.

ðēodscipe, m., discipline.

ðēon (ðȳwan) (§ 126), oppress [ðēow].

throne (throne) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), oppress [servant].

ðēow, m., servant.

theow, m., servant.

ðēowa, m., servant.

theow, m., servant.

ðēowotdōm (ðīowot-), m., service.

servitude (service-), m., service.

ðēs (§ 73), this.

these (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), this.

ðider, thither.

there, there.

ðiderweard, thitherward.

there, toward there.

ðīn (§ 76), thine.

your (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), yours.

ðing, n., thing;

thing, n., thing;

ǣnige ðinga, see 140, 15, Note.

Any things, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

ðingan (§ 127), arrange, appoint.

thing (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), organize, assign.

183b

ðis, see ðēs.

this, see these.

ðissum, see ðēs.

this, see these.

ðōhte, ðōhton, see ðęncean.

thought, thoughts, see thinking.

ðolian (§ 130), endure [thole].

ðolian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), persist [thole].

ðǫnan, thence.

there, from there.

ðǫnc, m., thanks.

Thanks, m., thanks.

ðone, see .

that, see this.

ðonne, than, then, when;

then, than, then, when;

ðonne ... ðonne, when ... then.

when ... then, when ... then.

ðrāg, f., time.

ðrāg, f., time.

ðrēa-nȳd, f., compulsion, oppression, misery [throe-need].

throe-need, f., compulsion, oppression, misery

ðrēora, see ðrīe.

ðrēora, see ðrīe.

ðridda, third.

third.

ðrie (ðrȳ) (§ 89), three.

three (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), three.

ðrīm, see ðrīe.

ðrīm, see ðrīe.

ðrīst-hȳdig, bold-minded.

drisht-hydeg, confident.

ðrītig, thirty.

30, thirty.

ðrōwung, f., suffering.

ðrōwung, f., anguish.

ðrȳ, see ðrīe.

ðrȳ, see ðrīe.

ðrym(m), m., renown, glory, strength.

ðrym(m), m., fame, glory, power.

ðrȳð, f., power, multitude (pl. used in sense of sing.);

thrīð, f., power, multitude (pl. used in the sense of sing.);

asca ðrȳðe 152, 23 = the might of spears.

asca ðrȳðe __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = the power of spears.

ðrȳð-ærn, n., mighty house, noble hall.

ðrȳð-ærn, n., great house, noble hall.

ðrȳð-word, n., mighty word, excellent discourse.

powerful word, n., mighty word, excellent discourse.

ðū (§ 72), thou.

you (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), thou.

ðūhte, see ðyncan.

thought, see thinking.

ðurfan (§ 136), need; pres. indic. 3d sing., ðearf; pret. 3d sing., ðorfte;

ðurfan (§ 136), need; pres. indic. 3rd sing., ðearf; pret. 3rd sing., ðorfte;

for-ðām mē wītan ne ðearf Waldend fīra morðor-bealo māga 145, 17 = therefore the Ruler of men need not charge me with the murder of kinsmen.

for-ðām mē wītan ne ðearf Waldend fīra morðor-bealo māga 145, 17 = therefore the Ruler of men need not charge me with the murder of kinsmen.

ðurh (§ 94, (2)), through.

through (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

ðus, thus.

thus

ðūsend, thousand.

thousand

184

ðȳ, see .

they, see see.

ðyder, see ðider.

there, see there.

ðyncan (§ 128), seem, appear (impersonal);

syncan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), seem, appear;

mē ðyncð, methinks, it seems to me;

I think

him ðūhte, it seemed to him.

him seemed

U.

ūhta, m., dawn; gen. pl., ūhtna.

ūhta, m., dawn; gen. pl., ūhtna.

unbeboht, unsold [bebycgan = to sell].

unbeboht, unsold [bebycgan = to sell].

uncūð, unknown, uncertain [uncouth].

unknown, uncertain, uncouth

under, under (with dat. and acc.).

under, under.

understǫndan (§ 116), understand.

understand (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), understand.

underðēodan (-ðīedan) (§ 126), subject to; past part. underðēoded = subjected to, obedient to (with dat.).

understand (-thied) (§ 126), subject to; past part. understood = subjected to, obedient to (with dat.).

unforbærned, unburned.

unburned, unburned.

unfrið, m., hostility.

unfrið, m., conflict.

ungefōge, excessively.

unfold, too much.

ungemete, immeasurably, very.

ungemete, immeasurable, extremely.

ungesewenlīc, invisible [past part. of sēon + līc].

invisible [past part. of see + -like].

unlyfigend, dead, dead man [unliving].

unlyfigend, deceased, deceased person [unliving].

unlȳtel, no little, great.

unlȳtel, not small, big.

unriht, n., wrong;

wrong

on unriht, see on.

on wrong, see on.

unrihtwīsnes, f., unrighteousness.

unrighteousness, f., unrighteousness.

unspēdig, poor.

unspēdig, struggling.

unwearnum, unawares.

uncomfortable, unaware.

ūp (ūpp), up.

up (upp), up.

ūpāstīgnes, f., ascension [stīgan].

ūpāstīgnes, f., ascension [stīgan].

ūp-lang, upright.

upright, standing.

ūre (§ 76), our.

ūre (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), our.

usses = gen. sing. neut. of ūser, see ic.

usses = general singular neuter of ūser, see ic.

184b

ūt, out, outside.

out, out, outside.

ūtan, from without, outside.

ūtan, from outside.

ūtanbordes, abroad.

ūtanbordes, overseas.

ūtgǫng, m., exodus.

ūtgoing, m., exodus.

uton, let us (with infin.) [literally let us go with infin. of purpose (see 137, 19-20, Note); uton = wuton, corrupted form of 1st pl. subj. of wītan, to go].

uton, let us (with infinitive) [literally let us go with infinitive of purpose (see 137, 19-20, Note); uton = wuton, corrupted form of 1st person plural subjunctive of wītan, to go].

ūt-weard, outward bound, moving outwards.

outward, heading out, moving away.

W.

wāc, weak, insignificant.

wack, weak, irrelevant.

wacian (§ 130), watch, be on guard; imperative sing., waca.

wacian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), watch, stay alert; imperative sing., waca.

wadan (§ 116), go, tread [wade].

wadan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), advance, walk [wade].

wǣg, m., wave.

wǣg, m., wave.

Wǣgmundigas, m. Wægmundings (family to which Beowulf and Wiglaf belonged).

Wǣgmundigas, m. Wægmundings (the family that Beowulf and Wiglaf were part of).

wæl, n., slaughter, the slain.

wæl, n., kill, the dead.

wæl-blēat, deadly [slaughter-pitiful].

wæl-blēat, deadly [bloodbath].

wælgīfre, greedy for slaughter.

wælgīfre, bloodthirsty.

wæl-rǣs, m., mortal combat [slaughter-race].

wæl-rǣs, m., death match [slaughter-race].

wæl-rēow, fierce in strife.

battle-ready, fierce in conflict.

wælsliht (-sleaht), m., slaughter.

wælsliht (-sleaht), m., slaughter.

wælstōw, f., battle-field [slaughter-place];

wælstōw, f., battlefield [slaughter-place];

wælstōwe gewald, possession of the battle-field.

battlefield control, possession of the battlefield.

wǣpen, n., weapon.

wǣpen, n., weapon.

wǣre, see bēon.

wǣre, see be.

wæs, see bēon.

was, see be.

wæter, n., water.

water, n., water.

waldend, see wealdend.

waldend, see wealdend.

wan (wǫn), wan, dark.

wan (wǫn), pale, dark.

wanhȳdig, heedless, rash.

reckless, careless, impulsive.

wānigean (wānian) (§ 130), bewail, lament (trans.) [whine].

wānigean (wānian) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), mourn, grieve (trans.) [whine].

185

warian (§ 130), attend, accompany.

warian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), join, come with.

wāt, see witan.

wāt, see witan.

waðum, m., wave; gen. pl., waðema.

wave, m.; gen. pl., wave's.

weal(l), m., wall, rampart.

weal, m., wall, rampart.

wealdend (§ 68, (3)), wielder, ruler, lord.

wealdend (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), champion, leader, lord.

wealh, m., foreigner, Welshman.

wealh, m., foreigner, Welsh.

wealhstōd, m., interpreter, translator.

wealhstōd, m., interpreter, translator.

weallan (§ 117), well up, boil, be agitated; pret. 3d. sing. indic., wēoll.

weallan (§ 117), well up, boil, be agitated; past tense 3rd person singular, indicative, wēoll.

wealsteal(l), m., wall-place, foundation.

wealsteal(l), n., wall spot, foundation.

weard, m., ward, keeper.

weard, m., ward, guard.

wearð, see weorðan.

was, see become.

weaxan (§ 117), wax, grow.

weaxan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), increase, develop.

weg, m., way;

way, m., way;

hys weges, see § 93, (3);

hys weges, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;

on weg, see on.

on the way, see on.

wel(l), well, readily.

well, well, readily.

wela, m., weal, prosperity, riches.

weal, m., prosperity, wealth.

welm, see wielm.

welm, see wielm.

wēnan (§ 126), ween, think, expect.

hope (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ween, think, expect.

węndan (§ 127), change, translate [wend, windan].

węndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), change, translate [wend, windan].

węnian (§ 130), entertain;

resistance (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), entertain;

węnian mid wynnum 149, 20 = entertain joyfully;

celebrate with joy __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = entertain joyfully;

węnede tō wiste 149, 27 = feasted (trans.).

wëne to wiste __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = feasted (trans.).

Weonodland (Weonoðland), n., Wendland.

Weonodland (Weonoðland), n., Wendland.

weorc, n., work, deed.

weorc, n., task, action.

weorold (weoruld), see woruld.

world, see world.

weorpan (§ 110), throw.

weorpan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), toss.

weorðan (§ 110), be, become.

become (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), be, become.

wer, m., man [werwulf].

wer, m., man [werewolf].

wērig, weary, dejected.

tired, weary, downcast.

werod, n., army, band.

werod, n., military, group.

wesan, see bēon.

wesan, see be.

185b

Wesseaxe, m. pl., West Saxons; gen. pl. = Wesseaxna.

Wesseaxe, m. pl., West Saxons; gen. pl. = Wesseaxna.

west, west, westward.

west, west, westward.

westanwind, m., west wind.

westanwind, m., westerly wind.

wēste, waste.

waste, waste.

wēsten, n., waste, desert.

wasteland, n., waste, desert.

Westsǣ, f., West Sea (west of Norway).

Westsǣ, f., West Sea (west of Norway).

Westseaxe, m. pl., West Saxons, Wessex.

West Saxons, m. pl., West Saxons, Wessex.

wīc, n., dwelling [bailiwick].

wīc, n., home [bailiwick].

wīcian (§ 130), stop, lodge, sojourn [wīc].

stay (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), stop, lodge, sojourn [wīc].

wīdre, adv., farther, more widely (comparative of wīde).

wider

wīdsǣ, f., open sea.

wīdsǣ, f., ocean.

wielm (welm), m., welling, surging flood [weallan].

wielm (welm), m., welling, surging flood [weallan].

wīf, n., wife, woman.

wife, n., wife, woman.

wīg, m., n., war, battle.

wīg, m., n., war, combat.

wiga, m., warrior.

wiga, m., fighter.

wild, wild.

crazy, crazy.

wildor, n., wild beast, reindeer; dat. pl. = wildrum (§ 33, Note).

wildor, n., wild beast, reindeer; dat. pl. = wildrum (§ 33, Note).

willa, m., will, pleasure; gen. pl., wilna (138, 16).

willa, m., will, pleasure; gen. pl., wilna (138, 16).

willan (§ 134; § 137, Note 3), will, intend, desire.

willan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), will, intend, want.

wilnung, f., wish, desire;

want, f., wish, desire;

for ðǣre wilnunga 119, 4 = purposely.

for the longing __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = intentionally.

Wiltūn, m., Wilton (in Wiltshire).

Wilton, m., Wilton (in Wiltshire).

wīn, n., wine.

, n., wine.

wīn-ærn, n., wine-hall.

wine-earn, n., wine-hall.

Wīnburne, f., Wimborne (in Dorsetshire).

Wīnburne, f., Wimborne (in Dorset).

wind, m., wind.

wind, n., wind.

wine, m., friend.

wine, m., buddy.

Winedas, m. pl., the Wends, the Wend country.

Winedas, m. pl., the Wends, the Wend country.

wine-dryhten, m., friendly lord.

wine-dryhten, m., friendly lord.

winelēas, friendless.

wine-less, friendless.

186

winemǣg, m., friendly kinsman.

winemǣg, m., friendly relative.

wīngeard, m., vineyard.

wine garden, m., vineyard.

winnan (§ 110), strive, fight [win].

win (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), strive, fight [win].

wīnsæl, n., wine-hall.

wine hall, n., wine hall.

wīn-sęle, m., wine-hall.

wine hall, m., wine hall.

winter, m., winter; dat. sing. = wintra.

winter, m., winter; dat. sing. = wintra.

wintercearig, winter-sad, winter-worn.

wintercare, winter-sad, winter-worn.

wīs, wise.

wise.

wīsdōm, m., wisdom.

wisdom, m., wisdom.

wīse, wisely.

wise, wisely.

wīse, f., manner, matter, affair [in this wise].

wise, f., manner, matter, affair [in this manner].

wīs-fæst, wise [wise-fast; cf. shame-faced = shamefast].

wīs-fæst, wise [wise; cf. shame-faced = shamefast].

wīs-hycgende, wise-thinking.

wise, thinking wisely.

Wīsle, f., the Vistula.

Wisła, f., the Vistula.

Wīslemūða, m., the mouth of the Vistula.

Wisla Mouth, m., the mouth of the Vistula.

wisse, see witan.

wisse, see witan.

wist, f., food, feast.

wist, f., meal, banquet.

wita, m., wise man, councillor.

wita, m., wise person, advisor.

witan (§ 136), know, show, experience.

witan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), know, show, experience.

wītan (§ 102), reproach, blame (with acc. of thing, dat. of person).

wītan (§ 102), criticize, assign blame (with accusative of thing, dative of person).

wīte, n., punishment.

wīte, n., punishment.

Wītland, n., Witland (in Prussia).

Witland, n., Witland (in Prussia).

wið (§ 94, (3)), against, toward, with;

wið94, (3)), against, toward, with;

wið ēastan and wið ūpp on emnlange ðǣm bȳnum lande, toward the east, and upwards along the cultivated land;

to the east and up along the cultivated land, toward the east, and upwards along the cultivated land;

wið earm gesæt 139, 11 = supported himself on his arm;

wið earm gesæt 139, 11 = propped himself up on his arm;

genęred wið nīðe (dat.) 143, 11 = had preserved it from (against) violence.

generated with malice (dat.) 143, 11 = had protected it from (against) harm.

wiðerwinna, m., adversary.

wiðerwinna, m., opponent.

186b

wiðfōn (§ 118), grapple with (with dat.).

wiðfōn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), grapple with (with dat.).

wiðhabban (§ 133), withstand, resist (with dat.).

withstand (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), withstand, resist (with dat.).

wiðstǫndan (§ 116), withstand, resist (with dat.).

withstand (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), withstand, resist (with dat.).

wlǫnc, proud.

wlǫnc, proud.

wōd, see wadan.

wōd, see wadan.

wolcen, n., cloud [welkin]; dat. pl., wolcnum.

wolcen, n., cloud [skies]; dat. pl., wolcnum.

wolde, see willan.

would, see want.

wōma, m., noise, alarm, terror.

wōma, m., sound, alert, fear.

wǫn, see wan.

wǫn, see wan.

wōp, n., weeping.

wōp, n., crying.

word, n., word.

word, n., word.

wōrian (§ 130), totter, crumble.

worry (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), totter, crumble.

worn, m., large number, multitude.

worn, m., large amount, crowd.

woruld, f., world;

world, f., world;

tō worulde būtan ǣghwilcum ęnde 102, 18 = world without end.

endless world __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ = endless world.

woruldcund, worldly, secular.

worldly, worldly, secular.

woruldhād, m., secular life [world-hood].

woruldhād, m., worldly life [world-hood].

woruldrīce, n., world-kingdom, world.

woruldrīce, n., kingdom of the world, world.

woruldðing, n., worldly affair.

woruldðing, n., worldly matter.

wræclāst, m., track or path of an exile.

wræclāst, m., the path or track of someone in exile.

wrāð, wroth, angry; foe, enemy.

wrāð, wroth, angry; foe, enemy.

wrītan (§ 102), write.

write (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), write.

wucu, f., week.

wucu, f., week.

wudu, m., wood, forest.

wudu, m., wood, forest.

wuldor, n., glory.

wuldor, n., glory.

Wuldorfæder (§ 68, (2)), m., Father of glory; gen. sing., Wuldorfæder.

Wuldorfæder (§ 68, (2)), m., Father of glory; gen. sing., Wuldorfæder.

Wuldur-cyning, m., King of glory.

Wuldur-cyning, m., King of Glory.

wulf, m., wolf.

wulf, m., wolf.

wund, f., wound.

wound, f., wound.

wund, wounded.

wund, injured.

187

wunden, twisted, woven, convolute (past part. of windan).

, twisted, woven, convoluted (past part. of windan).

wundor, n., wonder, marvel.

wonder, n., wonder, marvel.

wundrian (§ 130), wonder at (with gen.).

wundrian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wonder (with gen.).

wurdon, see weorðan.

wurdon, see become.

wurðan, see weorðan.

wurðan, see weorðan.

wylf, f., she wolf.

wylf, f., she-wolf.

wyllað, see willan.

want, see want.

wyn-lēas, joyless.

wyn-less, joyless.

wynn, f., joy, delight.

wynn, f., joy, delight.

wynsum, winsome, delightful.

wonderful, charming, delightful.

wyrc(e)an (§ 128), work, make, compose.

wyrc(e)an (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), create, build, compose.

wyrd, f., weird, fate, destiny.

wyrd, f., weird, fate, destiny.

wyrhta, m., worker, creator [-wright].

wright, m., worker, creator [-wright].

wyrm, m., worm, dragon, serpent.

wyrm, n., worm, dragon, serpent.

wyrmlīca, m., serpentine ornamentation.

wyrmlīca, m., snake ornament.

wyrð (weorð), worthy; see 114, 7-9, Note.

wyrð (weorð), worthy; see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

187b
Y.

ylca, see ilca.

ylca, check out ilca.

yldan (§ 127), delay, postpone [eald].

yldan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), delay, postpone [eald].

yldu, f., age [eld].

yldu, f., age [old].

ymbe (ymb) (§ 94, (2)), about, around, concerning [umwhile];

ymbe (ymb) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), about, around, concerning [umwhile];

ðæs ymb iii niht 99, 2 = about three nights afterwards.

about three nights afterwards 99, 2 = about three nights afterwards.

ymb-ēode, see ymb-gān.

ymb-ēode, see ymb-gān.

ymbe-sittend, one who sits (dwells) round about another, neighbor.

ymbe-sittend, someone who sits (lives) nearby another, neighbor.

ymb-gān (§ 134), go about, go around, circle (with acc.).

ymb-gān (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), go about, go around, circle (with acc.).

yrfe-weard, m., heir.

heir, m., heir.

yrnan, see iernan.

yrnan, see iernan.

yrre, ireful, angry.

mad, fiery, angry.

yteren, of an otter [otor].

otter, of an otter [otor].

ȳðan (§ 126), lay waste (as by a deluge) [ȳð = wave].

When (§ 126), caused destruction (as by a flood) [wave = wave].

188 189

II. GLOSSARY.

----

----

MODERN ENGLISH—OLD ENGLISH.

A.

a, ān (§ 77).

a, ān (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

abide, bīdan (§ 102), ābīdan.

wait, bīdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ābīdan.

about, be (§ 94, (1)), ymbe (§ 94, (2));

about, be (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), whether (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__);

to write about, wrītan be;

to write about, to write about;

to speak about (= of), sprecan ymbe;

to talk about

about two days afterwards, ðæs ymbe twēgen dagas.

about two days later, ðæs ymbe twēgen dagas.

adder, nǣdre (§ 64).

adder, snake (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

afterwards, ðæs (§ 93, (3)).

afterward, ðæs (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

against, wið (§ 94, (3)), on (§ 94, (3)).

against, with (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), on (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

Alfred, Ælfred (§ 26).

Alfred, Ælfred (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

all, eall (§ 80).

all, eall (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

also, ēac.

also

although, ðēah (§ 105, 2).

although, though (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, 2).

always, ā; ealne weg (§ 98, (1)).

always, all the way (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

am, eom (§ 40).

I'm, eom (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

an, see a.

an, see a.

and, ǫnd (and).

and, ǫnd (and).

angel, ęngel (§ 26).

angel, ęngel (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

animal, dēor (§ 32).

animal, deer (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

are, sind, sint, sindon (§ 40).

are, are, are, are (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

army, werod (§ 32);

military, group (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

Danish army, hęre (§ 26);

Danish army, here (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

English army, fierd (§ 38).

British army, fired (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

art, eart (§ 40).

art, eart (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Ashdown, Æscesdūn (§ 38).

Ashdown, Æscesdūn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

189b

request, to request (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

away, aweg.

away, away.

B.

battle-field, wælstōw (§ 38).

battlefield, wælstow (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

be, bēon (§ 40);

be, bēon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

not to be, see § 40, Note 2.

not to be, see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

bear, beran (§ 114).

bear, to carry (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

because, for ðǣm (ðe), for ðon (ðe).

because, for them (the), for that (the).

become, weorðan (§ 110).

become (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

before (temporal conjunction), ǣr, ǣr ðǣm ðe (§ 105, 2).

before (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, 2).

begin, onginnan (§ 107, (1); § 110).

start, onginnan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

belong to, belimpan tō + dative (§ 110).

belong to, belimpan tō + dative (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

best, see good.

best, see good.

better, see good.

better, see great.

bind, bindan (§ 110).

bind, bindan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

bird, fugol (§ 26).

bird, fugol (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

bite, bītan (§ 102).

bite, bite (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

body, līc (§ 32).

body, body (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

bone, bān (§ 32).

bone, bān (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

book, bōc (§ 68).

book, book (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

both ... and, ǣgðer ge ... ge.

both ... and, either ... or.

boundary, mearc (§ 38).

boundary, mearc (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

boy, cnapa (§ 64).

guy, weed (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

190

break, brēotan (§ 109), brecan, ābrecan (§ 114).

break, brēotan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), brecan, ābrecan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

brother, brōðor (§ 68, (2)).

brother __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

but, ac.

but, ac.

by, frǫm (fram) (§ 94, (1); § 141, Note 1).

by, from (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

C.

Cædmon, Cædmǫn (§ 68, (1)).

Cædmon, Cædmǫn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

call, hātan (§ 117, (1)).

call, hātan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

cease, cease from, geswīcan (§ 102).

stop, stop from, geswīcan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

child, bearn (§ 32).

kid, child (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

choose, cēosan (§ 109).

select, cēosan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Christ, Crīst (§ 26).

Christ, Christ (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

church, cirice (§ 64).

church, cirice (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

come, cuman (§ 114).

come, cuman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

comfort, frōfor (§ 38).

comfort, comfort (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

companion, gefēra (§ 64).

companion, gefēra (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

consolation, frōfor (§ 38).

comfort, frōfor (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

create, gescieppan (§ 116).

create, gecieved (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

D.

Danes, Dęne (§ 47).

Danes, Dęne (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

day, dæg (§ 26).

day, day (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

dead, dēad (§ 80).

dead, dēad (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

dear (= beloved), lēof (§ 80).

dear (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

deed, dǣd (§ 38).

deed, action (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

die, cwelan (§ 114).

die, perish (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

division (of troops), gefylce (§ 32), getruma (§ 64).

division (of troops), gefylce (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), getruma (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

do, dōn (§ 134).

do, do (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

door, dor (§ 32), duru (§ 52).

door, dor (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), duru (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

drink, drincan (§ 110).

drink, drincan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

during, on (§ 94, (3)). See also § 98.

during, on (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__). See also __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

dwell in, būan on (§ 126, Note 2).

live in, hang out at (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

190b
E.

earl, eorl (§ 26).

earl, eorl (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

endure, drēogan (§ 109).

endure, persist (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

England, Ęnglalǫnd (§ 32).

England, England (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

enjoy, brūcan (§ 62, Note 1; § 109, Note 1).

enjoy, brūcan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

every, ǣlc (§ 77).

every (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

eye, ēage (§ 64).

eye, eye (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

F.

father, fæder (§ 68, (2)).

dad, fæder (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

field, feld (§ 51).

field, feld (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

fight, feohtan, gefeohtan (§ 110).

fight, feohtan, gefeohtan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

find, findan (§ 110).

discover, findan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

finger, finger (§ 26).

finger, finger (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

fire, fȳr (§ 32).

fire, fire (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

fisherman, fiscere (§ 26).

fisherman, fiscere (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

foreigner, wealh (§ 26).

foreigner, wealh (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

freedom, frēodōm (§ 26).

freedom, freedom (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

friend, wine (§ 45), frēond (§ 68, (3)).

friend, wine (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), friend (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

friendship, frēondscipe (§ 45).

friendship, friendship (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

full, full (with genitive) (§ 80).

full, full (with possessive) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

G.

gain the victory, sige habban, sige niman.

achieve victory, sige habban, sige niman.

gift, giefu (§ 38).

gift, gift (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

give, giefan (with dative of indirect object) (§ 115).

give, giefan (with the indirect object in dative) (§ 115).

glad, glæd (§ 81).

happy, hæpi (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

glove, glōf (§ 38).

glove, glove (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

go, gān (§ 134), faran (§ 116).

go, going (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), travel (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

God, God (§ 26).

God, God (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

good, gōd (§ 80).

good, good (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

H.

Halgoland, Hālgoland (§ 32).

Halgoland, Hālgoland (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

hall, heall (§ 38).

hall, heall (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

191

hand, hǫnd (§ 52).

hand, hand (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

hard, heard (§ 80).

difficult, listened (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

have, habban (§ 34);

have, habban (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

not to have, nabban (p. 32, Note).

not to have, nabban (p. 32, Note).

he, (§ 53).

he, he (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

head, hēafod (§ 32).

head, head (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

hear, hīeran (§ 126).

hear, hīeran (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

heaven, heofon (§ 26).

heaven, heofon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

help, helpan (with dative) (§ 110).

assist, assisting (with dative) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

herdsman, hierde (§ 26).

herdsman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

here, hēr.

here, here.

hither, hider.

here, hiding.

hold, healdan (§ 117, (2)).

hold, healdan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

holy, hālig (§ 82).

holy, holy (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

horse, mearh (§ 26), hors (§ 32).

horse, mare (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), stallion (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

house, hūs (§ 32).

house, house (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

I.

I, ic (§ 72).

I, me (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

in, on (§ 94, (3)).

in, on (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

indeed, sōðlīce.

Indeed, truly.

injure, scęððan (with dative) (§ 116).

injure, scęððan (to) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

it, hit (§ 53).

it, hit (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

K.

king, cyning (§ 26).

king, cyning (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

kingdom, rīce (§ 32), cynerīce (§ 32).

kingdom, realm (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), royal realm (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

L.

land, lǫnd (§ 32).

land, lǫnd (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

language, sprǣc (§ 38), geðēode (§ 32).

language, speech (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), dialect (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

large, micel (§ 82).

big, great (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

leisure, ǣmetta (§ 64).

leisure, ǣmetta (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

let us, uton (with infinitive).

let's, uton (with infinitive).

limb, lim (§ 32).

limb, lim (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

little, lytel (§ 82).

small (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

live in, būan on (§ 126, Note 2).

live in, house on (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

lord, hlāford (§ 26).

Lord, hlāford (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

191b

love, lufian (§ 131).

love, lufian (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

love (noun), lufu (§ 38).

love (noun), lufu (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

M.

make, wyrcan (§ 128).

create, produce (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

man, sęcg (§ 26), mǫn (§ 68, (1)).

man, sword (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), moon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

many, mǫnig (§ 82).

many, mǫnig (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

mare, mȳre (§ 64).

mare, mȳre (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

mead, medu (§ 51).

mead, honey wine (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Mercians, Mierce (§ 47).

Mercians, Mierce (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

milk, meolc (§ 38).

milk, meolc (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

month, mōnað (§ 68, (1), Note 1).

month, mōnað (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

mouth, mūð (§ 26).

mouth, mouth (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

much, micel (§ 96, (3)), micle (§ 97, (2)).

many, much (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), much (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

murderer, bǫna (§ 64).

murderer, bǫna (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

my, mīn (§ 76).

mine (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

N.

natives, lǫndlēode (§ 47).

natives, locals (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

nephew, nefa (§ 64).

nephew, niece (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

new, nīwe (§ 82).

new, new (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Northumbrians, Norðymbre (§ 47).

Northumbrians, Norðymbre (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

not, ne.

not, ne.

O.

of, see about.

of, see about.

on, on (§ 94, (3)), ofer (§ 94, (2)).

on, on (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), offer (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

one, ān (§ 89);

one, one (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

the one ... the other, ōðer ... ōðer.

the one ... the other, other ... other.

other, ōðer (§ 77).

other, ōðer (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

our, ūre (§ 76).

our, ure (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ox, oxa (§ 64).

ox, oxa (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

P.

place, stōw (§ 38).

location, stōw (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

plundering, hęrgung (§ 38).

looting, hęrgung (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

192

poor, earm (§ 80), unspēdig (§ 82).

poor, earm (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), unspēdig (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

prosperous, spēdig (§ 82).

wealthy, thriving (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Q.

queen, cwēn (§ 49).

queen, queen (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

R.

reindeer, hrān (§ 26).

reindeer, hrān (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

remain, bīdan (§ 102), ābīdan.

stay, wait (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), endure.

retain possession of the battle-field, āgan wælstōwe gewald.

keep control of the battlefield, āgan wælstōwe gewald.

rich, rīce (§ 82), spēdig (§ 82).

wealthy, affluent (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), prosperous (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

ride, rīdan (§ 102).

ride, ride (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

S.

say, cweðan (§ 115), sęcgan (§ 133).

say, cweðan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), tell (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

scribe, bōcere (§ 26).

writes, book (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

seal, seolh (§ 26).

seal, seolh (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

see, sēon (§ 118), gesēon.

see, see (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to see.

serpent, nǣdre (§ 64).

snake (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

servant, ðēowa (§ 64), ðegn (§ 26).

servant, servant (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), thane (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

shall, sculan (§ 136; § 137, Note 2).

shall, sculan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

she, hēo (§ 53).

she, her (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

shepherd, hierde (§ 26).

shepherd, herder (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

ship, scip (§ 32).

ship, scip (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

shire, scīr (§ 38).

shire, scīr (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

shoemaker, scēowyrhta (§ 64).

shoemaker, scēowyrhta (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

side, on both sides, on gehwæðre hǫnd.

side, on either side, on each hand.

six, siex (§ 90).

6, 6 (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

slaughter, wæl (§ 32), wælsliht (§ 45).

slaughter, whale (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), slaughter (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

small, lȳtel (§ 82).

small, little (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

son, sunu (§ 51).

son, child (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

soul, sāwol (§ 38).

soul, soul (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

speak, sprecan (§ 115).

talk, speak (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

spear, gār (§ 26), spere (§ 32).

spear, gār (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), spere (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

192b

stand, stǫndan (§ 116).

stand, stǫndan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

stone, stān (§ 26).

stone, stone (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

stranger, wealh (§ 26), cuma (§ 64).

stranger, foreigner (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), guest (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

suffer, drēogan (§ 109).

endure, experience (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

sun, sunne (§ 64).

sun, sun (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

swift, swift (§ 80).

quick, quick (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

T.

take, niman (§ 110).

take, niman (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

than, ðonne (§ 96, (6)).

than, than (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

thane, ðegn (§ 26).

thane, thane (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

that (conjunction), ðæt.

that

that (demonstrative), , sēo, ðæt (§ 28).

that (demonstrative), she, her, that (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

that (relative), ðe (§ 75).

that (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

the, se, sēo, ðæt (§ 28).

the, se, seo, that (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

then, ðā, ðonne.

then, there, at that time.

these, see this.

these, check this.

they, hīe (§ 53).

they, hīe (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

thing, ðing (§ 32).

thing, thing (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

thirty, ðrītig.

30

this, ðēs, ðēos, ðis (§ 73).

this, these, those, this (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

those, see that (demonstrative).

these, see that (demonstrative).

thou, ðū (§ 72).

you, ðū (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

though, ðēah (§ 105, 2).

though, though (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, 2).

three, ðrīe (§ 89).

three, three (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

throne, ascend the throne, tō rīce fōn.

throne, take the throne, tō rīce fōn.

throw, weorpan (§ 110).

throw, toss (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

to, (§ 94, (1)).

to, (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

tongue, tunge (§ 64).

tongue, tunge (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

track, spor (§ 32).

track, sport (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

true, sōð (§ 80).

true, soð (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

truly, sōðlīce.

truly, indeed.

two, twēgen (§ 89).

two, twēgen (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

V.

very, swīðe.

very, really.

vessel, fæt (§ 32).

boat, fæt (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

victory, sige (§ 45).

win, sige (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

193
W.

wall, weall (§ 26).

wall, we all (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

warrior, sęcg (§ 26), eorl (§ 26).

warrior, sęcg (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), earl (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

way, weg (§ 26).

way, path (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

weapon, wǣpen (§ 32).

weapon, wǣpen (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

well, wel (§ 97, (2)).

well, wel (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Welshman, Wealh (§ 26).

Welsh person, Wealh (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

went, see go.

went, see go.

westward, west, westrihte.

westward, west, west right.

whale, hwæl (§ 26).

whale, hwæl (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

what? hwæt (§ 74).

what? hwæt (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

when, ðā, ðonne.

when, then.

where? hwǣr.

where?

which, ðe (§ 75).

which, the (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

who? hwā (§ 74).

who? who (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

who (relative), ðe (§ 75).

who (relative), the (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

whosoever, swā hwā swā (§ 77, Note).

whoever, swā hwā swā (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

will, willan (§ 134; § 137, Note 3).

will, willan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

Wilton, Wiltūn (§ 26).

Wilton, Wiltūn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

win, see gain.

win, see earn.

193b

wine, wīn (§ 32).

wine, wine (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

wisdom, wīsdōm (§ 26).

wisdom, wisdom (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

wise, wīs (§ 80).

smart, wīs (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

with, mid (§ 94, (1));

with, mid (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__);

to fight with (= against), gefeohtan wið (§ 94, (3)).

to fight against, gefeohtan wið (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

withstand, wiðstǫndan (with dative) (§ 116).

withstand, wiðstǫndan (with dative) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

wolf, wulf (§ 26), wylf (§ 38).

wolf, wulf (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wylf (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__).

woman, wīf (§ 32).

woman, wife (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

word, word (§ 32).

word, word (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

worm, wyrm (§ 45).

worm, dragon (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Y.

ye, (§ 72).

yeah, you (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

year, gēar (§ 32).

year, gēar (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

yoke, geoc (§ 32).

yoke, geoc (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

you, ðū (singular), (plural) (§ 72).

you, you (singular), you (plural) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

your, ðīn (singular), ēower (plural) (§ 76).

your, thine (singular), yours (plural) (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

Page 109,7: linenote
    vi    v     iv   iii    ii    i      1     2    3    4   5   6
    |     |     |     |     |     |      X
    |     |     |     |     |     |      XX    X    X
    |     |     |     |     |     |      XXX   XX   XX   X   X
    -------------------------------      XXXX  XXX  XXX  XX  XX  X
    _e_  _d_                             _c_   _b_              _a_
    Where the horsemen                 The six sections of the property
      gather.                          located within one mile.


        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!